JP6683122B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure, control, and performance in order to improve the interest of the game and provide a healthier game ( For example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2011-172988, A

  In the gaming machine as described above, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game and providing a healthier game.

  The present invention has been made to solve at least a part of the problems described above, and can be realized as the following modes.

[Form]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
An operation input means for inputting an operation by a player as a signal,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Preceding determination means that is executed at a timing earlier than the determination of the determination means, and performs advance determination including at least the determination of the special information,
The holding display corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is determined by the first holding display in which the special information is first determined by the determination means and the special information is determined after the first holding display. And a second hold display which is displayed in a predetermined display manner so as to be distinguishable from each other, and a hold display means capable of changing the display manner of the displayed hold display,
Production execution means for executing the production corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Prior to changing the display mode of the hold display by the hold display means, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed is provided,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the suspended display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition,
The holding display means,
Determining means for determining the display mode of the hold display based on at least the result of the preceding determination of the special information corresponding to the hold display;
More than the change width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the one display mode of the first hold display, the one display mode of the second hold display Means for changing the display mode of the hold display only in a mode in which the change width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in change is larger,
Means for changing the display mode of the hold display based on a signal input by the operation input means,
The game machine characterized in that the display mode of the second hold display may be a display mode of a lower stage than the display mode of the first hold display .

  According to the gaming machine of the above aspect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing explaining the content of various counters. FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a win / loss table stored in a win / loss table storage area. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table set to the pachinko machine. It is a time chart explaining an example of a process which a pachinko machine performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of suggestive production, specific end production, and specific start production. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the process which a pachinko machine performs in a standby state. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of processing in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music has become zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started. 9 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while reducing the volume of background music. It is a flowchart which shows a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for the starting opening. It is a flowchart which shows a front determination process. It is a flowchart showing a winning process for a through. It is a flowchart which shows a normal process. It is a flow chart which shows game time control processing. It is a flow chart which shows data setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows change start processing. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of variable time. It is a flowchart showing a game state transition process. It is a flowchart showing a special winning opening opening and closing process. It is a flowchart which shows a condition determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an ending time setting process. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of an ending period. It is a flow chart which shows processing for electric power combination support. It is a flow chart which shows electric part opening and closing control processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing for standby. FIG. 3 is a block diagram mainly showing an electrical configuration of a sound emission control device and a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU. It is a flowchart which shows a command correspondence process. It is a flow chart which shows processing corresponding to a starting command. It is a flowchart which shows a hold command corresponding process. It is a flowchart showing an update process at the time of winning. It is the flowchart which shows production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the update process at the time of a fluctuation start. It is a flowchart showing an opening effect setting process. It is a flowchart showing an ending effect setting process. It is a flow chart which shows waiting state shift processing. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flow chart which shows command interruption processing performed in MPU of a display control device. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process performed in MPU of a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows a command correspondence process. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 2nd embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the aspect of a display of a symbol display device at the time of performing suggestive production in a preceding game time. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 3rd embodiment performs. It is a time chart which shows the processing which a pachinko machine in a 4th embodiment performs. It is the explanation drawing which shows the outline of setting processing of production type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object A which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object B which is an object image. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object C which is an object image. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for object A. It is explanatory drawing which shows an arrangement | positioning / timing setting table. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a notice effect in which a plurality of objects are combined. It is the flowchart which shows the setting processing of production type. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline of the setting process of the effect type in 6th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a display object table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is an explanatory view showing a display pattern table for A. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for B. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for C. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display pattern table for AB. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display pattern table for BC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display pattern table for ABC. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is explanatory drawing which shows the notice production when a display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set. It is a flow chart which shows the setting processing of the production classification in a 6th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the sequel production performed as reach production. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 7th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when RTC production start conditions are satisfied while the pattern display device is displaying a background moving image. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when RTC production start conditions are satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying a demo video. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when a transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying the RTC effect moving image. It is a timing chart which shows an example of a process when a return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device is displaying the RTC effect moving image. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process performed in the sound-light side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing for RTC production performed in a sound-light side MPU of a 7th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows waiting state shift processing performed in a sound-light side MPU of a 7th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the command corresponding process performed in the display side MPU of 7th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the outline | summary of the process which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows the update processing at the time of winning in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for holding effects in 8th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for holding productions in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows display level upper limit value setting processing in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the upper limit table in 8th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the production setting processing in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production setting processing in an 8th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production contents decision processing in an 8th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the holding production determination table in 8th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing explaining the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 9th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the storage area for holding effects in 9th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the parameter setting process for holding productions in 9th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production setting processing in a 9th embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation production contents determination processing in a 9th embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (other example 1) performs. It is a storage area for holding effects in the tenth embodiment (variant example 1). It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (other example 2) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (other example 3) performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the suggestion production which the pachinko machine in 10th Embodiment (another example 4) performs. It is a perspective view of the pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment. It is a front view of the game board in the eleventh embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the symbol and display surface which are variably displayed in the symbol display device in 11th Embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various counters used for the big hit lottery etc. in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit / miss table for the 1st starting opening in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the hit / miss table for the 2nd starting opening in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the distribution table in 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of the winning / discarding table for electric role opening lottery used when performing an electric role opening lottery in 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining an example of processing which a pachinko machine in an 11th embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the result image in the symbol display device of 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart explaining another example of the process which the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment performs. It is explanatory drawing explaining the display mode of the demo image which the pachinko machine in 11th Embodiment displays. It is explanatory drawing explaining the relationship between the RTC production animation and the demonstration animation in 11th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance process for the starting opening which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ball entry process for through gates which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the normal process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game time control processing which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation start process for the 1st symbol display part which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows the number-of-games counting processing which the main side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information shift process for 1st symbol display parts which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows the judgment processing for the 1st symbol display parts which the main side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the variable time for the 1st symbol display parts which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for high probability mode termination which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the variation start process for the 2nd symbol display part which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the reservation information shift process for the 2nd symbol display part which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the determination process for the 2nd symbol display part which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the setting process of the fluctuation time for the 2nd symbol display part which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the fluctuation stop process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transfer process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the opening time setting process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-rounds setting process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening / closing process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the entrance counter setting process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the special winning opening opening limit time setting process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the V winning opening opening and closing process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the opening limit time setting process for V winning a prize mouth which the main side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the ending time setting process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows shift processing at the end of the ending period which a main side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the electric power support process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the electric-role opening / closing process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the game ball launch control process which the main MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a block diagram centering on an electric composition of a voice luminescence control device and a display control device in an 11th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the display mode switching process which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows the processing for special 1 game times production which the sound-light side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows the special 2 game time production processing which the sound-light side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for stand-by which the sound side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transition preparation process for special 1 which the sound side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the transition preparation process for special 2 which the sound side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main demo transfer process which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows sub demo transfer processing which a sound side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows return processing which MPU on the sound-and-light side in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flow chart which shows processing for RTC production which a sound-light side MPU in an 11th embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for result display which the sound-light side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which the display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the command interruption process which the display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the V interruption process which the display side MPU in 11th Embodiment performs. It is a flowchart which shows the process for result display performed by the sound-light side MPU in the aspect 12 of 11th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the structure of the unit for right-handed strikes with which the pachinko machine of 12th Embodiment is equipped. It is a time chart which shows the behavior of the game ball which has reached the right-hand side unit of the twelfth embodiment. It is an explanatory view showing an image displayed on a symbol display device in a high probability mode and a high frequency support mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the transition of the number of remaining acquisition balls when a big hit is won in the big hit lottery in a high probability mode. It is a flowchart which shows the process for a remaining acquisition sphere number display performed by the sound-light side MPU92 in 12th Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the object D which can be used for notice production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the image (object D + image E) which combined the image E with the object D.

An embodiment of a gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in the following order with reference to the drawings.
A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
A3. Overview of processing by game machines:
A4. Overview of processing in the standby state:
A5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
A6. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
B. Second embodiment:
C. Third embodiment:
D. Fourth Embodiment:
E. FIG. Fifth embodiment (an example of effect type setting processing):
F. Sixth embodiment (another example of effect type setting processing):
G. Seventh embodiment (configuration including RTC):
H. Eighth embodiment:
I. Ninth embodiment:
J. Tenth Embodiment:
K. Eleventh embodiment:
L. Twelfth embodiment:
M. Modification:
N. Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and the like:

A. First embodiment:
A1. Gaming machine structure:
FIG. 1 is a perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, also referred to as a “pachinko machine”) as one embodiment of the present invention. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facilities of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged on a front surface of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 16 with respect to the inner frame 13. On the back of the inner frame 13, control devices for controlling the pachinko machine main body 12, such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device, are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the outer frame 11 and a function of locking the front door frame 14 so that it cannot be opened with respect to the inner frame 13. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illuminated component is configured by light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at each game time played by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of jackpot winning, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is closed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in the shape of a box with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as lent balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and a player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the staging operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates the operation handle 25, a game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor for permitting the driving of the game ball firing mechanism, a weight button for stopping the game ball firing mechanism from firing the game ball by pressing operation by the player, and a rotation of the operation handle 25. And a variable resistor for detecting a dynamic operation amount based on a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor is turned on, and when the player rotates the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor changes in accordance with the amount of rotation operation, A game ball is fired from the game ball firing mechanism to the front of the game board with an intensity corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor.

  Next, the configuration of the back surface of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A control device for controlling the operation of the pachinko machine 10 is arranged on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10.

  FIG. 2 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10. As illustrated, the pachinko machine 10 includes a first control unit 51, a second control unit 52, and a third control unit 53. Specifically, these mechanical parts are provided on the back surface of the inner frame 13.

  The first control unit 51 includes a main controller 60. The main control device 60 has a main control board having a function of controlling the main game and a function of monitoring the power supply. The main control board is housed in a board box made of a transparent resin material.

  The second control unit 52 includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The voice light emission control device 90 controls light emission means such as a speaker and various lamps provided on the front surface of the pachinko machine 10 based on the command transmitted from the main control device 60. The display control device 100 controls the symbol display device based on the command transmitted from the voice emission control device 90. The symbol display device includes a liquid crystal display that displays symbols and images for presentation.

  The third control unit 53 includes a payout control device 70 and a firing control device 80. The payout control device 70 performs payout control for paying out prize balls. The firing control device 80, when an instruction to fire a game ball is input from the main control device 60, performs a game ball so as to fire a game ball having a strength corresponding to a turning operation amount of the operation handle 25 by the player. Controls the ball firing mechanism. In addition, on the back surface of the inner frame 13, a tank 54 to which the game balls supplied from the island facility of the game hall are sequentially replenished, a slope that is connected below the tank 54 and is gently inclined so that the game balls flow downstream. The tank rail 55 having the, the case rail 56 vertically connected to the downstream side of the tank rail 55, the supply of game balls from the case rail 56, and the payout of a predetermined number of game balls according to an instruction from the payout control device 70. A plurality of devices necessary for the operation of the pachinko machine 10, such as the payout device 71, are provided.

  Next, the gaming board will be described. The game board is detachably attached to the front surface of the inner frame 13.

  FIG. 3 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and thereafter flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is provided. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is formed with a plurality of openings penetrating in the front-rear direction. A general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, and a variable winning device 36 are provided in each opening. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  As shown in the figure, a plurality of general winning openings 32 are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when the game balls are won in the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  Both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 are open upward, and are arranged side by side in the vertical direction so that the first starting port 33 is above the second starting port 34. In this embodiment, when a game ball wins the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. The second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a including a pair of left and right movable pieces. When the electric accessory 34a is in the closed state, the game ball cannot enter the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, when the electric accessory 34a is in the open state, the game ball can win the second starting port 34. In the present embodiment, when a game ball wins in the second starting opening 34, four game balls are paid out as prize balls. An out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not won any of the various winning ports are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. When the game ball wins the through gate 35, that is, when the game ball passes through the through hole of the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) with the winning as a trigger. As a result of the internal lottery, when the power combination opening is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the power combination opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has won the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after winning and the second. It is possible to win a prize in the starting opening 34. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if a game ball is won in the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 is provided with a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The open / close door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. As a result of the internal lottery (big hit lottery) by the main control device 60, when the big hit is won and the open / close execution mode is entered, the open / close door 36b repeats the open state and the closed state in which the game balls can win. The opening / closing execution mode is a case where a jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, and the opening / closing door 36b is opened. This is a mode in which the closed state is repeated. That is, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning in the first starting opening 33, when the jackpot is won, the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning in the jackpot 36a of the variable winning device 36 is possible is performed. Similarly, as a result of the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, even when the jackpot is won, the opening / closing execution mode in which the winning a prize 36a of the variable winning device 36 can be won is performed. In this embodiment, when the game balls are won in the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first result display section 37a and a second result display section 37b. Each of the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b is composed of a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting sections are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the winning of the winning in the first starting opening 33 is performed, the first result display unit 37a displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display unit displays the lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the first result display section 37a causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  When the jackpot lottery triggered by winning in the second starting opening 34 is performed, the second result display portion 37b displays a variable display or a display mode until the segment display displays a display corresponding to the lottery result. Display a predetermined display. When the lottery is finished, the second result display unit 37b causes the segment display to display a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The special drawing unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, adjacent to the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the first start opening 33 are reserved. The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. Further, in the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have won the second start opening 34 are reserved. The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on.

  The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the winning of the winning through the through gate 35 is performed, the universal figure unit 38 displays a lighted display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display as the display mode of the light emitting display. When the electric accessory release lottery is finished, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result. The special drawing unit 37 and the universal drawing unit 38 are not limited to being configured by a segment display device or a light emitting display device using an LED lamp, and may be, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT or a dot matrix display device. For example, it may be configured by various display devices capable of showing the lottery result and the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode or a display corresponding to it. The round game is an open / close door until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls is won in the variable winning device 36, whichever is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of 36b is continued. The number of round games depends on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended and a new game time is started.

  The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 is configured by a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the liquid crystal display device, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device or a CRT.

  The symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or predetermined display of the first result display section 37a based on the winning of the first start opening 33. Further, the symbol display device 41 performs variable display or predetermined display of the symbols in accordance with the variable display or the predetermined display of the second result display portion 37b based on the winning in the second starting opening 34. . The symbol display device 41 performs not only the display effect triggered by the winning of the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, but also the display effect in the opening / closing execution mode that shifts when the jackpot is won. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 4A is an explanatory diagram showing symbols that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. As shown in FIG. 4A, the symbols indicating numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. In addition, as the variable displayed symbols, it is also possible to adopt a symbol in which a symbol such as a character is added to each symbol showing numbers 1 to 8.

  FIG. 4B is an explanatory diagram showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, three symbol rows Z1, Z2, Z3 of left, middle and right are displayed on the display surface 41a. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 shown in FIG. 4A are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol column has a periodicity from top to bottom or from bottom. A variable display is displayed that scrolls up. As shown in FIG. 4B, after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L. Specifically, when a game ball is won in the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol sequence Z1, the symbol sequence Z3, and the symbol sequence Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. . In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is the big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is set on the activated line L. It is formed. For example, the same symbol combination is formed on the activated line L. The manner of variable display of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 is not limited to the above-mentioned aspect, but the number of symbol rows, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbol row, the symbol of each symbol row Various modes such as the number can be adopted as the mode of variable display of symbols.

  Here, the game number is one unit of the process of notifying the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery about the special information acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Is. In other words, the pachinko machine 10 notifies the player of the lottery result of one jackpot lottery for one special information for each game. When the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment obtains the special information based on the winning of either the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34, the first result display section 37a or the second result is obtained for each game. In either one of the display units 37b, after the segment display is variably displayed, the segment display is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the special information is acquired based on the winning of either the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, a predetermined value is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for each game. After the variable display of the symbol row, the symbol row is stopped and displayed so as to be displayed corresponding to the lottery result of the acquired special information. Further, the time required for one game time is also called a unit game time. The unit game time is composed of a variable time which is the time from the start of the variable display until the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed, and a stop time which is the time when the predetermined lottery result is stopped and displayed. There is.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

A2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using block diagrams.

  FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 further includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. Various detection sensors 67a to 67e, a payout control device 70, and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. Further, the main control board 61 is provided as various detection sensors 67a to 67e at various winning openings such as the general winning opening 32, the first starting opening 33, the second starting opening 34, the through gate 35, and the variable winning device 36. It is also connected to multiple detection sensors. The main side MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA during the game has won each winning opening. Further, the MPU 62 executes the jackpot lottery based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, and also executes the electric accessory release lottery based on the winning of the through gate 35.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b for opening and closing the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. , And the main display unit 45 are connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning award drive unit 36c so that the open / close door 36b is opened / closed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory release lottery, when the electric role is opened, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 34b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened. In each game time, the MPU 62 executes display control of the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b in the main display section 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. Display control is executed.

  A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the winning determination result. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the winning in the general winning opening 32 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the winning in the first starting opening 33 is specified. In the case of doing, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and in the case where the winning of the second starting opening 34 is specified, it corresponds to the payout of one game ball. The prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls. A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production that reflects the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. Understand whether or not a reach has occurred, the content of the reach effect, and the content of the notice effect executed at each game time. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the combination of symbols is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram illustrating the contents of various counters used for a jackpot lottery and the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1 is used for the big hit lottery. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot result or a normal jackpot result. The reach random number counter C3 is used for the reach lottery of whether or not the reach is generated when the symbol array displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed.

  The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first result display portion 37a and the second result display portion 37b of the main display portion 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  A holding information storage area 64b is provided in the RAM 64. The hold information storage area 64b is composed of a first hold area Ra, a second hold area Rb, an execution area AE, and a total hold number storage area. When the game balls sequentially win the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of winning are stored in the reserved information storage area 64b in time series. Memorized in.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599).

  The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and the game ball in the second starting opening 34. Is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of winning. The value of the random number that wins the jackpot is stored as a win / loss table in the win / loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a win / loss table stored in the win / loss table storage area 63a. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as lottery modes for the jackpot lottery. FIG. 7A shows a hit / fail table for the low probability mode, and FIG. 7B shows a hit / fail table for the high probability mode. As shown in FIG. 7A, in the gaming state in which the winning / losing table for the low-probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, there are two random number values that can win the jackpot. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 7 (b), in the gaming state in which the winning or losing table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the jackpot lottery, the number of the random numbers which is the jackpot winning is 20 pieces. The value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the high probability mode. Note that the number and value of random numbers to be won are arbitrary as long as the winning probability in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining a jackpot type such as a probability variation jackpot or a normal jackpot. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that it is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 29, and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. More specifically, when the game ball is won in the first starting opening 33, it is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b (RAM64), and when the game ball is winning in the second starting opening 34, the holding information is held. It is stored in the second holding area Rb of the storage area 64b (RAM 64).

Here, the jackpot type in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (2) Lottery mode of jackpot lottery after completion of the opening / closing execution mode (3) Electric power object 34a of the second starting opening 34 after completion of opening / closing execution mode Support mode

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (1) opening / closing execution mode, the frequency of occurrence of winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the relative frequency becomes relatively high. For example, in the high frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed 15 times from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 30 seconds elapse, or the number of winnings on the opening / closing door 36b is 10. It can be set to continue until the number of individual items. On the other hand, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening / closing door 36b is opened / closed twice from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode, and one opening is performed until 0.2 sec has elapsed or the number of winnings on the opening / closing door 36b. Can be set to continue until 10.

  When the operation handle 25 is operated by the player, the game ball launching mechanism 81 is drive-controlled so that one game ball is launched toward the game area PA in 0.6 sec. In the case of the above specific example, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is 0.2 sec. That is, in the low frequency winning mode, the opening time of the opening / closing door 36b once is shorter than the firing cycle of the game ball. Therefore, in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, the winning of the game ball does not substantially occur. However, even in the opening / closing execution mode according to the low frequency winning mode, it may be set so that the winning of the game ball may occur.

  In addition, the number of times of opening and closing the open / close door 36b, the opening limit time for one opening, and the opening limit number for one opening are the winnings to the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. If the high frequency winning mode is higher than the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the open / close door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, the high-frequency winning mode has a larger number of times of opening and closing than the low-frequency winning mode, and if the opening limit time for one opening is long or the opening limit number for one opening is set to be large. Good. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the lottery mode of the above-mentioned (2) big hit lottery after completion of the opening / closing execution mode, a probability variation lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed as a win / loss table using a high probability win / loss table It is possible to set a normal lottery mode in which a big hit lottery is performed by using a win / loss table for low probability. As described with reference to FIG. 7, when the jackpot lottery is performed using the high-probability winning / decreasing table, the jackpot is determined as compared with the case where the jackpot lottery is performed using the low-probability winning / decreasing table. High probability of doing.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 after the above-mentioned (3) opening / closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball is continued in the same manner to the game area PA. When the comparison is performed in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

  Specifically, the high-frequency support mode and the low-frequency support mode have the same probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4, but in the high-frequency support mode. The number of times the electric accessory 34a is in the open state when the electric role is released is set to be larger than that in the low frequency support mode, and one opening time may be set to be longer. In addition, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electric role is released and the electric accessory 34a is opened a plurality of times, the closing time from the end of one opening state to the start of the next opening state is It may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set to be shorter than that in the low frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed. May be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the second start opening 34 is higher than in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  In the low frequency support mode, the probability of winning the first start opening 33 is higher than in the second start opening 34, but in the high frequency support mode, the second start opening 34 is more likely to be won than the first start opening 33. The probability of winning is high. When a prize is paid to the second starting opening 34, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player should play the game while not reducing the number of balls he holds. You can

  Note that the configuration in which the high-frequency support mode has a higher frequency of being in the electric power open state per unit time than the low-frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described one. It may be configured to increase the probability of winning the winning combination. Further, in a configuration in which a plurality of types of securing times are secured for the next electric accessory release lottery performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed, a low frequency is set in the high frequency support mode. It may be set such that a shorter securing time is more easily selected or an average securing time is shorter than in the support mode. Furthermore, the number of times of opening is increased, the opening time is lengthened, and the securing time that is secured when the next electric accessory release lottery is performed after one electric accessory release lottery is performed is concerned. Even if the advantage of the high-frequency support mode is increased over the low-frequency support mode by applying the condition of any one or any combination of shortening the average time of securing time and increasing the winning probability. Good.

  As described above, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort a plurality of types of jackpots. The jackpot sort destination corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a sort table in the sort table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 8 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the contents of the distribution table set in the pachinko machine 10. FIG. 8A shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 8B shows a distribution table for the second starting port.

  As shown in the distribution table for the first starting port of FIG. 8A, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the first starting port 33, 16R certainty variation jackpot, 8R certainty variation jackpot, 16R normal Big hit, 8R Normal big hit is set.

  In the 16R probability jackpot and the 8R probability jackpot, the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / discarding lottery mode after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode is the high probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the 16R normal jackpot and the 8R normal jackpot, the mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high frequency winning mode, and the winning / discarding lottery mode after the completion of the opening / closing execution mode is the low probability mode. It is a big hit that the support mode after the end of becomes the high frequency support mode.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 13” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “14 to 27” are the 8R normal jackpots. "28-33" corresponds to the 16R normal jackpot and "34-39" corresponds to the 8R normal jackpot.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, four types of jackpots are set as jackpot types. Therefore, the jackpot mode is diversified. When comparing these four types of jackpots, the degree of advantage for the player is that the 16R certainty variation jackpot is the highest, the 8R certainty variation jackpot is next highest, then the 16R regular jackpot, and finally the 8R regular jackpot. By thus setting a plurality of types of jackpots having different degrees of advantage for the player, monotony of the game can be suppressed, and it becomes possible to increase the attention of the game.

  Next, as shown in the distribution table for the second starting port in FIG. 8B, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the jackpot type based on the second starting port 34, a 16R positive variable jackpot and an 8R positive variable jackpot. Is set. In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 27” correspond to the 16R probability variation jackpot, and “28 to 39” correspond to the 8R probability variation jackpot. It corresponds to. That is, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all of the jackpots based on the winning of the second start opening 34 are probability variation jackpots. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won, the jackpot type distribution mode is that the jackpot is won based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and This is different from when the jackpot is won based on the winning of the starting opening 34.

  As described above, the jackpot type distribution mode of the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34 is provided with a clear difference in the advantage for the player. Therefore, the player will play the game while expecting that a win will be generated in the second starting opening 34 of the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34. It should be noted that, if the result of the win / win lottery is a failure, the open / close execution mode is not entered, and the win / win lottery mode and the support mode are not changed.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE, and the jackpot classification using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. In addition, the MPU 62 further uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to display the segment display on the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. Determine the display mode. When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated and is stored in the reserved information storage area 64b of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. Specifically, the updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the first holding area Ra of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the first starting opening 33, and at the timing when the game ball wins the second starting opening 34. The updated value of the reach random number counter C3 is stored in the second holding area Rb of the RAM 64. Then, after the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb is moved to the execution area AE, the value for reach determination stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 is reached. The table is collated to determine whether or not reach is generated. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, when the jackpot is won and the opening / closing execution mode is entered, the MPU 62 determines the reach occurrence regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. Specifically, on the display surface 41a of FIG. 4B, the symbol is first stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z1, and then the same symbol as Z1 is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z3, thereby forming a reach line. In the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing the variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z2.

  Also, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, In addition to reducing or displaying the combination of the symbols in which the reach line is formed, the reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character when the reach effect is being performed or before the reach display. May be.

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and then return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired at the time of starting the fluctuation display on the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b and determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 249, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is periodically updated, and is stored in the electric accessory holding area 64c of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed on whether or not to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state by using the stored value of the electric accessory release counter C4. For example, if C4 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the closed state.

  A combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra corresponds to the holding information related to the first starting opening 33, and the second holding area Rb. The combination of one set of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3, which are stored in, corresponds to the holding information related to the second starting port 34, and these holding information is special information in the present invention. Equivalent to.

A3. Overview of processing by game machines:
Next, an outline of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 9 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to this embodiment. In the present description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases of case a1 and case a2 as an example.

  In FIG. 9A, as a case a1, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time (hereinafter, also simply referred to as “big hit”), and the big hit is performed in the second game time executed after the first game time. The process performed by the pachinko machine 10 when the player is out of the lottery is shown. In the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery of the game time immediately before the first game time is out and there is no other game time between the first game time and the second game time. Explain. It should be noted that another game time may exist between the first game time and the second game time. The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. The notice effect is an effect executed immediately before or after the start of the fluctuation of the symbols, and is an effect for suggesting the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. The reach effect is an effect that is executed after the reach, and is an effect that suggests the expectation of winning the jackpot lottery to the player. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

  After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The special game state is a state in which a bonus is given to the player. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting the opening / closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open / close execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. During the execution period of the opening / closing execution mode, a predetermined effect for the opening / closing execution mode is executed. After the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect. As shown in FIG. 9A, in this description, a period for executing the ending effect is referred to as an ending period.

  Here, the pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect in the ending period. The suggestion effect is an effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is an effect that suggests reproducing the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect selected and executed from a plurality of types in the first game time. In addition, the special game state reproduction effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of the already executed effect in the special game state.

  FIG. 10: is explanatory drawing which shows an example of a suggestion production, the specific end production, and the specific start production mentioned later. FIG. 10A shows a suggested effect, FIG. 10B shows a specific end effect, and FIG. 10C shows a specific start effect. The suggestive effect shown in FIG. 10A is an effect that suggests that the female character reproduces the effect executed in the first game time, that is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, after the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect in the ending period, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are performed. Reproduce. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced, but the notice effect, the reach effect, or the result executed in the first game time is reproduced. You may reproduce only a part of announcement production. For example, when executing a notice effect, a reach effect, and a result notification effect as special game state reproduction effects, the reach effect and the result notification effect are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the notice effect is omitted and executed. Good. By omitting a part or all of the notice effect that is executed at high frequency during normal times, by preferentially reproducing the reach effect and the result notification effect (big hit notification) that are executed only during the reach or jackpot, the player can The special game state reproduction effect can be executed by focusing on the effect that strongly desires the reproduction, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  When the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a during the execution of the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game time. Some of the contents are different from the design.

  After executing the special game state reproduction effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the specific end effect. FIG. 10B shows an example of the specific ending effect. As shown in the figure, the specific end effect in the present embodiment is an effect that suggests that the female character has completed the special game state reproduction effect.

  Description will be returned to FIG. The pachinko machine 10 ends the ending period and the special game state with the end of the specific end effect. After that, the second game time is executed. The jackpot lottery for the second game is out. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect (also called a normal notice effect) for notifying the result of the jackpot lottery and a result notice effect (disappearance notice). The case a1 has been described above.

  Next, the case a2 will be described. FIG. 9B shows, as case a2, a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game time. .

  As shown in FIG. 9B, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the notice effect and the reach effect. Then, after executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

  After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an effect that suggests starting the opening / closing execution mode as the opening effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes the open / close execution mode in which the opening / closing door 36b is repeatedly opened and closed. After the end of the opening / closing execution mode, the pachinko machine 10 executes the ending effect in the ending period.

  In case a2, unlike case a1, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestive effect during the ending period. The content of the suggestive effect is the same as the content of the suggestive effect executed in case a1. The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestion effect is finished. That is, the ending period in case a2 is shorter than the ending period in case a1.

  The pachinko machine 10 ends the special game state when the suggestion effect is finished. After that, the second game time is executed. In case a2, the jackpot lottery is won also in the second game time. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game time reproduction effect as an effect in the second game time. The game time reproduction effect is an effect for reproducing at least a part of the effect already executed in the game time. In the present embodiment, as the game time reproduction effect, the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. That is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (big hit notification) executed in the first game time are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (big hit notification) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect, and also has a function as a result notification about the big hit lottery in the second game time. Then, with the end of the game time reproduction effect, the second game time is ended.

  In addition, as will be described later using a flowchart, in the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. That is, in case a2, since the first game time and the second game time are both game times that are won in the jackpot lottery, the variation time of the first game time and the variation of the second game time The time is the same. Therefore, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time can be executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time.

  In this embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is controlled to be constant, but the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is set by using a random number. , The variation time of the game times at the time of a big hit may be different every time. In this case, when the second game time is longer than the first game time, the time difference between the fluctuation times of the second game time and the first game time at the start of the second game time (Surplus time) may be used to perform the suggested effect prepared in advance. By preparing a plurality of types of suggestive effects for each length of extra time, even if the extra time is different each time, the suggestive effect can be executed at the start of the second game time. The suggestive effect executed using the surplus time is executed after the suggestive effect executed in the special game state after the first game time. Therefore, the content of the suggestive effect to be executed using the surplus time is set so that the suggestive effect to be executed in the special game state and the suggestive effect to be executed using the surplus time have continuity. Good. By doing so, even when the second game time is longer than the first game time, the game time reproduction effect can be executed in the second game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  If the second game time is shorter than the first game time, only part of the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are executed as the game time reproduction effect. May be For example, when the notice production, the reach production, and the result notification production are executed as the game time reproduction production, the reach production and the result notification production are preferentially reproduced, and a part or all of the notice production is omitted to reproduce the game time reproduction production. May be executed. By omitting a part or all of the notice effect that is executed at high frequency during normal times, by preferentially reproducing the reach effect and the result notification effect (big hit notification) that are executed only during the reach or jackpot, the player can It is possible to preferentially reproduce the production that strongly desires reproduction.

  As shown in FIG. 9B, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the gaming state to the special gaming state after the end of the second game time. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as the opening effect in the special game state after that, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is a win and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the specific start effect. The specific start effect shown in the figure is an effect that suggests that the female character has won the jackpot lottery in the second game time, and also the special game state (opening and closing due to the jackpot in the second game time). This is an effect that suggests that the execution mode) is started. The pachinko machine 10 executes the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect after executing the specific start effect. In this case, the effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect (normal ending effect) are effects executed in the normal jackpot. The normal ending effect executed as the ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is over.

  The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 has been described above using the two cases of case a1 and case a2. As described in case a1, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is missed, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed after the suggestion effect are executed in the first game time. It is executed as a special game state reproduction effect for reproducing the effect, and the player recognizes that it is an effect for reproducing the already executed effect. On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won as in case a2, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect that are executed after the suggestion effect are already executed in terms of effect. Although it is executed as an effect to reproduce the effect, it is actually a game time reproduction effect that is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. When the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 is being watched first, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to anticipate winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game time, while recognizing that it is merely reproduction of the production. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game time, when the result notification effect notifies that the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, the player For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game time are not reproductions of the effects executed in the first game time, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the times. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a surprising effect and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. The player can be given a sense of expectation regarding the effect. In addition, by making the second game time in case a2 unexpected by the player, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested that the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to expect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game is won. Therefore, it is possible to give the game more unexpectedness.

  Further, as in case a2, when the notice production, the reach production, and the result notification production executed in the first game time are reproduced as they are and executed in the second game time, the result notification effect in the second game time is executed. Even if it is done, the player may not be aware that he or she has won the jackpot lottery in the second game time, but since the specific start effect is executed in the special game state after the end of the second game time. At the time of executing the specific start effect, it is possible to let the player recognize that the jackpot lottery in the second game is won.

A4. Overview of processing in the standby state:
Next, the outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the standby state will be described. The standby state is a state after the game time has ended, and neither the special game state nor the next game time has been started.

  FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment in the standby state. In FIG. 11, a state diagram showing whether or not the symbol displayed on the main display unit 45 is changing, the display mode of the symbol display device 41, and the output of the voice output from the voice emission control device 90. The content and the audio output level (volume) are shown. Further, in FIG. 11, the standby state flag in the main control device 60 is turned on and off, the transition condition satisfaction flag in the main control device 60 is turned on and off, and the cue determination flag in the voice emission control device 90 is shown. ON and OFF states are shown. These flags will be described later.

  The numbers such as "01" described in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 indicate the temporal position of the moving image data, and "01" indicates the head position of the moving image data. The temporal position of the video data is the position of the video data corresponding to each time of the video displayed with a temporal length, and is the temporal position of the video when the video data is captured with a temporal length. This is the position of the corresponding moving image data. As the temporal position of the moving image data, for example, a time code recorded in the moving image data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the moving image data of the background moving image is displayed up to the temporal position of “30”, the moving image data returns to the temporal position of “01” and is displayed from the beginning.

  A number such as "01" described in the output content of the voice indicates a temporal position of the music data, and "01" indicates a head position of the music data. The temporal position of the music data is the position of the music data corresponding to each time of the music that is output with the time length, and is the time position of the music when the music data is captured with the time length. This is the position of the corresponding music data. As the time position of the music data, for example, a time code recorded in the music data can be used. In the present embodiment, when the music data of the background music is output up to the time position of “30”, it returns to the time position of “01” and is output from the beginning.

  The display control device 100 displays a background moving image on the symbol display device 41 in the game time when a display corresponding to the result of the jackpot lottery is performed, and also in the standby state after the game time is over, the background movie is displayed in the symbol display device 41. Is continuously displayed. The background moving image is a moving image displayed on the background side of the symbol on the symbol display device 41. When an image or moving image such as the above-mentioned notice effect or reach effect is displayed, the background moving image is displayed on the background side of these images or moving images. Is displayed. The background moving image of the present embodiment is a moving image in which the character is dancing to the rhythm of background music described later.

  The sound emission control device 90 causes the speaker 46 to output the background music (BGM: Background Music) corresponding to the background moving image described above in the game round, and also in the standby state after the game round ends, the background music is output from the speaker 46. Is output continuously. In the present embodiment, the background music is music that is continuously output corresponding to the background video, and has the same temporal length as the background video. Therefore, in the present embodiment, for example, by displaying the background music at the temporal position “10” at the timing at which the background video at the temporal position “10” is displayed, the background video is displayed and the rhythm of the background music is displayed. A production in which one and one correspond to each other is realized.

  As shown in FIG. 11, main controller 60 turns the standby state flag ON (time t1) when the game time ends, that is, when the fluctuation of the symbol on main display unit 45 stops. Then, the main controller 60, after the fluctuation of the symbols in the main display unit 45 is stopped and the standby state, if 15 seconds have elapsed without starting any of the special game state and the next game time, That is, when 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned on, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied, the transition condition satisfied flag is turned on, and the standby state flag is turned off (time t2).

  The transition condition is that the output mode of the voice is switched from the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player to the mode in which the volume of the background music is zero (silent state), and This is a condition for shifting the display mode from the mode in which the background video is displayed to the mode in which the demo video is displayed. That is, when the transition condition is satisfied, the voice output mode shifts to the mode in which the continuity of the background music is broken, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is broken. . Note that the demonstration video (demonstration video) is a video different from the background video and is a video for communicating the attraction of the pachinko machine 10 to the player. For example, in the demonstration video, the model name of the pachinko machine 10 is displayed, the playing method of the pachinko machine 10 is explained, and the characters and stories that appear in the pachinko machine 10 are explained. The demo video may be called an attract video.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the transition condition is satisfied at time t2, the sound emission control device 90 outputs the sound in the background music at a volume preset by the player (time t2). To the time (from time t2 to time t3) while the output of the background music is continued to be output, and the volume of the background music is reduced (faded out) with the passage of time. The mode is changed to a certain mode (mode after time t3). In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 continues to output the background music until 5 seconds have elapsed after the volume of the background music became zero, and after the volume of the background music became zero. The output of the background music is stopped at the timing (time t4) when 5 seconds have passed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 11, the volume preset by the game ball is the maximum volume.

  When the transition condition is satisfied, the display control device 100 transitions the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode in which a demo video is displayed 5 seconds after the volume of the background music becomes zero (time). t4). The sound emission control device 90 turns on the cue determination flag at the timing when the display of the demonstration moving image is started (time t4). The cue determination flag is a flag for determining whether or not to start displaying and outputting the background moving image and background music from the temporal start position “01” when a return condition described later is satisfied. is there. In the present embodiment, the cue determination flag shifts to a mode in which the continuity of the background music is interrupted in the output mode of the sound, and the mode in which the continuity of the background moving image is interrupted in the display mode of the symbol display device 41. It is turned on when shifting to.

  The main controller 60, after the transition condition is satisfied, when the game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the second starting port 34 and the game times (variable display of symbols) are started, the return condition is set. When it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned off. As for the return condition, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and the output mode of the voice is returned to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player. It is a condition.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (time t5), the cue determination flag is set. Is ON, the display control device 100 and the sound emission control device 90 execute the cueing process of the background moving image and the background music. Specifically, the display control device 100 restores the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image. The sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and outputs the background music from the temporal start position “01” of the background music when outputting the background music. To start. Therefore, both the background moving image and the background music are displayed and output from the temporal head position.

  Note that the sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and performs a cueing process for background music and a background moving image (a process of starting output of music or display of a moving image from a temporal start position “01”). ) Is performed, the type of background music to be subjected to the cueing process is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 displays a plurality of types of background videos corresponding to a plurality of types of background music. A configuration may be adopted in which a background moving image that can be displayed and that corresponds to the selected background music is selected to execute the cueing process. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

  FIG. 12 is a timing chart showing an example of processing in the case where the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started. As shown in FIG. 12, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo moving image is started (time t4), the cue determination flag is set. Is off, the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 returns the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. To execute. In this way, the display mode and the voice output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is established.

  FIG. 13 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when a return condition is satisfied while the volume of background music is being reduced. As shown in FIG. 13, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (time t3), since the cue determination flag is OFF, the display control device 100 causes the symbol display device 41 to display the background. The mode for displaying the moving image is continued, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. In this way, the display mode and the voice output mode of the symbol display device 41 return to the mode before the transition condition is established.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11). The display control device 100 restores the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined temporal position. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and at the time of outputting the background music, from the predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes depending on the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position for starting the display of the background video changes depending on the timing when the return condition is satisfied, for example, when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started, the demo video is displayed. When the display of the background moving image is started from the temporal position of the background moving image displayed immediately before the transition to the display mode, or when returning from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the background moving image , A configuration in which the temporal position of the background video to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the demo video, and after the transition from the mode of displaying the background video to the mode of displaying the demo video Also continues the background video playback as an internal process, and continues as an internal process when returning from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Configuration, and the like to display the background video that is playing Te.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100. Starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image, and the audio emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position “01” of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started at a position midway in time and the output of the background music is started at a position midway in time. For example, if the configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position midway in time of the background video and the output is started from a position midway in time of the background music, the player is Since the background moving image and the background music are to be viewed from a position in the middle of time, it may be uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that is not being listened to. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the background moving image and the background music from the temporal head position, so that it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the background moving image and the background music can be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode in which the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, the mode before the transition condition is satisfied can be restored in a natural flow without a feeling of discomfort.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music. It is possible to return in a natural flow without feeling uncomfortable with the mode before the operation.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, after the game time is over, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds elapse without starting any of the special game state and the next game time, so the game is executed. It is possible to reduce the volume of background music over time in a state in which it is highly possible that a person is not playing a game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game time is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode of displaying the background moving image, and the voice Since the output mode is returned to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player, the expectation that the game time has started can be improved, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

A5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific control for executing the processing shown in case a1 and case a2 in the pachinko machine 10 will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  In order to advance the game of each game time, the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes a timer interrupt process and a normal process. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is regularly (for example, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S101, reading processing of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e is executed. That is, the states of the various detection sensors 67a to 67e connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S102.

  In step S102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S103.

  In step S103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S104.

  In step S104, a winning process for the starting openings associated with winning the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. The details of the winning process for the starting opening in step S104 will be described later. After executing step S104, the process proceeds to step S105.

  In step S105, a winning process for a through game accompanying the winning of the through gate 35 is executed. Details of the through winning process in step S105 will be described later. After executing step S105, the MPU 62 ends the timer interrupt process.

<Winning process for starting mouth>
Next, the winning process for the starting opening will be described. The winning process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 14: S104) of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing the winning process for the starting opening. In step S201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the first starting opening 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has won the first starting opening 33 (S201: YES), the process proceeds to step S202, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out three game balls. Set. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S203.

  In step S203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the first start opening 33. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S204.

  In step S204, the startup hold number RaN (hereinafter, also referred to as the first startup hold number RaN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the first hold area Ra is read, and the first start hold number RaN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The first start hold number RaN indicates the hold number based on winning in the first start opening 33. Then, it progresses to step S209.

  When it is determined in step S201 that the game ball has not won the first starting opening 33 (S201: NO), the process proceeds to step S205, and it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the second starting opening 34. 2 The determination is made based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the starting port 34.

  When it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has won the second starting opening 34 (S205: YES), the process proceeds to step S206, and a prize ball command for causing the payout control device 70 to pay out four game balls. Set. Then, it progresses to step S207. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S205 that the game ball has not won in the second starting port 34 (S205: NO), the winning process for the main starting port ends.

  In step S207, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal to the management control device on the game hall side that the game ball has won the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step S208.

  In step S208, the startup hold number RbN (hereinafter, also referred to as the second start hold number RbN) that is the value stored in the hold number storage area of the second hold area Rb is read, and the second start hold number RbN will be described later. Set as a processing target. The second start hold number RbN indicates the hold number based on winning in the second start opening 34. Then, it progresses to step S209.

  In step S209, it is determined whether or not the number N (RaN or RbN) of starting suspensions set in step S204 or step S208 described above is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S209, if the number N of start-up suspensions is not less than the upper limit value (S209: NO), the winning process for this starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S209, when the number N of startup pending is less than the upper limit value (S209: YES), the process proceeds to step S210, after adding 1 to the number N of startup pending in the corresponding holding area, the process proceeds to step S211. , 1 is added to the value stored in the total reserved quantity storage area (hereinafter referred to as total reserved quantity CRN). The total pending quantity CRN indicates the total value of the first starting pending quantity RaN and the second starting pending quantity RbN. Then, it progresses to step S212.

  In step S212, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are set to the first storage area of the corresponding free storage areas, that is, the step It is stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reservations to which 1 is added in S210. Specifically, when the first starting pending number RaN is set as a processing target, each of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14). The value is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the first suspension area Ra, that is, the storage area corresponding to the first startup suspension number RaN to which 1 is added in step S210. Further, when the second start pending number RbN is set as the processing target, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) are set to It is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the second holding area Rb, that is, in the storage area corresponding to the second starting hold number RbN to which 1 is added in step S210. After executing step S212, the process proceeds to step S213.

  In step S213, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (held information), the jackpot lottery result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the occurrence of reach. It is a process of determining whether or not the holding information is present before the holding information is subjected to the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60. Details of the destination determination process will be described later. After executing step S213, the process proceeds to step S214.

  In step S214, processing for setting a hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as a hold command.

  The hold command indicates that the first start port 33 or the second start port 34 has won a prize, and the determination result by the previous determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the prize is the main control device. It is a command for the sub-side control device to confirm before being targeted for the jackpot lottery by 60. The hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process described later.

  Further, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the hold command transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33, the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 increases the number of hold. To the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number. On the other hand, when the hold command transmitted based on the winning to the second starting opening 34 is received, the voice emission control device 90 increases the number of held displays in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. To the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold.

  After executing step S214, the main MPU 62 ends the winning process for the main starting opening.

<First judgment processing>
Next, the destination determination process will be described. The destination determination processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 15: S213) of the winning opening winning process.

  FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the destination determination process. As described above, the determination process such as the jackpot lottery lottery determination, the jackpot type determination, the presence / absence of the reach occurrence, and the like are determined based on the hold information as described above. This is a process to be executed before the target of the lottery.

  In step S301, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the winning opening for the starting opening (FIG. 15) is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S302, and the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this prize is executed as the game time is determined. Specifically, the determination result of the prior determination process executed by the winning before the current winning is read from the corresponding storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a probability variation jackpot that occurs before the jackpot lottery for this winning. By doing so, the lottery mode at the time when the jackpot lottery by the current prize is executed as the game time is determined.

  In step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this winning is executed as the game time (S302: YES), the process proceeds to step S303, and the winning / losing table storage area The win / fail table for the low probability mode stored in 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and as a result of referring to the hit / miss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, in step S302, when it is determined that the lottery mode is not the low-probability mode at the time when the jackpot lottery for this prize is executed as the game time (S302: NO), the process proceeds to step S304, and the high-probability mode is used. As a result of referring to the hit / no hit table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot. After that, the process proceeds to step S305, and it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode.

  When it is determined in step S305 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S305: YES), the process proceeds to step S306, and the value is stored in the storage area by the winning of the starting opening this time. The value of the jackpot type counter C2 is read. After that, the process proceeds to step S307, and the distribution table stored in the distribution table storage area 63b is referred to. Specifically, in the case where the jackpot type counter C2 which is the distribution target this time is obtained based on the winning of the first starting opening 33, the first starting opening allocation table is referred to, If it is acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34, the second starting opening distribution table is referred to. After executing step S307, the process proceeds to step S308.

  In step S308, as a result of referring to the distribution table, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot type counter C2 read this time corresponds to the probability variation jackpot. When it determines with it corresponding to a probability variation jackpot in step S308 (S308: YES), it progresses to step S309 and memorize | stores probability variation jackpot information in the previous determination process result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S308 that the probability variation jackpot is not supported (S308: NO), the process proceeds to step S310, and normal jackpot information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends.

  In step S305, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S305: NO), the process proceeds to step S311, and the value is stored in the storage area by winning the start opening this time. The value of the reached reach random number counter C3 is read. After that, the process advances to step S312 to refer to the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c. Then, the process proceeds to step S313, and as a result of referring to the reach determination table, it is determined whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 read this time corresponds to the occurrence of reach.

  In step S313, when it is determined that the reach occurrence is supported (S313: YES), the process proceeds to step S314 and the reach occurrence information is stored in the previous determination processing result storage area 64f. Then, the destination determination process ends. On the other hand, in step S313, when it is determined that the occurrence of the reach is not supported (S313: NO), the destination determination process is ended as it is.

<Through winning processing>
Next, the through winning process will be described. The through winning process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 14: S105).

  FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing the winning process for through. In step S401, it is determined whether or not the game ball has won the through gate 35. When it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has won the through-gate 35 (S401: YES), the process proceeds to step S402, and whether or not the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). To determine. The bonus holding number SN is a value indicating the number of winnings to the through gate 35 which is reserved for performing the electric bonus opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is 4. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S401 that the game ball has not won in the through gate 35 (S401: NO), the winning process for this through is ended.

  When it determines with it being less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN in step S402 (S402: YES), it progresses to step S403 and 1 is added to the accessory holding number SN. Then, it progresses to step S404.

  In step S404, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S103 (FIG. 14) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64c of the RAM 64. After that, the winning process for through is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S402 that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value (S402: NO), that is, when the value of the accessory holding number SN is equal to or more than the upper limit value, The winning process for through is ended without storing the value of the electric accessory release counter C4.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

  FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S501, start-up processing is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device upon power-on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. Then, it progresses to step S502.

  In step S502, a startup command is set. The start-up command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to start a demo moving image when the power is turned on. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S503.

  In step S503, the output data such as the start-up command set in step S502 and the command set in the timer interrupt process or the previously executed normal process is transmitted to each sub-side control device. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. In addition, when commands relating to effects such as a start-up command, a variation command, a type command, and a hold command are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S503, the process proceeds to step S504.

  In step S504, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S505.

  In step S505, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the process proceeds to step S506. In step S506, a game time control process for controlling the game at each game time is executed. In the game time control process, jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first result display section 37a, the second result display section 37b, and the like are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S506, the process proceeds to step S507.

  In step S507, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S508.

  In step S508, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric power accessory 34a provided in the second starting port 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a should be opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S509.

  In step S509, a standby process for causing each sub-side control device to start a demonstration moving image when the standby state has elapsed for a predetermined time is executed. Details of the standby process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S510.

  In step S510, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (strictly speaking, the start of the command output processing in step S503). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached. When it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal process (S510: NO), the execution timing of the next normal process is reached in steps S511 and S512. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed. Specifically, in step S511, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S512, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S510 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the normal process this time (S510: YES), the process returns to step S503, and each process from step S503 to step S508 is performed. Run.

  In addition, since the execution time of each process of step S503 to step 507 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be updated randomly by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal process (FIG. 18: S506).

  FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the game number control process. In step S601, it is determined whether or not it is in the special game state. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The open / close execution mode flag is turned ON when the game state is changed to the open / close execution mode in the game state transition process described later, and is turned OFF when the open / close execution mode is also ended in the game state transition process. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period.

  When it is determined in step S601 that one of the opening period flag, the opening / closing execution mode flag, and the ending period flag is ON (S601: YES), it is determined that the special game state is in effect, and the processing in step S602 and subsequent steps is performed. Without executing any, this game time control processing is ended. That is, in the special game state, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not a prize has been paid to the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S601 that the game is not in the special game state (S601: NO), the process proceeds to step S602.

  In step S602, it is determined whether or not the main display unit 45 is in the variable display. Specifically, it is determined whether or not one of the first result display unit 37a and the second result display unit 37b is in the variable display. This determination is performed by determining whether the variable display flag of the variable display flag storage area in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The variable display flag is turned ON when the variable display is started for either the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b, and is turned OFF when the variable display is ended.

  In step S602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is not performing the variable display (S602: NO), the process proceeds to the game times start process of steps S603 to S605. In step S603, it is determined whether the total reserved number CRN is “0”. When the total reserved number CRN is “0”, it means that the reserved starting number is “0” for both the first starting port 33 and the second starting port 34. Therefore, when it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is "0" (S603: YES), the present game number control processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S603 that the total reserved number CRN is not “0” (S603: NO), the process proceeds to step S604.

  In step S604, a data setting process for setting the data stored in the first holding area Ra or the second holding area Rb to the state after the start of fluctuation is executed, and the process proceeds to step S605. Details of the data setting process will be described later.

  In step S605, a variation start process for starting the variation display on the main display unit 45 and the variation display on the symbol display device 41 is executed. The details of the fluctuation start process will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S606.

  In step S606, 1 is subtracted from the value of the game number counter PNC. The game number counter PNC is a counter for counting the number of game times executed in the high frequency support mode. After executing step S606, the process proceeds to step S607.

  In step S607, the standby state flag is turned off. The standby state flag is a flag that is turned on at the timing when the standby state is started and turned off at the timing when the variable display of the main display unit 45 is started or when 15 seconds have passed after the standby state was started. is there. After executing step S607, the process proceeds to step S608.

  In step S608, it is determined whether or not the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON. The transition condition satisfaction flag is a flag that is turned on at the timing when 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state was started and turned off at the timing when the variable display on the main display unit 45 is started. When it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is ON (S608: YES), the process proceeds to step S609. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S608 that the transition condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S608: NO), the game number control process is ended.

  In step S609, a return condition satisfaction command is set. The return condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each sub-side control device to recognize that the variable display of the main display unit 45 has been started, that is, the return condition has been satisfied. After executing step S609, the process proceeds to step S610.

  In step S610, the transition condition satisfaction flag is turned off. Then, the game number control process is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S602, when it is determined that the main display unit 45 is performing variable display (S602: YES), the game-time progression process of steps S611 to S615 is executed.

  In step S611, it is determined whether or not the variation time of the current game time has elapsed. As described above, the variable time is the time from the start of the fluctuation of the symbol row to the stop of all the symbol rows, which is a part of the unit game time. Specifically, in step S611, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation time information stored in the fluctuation time counter area (various counter areas 64d) of the RAM 64 has become "0". The value of the fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time setting process (FIG. 22) described later. The value of the set fluctuation time information is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated.

  When it is determined in step S611 that the variation time has not elapsed (S611: NO), the process proceeds to step S612 and the variation display process is executed. The variable display process is a process of changing the display mode on the result display unit related to the current game time. After executing step S612, the game number control process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S611 that the variation time has elapsed (S611: YES), the process proceeds to step S613, and variation end processing is executed. The variation end process is performed on the result display unit so that the pattern of the symbol displayed on the result display unit determined in the variation start process (FIG. 21) described later is displayed on the result display unit related to the current game time. Display control. After executing step S613, the process proceeds to step S614.

  In step S614, the standby state flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S615 and performs a standby state time setting process. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. The standby state timer counter Tw is a counter for measuring the elapsed time from the start of the standby state, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step S615, the game number control process is ended.

<Data setting process>
Next, the data setting process will be described. The data setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a game time control process subroutine (FIG. 19: S604).

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the data setting process. In step S701, it is determined whether or not the holding area that is the processing target for executing the data setting processing is the first holding area Ra. Specifically, the hold information stored first (the hold stored in the first area of the first hold area Ra) among the hold information stored in time series in the first hold area Ra (FIG. 6). The information) is stored in the first reserved area of the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 6) which is the earliest reserved information among the reserved information stored in time series in the second reserved area Rb (FIG. 6). (Holding information), the holding area to be processed is determined to be the first holding area Ra if the holding area is stored before the holding information. On the other hand, of the holding information stored in the first holding area Ra (FIG. 6) in time series, the holding information stored first in the second holding area Rb (FIG. 6) is stored in time series. If the earliest stored hold information is stored in the hold area first, the hold area to be processed is determined to be the second hold area Rb. That is, by executing the process of step S701, the reservation information can be processed in the order stored in the first reservation area Ra or the second reservation area Rb.

  If it is determined in step S701 that the reservation area to be processed is the first reservation area Ra (step S701: YES), the data setting process for the first reservation area in steps S702 to S707 is executed. On the other hand, in step S701, when it is determined that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S701: NO). ), The data setting process for the second holding area in steps S708 to S713 is executed.

  In step S702, the first starting hold number RaN of the first hold area Ra is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S703, in which the total hold number CRN is decremented by 1. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S704. In step S704, the data stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S705.

  In step S705, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S705, the process proceeds to step S706.

  In step S706, if the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is ON, the flag is turned OFF, and if not, that state is maintained. The second result display unit flag is information for specifying whether the target of the current variable display is the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b. Then, it progresses to step S707.

  In step S707, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current shift of data corresponds to the first holding area Ra, that is, the first starting opening 33. The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, the data setting process ends.

  The shift command set in step S707 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The voice emission control device 90 transmits to the display control device 100 a command for changing the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings, based on the received shift command. To do. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

  When it is determined in step S701 that the processing target holding area is not the first holding area Ra, that is, when the processing target holding area is the second holding area Rb (step S701: NO), It proceeds to step S708.

  In step S708, 1 is subtracted from the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. Then, it progresses to step S709. In step S709, the total reserved number CRN is decremented by 1, and the process proceeds to step S710 to move the data stored in the first area of the second reserved area Rb to the execution area AE. Then, it progresses to step S711.

  In step S711, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S711, the process proceeds to step S712.

  In step S712, if the second result display unit flag of the various flag storage area 64e is not ON, the flag is turned ON, and if it is ON, the state is maintained. Then, it progresses to step S713.

  In step S713, a shift command is set. The shift command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90, which is the sub-side control device, to recognize that the data in the holding area has been shifted. In this case, from the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63, information indicating that the holding area that is the target of the current data shift corresponds to the second holding area Rb, that is, the second starting opening 34 The shift command including the information indicating that the shift command is included is set, and the selected shift command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. Then, this data setting process is completed.

  The shift command set in step S713 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 causes the display control device 100 to issue a command to change the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in response to the reduction in the number of holdings based on the received shift command. Send. Upon receiving the command, the display control device 100 changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the decrease in the number of hold.

<Variation start processing>
Next, the fluctuation start process will be described. The variation start processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 19: S605) of the game time control processing.

  FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation start process. In step S801, it is determined whether the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the win / loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After that, it is usually turned off when the jackpot is won. When it is determined in step S801 that the high probability mode is set (S801: YES), the process proceeds to step S802.

  In step S802, the win / fail determination is performed by referring to the win / loss table for the high probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win / loss table for the high probability mode shown in FIG. 7B. To determine. Then, it progresses to step S804. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S801 that the high probability mode is not set (S801: NO), the process proceeds to step S803.

  In step S803, a win / loss determination is performed by referring to the win / loss table for the low probability mode. Specifically, whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE matches the value set as the jackpot win in the win / loss table for the low probability mode shown in FIG. 7A. To determine. Then, it progresses to step S804.

  In step S804, it is determined whether or not the result of the win / no win determination (big win lottery) in step S802 or step S803 is a big win. In step S804, if the result of the win / no win determination is a big hit (S804: YES), in steps S805 to S812, in order to set a process for setting a game result in the case of a big hit and a stop result. The process of is executed.

  In step S805, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is not ON (S805: NO), the process proceeds to step S806, and the first start port distribution table (see FIG. 8A) is referred to. Then, the distribution determination is performed. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R sure change jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R sure change jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S805 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S805: YES), the process proceeds to step S807, and the distribution table for the second starting opening (see FIG. 8B). The distribution determination is performed with reference to. Specifically, the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE is any of the numerical range of the 16R sure change jackpot, the numerical range of the 8R sure change jackpot, the numerical range of the 16R regular jackpot, and the numerical range of the 8R regular jackpot. Is included in. After executing the processing of step S806 or step S807. It proceeds to step S808.

  In step S808, it is determined whether or not the type of jackpot distributed in step S806 or step S807 is a probability variation jackpot. When it is determined in step S808 that the game result is a probability variation big hit (S808: YES), the process proceeds to step S809.

  In step S809, a stop result setting process for the probability variation big hit is executed. The stop result setting process for the probability variation jackpot and the variation of the stop result displayed on the first result display portion 37a or the second result display portion 37b in the current game time when the probability variation jackpot is won. This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the type of the big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is obtained by referring to the stop result table for the probability variation big hit stored in the stop result table storage area 63e. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S809, the process proceeds to step S810.

  In step S810, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the kind of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R certainty variation jackpot is turned on when the 16R certainty variation jackpot and the 8R certainty variation flag is turned on when the 8R certainty variation jackpot is hit. Then, it progresses to step S814.

  In step S808, when it is determined that the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 is not a probability variation jackpot (S808: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is a normal jackpot, in step S811. move on.

  In step S811, a normal jackpot stop result setting process is executed. The normal jackpot stop result setting process, in the current game time that will be won the normal jackpot, fluctuate in the state of displaying any stop result on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b This is a process for setting whether to end the display. Specifically, by referring to the normal jackpot stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S806 or step S807 can be obtained. The obtained address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S811, the process proceeds to step S812.

  In step S812, the flag (big hit type flag) corresponding to the type of big hit distributed in step S806 or step S807 is turned ON. Specifically, the 16R normal big hit is turned on when the 16R normal big hit is made, and the 8R normal flag is turned on when the 8R normal big hit is made. Then, it progresses to step S814.

  In step S804, when the result of the big hit lottery in step S802 or step S803 is not the big hit (S804: NO), the process proceeds to step S813, and the stop result setting process for out-of-range is executed. The stop result setting process for the time of disengagement ends the variable display in a state in which any stop result is displayed on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b in the current game time that is the disengagement result. This is a process for setting Specifically, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the execution area AE is acquired by referring to the stop result table for the out-of-range in the stop result table storage area 63e. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S813, the process proceeds to step S814.

  In step S814, variable time setting processing is executed. The variable time setting process is to set the variable time, which is the time required for the current game in the first result display section 37a or the second result display section 37b, based on the presence or absence of a big hit or the presence or absence of reach. Processing. Details of the variable time setting process will be described later. After executing step S814, the process proceeds to step S815.

  In step S815, it is determined whether the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON (S815: NO), the process proceeds to step S816 and the first variation command is set. The first variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the first start opening 33, and whether or not the reach has occurred. Information and the information on the variation time set in step S814 are included. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S815 that the second result display unit flag is ON (S815: YES), the flow advances to step S817 to set a second variation command. The second variation command includes information indicating that the current game time is related to the hold information acquired based on the winning of the second start opening 34, and whether or not the reach has occurred. Information and the information on the variation time set in step S814 are included. After executing step S816 or step S817, the process proceeds to step S818.

  In step S818, the type command is set. The type command includes the presence / absence of a big hit and information on the result of the distribution determination. In other words, the type command includes, as the jackpot type information, 16R certainty variation jackpot information, 8R certainty variation jackpot information, 16R regular jackpot information, 8R regular jackpot information, or information on the result of deviation.

  The variation command and the type command set in steps S816 to S818 are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received variation command and type command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S818, the process proceeds to step S819.

  In step S819, the variable display of symbols is started on the result display section corresponding to the current game time among the first result display section 37a and the second result display section 37b. Specifically, when the second result display unit flag of the RAM 64 is not ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified to be the first result display unit 37a, and the variable display is started, When the second result display unit flag is ON, the result display unit corresponding to the current game time is specified as the second result display unit 37b, and the variable display is started. After executing step S819, the fluctuation start process ends.

<Variation time setting process>
Next, the variable time setting process will be described. The variation time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a variation start process subroutine (FIG. 21: S814).

  FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the variable time setting process. In step S901, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step S902.

  In step S902, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game time is a win. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the probability variation big hit flag or the normal big hit flag of the RAM 64 is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S902: YES), the process proceeds to step S903.

  In step S903, the fluctuation time table stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referenced to acquire fluctuation time information corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time of the game times won in the jackpot lottery is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S902 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game time is not a win (S902: NO), the process proceeds to step S905, and it is determined whether a reach occurs in the current game time. Since the present process (S905) is executed when the jackpot lottery related to the current game number has not been won in step S902, the reach occurs among the game numbers not won in the jackpot lottery in step S905. It is determined whether or not the game is played. Specifically, when the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the execution area AE is a value corresponding to the occurrence of the reach, it is determined that the reach occurs (S905: YES), and the process proceeds to step S906. It should be noted that the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area of the ROM 63 is referred to when the presence or absence of the reach is specified using the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  In step S906, the variation time table for reach generation stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to obtain the variation time information corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS this time. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the fluctuation time for reach generation is constant. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

  When it is determined in step S905 that the reach does not occur in the current game time (S905: NO), the process proceeds to step S907, and the reach non-occurrence variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is referred to. Then, the fluctuation time corresponding to the value of the fluctuation type counter CS this time is acquired. After that, the process proceeds to step S904, and the acquired fluctuation time information is set in the fluctuation time counter area provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the variable time setting process ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of total pending numbers CRN increases. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, a configuration that does not depend on the number of total reserved numbers CRN may be used, and the smaller the number of total reserved numbers CRN, the shorter the variation time may be set. In addition, when the second start pending quantity RbN is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending quantity RaN increases, and when the second start pending quantity RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of second start pending numbers RbN increases. In addition, when the second start pending number RbN is “0”, the fluctuation time becomes longer as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases, and when the second start pending number RbN is “1” or more. May be set so that the larger the number of second start pending numbers RbN, the longer the variation time or the constant time without depending on the respective pending numbers RaN and RbN.

  Also, in the situation where the support mode is the high frequency support mode, the reach non-occurrence is generated so that a shorter variable time is selected than in the case where the number of hold information is the same as in the situation where the support mode is the low frequency support mode. A variable time table for use may be set. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the selected fluctuation times may be the same or may be the reverse of the above relationship.

  Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is out. Good. Further, the fluctuation time table for the probability variation big hit, the fluctuation time table for the normal big hit, the fluctuation time table for the out-reach, and the fluctuation time table for the complete deviation may be individually set.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 18: S507).

  FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S1001, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is turned on at the end of the opening / closing execution mode in the special game state (at the start of the ending period), and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the special game state, as described with reference to FIG.

  When it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is not ON (S1001: NO), the process proceeds to step S1002, and it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. As described above, the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on when the game state is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, and is turned off when ending the opening / closing execution mode.

  When it is determined in step S1002 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S1002: NO), the process proceeds to step S1003, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period.

  When it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is not ON (S1003: NO), the process proceeds to step S1004, and the timing at which the variable display of symbols on the first result display unit 37a or the second result display unit 37b ends Or not. In step S1004, when it is determined that it is not the timing when the variable display is ended (S1004: NO), the game state transition processing is ended as it is.

  In step S1004, when it is determined that it is the timing when the variable display ends (S1004: YES), the process proceeds to step S1005, and the game result of this game time (result of the jackpot lottery) is transferred to the opening / closing execution mode. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. Specifically, it is determined whether or not any of the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16R normal flag, and the 8R normal flag of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined that none of the above flags is ON (S1005: NO), this game state transition processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1005 that the game result of this game time (the result of the big hit lottery) corresponds to the shift to the open / close execution mode (S1005: YES), the process proceeds to step S1006, and the standby state flag Is turned off, the process proceeds to step S1007, and the high probability mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S1008.

  In step S1008, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the opening period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). In the present embodiment, the same fixed length of opening time is set in each opening period. Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6 sec) is set in the third timer counter area T3 that determines the opening time. The third timer counter area T3 is provided in each timer counter area 64d of the RAM 64. After executing step S1008, the process proceeds to step S1009.

  In step S1009, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). This opening command includes information about the set opening time and the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time and the opening / closing execution mode based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S1009, the process advances to step S1010 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S1003 that the opening period flag is ON (S1003: YES), the process proceeds to step S1011.

  In step S1011 it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". If it is determined in step S1011 that the opening period has ended (S1011: YES), the flow advances to step S1012 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step S1013.

  In step S1013, a round display start process for notifying the type of the current open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing Step S1013, the process proceeds to Step S1014.

  In step S1014, the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode is determined. Specifically, the jackpot type flags (16R certainty variation flag, 8R certainty variation flag, 16R normal flag, 8R certainty variation flag) stored in the RAM 64 are confirmed. When it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 16R certainty variation flag or the 16R normal flag (S1014: YES), the process proceeds to step S1015, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1014 that the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 is the 8R certainty change flag or the 8R normal flag (S1014: NO), the process proceeds to step S1016 and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. "8" is set in the obtained first round counter area RC1. After executing step S1015 or step S1016, the process proceeds to step S1017.

  In step S1017, the open / close execution mode flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S1002 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON (S1002: YES), the process proceeds to step S1018, and the special winning opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, when the special winning opening 36a is closed, the variable winning driving unit 36c is driven on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is equal to or larger than "1", and the big winning is achieved. The mouth 36a is opened. When the special winning opening 36a is open, the variable winning drive unit is provided on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed since the opening of the special winning opening 36a or the opening limit number has been won. The driving state of 36c is stopped and the special winning opening 36a is closed. Details of the special winning opening / closing process will be described later. After executing step S1018, the process proceeds to step S1019.

  In step S1019, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1019: NO), the main game state transition processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1019: YES), the process proceeds to step S1020, and the open / close execution mode flag is turned off. After executing step S1020, the process proceeds to step S1021.

  In step S1021, round display end processing is executed. In the process, the display control of the round display unit 39 is ended so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S1021, the process proceeds to step S1022.

  In step S1022, condition determination processing is executed. The condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. Specifically, by winning the jackpot lottery at the next game time, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period, and the effect (preliminary effect, reach effect, and reach effect It is determined whether or not to execute the process of reproducing the result notification effect (big hit notification). The condition determination process will be described later. After executing step S1022, the process proceeds to step S1023.

  In step S1023, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the time length of the ending period in the special game state (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S1023, the process proceeds to step S1024.

  In step S1024, an ending command is set. The ending command thus set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S503 in the normal process (FIG. 18). The sound emission control device 90 ends the effect corresponding to the opening / closing execution mode based on the reception of the ending command. After executing step S1024, the process proceeds to step S1025.

  In step S1025, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S1001 that the ending period flag is ON (S1001: YES), the process proceeds to step S1026.

  In step S1026, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, in the ending time setting process (S1023), it is determined whether or not the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is "0". The value of the fourth timer counter area T4 is set in the ending time setting process (FIG. 25) described later. When it is determined in step S1026 that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is “0” (S1026: YES), the process proceeds to step S1027.

  In step S1027, the ending period flag is turned off. Then, the process proceeds to step S1028, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of game times after the ending period of this time is finished. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S1028, the process proceeds to step S1029.

  In step S1029, the standby state flag is turned on. Then, the process proceeds to step S1030, and the standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 sec) is set in the standby state timer counter Tw stored in the various counter areas 64d. After executing step S1030, the present game state transition processing ends.

  On the other hand, in step S1026, when it is determined that the value of the fourth timer counter area T4 set as the ending time is not “0” (S1026: NO), this game state transition processing is ended as it is.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: 1017) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening / closing process. In step S1101, it is determined whether the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. When it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is not open (S1101: NO), the process proceeds to step S1102, and it is determined whether or not the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0" (S1102: YES), the main winning opening / closing processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1102 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S1102: NO), the process proceeds to step S1103.

  In step S1103, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S1103: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1103 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1103: YES), the process proceeds to step S1104, and the variable winning drive unit is operated to open the special winning opening 36a. 36c is driven. Then, it progresses to step S1105.

  In step S1105, setting processing for each round is executed. In the case of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, all the winning modes that have been set are high-frequency winning modes, so "15000" (that is, 30 seconds) is set in the first timer counter area T1. Further, in order to count the number of winning game balls to the special winning opening 36a, "10" is set in the winning counter area PC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. The count value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. If the pachinko machine 10 is set to the low frequency winning mode, for example, "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1 and "6" is set in the winning counter area PC. ] May be set. After executing step S1105, the process proceeds to step S1106.

  In step S1106, a release command is set. After that, the main prize opening / closing processing is ended. The opening command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the special winning opening 36a has started, and is a command for normal processing. It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). Based on the received opening command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has started, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set to the special winning opening 36a. Update to the content corresponding to the start of the release. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the release command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received opening command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has been started, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the special winning opening 36a is opened. Update the contents corresponding to the start.

  When it is determined in step S1101 that the special winning opening 36a is open (step S1101: YES), the process proceeds to step S1107, and it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". To do. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not "0" (S1107: NO), the process proceeds to step S1108.

  In step S1108, it is determined whether or not a game ball has won the special winning opening 36a based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When it is determined in step S1108 that no winning has occurred (S1108: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1108 that a winning has occurred (S1108: YES), the process proceeds to step S1109, and the value of the winning counter area PC is decremented by one. Then, it progresses to step S1110.

  In step S1110, it is determined whether or not the value of the winning counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning prize counter area PC is not “0” (S1110: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S1107 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S1107: YES), or when it is determined in step S1110 that the value of the winning counter area PC is “0”. (S1110: YES), the process proceeds to step S1111, and the special winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step S1112.

  In step S1112, 1 is subtracted from the value in the first round counter area RC1. Then, it progresses to step S1113 and it is determined whether the value of the 1st round counter area RC1 is "0". When it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S1113: YES), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1113 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S1113: NO), "1000" (that is, 2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the special winning opening 36a. After executing step S1114, the process advances to step S1115 to set a close command. After that, the special winning opening / closing processing is ended.

  The set closing command is a command including information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening of the special winning opening 36a has been completed, and is a normal process. In the external output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of FIG. Based on the received closing command, the sound emission control device 90 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are set in the special winning opening 36a. Update the contents to correspond to the completion of the opening. Further, the sound emission control device 90 transmits the closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining the information form. Based on the received closing command, the display control device 100 specifies that the opening of the special winning opening 36a for one round has ended, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the opening of the special winning opening 36a ends. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did.

<Condition determination processing>
Next, the condition determination process will be described. The condition determination process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1022) of the game state transition process.

  As described above, the condition determination process is a process of determining whether or not the case a2 shown in FIG. 9 is applicable. The condition to be able to execute the processing of case a2 is to win the jackpot lottery in the first game time and also to win the jackpot lottery in the second game time. This condition determination processing is executed immediately before the end of the opening / closing execution mode after winning the big hit lottery in the game time, and is a process of determining whether or not to win the big hit lottery in the next game time.

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the condition determination process. In step S1201, it is determined whether or not the reserved number CRN> 0. By executing this processing, when executing the special game state after the first game time, it is confirmed whether or not there is a game time immediately after the special game state. If the game time does not exist, it means that there is no game time corresponding to the second game time capable of executing the game time reproduction effect immediately after the suggestion effect, and the process of case a2 cannot be executed. .

  When it is determined in step S1201 that the number of reserved CRN> 0 (S1201: YES), the process proceeds to step S1202. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1201 that the number of reserved CRN> 0 is not satisfied (S1201: NO), the present condition determination process is directly terminated.

  In step S1202, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 related to the next game time is read. Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the storage area due to the winning of the winning opening for the starting opening (FIG. 15) is read. Then, it progresses to step S1203.

  In step S1203, it is determined whether or not the normal jackpot flag is ON. By executing the process, it is determined whether the jackpot lottery related to the next game time is executed in the high probability mode or the low probability mode.

  When it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is ON (S1203: YES), the process proceeds to step S1204, and the low probability mode win / loss table stored in the win / loss table storage area 63a is referred to. After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the win / loss table for the low probability mode, it is determined whether or not the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1203 that the normal jackpot flag is not ON (S1203: NO), the process proceeds to step S1205 and the high probability mode win / loss table stored in the win / loss table storage area 63a is referred to. . After that, the process proceeds to step S1206, and as a result of referring to the hit table for the high probability mode, it is determined whether the information on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot.

  When it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time corresponds to the jackpot (S1206: YES), the process proceeds to step S1207.

  In step S1207, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. In the case a2 (FIG. 9), the effect duplication avoidance flag further reproduces the game time reproduction effect executed in the second game time during the ending period of the special game state after the second game time. This flag is used to prevent execution. When it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1207: NO), the process proceeds to step S1208, and the condition satisfaction flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step S1209.

  In step S1209, a condition satisfaction command is set. The condition satisfaction command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 on the sub side to recognize that the condition satisfaction flag is ON. The condition satisfaction command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the external output process of the normal process (FIG. 18: step S503). After that, the condition determination process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1206 that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 read this time does not correspond to the jackpot (S1206: NO), or when it is determined in step S1207 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. (S1207: YES), the present condition determination processing is ended as it is.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1023) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S1301, it is determined whether the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON.

  When it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is not ON (S1301: NO), the process proceeds to step S1302, and it is determined whether the condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is ON (S1302: YES), the process proceeds to step S1303.

  In step S1303, "3000" (6 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4 which is the ending time timer. The process of step S1303 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the first game in the case of case a2 of FIG. In case a2, only the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, and the reproduction of the effect executed in the first game time is not executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, 6 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the suggestive effect. After executing step S1303, the process advances to step S1304 to turn off the condition satisfaction flag. Then, it progresses to step S1305.

  In step S1305, the effect duplication avoidance flag is turned ON. After that, the ending time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1302 that the condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S1302: NO), the process proceeds to step S1306.

  In step S1306, "15000" (30 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1306 is a process of setting an ending time in the special game state after the first game in the case of case a1 in FIG. In case a1, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed in the ending period. Therefore, in the present embodiment, 30 seconds are secured as the ending time required to execute the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect. In the present embodiment, the time required for the suggestive effect is constant at 6 seconds, and the time required for the special game state reproduction effect is constant at 24 seconds. After executing step S1303, the ending time setting process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1301 that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON (S1301: YES), the flow advances to step S1307 to set an effect duplication avoidance command. The effect duplication avoidance command is a command including information for causing the sub light emitting control device 90 to recognize that the effect duplication avoidance flag is ON. The effect duplication avoidance command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 18: step S503) of the normal process. After executing step S1307, the process advances to step S1308.

  In step S1308, "4000" (8 sec) is set in the fourth timer counter area T4. The process of step S1308 is a process of setting the ending time in the special game state after the second game in the case a2 of FIG. In case a2, a normal ending effect is executed during the ending period. Therefore, in this embodiment, 8 seconds is secured as the ending time required to execute the normal ending effect.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 23: S1028) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S1401, it is determined whether or not the flag corresponding to the probability variation big hit is turned on in the RAM 64 as the big hit type flag. That is, it is determined whether the 16R probability variation flag or the 8R probability variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON.

  When it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R certainty variation flag or the 8R certainty variation flag of the RAM 64 is ON (S1401: YES), the process proceeds to step S1402 and the flag erasing process is executed. Specifically, if the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, their states are maintained. . After executing step S1402, the process proceeds to step S1403.

  In step S1403, the high-probability mode flag is turned ON, and then in step S1404, the high-frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the opening / closing execution mode is finished, the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and the support mode is shifted to the gaming state which is the high-frequency support mode. The high probability mode and the high frequency support mode are maintained at least until the next big win. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1405.

  In step S1405, the game number counter PNC provided in the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 is set to 100. The value set in the game number counter PNC is a value indicating the number of games when the high frequency support mode is executed by limiting the number of games. Then, it progresses to step S1406.

  In step S1406, a high-probability mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win / loss selection mode is the high-probability mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. To do. Then, it progresses to step S1410.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1401 that the 16R normal flag or the 8R normal flag is ON in the RAM 64 (S1401: NO), the flow advances to step S1407 to execute a flag erasing process. Specifically, if the 16R probability variation flag, the 8R probability variation flag, the 16 normal flag, the 8R normal flag, and the high frequency support mode flag are ON, they are turned OFF, and if they are not ON, their states are maintained. . Then, it progresses to step S1408.

  In step S1408, after turning on the high frequency support mode flag, the process proceeds to step S1409, and 100 is set in the game number counter PNC provided in various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S1410.

  In step S1410, a high-frequency support mode command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the high-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Set. After that, the transition process at the end of the ending period ends.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 18: S508).

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support process. In step S1501, it is determined whether or not support is being performed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is brought into the open state, and turned off when returning to the closed state. When it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is not ON (S1501: NO), the process proceeds to step S1502.

  In step S1502, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the opened state is won in the electric role opening lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric roled device 34a, and is turned off when the supporting flag is on. Is. When it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is not ON (S1502: NO), the process proceeds to step S1503.

  In step S1503, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in each counter area 64d of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S1503 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1503: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1503: YES), the process proceeds to step S1504.

  In step S1504, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S1504 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S1504: YES), the flow advances to step S1505 to set the off display, and then the main power supporting support process is ended. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1504 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S1504: NO), the process proceeds to step S1506.

  In step S1506, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0”. When it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is “0” (S1506: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1506 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0” (S1506: YES), the process advances to step S1507.

  In step S1507, it is determined whether or not the opening / closing execution mode is in progress, and then the process proceeds to step S1508 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open / close execution mode is not set in step S1507 (S1507: NO) and the high-frequency support mode is set in step S1508 (S1508: YES), the flow advances to step S1509 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S1510.

  In step S1510, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1509 is support winning. When it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (S1510: YES), the process proceeds to step S1511, the support winning flag is turned ON, and the various counter areas 64d of the RAM 64 are provided. "3" is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. Then, it progresses to step S1512. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1510 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (S1510: NO), the process proceeds to step S1512 without executing the process of step S1511.

  In step S1512, it is determined whether the winning / winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode. When it is determined in step S1512 that the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode (S1512: YES), the process proceeds to step S1513. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1512 that the winning / winning lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S1512: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly ended.

  In step S1513, it is determined whether or not the game number counter area is "0". The number-of-games counter is decremented by 1 each time one game is completed in the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. When it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is not "0" (S1513: NO), the main power combination support processing is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1513 that the number-of-games counter area is “0”, the process proceeds to step S1514, and the high frequency support mode flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S1515.

  In step S1515, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process for supporting the electric power combination ends.

  The low frequency support command set in step S1515 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the normal external output process (FIG. 18: step S503). The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the process corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S1507 that the mode is the opening / closing execution mode (S1507: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step S1518 (S1508: NO), the process proceeds to step S1516, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64c is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 190, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. Also, "14750" (that is, 29.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. Then, it progresses to step S1517.

  In step S1517, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S1516 is support winning. If it is determined in step S1517 that the support is not won (S1517: NO), the main power supporting support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1517 that the support is won (S1517: YES), the process proceeds to step S1518, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1502 that the support winning flag is ON (S1502: YES), the flow advances to step S1519 to determine whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1519: NO), the pattern of the universal figure unit 38 is being changed and displayed, and therefore the processing for main electric power support is continued. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1519 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1519: YES), the process proceeds to step S1520.

  In step S1520, the hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the picture in the universal figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step S1521, and the in-support flag is turned ON and the support winning flag is turned OFF. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S1501 that the in-support flag is ON (S1501: YES), the flow advances to step S1522 to execute electric role opening / closing control processing for opening / closing controlling the electric accessory 34a. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Electrical part opening / closing control process>
Next, a power combination opening / closing control process will be described. The electric power combination opening / closing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 28: S1522) of the electric power combination support process.

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening / closing control process. In step S1601, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 34b is in the driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S1601: YES), the process proceeds to step S1602.

  In step S1602, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1602: NO), the main electric power combination opening / closing control process is directly terminated. That is, when the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric opening / closing control process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1602 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1602: YES), the process proceeds to step S1603, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S1603, the process proceeds to step S1604.

  In step S1604, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S1605 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not “0” (S1605: NO), the main electric power combination opening / closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1605 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0” (S1605: YES), the process proceeds to step S1606 to turn off the support flag. After that, the electric power combination opening / closing control process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S1601 that the electric accessory 34a is not open (S1601: NO), the process proceeds to step S1607, and it is determined whether or not the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S1607 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S1607: NO), the main electric power combination opening / closing control process is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1507 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S1607: YES), the process proceeds to step S1608, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. . Then, it progresses to step S1609.

  In step S1609, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in progress (S1609: NO), the flow advances to step S1610 to determine whether the high frequency support mode is set. To do.

  If it is determined in step S1610 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S1610: YES), the flow advances to step S1611 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. After that, the electric power combination opening / closing control process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1609 that it is the open / close execution mode (S1609: YES), or if it is determined that it is not the high frequency support mode in step S1610 (S1610: NO), the process proceeds to step S1612, and the second "100" (that is, 0.2 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. After that, the electric power combination opening / closing control process is ended.

<Processing for standby>
Next, the standby process will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 18: S509).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the standby process. In step S1701, it is determined whether the standby state flag is ON. When it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is ON (S1701: YES), the process proceeds to step S1702. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1701 that the standby state flag is not ON (S1701: NO), this standby process is ended.

  In step S1702, it is determined whether 15 seconds have passed since the standby state flag was turned on. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, and if the value of the standby state timer counter Tw is 0, 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on. To determine. If it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on, the process advances to step S1703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1702 that 15 seconds have not elapsed since the standby state flag was turned on, the standby process is ended.

  In step S1703, the standby state flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S1704 to turn on the transition condition satisfaction flag. After that, the process advances to step S1705 to set a transition condition satisfaction command. The transition condition satisfaction command is a command for causing each control device on the sub side to recognize that 15 seconds have elapsed since the standby state was started, that is, the transition condition was satisfied. After executing step S1705, the standby process ends.

A6. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configuration of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. The MPU 92 is mounted on the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element containing a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 is connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. On the output side of the MPU 92, the production operation buttons 24, the speaker 46, various lamps 47 are connected, and the display control device 100 is connected.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105, which is an IC chip, is also called a "drawing chip", and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

A7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 32 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed in the sound-side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (for example, 2 msec). Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S1801, command storage processing is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound / light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing Step S1801, the process proceeds to Step S1802.

  In step S1802, a command corresponding process for performing a process corresponding to the received command is executed. The details of the command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S1802, the process proceeds to Step S1803.

  In step S1803, standby state transition processing for reducing the output level (volume) of the sound in the standby state and starting the demo moving image is executed. Details of the standby state transition processing will be described later. After executing step S1803, the process proceeds to step S1804.

  In step S1804, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control processing, the light emission of the various lamps 47 is controlled based on the light emission data read in the command corresponding processing in step S1802. After executing step S1804, the process proceeds to step S1805.

  In step S1805, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the voice output control process, the voice output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the voice output data read in the command corresponding process of step S1802. After executing step S1805, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio light emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32: S1802).

  FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. As described above, in the command handling process, the process corresponding to the command received from the main MPU 62 is executed. The processing of each step executed in the command handling processing will be described below.

  In step S1901, it is determined whether a startup command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1901 that the startup command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: YES), the process proceeds to step S1902 and the startup command handling process is executed. Details of the startup command handling process will be described later. After executing Step S1902, the process proceeds to Step S1903. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1901 that the startup command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1901: NO), the process proceeds to step S1903 without executing step S1902.

  In step S1903, it is determined whether a hold command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: YES), the process proceeds to step S1904 and the hold command handling process is executed. Details of the pending command handling process will be described later. After executing step S1904, the process proceeds to step S1905. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1903 that the hold command is not received from the main MPU 62 (S1903: NO), step S1904 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S1905.

  In step S1905, it is determined whether the variation command and the type command have been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have been received (S1905: YES), the process proceeds to step S1906. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1905 that the variation command and the type command have not been received (S1905: NO), the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1906, effect setting processing is executed. In the effect setting process, a notice effect, a reach effect, a stop design, a variable display pattern, etc., to be executed in this game time are set. Details of the effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1906, the process proceeds to step S1907.

  In step S1907, it is determined whether the opening command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1907: YES), the flow advances to step S1908 to execute the opening effect setting process. In the opening effect setting process, the jackpot type included in the opening command received this time is specified, the content of the opening effect corresponding to the jackpot type is set, and the information corresponding to the effect content is set. The opening effect command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Then, it progresses to step S1909.

  In step S1909, opening / closing execution mode effect setting processing is executed. In the opening / closing execution mode effect setting process, the content of the effect executed in the opening / closing execution mode is set based on the information on the number of rounds and the jackpot type information included in the opening command. After executing step S1909, the process proceeds to step S1910.

  If it is determined in step S1907 that the opening command has not been received (S1907: NO), the process proceeds to step S1910 without executing steps S1908 and S1909.

  In step S1910, it is determined whether a condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1910: YES), the flow advances to step S1911, and the sound / light stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound / light RAM 94 is stored. Turn on the side condition satisfaction flag. After executing step S1911, the process proceeds to step S1912. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1910 that the condition satisfaction command has not been received (S1910: NO), the process proceeds to step S1912 without executing step S1911.

  In step S1912, it is determined whether an effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S1912: YES), the flow proceeds to step S1913, and the sounds stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 are stored. Turn on the light side effect duplication flag. After executing step S1913, the process proceeds to step S1914. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1912 that the effect duplication avoidance command has not been received (S1912: NO), the process proceeds to step S1914 without executing step S1913.

  In step S1914, it is determined whether an ending command has been received. If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has been received (S1914: YES), the process advances to step S1915 to execute an ending effect setting process. In the ending effect setting process, the ending effect contents in the ending period are set based on the information about the ending time included in the ending command received this time and the ON / OFF information of the sound-light side condition satisfaction flag. is there. The ending effect setting process will be described later. After executing step S1915, the process proceeds to step S1920.

  If it is determined in step S1914 that the ending command has not been received (S1914: NO), the process proceeds to step S1916 without executing step S1915.

  In step S1916, it is determined whether or not a transition condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: YES), the process proceeds to step S1917, and the volume reduction flag is turned on. The volume reduction flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, and is turned on at the timing of starting the process of reducing the output level (volume) of the voice, and at the timing when the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero. This is a flag that is turned off. After executing step S1917, the process proceeds to step S1918. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1916 that the transition condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1916: NO), step S1917 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S1918.

  In step S1918, it is determined whether a return condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition satisfaction command is received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: YES), the process proceeds to step S1919, and the return condition satisfaction flag is set to ON. The return condition satisfaction flag is stored in various flag storage areas 94a, and is turned on when starting the process of returning the audio output level (volume) or the process of ending the demo video, and outputs the audio output level (volume). This is a flag that is turned off when the volume) is restored and the demo video ends. After executing step S1919, the process proceeds to step S1920. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1918 that the return condition satisfaction command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S1918: NO), the process proceeds to step S1920 without executing step S1919.

  In step S1920, other setting processing is executed. In the other setting process, for example, effect contents corresponding to the high frequency support mode command, the low frequency support mode command, the opening command and the closing command are set. When the effect operation button 24 is pressed, the effect operation command for recognizing that the effect operation button 24 is pressed is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. After executing step S1920, the processing corresponding to this command ends.

<Startup command processing>
Next, the startup command handling process will be described. The startup command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1902).

  FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing the startup command handling process. As described above, the startup command handling process is a process executed when the startup command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the startup command handling processing will be described below.

  In step S2001, a demo movie start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The demo moving image start command is a command for causing the display-side MPU 102 to start displaying the demo moving image. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts the process for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2001, the process proceeds to step S2002.

  In step S2002, the demo movie display flag is turned on. The demo video display flag is a flag indicating that the demo video is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and is turned on when the display of the demo video is started and turned off when the display of the demo video is finished. It is a flag that is set. After executing step S2002, the process proceeds to step S2003.

  In step S2003, the cue determination flag is turned on. As described above, the cue determination flag starts output and display from the temporal start position of the background music and the background video when the return condition is satisfied and the output of the background music and the display of the background video are started. This is a flag for determining whether or not. If the cue determination flag is ON at the timing when the return condition is satisfied, when the background music is output and the background video is displayed, the output and the display are started from the temporal start position of the background music and the background video. To do. After executing step S2003, the main startup command handling process ends.

<Hold command handling>
Next, the pending command handling process will be described. The hold command handling process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a command handling process subroutine (FIG. 33: S1904).

  FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the hold command handling process. As described above, the hold command handling process is a process executed when the hold command is received from the main MPU 62. The processing of each step executed in the pending command handling processing will be described below.

  In step S2101, the update process at the time of winning is executed. In the update processing at the time of winning, the number of holding information acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33, the number of holding information acquired based on winning in the second starting opening 34, and these holdings A process for allowing the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the total number of pieces of information is executed. Details of the update process at the time of winning in step S2101 will be described later. In the following, the number of holding information items obtained based on winning in the first starting port 33 is also referred to as “first holding number”, and the number of holding information items obtained based on winning in the second starting port 34 is It is also referred to as “second reserved number”, and the total number of the first reserved number and the second reserved number is also referred to as “total reserved number”. After executing step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2102.

  In step S2102, a hold display control process is executed. Specifically, the number of holding information items acquired based on the winning of the first starting port 33 specified in step S2101, and the number of holding information items acquired based on the winning of the second starting port 34. The display mode (color and combination of LED lamps to be turned on) of the first hold display section 37c and the second hold display section 37d is controlled based on the above. After executing step S2102, the pending command handling process ends.

<Update process at the time of winning>
Next, the update process at the time of winning will be described. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command corresponding process.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the time of winning. In step S2201, it is determined whether or not the hold command that is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33. When it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command which is the current read target is transmitted based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 (S2201: YES), the process proceeds to step S2202 and the sound and light is emitted. The update processing of the first reserved number counter area provided in each counter area 94b of the side RAM 94 is executed. The first reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the first starting opening 33. In the update processing of the first pending quantity counter area, the information of the first pending quantity counter area is updated to the information of the pending quantity included in the pending command that is the current read target. After executing step S2202, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  When it is determined in step S2201 that the hold command which is the current read target is not transmitted based on the winning of the first start opening 33 (S2201: NO), that is, the hold command is the second start opening. If it is determined that the data is transmitted based on the winning of 34, the process proceeds to step S2203, and the update processing of the second holding number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. . The second reserved number counter area is a counter area for the sound-light side MPU 92 to specify the number of reserved information acquired based on winning in the second starting opening 34. In the update processing of the second reserved quantity counter area, the information of the second reserved quantity counter area is updated to the information of the reserved quantity included in the command that is the current read target. After executing step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2204.

  The reason why the processes of steps S2202 and S2203 are performed as described above will be described. In the present embodiment, while the pachinko machine 10 is powered off, backup power is supplied to the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, whereas backup power is supplied to the RAM 94 of the audio emission control device 90. Not done. Therefore, when the power is cut off in the situation where the hold information related to winning in the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34 is stored in the RAM 64 of the main control device 60, the main control device 60 outputs the hold information. In contrast to being stored and held, the voice emission control device 90 recognizes that the number of holding information is zero. In this case, if a configuration is adopted in which the voice emission control device 90 counts up the first hold number counter area or the second hold number counter area each time a hold command is received, the main controller 60 actually holds the hold storage. There may be a problem that the number of held information held and the number of held information grasped by the voice emission control device 90 do not match. On the other hand, as in the above-described embodiment, the main control device 60 transmits the hold command including the information on the number of holdings, and the voice emission control device 90 sends the hold command each time the command is received. By adopting a configuration in which the information on the contained quantity to be contained is set in the first reserved quantity counter area or the second reserved quantity counter area, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of the inconvenience as described above.

  In step S2204, the update processing of the total reserved number counter area provided in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94 is executed. In the total reserved quantity counter area, the sum of the quantity of the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the first starting opening 33 and the quantity of the reservation information acquired based on the winning of the second starting opening 34 is generated. This is a counter area for specifying in the side MPU 92. In the update processing, the information of the total reserved quantity counter area is the sum of the information of the reserved quantity measured in the first reserved quantity counter area and the information of the reserved quantity measured in the second reserved quantity counter area. To update. After executing step S2204, the update process at the time of final winning is completed.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1906) of the command corresponding process.

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process. As described above, the effect setting process is a process executed when it is determined that the variation command and the type command are received, and is a process for setting the content of the effect executed in the current game time. . Hereinafter, a specific process of the effect setting process will be described.

  In step S2301, the fluctuation command received this time is read, and from this command, the information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the kind of big hit, the presence / absence of a reach, and the fluctuation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. Then, it progresses to step S2302.

  In step S2302, it is determined whether the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2302 that the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2302: NO), the process proceeds to step S2303.

  In step S2303, effect type setting processing is executed. The effect type setting process executed in step S2303 is a process of setting the content of the notice effect and the reach effect in the game. The effect type setting process will be described later. After executing Step S2303, the process proceeds to Step S2304.

  In step S2304, a stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R certainty jackpot, 8R certainty jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, or 8R regular jackpot, the same symbol on the activated line L The information corresponding to the stop result in which the combination is established is set as the current stop symbol information. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination and the same. A combination of even symbols may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead of this, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the “7” symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R probability variation jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is 16R normal jackpot or 8R normal jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a miss result, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the variation command. When it is determined that the reach is generated, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the effective line L, and the stop result is that the reach symbol combination is established on the effective line L. The information is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the reach is not supported, the stop result is that the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L, and the reach symbol combination is not established on the activated line L. Corresponding information is set as the information of the current stop symbol. After executing Step S2304, the process proceeds to Step S2305.

  In step S2305, a process for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, the information of the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the variation command received this time, and the combination of the variation time information and the stop symbol information identified in step S2304 is set. Select the corresponding variable display pattern. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. Then, it progresses to step S2306.

  In step S2306, it is determined whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the current game time has been won. Specifically, the presence or absence of a big hit is determined based on the received variation command. When it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game number is won (S2306: YES), the process proceeds to step S2307.

  In step S2307, information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game is stored. Specifically, the setting contents in the effect setting process of step S2303 are stored. This processing is performed in order to reproduce the effect in the game times that is won in the jackpot lottery. After executing step S2307, the process advances to step S2312. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2306 that the jackpot lottery related to the current game number has not been won (S2306: NO), the process proceeds to step S2312 without executing step S2307.

  When it is determined in step S2302 that the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2302: YES), the process proceeds to step S2308. That is, when it is determined that the process corresponding to case a2 described in FIG. 9 is to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2308.

  In step S2308, the information on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process relating to the previous game time is read. Then, it progresses to step S2309.

  In step S2309, effect type setting processing is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern information read in step S2308. That is, the same effect as the effect executed in the previous game is set. Then, it progresses to step S2310.

  In step S2310, setting processing of the stop symbol is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern information read in step S2308. That is, the stop symbol having the same content as the stop symbol displayed in the previous game time is set. Then, it progresses to step S2311.

  In step S2311, setting processing of the variable display pattern is executed based on the effect type, the stop symbol, and the information of the variable display pattern read in step S2308. That is, the variable display pattern having the same content as the variable display pattern displayed in the previous game is set. Then, it progresses to step S2312.

  In step S2312, the effect command, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern information set in the current game time are set in the effect command. After that, the process advances to step S2313, and the effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 executes processing for displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2313, the process proceeds to step S2314, after performing the update process at the start of fluctuation, the effect setting process is ended. Details of the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described later.

<Update process at the start of fluctuation>
Next, the update process at the start of fluctuation will be described. The updating process at the start of fluctuation is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 37: S2314) of the effect setting process.

  FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the update processing at the start of fluctuation. In step S2401, it is determined whether or not the fluctuation command received this time is the first fluctuation command. If it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is the first variation command (S2401: YES), the flow advances to step S2402 to set the first reserved number counter stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. Subtract one. Then, it progresses to step S2404.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2401 that the variation command received this time is not the first variation command (S2401: NO), the process proceeds to step S2403, and the second hold number stored in the sound-light side RAM 94. Decrement the counter by 1. Then, it progresses to step S2404.

  In step S2404, the information of the total reserved number counter area is updated so that the total reserved number stored in the total reserved number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After that, the updating process at the start of fluctuation is completed.

<Opening effect setting process>
Next, the opening effect setting process will be described. The opening effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the audio emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1908) of the command corresponding process.

  FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing the opening effect setting process. In step S2501, it is determined whether or not the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2501 that the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2501: NO), the process proceeds to step S2502.

  In step S2502, a normal start effect is set as the opening effect. In the present embodiment, as explained in case a2 of FIG. 9, as the opening effect in the special game state, an opening effect to be executed only in a special case such as a specific start effect (see FIG. 10C) is prepared. are doing. In step S2502, a start effect (normal start effect) executed in a case other than the special case such as the case a2 is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2502, the process proceeds to step S2505.

  When it is determined in step S2501 that the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2501: YES), the process proceeds to step S2503. In step S2503, the specific start effect is set as the opening effect. After executing step S2503, the flow proceeds to step S2504, and the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S2505.

  In step S2505, an opening effect command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The opening effect command includes information on the opening effect set in step S2502 or step S2503. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received opening effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2505, the present opening effect setting process ends.

<Ending effect setting process>
Next, the ending effect setting process will be described. The ending effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1915) of the command corresponding process.

  FIG. 40 is a flowchart showing the ending effect setting process. In step S2601, it is determined whether or not the sound-light side effect duplication flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2601 that the sound-light side effect duplication flag is not ON (S2601: NO), the process proceeds to step S2602.

  In step S2602, it is determined whether or not the sound-light-side condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2602 that the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2602: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2603. That is, when it is determined that the effect (indication effect, special game state reproduction effect and specific end effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game turn of case a1 in FIG. 9 is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2603. move on.

  In step S2603, the information on the effect type, stop symbol, and variable display pattern stored in step S2307 of the effect setting process (FIG. 37) is read. Then, it progresses to step S2604.

  In step S2604, a special game state reproduction effect is constructed from the information read in step S2603. After that, the process proceeds to step S2605, and the suggestion effect, the special game state reproduction effect, and the specific end effect are set as the ending effect. That is, the effect to be executed in the ending period in the special game state after the first game in case a1 of FIG. 9 is set. Then, it progresses to step S2609.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2602 that the sound / light side condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2602: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2606. That is, when it is determined that the effect (indication effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the first game time of the case a2 in FIG. 9 is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2606.

  In step S2606, the suggestive effect is set as the ending effect. Then, it progresses to step S2609.

  If it is determined in step S2601 that the sound-light side effect duplication flag is ON (S2601: YES), the flow advances to step S2607. That is, when it is determined that the effect (normal ending effect) corresponding to the ending period in the special game state after the second game turn of the case a2 of FIG. 9 is determined to be executed, the process proceeds to step S2607.

  In step S2607, the normal ending effect is set as the ending effect. As described above, the normal ending effect is an effect that suggests that the special game state is over. Then, it progresses to step S2608.

  In step S2608, the sound-light side effect duplication flag is turned off, and then the process proceeds to step S2609.

  In step S2609, an ending effect command including information corresponding to the effect contents set in step S2605, step S2606, or step S2607 is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100. The display-side MPU 102 executes a process of displaying the effect contents corresponding to the received ending effect command on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2609, the ending effect setting process is ended.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when executing the special game state reproduction effect, as shown in steps S2603 to S2605 and S2609, the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time are shown. The voice emission control device 90 stores the information, and when executing the special game state reproduction effect, a command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed again in the first game time is part of the ending command. As a result, by transmitting from the sound emission control device 90 to the display control device 100, the image corresponding to the special game state reproduction effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 receives the command indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time from the sound emission control device 90 as a part of the ending command, and receives the command. The pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern indicated by the command is read from the program ROM 103 and written in the work RAM 104. The pattern data table is necessary to display an image for one frame at the image update timing when displaying a moving image corresponding to the effect for this game use on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. It is a group of information for which various processes are defined. That is, in the pattern data table, an information group corresponding to each frame from the start timing to the end timing in the effect for game play this time is defined.

  The MPU 102 of the display control device 100 reads out the information group corresponding to each frame and instructs the VDP 105 to draw in order to display an image for one frame. The VDP 105 reads an image from the character ROM 106 according to a drawing instruction from the MPU 102, generates image data to be displayed on the display surface 41a in the video RAM 107, and outputs the generated image data to the symbol display device 41 to display the image. An image of one frame is displayed on the surface 41a. MPU102 of the display control device 100, for the information group of each frame stored in the pattern data table, by sequentially issuing a drawing instruction to the VDP105, the effect type and the stop symbol executed in the first game time. The variable display pattern can be executed as a special game state reproduction effect.

  In the present embodiment, the special game state reproduction effect is executed by executing the above-described process. In addition, as the process of executing the special game state reproduction effect, in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, other The processing may be adopted. For example, as in the present embodiment, instead of the process of storing the information indicating the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time in the voice emission control device 90, the voice emission control device 90 displays the information. A command for instructing to temporarily store the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time is transmitted to the control device 100. The display control device 100 temporarily stores the pattern data table corresponding to the combination of the effect type, the stop symbol, and the variable display pattern executed in the first game time according to the command.

  After that, when executing the special game state reproduction effect, the voice emission control device 90 outputs to the display control device 100 a command indicating that the VDP 105 is to be instructed to draw in accordance with the temporarily stored pattern data table. . The display control device 100 can execute the special game state reproduction effect by issuing a drawing instruction to the VDP 105 in accordance with the command according to the temporarily stored pattern data table. As described above, various processes can be adopted in the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 as the process for executing the special game state reproduction effect.

<Standby state transition process>
Next, the standby state transition process will be described. The standby state transition process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 32: S1803).

  FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing the standby state shift processing. In step S2701, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S2701: NO), the process proceeds to step S2702.

  In step S2702, it is determined whether the demo movie display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2702 that the demo movie display flag is not ON (S2702: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2703. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2702 that the demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S2702: YES), the standby state shifting process is ended.

  In step S2703, it is determined whether the demo movie start waiting flag is ON. The demo video start waiting flag is a flag for identifying in the audio emission control device 90 that the demo video is waiting to start, and is turned on when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. The flag is set to OFF when the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero and 5 seconds elapse without the return condition being satisfied. If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo movie start waiting flag is not ON (S2703: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2704.

  In step S2704, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2704: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2705. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2704 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2704: NO), the standby state transition process ends.

  In step S2705, a process of reducing the audio output level (volume) is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 steps, and the process of lowering the audio output level by one step is executed. In the present embodiment, the standby state transition process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, so that the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing step S2705, the process advances to step S2706.

  In step S2706, it is determined whether or not the audio output level (volume) has become zero. When it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S2706: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2707, the volume reduction flag is turned off, and the flow proceeds to step S2708 to wait for the start of the demo video. Turn on the flag. Then, it progresses to step S2709. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2706 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S2706: NO), the standby state transition process ends.

  In step S2709, a demo movie start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set to the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94b. The demo movie start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the output level (volume) of the sound becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. It After executing step S2709, the present standby state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2703 that the demo movie start waiting flag is ON (S2703: YES), the flow proceeds to step S2710.

  In step S2710, it is determined whether the demo video start waiting period of 5 seconds has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, and if the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, the demo video start waiting period of 5 seconds ends. It is judged that it did. If it is determined in step S2710 that the demo movie start waiting period has ended, the process proceeds to step S2711. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2710 that the demo video start waiting period has not ended, the standby state transition processing ends.

  In step S2711, background music output stop processing is executed. After that, the process advances to step S2712, and a demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts the process for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S2712, the process advances to step S2713.

  In step S2713, the demo movie start waiting flag is turned off, and in step S2714, the demo movie display flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S2715, the cue determination flag is set to ON, and this standby state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2701 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S2701: YES), the flow advances to step S2716 to determine whether the cue determination flag is ON. When it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S2716: NO), the process proceeds to step S2717, and the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to a value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2717, the process advances to step S2718.

  In step S2718, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S2718: YES), the flow advances to step S2719 to turn off the volume reduction flag. Then, it progresses to step S2720. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2718 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S2718: NO), step S2719 is skipped and step S2720 is reached.

  In step S2720, it is determined whether the demo movie start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S2720 that the demo video start wait is ON (S2720: YES), the flow advances to step S2721 to turn off the demo video start wait flag. After that, the process advances to step S2722, and the return condition satisfaction flag is turned off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2720 that the demo movie start waiting flag is not ON (S2720: NO), the process proceeds to step S2722 without executing step S2721, and the return condition satisfaction flag is turned OFF. After executing step S2722, the present standby state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S2716 that the cue determination flag is ON (S2716: YES), the flow advances to step S2723 to send a demo movie end command to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo movie end command executes a process for ending the display of the demo movie. After executing step S2723, the flow advances to step S2724 to turn off the demo movie display flag. Then, it progresses to step S2725.

  In step S2725, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts the process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. Then, it progresses to step S2726.

  In step S2726, the output level (volume) of the sound is returned to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S2726, the process proceeds to step S2727.

  In step S2727, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cue determination flag is ON, the output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the process advances to step S2728 to turn off the cue determination flag. After that, the process advances to step S2729, the return condition satisfaction flag is turned off, and this standby state transition processing ends.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the voice light emission control device 90 and a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed as it is until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

  In step S2801, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. Then, it progresses to step S2802.

  In step S2802, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

  FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S2901, a command storage process is executed. In the command storing process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image, or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

  In step S3001, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the contents of the command stored in the command storage area are analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 43), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command correspondence process (S3001), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the processes corresponding to all the analyzed commands are executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, it is possible to quickly grasp the form of the effect such as the notice effect or the stop pattern set by the voice emission control device 90, and display the effect image according to the mode. The rendering of the image can be controlled for display on the device 41. The details of the command handling process will be described later.

  In step S3002, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S3001) or the like. . Then, it progresses to step S3003.

  In step S3003, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (S3002), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). Then, it progresses to step S3004.

  In step S3004, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S3003), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process on the basis of these pieces of information and, together with the drive signal, displays the image drawn on the basis of the information received at the immediately preceding V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the process advances to step S3005 to execute other processes, and then ends the V interrupt process.

<Command processing>
Next, the command handling process will be described. The command corresponding process is executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 as a V interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 44: S3001).

  FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the command handling process. In step S3101, it is determined whether an effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. When it is determined in step S3101 that the effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3102, and display start processing of the effect corresponding to the effect command is executed. Specifically, the control of the drawing and display of the image is started so that the effect mode specified by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3102, the process proceeds to step S3103. On the other hand, in step S3101, if it is determined that the effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3103 without executing step S3102.

  In step S3103, it is determined whether the opening effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104. When it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3104, and the opening effect display start processing corresponding to the opening effect command is executed. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode specified by the opening effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Further, after the opening effect is finished, the drawing and display control of the image is started so that the opening / closing execution mode effect is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3104, the process proceeds to step S3105. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3103 that the opening effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3105 without executing step S3104.

  In step S3105, it is determined whether the ending effect command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. When it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3106, and the ending effect display start processing corresponding to the ending effect command is executed. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode specified by the ending effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3106, the process proceeds to step S3107. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3105 that the ending effect command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3107 without executing step S3106.

  In step S3107, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3107 that the demo moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3108 to execute demo moving image display start processing. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the demo moving image specified by the demo moving image start command is displayed on the symbol display device 41. In the present embodiment, the display of the demo moving image is repeated until the demo moving image end command described later is received. After executing step S3108, the process proceeds to step S3109. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3107 that the demo moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3109 without executing step S3108.

  In step S3109, it is determined whether or not the demo moving image end command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3109 that the demo moving image end command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3110, and processing for ending the display of the demo moving image is executed. Then, it progresses to step S3111. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3109 that the demo moving image end command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3111 without executing step S3110.

  In step S3111, it is determined whether the background moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is stored, the process advances to step S3112 to execute processing for starting display of the background moving image. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S3112, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3111 that the background moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112.

  In step S3113, it is determined whether or not another command is stored in the command storage area provided in work RAM 104, and processing corresponding to the stored command is executed. For example, when the above-mentioned production operation command is stored, the processing when the above-mentioned production operation command is stored is executed. After that, the processing corresponding to this command ends.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is out, as in case a1, the notice effect and the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect are generated. And the result notification effect is executed as a special game state reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time, and the player recognizes that it is an effect that reproduces the already executed effect. On the other hand, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won as in case a2, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect that are executed after the suggestion effect are already executed in terms of effect. Although it is executed as an effect to reproduce the effect, it is actually a game time reproduction effect that is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. When the special game state reproduction effect in case a1 is being watched first, the player executes the game time reproduction effect in the second game time of case a2 in the first game time as in case a1. It is difficult to anticipate winning in the jackpot lottery related to the second game time, while recognizing that it is merely reproduction of the production. In such a state, after the notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the second game time, when the result notification effect notifies that the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, the player For the first time, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the second game time are not reproductions of the effects executed in the first game time, but the second game. Recognize that it was executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the times. By executing the special game state reproduction effect in the case a1 and the game time reproduction effect in the case a2 in this way, the game is given a surprising effect and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. The player can be given a sense of expectation regarding the effect. In addition, by making the second game time in case a2 unexpected by the player, it is possible to surprise the player and improve the interest of the game.

  Furthermore, in the case of case a2, it is suggested that the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect executed in the first game time are reproduced even though the jackpot lottery in the second game time is won. Since the suggestive effect is executed, it is even more difficult for the player to expect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game is won. Therefore, it is possible to give the game more unexpectedness.

  Further, in case a2, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect already executed in the effect, but actually, Is executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Therefore, as a case where the reach effect is executed, a case where it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation regarding the success or failure of the big hit lottery, and a case where it is executed as a reproduction of the already executed effect, Although it will be executed as a reproduction of the already executed production, at least three cases will be set, including the case of being executed due to winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. can do. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100 returns the display mode of the symbol display device 41 from the mode of displaying the demo video to the mode of displaying the background video. Then, when the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the display control device 100 starts displaying the background moving image from a predetermined temporal position. In addition, the sound emission control device 90 executes processing for returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, and at the time of outputting the background music, from the predetermined temporal position of the background music. Start output. Therefore, it is possible to easily synchronize the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes depending on the timing when the return condition is satisfied. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, according to this embodiment, after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and when the return condition is satisfied after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the display control device 100. Starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image, and the audio emission control device 90 starts the output from the temporal start position “01” of the background music. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the display of the background moving image is started at a position midway in time and the output of the background music is started at a position midway in time. For example, if the configuration is adopted in which the display is started from a position midway in time of the background video and the output is started from a position midway in time of the background music, the player is Since the background moving image and the background music are to be viewed from a position in the middle of time, it may be uncomfortable or unsatisfactory that there is a portion of the background moving image and the background music that is not being listened to. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the background moving image and the background music from the temporal head position, so that it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the background moving image and the background music can be viewed from the beginning position in time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and before the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 12), the display control is performed. The device 100 continues the mode in which the background moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the sound emission control device 90 executes the process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player. While maintaining the synchronization between the display and the output of the background music, the mode before the transition condition is satisfied can be restored in a natural flow without a feeling of discomfort.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the return condition is satisfied while the volume of the background music is being reduced (FIG. 13), the display control device 100 continues the mode of displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41. Since the sound emission control device 90 executes a process of returning the volume of the background music to the volume preset by the player, the transition condition is satisfied while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the background video and the output of the background music. It is possible to return in a natural flow without feeling uncomfortable with the mode before the operation.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, after the game time is over, it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied when 15 seconds elapse without starting any of the special game state and the next game time, so the game is executed. It is possible to reduce the volume of background music over time in a state in which it is highly possible that a person is not playing a game.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, it is determined that the return condition is satisfied when the game time is started in the standby state, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and the background music is played. Since the output mode returns to the mode in which the background music is output at the volume preset by the player, the sense of expectation that the game time has started can be improved and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

B. Second embodiment:
FIG. 46 is a time chart showing the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the second embodiment. In case a2 shown in FIG. 9B of the first embodiment, the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game time, and the first game time is also given. The process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when the and the second game times are continuous has been described.

  On the other hand, in the second embodiment, as a case b1 shown in FIG. 46 (a), the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, and the jackpot lottery is also won in the second game time. A process executed by the pachinko machine 10 when another game time (hereinafter also referred to as a preceding game time) exists between the first game time and the second game time will be described. The jackpot lottery in the preceding game times is out.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

  After that, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. In the special game state, the opening effect, the opening / closing execution mode, and the ending effect are executed. In the present embodiment, in the special game state after the first game, the opening effect suggests the beginning of the special game state (normal opening effect), and the ending effect suggests the end of the special game state. Execute the ending production (normal ending production). That is, unlike the case a2 in FIG. 9B, the suggestive effect is not executed as the ending effect in the special game state.

  When the special game state ends, the preceding game times are executed. In the present embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game time.

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the symbol display device 41 when executing the suggestive effect in the preceding game time. As shown in the figure, when the suggestive effect is executed, the display surface 41a is divided into a display area 41aS and a display area 41aL. Then, in the display area 41aS, a symbol change display and a stop display are executed. Specifically, in the unit game time, the symbol display is changed during the variable time, and the symbol stop display is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, the suggestive effect is executed. In this way, by displaying the variable display and the stop display of the symbols on the small area of the display surface 41a, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect without giving the player a feeling of strangeness in the preceding game times. Further, the variable display and the stop display of the symbols may not be displayed on the display surface 41a, or a predetermined mark or character displayed in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the symbols may be blinked and lit. . Even in this case, the suggestion effect can be executed in the preceding game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (a), the pachinko machine 10 executes the preceding game time and then executes the second game time. As described above, in the example shown in the case b1 of FIG. 46 (a), the jackpot lottery is won also in the second game time. The pachinko machine 10 executes a game-time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time, as an effect in the second game time. That is, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result notification effect (big hit notification) executed in the first game time are executed. In this case, the result notification effect (big hit notification) has a function as a part of the game time reproduction effect, and also has a function as a result notification about the big hit lottery in the second game time. Then, with the end of the game time reproduction effect, the second game time is ended.

  Since the jackpot lottery is won in the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state after the second game time is over. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. The specific start effect is executed as the opening effect in the special game state after that, when the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is a win and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time.

  The second embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following processing.

  When the jackpot lottery is won in the first game time, the same effect as the process executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 37: S2307) is performed in the first game time (in the present embodiment, a notice is given. Effects, reach effects, and result announcement effects) are stored. Note that the content to be stored is not limited to the effect itself executed in the first game time, and may be other information as long as the information can specify the effect executed in the first game time. That is, the effect executed in the first game time, such as the information indicating the type (pattern) of the effect executed in the first game time and the address information of the memory in which the effect executed in the first game time is stored. Information that can be called again.

  After storing the effect executed in the first game time, by the determination processing, the game time executed after the first game time and which is won in the jackpot lottery (second game time) is specified. Then, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect in the first game time stored are executed as the game time reproduction effect in the second game time. At that time, for example, by setting the variation times to be the same for all the game times that are won in the jackpot lottery, the reach effect and the result notification effect executed in the first game time can be changed to the second time. It can be executed within a variable time in the game game.

  If there is a preceding game time between the first game time and the second game time, the present embodiment is realized by executing a suggestion effect according to the variation time of each preceding game time. can do. In addition, when there are a plurality of preceding game times, a suggestive effect corresponding to each variable time may be executed in each preceding game time, for example, a preceding game time executed immediately before the second game time. The suggested effect may be executed only in, and the normal effect may be executed in the other preceding game times.

  Further, the number of preceding game times is not limited to one, and when a plurality of preceding game times are consecutively present between the first game time and the second game time, the first game time is regarded as the first game time. You may set the upper limit of the number of game times permitted as a preceding game time between the 2nd game times.

  FIG. 46 (b) is a time chart illustrating an example of a process when a plurality of preceding game times continuously exist between the first game time and the second game time. As shown in the figure, for example, when the number of preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out is 5 or less after winning the big hit lottery in the first game time (FIG. 46 (b )) After that, in the second game time that wins the jackpot lottery, the game time reproduction effect that reproduces the effect executed in the first game time is executed, and the preceding game time exists in a number of 6 times or more. (Not shown), after that, the game time reproduction effect may not be executed in the second game time in which the jackpot lottery is won. As the process, when the big hit lottery is won in the first game time, the same effect as the process executed in the first embodiment (FIG. 46: S2307) is performed in the first game time (this embodiment). In the above, the notice effect, the reach effect, and the result announcement effect are stored in the sound-light side RAM 94.

  In addition, when a preceding game time counter that counts the number of preceding game times between the first game time and the second game time is provided, and when determining the effect of the second game time to win the jackpot lottery, It is determined whether the counter value of the preceding game time counter is 5 or less or 6 or more. When the counter value is 5 or less, the effect executed in the first game time is read from the sound-light side RAM 94, and the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time. When the reproduction effect is executed and the counter value is 6 or more, the usual big jackpot effect is executed in the second game time. By doing so, the present embodiment can be realized even when there are a plurality of preceding game times. Further, the suggestive effect is executed in the preceding game time. Specifically, the preceding determination process determines the preceding game time immediately before the second game time, and determines to execute the suggestive effect in the preceding game time. Then, at the timing when the variation time of the preceding game time is determined, a suggestion effect corresponding to the variation time of the preceding game time is selected and executed. By doing so, it is possible to execute the game time reproduction effect even when a plurality of preceding game times continuously exist between the first game time and the second game time. it can. In this description, in the case where there are 6 or more preceding game times in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out of the preceding game times after the first game time in which the big hit lottery is won, , After that, the game number reproduction effect is not executed in the second game time to win the jackpot lottery, but the number of the preceding game times (threshold value) that is determined not to execute the game time reproduction effect is limited to six. No, it can be set to any number.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, another game is performed. By executing the suggestion effect in the game, the suggestion effect and the game time reproduction effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Further, even when there are a plurality of other game times (preceding game times) between the first game time and the second game time, a suggestive effect according to the variation time of each preceding game time is produced. By executing the game, the game time reproduction effect can be executed in the second game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

C. Third embodiment:
FIG. 48 is a time chart illustrating a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the third embodiment. In the third embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect, at least a part of the effect executed in the game time before the first game time (FIG. 48: first preceding game time) is reproduced. In addition, a case where at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced will be described. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case c1 and case c2, as an example.

  FIG. 48A shows, as a case c1, when the jackpot lottery is won in the first game round and is missed in the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round, the pachinko machine 10 is shown. Shows the processing executed by. As shown in the figure, before the first game time to win the big hit lottery, there is a first preceding game time where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), in case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game time and the first game time. In the present embodiment, the continuous effect is an effect that gives advance notice of winning the jackpot lottery in the first game time. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

  The result notification effect in the first preceding game time when executing the continuous effect will be described with reference to FIG. 47 described above. In the display area 41aS of the display surface 41a, variable display and stop display of symbols are executed. . Specifically, in the unit game time, the symbol display is changed during the variable time, and the symbol stop display is executed during the stop time. On the other hand, in the display area 41aL, continuous effects are executed. By doing so, a series of continuous effects can be executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a), after executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes a suggestion effect, a special game state reproduction effect, and a specific end effect during the ending period. In the present embodiment, as the special game state reproduction effect, a continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and a result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are reproduced and executed. To do. When the variable display and the stop display of the symbols are reproduced as the special game state reproduction effect, the contents of the symbol displayed on the display surface 41a during the execution of the special game state reproduction effect are actually displayed in the first game time. Some of the contents are different from the design.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the special game state reproduction effect and then executes the specific end effect. After that, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time. The jackpot lottery for the second game is out. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes a normal notice effect and a result notice effect (disappearance notice).

  Next, the case c2 shown in FIG. 48 (b) will be described. In the case c2, as in the case c1, before the first game time to win the big hit lottery, there is a first preceding game time in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out. Further, in the case c2, before the second game time to win the big hit lottery, there is a second preceding game time where the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out.

  Similarly to case c1, the pachinko machine 10 executes a series of continuous effects over the first preceding game time and the first game time. After executing the continuous effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes a result notification effect that notifies the player of the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. In the first game time, a big hit is announced as a result notice production.

  After executing the result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state.

  In case c2, the pachinko machine 10 executes only the suggestive effect during the ending period. Then, the game times reproduction effect is executed over the second preceding game times and the second game times. In case c2, as the game time reproduction effect, a continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time and a result notification effect (big hit notification) in the first game time are executed.

  After the end of the second game, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect in the opening effect in the special game state. After executing the specific start effect, the pachinko machine 10 executes the opening / closing execution mode and the ending effect. In the special game state after the second game, the normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  The third embodiment can be realized by, for example, the following specific processing.

  In the present embodiment, the RAM 96 always stores the effects executed in the four game times already executed. Then, each time a winning is generated in the first starting opening 33, the result of the jackpot lottery in the game times executed by the winning is grasped by the preceding determination process.

  As a result of the previous determination process, when it is determined that the result of the jackpot lottery of the first game time is a jackpot, the jackpot lottery of the first preceding game time, which is held one before the first game time, is held. When the result is out of order, the continuous effect is executed over the first preceding game time and the first game time.

  Then, when there are two or more holding game times after the first game time by the end of the first game time, the result of the jackpot lottery of the two game times is grasped by the prior determination processing, When the results of the big hit lottery of the two game times are both out of sequence, case c1 is executed. That is, the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect are executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the game number to be executed first is out of the two game times and the result of the jackpot lottery of the game number to be executed later is a jackpot, case c2 is executed. . That is, the suggestion effect is executed in the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time, and the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second preceding game time and the second game time.

  In case c2, if the second preceding game time does not exist, that is, if the jackpot lottery in the game time executed after the special game state after the first game time is a big hit, the second game time. In, the continuous effect executed from the first preceding game time to the first game time may be executed as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, when the variation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to reproduce all the continuous effects, only a part of the continuous effects may be reproduced.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 in the third embodiment, it is a case where the continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time. Also, as the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect, the continuous effects can be reproduced. Further, by using the processing of the case c1 and the processing of the case c2 together, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the continuous effect.

D. Fourth Embodiment:
FIG. 49 is a time chart illustrating a process executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment. In the fourth embodiment, the effect executed in the first game time in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is out is executed as a game time reproduction effect in the second game time executed after the first game time. In this description, the characteristics of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described by taking two cases, case d1 and case d2, as an example.

  FIG. 49 (a) shows a case d1 in which the pachinko machine 10 is out of the jackpot lottery in the first game round and wins the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. It shows the processing to be performed. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes a notice effect and a reach effect in the first game time. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 gives a notice of deviation in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the game time reproduction effect, and the result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggestion effect, an effect that suggests reproducing the effect executed in the first game time, and as a game time reproduction effect, a notice effect and a reach effect executed in the first game time. Perform the performance. Also, as a result notice production, a big hit notice is given.

  After executing the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 shifts the game state to the special game state. As shown in the figure, the pachinko machine 10 executes an opening effect, an opening / closing execution mode, and an ending effect in the special game state. The pachinko machine 10 executes a specific start effect as the opening effect. In addition, a normal ending effect is executed as the ending effect.

  Next, the case d2 will be described. Case d2 is, as shown in FIG. 49 (b), missed in the jackpot lottery in the first game round and further missed in the jackpot lottery in the second game round executed after the first game round. , The processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. As shown in the figure, in the first game time, a notice effect and a reach effect are executed. The reach effect performed in this case is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery. After executing the reach effect, the pachinko machine 10 gives a notice of deviation in the result notification effect.

  After executing the first game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the second game time. In the second game time, the pachinko machine 10 executes the suggestion effect, the game time reproduction effect, and the result notification effect. The pachinko machine 10 executes, as a suggestion effect, an effect that suggests reproducing the effect executed in the first game time, and as a game time reproduction effect, a notice effect and a reach effect executed in the first game time. Perform the performance. Also, as a result notice production, a notice of deviation is given.

  The fourth embodiment can be realized by, for example, the specific processing described below.

  Whether or not the jackpot lottery related to the suspended game number is held is determined by executing the previous determination process each time a prize is placed in the first starting opening 33. Then, when it is specified that the jackpot lottery in the game times held two or more ahead is won, the game times that are won in the jackpot lottery (corresponding to the second game times in case d1). The notice effect and the reach effect are executed in the game time (corresponding to the first game time) that is held immediately before, and the executed notice effect and the reach effect are stored. As described above, the information to be stored is not limited to the data of the executed notice effect and the reach effect itself, but may be other information as long as the executed notice effect and the reach effect can be read out again. Good.

  The pachinko machine 10 executes the reach effect in the first game time, and then performs the disengagement notification as the result notification effect. After that, in the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed, and the stored notice effect and reach effect are executed as the game time reproduction effect. Further, the specific start effect executed in the special game state after the second game time is realized by executing the same process as the opening effect setting process performed by the sound emission control device 90 in the first embodiment. be able to. The case d1 in the fourth embodiment can be realized by executing such processing.

  Further, the case d2 is executed first of the two reserved game times when there are two consecutive game times in which the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is missed by executing the destination determination process. It can be realized by executing a reach effect in a game time that is performed, and in a game time that is executed later, a suggestion effect and a notice effect and a reach effect that are executed in the previous game time as a game time reproduction effect. . In this case, in the second game time, the variation time of the second game time is shorter than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. In this case, for example, part or all of the notice effect executed as the game time reproduction effect may be omitted according to the variation time of the second game time.

  On the other hand, in the second game time, when the variation time of the second game time is longer than the time required to execute all of the notice effect and the reach effect in the first game time as the game time reproduction effect. For example, the execution time of the suggestive effect may be set to be long depending on the variation time of the second game time. Necessary for suggestion production and game time reproduction production by preparing multiple types of suggestion production corresponding to the time required for production and selecting the optimum suggestion production according to the variation time of the second game time. It is possible to make the variable time and the variation time of the second game time the same.

  As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 according to the fourth embodiment, the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won by executing the process of the case d1. Since the effect executed in the first game time in which the lottery result of the big hit lottery is out is executed in the second game time as the game time reproduction effect, the big hit lottery related to the second game time is won. It is difficult for players to anticipate that. In addition, before executing the game time reproduction effect, by executing the suggestion effect that suggests reproducing the effect in the first game time that is out of the jackpot lottery, the first game in the second game time. It is possible to further give the player the recognition that the effect executed in the game is only reproduced. Then, it is possible to let the player recognize that the big hit lottery related to the second game time has been won, only after the notification means notifies the lottery result of the big hit lottery related to the second game time, which is surprising to the game. It is possible to impart sex. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, by executing the processing of case d2, in addition to the case where the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is won, when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the second game time is missed, Since the game time reproduction effect is executed, it is possible to give the player recognition that the lottery result of the jackpot lottery related to the game times for which the game time reproduction effect is executed is not necessarily a jackpot. As a result, when the game times reproduction effect is executed, the player is given a feeling of emotion and feeling of expectation, and the player's attention to the game times in which the already executed effects are reproduced is improved. be able to.

E. FIG. Fifth embodiment (an example of effect type setting processing):
Next, as a fifth embodiment, an example of the processing executed in the effect type setting processing (FIG. 37: S2303) described in the first embodiment will be described. The effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect executed in the game time in the sound emission control device 90 (sound-light side MPU 92). In the present description, the outline of the effect type setting processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. After that, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 50 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of effect type setting processing. When the sound-light side MPU 92 starts the effect type setting process, the object A display pattern random number counter C11, the object B display pattern random number counter C12, and the object C display pattern random number counter are used to determine the content of the notice effect. A counter value is acquired at a predetermined timing from each random number counter of C13.

  Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a random number counter used to determine how to combine a plurality of object images forming the notice effect in each game time. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter value is updated at short intervals. Each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect at each game time is configured by combining three types of object images. The display pattern random number counter C11 for object A, the display pattern random number counter C12 for object B, and the display pattern random number counter C13 for object C are random numbers for determining the display modes of these three types of object images. In the effect type setting process, how to combine the three types of object images, the arrangement position on the display surface 41a, and the display timing are determined and set as the notice effect. Here, three types of object images forming the notice effect in the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 51 is an explanatory diagram showing an object A that is an object image forming the notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object A shows the behavior of a character expressing a person, and is composed of three images A1, A2, and A3. 51A shows the image A1, FIG. 51B shows the image A2, and FIG. 51C shows the image A3. The object A is an image that changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images A1, A2, and A3 in a predetermined order, that is, is displayed as a moving object image, and One of the images A1, A2, and A3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an object B that is an object image forming the notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object B shows how the weather changes, and is composed of three images, an image B1, an image B2, and an image B3. 52 (a) shows the image B1, FIG. 52 (b) shows the image B2, and FIG. 52 (c) shows the image B3. The object B is an image that changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images B1, B2, and B3 in a predetermined order, that is, a case where the object B is displayed as a moving object image, and One of the images B1, B2, and B3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an object C that is an object image forming the notice effect. As shown in the figure, the object C shows the behavior of the dog in the box, and is composed of three images C1, C2, and C3. 53 (a) shows the image C1, FIG. 53 (b) shows the image C2, and FIG. 53 (c) shows the image C3. The object C is an image that changes over time by displaying at least two images of the three images C1, C2, and C3 in a predetermined order, that is, a case where the object C is displayed as a moving object image, and One of the images C1, C2, and C3 may be displayed as a still image by being continuously displayed for a predetermined period.

  As described above, in the effect type setting process in the present embodiment, the notice effect is set by combining the three types of object images (objects A to C) described in FIGS.

  The description returns to FIG. When acquiring the counter values from the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table for object A, the display pattern table for object B, and the display pattern table for object C to refer to each display pattern random number counter. Collation with each counter value acquired from C11 to C13 is executed to determine the display pattern for each object.

  FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for object A as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for the object A has a big hit when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, a case where the result of the big hit lottery is a miss and a reach effect is executed ("out (reach) present"), and a big hit. It is divided into three cases where the result of the lottery is out and the reach effect is not executed (“out of reach (no reach)”. In each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter of 0 to 99 In this embodiment, as the display pattern of the object A, the pattern in which the object A is not displayed (non-display) and the pattern in which only the image A1 is displayed ( A1), a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying the image A1 and the image A2, and a pattern (A1-A2) for sequentially displaying the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3 ( 1-A2 over A3) and is set in advance.

  When setting the notice effect in a predetermined game time, the sound-light side MPU 92 confirms whether the game time corresponds to a jackpot, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). Then, in the display pattern table, the corresponding portion of the game time is referred to. For example, when the game number is a big hit, the “big hit” column of the display pattern table is referred to. Then, the display pattern is determined by collating with the acquired value of the display pattern random number counter C11.

  As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, the method of assigning a random number value to each display pattern is different in each of the cases of big hit, out (reach), and out (no reach). For example, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed when the jackpot is a big hit, when it is out (with reach), and when it is out (without reach). Is different from. That is, the display probability of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is higher in the order of big hit, out (with reach), and out (without reach). On the contrary, the probability that the display pattern (A1) is displayed is high in the order of out (no reach), out (reach), and jackpot. Therefore, in the notice effect at the game time, the probability of being a big hit is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2) is displayed than when only the display pattern (A1) is displayed, and the display pattern (A1-A2) It is set so that the probability of being a big hit is higher when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed than when is displayed. That is, the effect produced by the object A indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player by suggesting the probability of the jackpot of the game times, and the degree of expectation of the jackpot to the player (hereinafter, expectation level). (Also referred to as)).

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the objects A, B, and C is different in the method of allocating the value of the random number in each case of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). The jackpot expectations shown by the step-up effect of object A, the jackpot expectations shown by the step-up effect of object B, and the jackpot expectations shown by the step-up effect of object C are different from each other. For example, in the object B, the value of the display pattern random number in the display pattern for the object B is set so that it is not displayed in the game time when the object is out (without reach) and is displayed in the case of out (with reach) and jackpot. It may be distributed. Specifically, in the display pattern for the object B, when it is out (no reach), it can be realized by setting it to "non-display" in all cases of the display pattern random numbers 0 to 99. By doing so, the jackpot expectation degree indicated by the object A when the object B is not displayed and the jackpot expectation degree when the object A and the object B are displayed can be made different. That is, in each of the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C, by differently setting the method of allocating the random number values in the cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach), In addition to the step-up mode of each object image, the expectation level of the jackpot can be expressed by the presence or absence of the display of each object. By doing so, the degree of attention of the player to the object image can be improved.

  In the present embodiment, the display pattern table of each of the object A, the object B, and the object C is divided into three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach). However, for example, the jackpots in the display pattern table of the object B are further divided into 16R certainty jackpots, 8R certainty jackpots, 16R regular jackpots, and 8R regular jackpots, and the effect by the object B is expected to be certainty jackpots. You may make it function as a step-up production which shows a degree. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which there is a latent probability change state (a game state in which the player does not recognize that the lottery mode is the high probability mode), the effect by the object C is the expectation of the probability change state of the current game time. You may make it function as a step-up production which shows. In this way, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (eg, jackpot expectation or The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game such as the probability of the probability variation jackpot) may be indicated.

  As shown in FIG. 50, the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the display pattern for the object A, the object B, and the object C, and then arranges each object in order to display the combination on the display surface 41a. The position and the display timing of each object are set. Specifically, the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the arrangement position of each object and the display timing by referring to a preset arrangement / timing setting table.

  FIG. 55 is an explanatory diagram showing an arrangement / timing setting table. As shown in the drawing, the arrangement / timing setting table starts displaying on the display object determined to be displayed, the coordinates of the arrangement position on the display surface 41a of each displayed object, and the display surface 41a of each object. The timing and the timing are set in association with each other. The display pattern determined in the process using the random number counter is, for example, the display pattern (A1-A2) for the object A, the display pattern (non-display) for the object B, and the display pattern (C1-C2-) for the object C. In the case of C3), since the displayed objects are the object A and the object C, refer to “AC” in the left column of the arrangement / timing setting table. In this case, as shown in the middle column of the placement / timing setting table, the placement coordinates of the object A and the object C are such that the center coordinate of the object A is located at (Xa2, Ya2) on the display surface 41a for the object A. The object C is set so that the center coordinates of the object C are located at (Xc1, Yc1) on the display surface 41a. Further, in this case, as shown in the right column of the arrangement / timing setting table, the display of the object A starts ta2 seconds after the game time is started, and the display of the object C is started after the game time is started. The display is set to start after 1 second from tc.

  The coordinates indicating the arrangement of each object in the arrangement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the arrangement position (coordinates) of each object may be set to change with time. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is The arrangement and display start timing of the display objects are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so as not to overlap each other.

  In the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions of the objects are taken into consideration and the display surface 41a is associated with each other. In the arrangement / timing setting table, the arrangement of display objects (relative arrangement position between objects) and the display start timing (relative timing between objects) are set. Further, the arrangement and display start timing of the display objects in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so that the objects displayed in the same period on the display surface 41a do not overlap each other.

  FIG. 56 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of a notice effect in which a plurality of object images are combined. The example of FIG. 56 shows a case where the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 change with time. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 56 (a), FIG. 56 (b), and FIG. 56 (c). FIG. 56 shows a notice effect in which the object A, the object B, and the object C are combined, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is displayed for the object A, and the display pattern (B1-B2) is displayed for the object B. -B3) is displayed, and the notice pattern is set so that the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed for the object C.

  In the notice production shown in FIG. 56, a person walking on a sunny day finds a box, notices that there is a dog in the box while the weather is gradually bad, and tells a story of giving an umbrella to the dog. It is expressed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions of the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are related to each other. Further, the display object arrangement and the display start timing in the arrangement / timing setting table are set so that the display surface 41a is displayed in a narrative manner. By doing so, the notice effect executed by displaying a plurality of types of object images in the same period can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable, and has a narrative effect to improve the game. The interest can be improved.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (c), the object A is displayed on the display surface 41a without an image frame indicating the area of the object image. Specifically, the object A is composed of a layer image of an image frame and a layer image showing a character expressing a person, and a process of displaying only a layer image showing a character expressing a person. Is running. By doing so, the effect in which the plurality of object images are displayed can be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

  In FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed without displaying the image frame, but the image A1 displayed as the display pattern (A1-A2-A3), The image frames of part or all of the images A2 and A3 may not be displayed. Also, similar processing may be executed for other object images.

  In this way, the sound-light side MPU 92 sets the arrangement position of each object and the display timing of each object, and sets the notice effect.

  Next, the effect type setting process described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the effect type setting process. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 37: S2303) of the effect setting process.

  In step S3201, each counter value is acquired from each of the display pattern random number counters C11 to C13. After that, the process advances to step S3202, and it is confirmed whether the game time for which the notice effect is set is a big hit, a miss (with reach), or a miss (without reach). After executing step S3202, the process proceeds to step S3203.

  In step S3203, the display pattern of each object is determined by referring to each display pattern table for the objects A to C. Then, it progresses to step S3204.

  In step S3204, when the display pattern is set for each object, it is determined whether or not the object is displayed in the notice effect of the game time. That is, it is determined whether or not the display patterns of all the objects A to C are “non-display”.

  When it is determined in step S3204 that the object display is not absent (non-display) in the notice effect at the game time (S3204: NO), the process proceeds to step S3205, and the layout / timing setting table is referred to and displayed. The coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the timing of starting the display on the display surface 41a are determined. Then, it progresses to step S3206.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3204 that the object display is not present (non-display) in the notice effect of the game time (S3204: YES), the process proceeds to step S3206 without executing step S3205.

  In step S3206, a notice effect is set. Specifically, the determined display object, the coordinates of the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a, and the timing of starting the display of each object are set as the notice effect at the game time. Then, it progresses to step S3207.

  In step S3207, it is determined whether or not the game time is a big hit or a miss (reach is present). That is, it is determined whether or not the reach effect is executed after the notice effect is executed in the game time.

  When it is determined in step S3207 that the game times are a big hit or a miss (reach is present) (S3207: YES), the process proceeds to step S3208, and reach effect setting processing is executed. Then, it progresses to step S3209.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3207 that the game times are not the big hit or the miss (reach is present) (S3207: NO), the process proceeds to step S3209 without executing step S3208.

  In step S3209, the notice effect and the reach effect set in steps S3206 and S3208 are set as effect commands. After that, the setting process of the effect type ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the objects are displayed as the notice effect in the same period, they are displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, so that the objects are the same. The effect executed by being displayed during the period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, each object may be displayed in the same period as other objects, or may not be displayed in the same period (that is, each object may be displayed alone). The effect can be executed and the object can be effectively used.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 56, when a plurality of object images are displayed in the same period, the respective object images are displayed in a mode having a story related to each other, so that the plurality of object images are displayed in the same period. The effect executed by being displayed on the player can be made to be an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect executed by displaying a plurality of object images in the same period has a narrative effect, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C are different in the way of allocating the random numbers in the cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game and the degree of expectation of the jackpot, which are shown by the step-up effect by the object images of the objects A, B, and C, are different. That is, even when each object is displayed, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game is different depending on whether or not other objects are also displayed in the same period. Therefore, the degree of interest of the player to the effect, the degree of interest, Expectations can be improved.

  Furthermore, as described above, in the present embodiment, depending on the setting mode of the display pattern table, for example, the jackpots in the display pattern table of the object B are classified into 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R normal jackpot, 8R normal jackpot. By classifying into the jackpot, the effect by the object B can be made to function as a step-up effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the probability variation jackpot. That is, the effect by each object can be made to function as an effect indicating the degree of advantage or disadvantage of different types of games. Therefore, each object can be used to suggest the degree of advantage or disadvantage of various types of games.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the respective object images are displayed in the same period, the relative positions of the objects are displayed on the display surface 41a at predetermined arrangement positions. A plurality of objects displayed on the display surface 41a during the same period are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Specifically, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the arrangement and timing are set so that the objects are related to each other. Arrangement of display objects in the setting table and timing of display start are set. Further, the display object arrangement and the display start timing are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so that the objects displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period do not overlap each other. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying a plurality of objects in the same period does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved. In addition, since each object image may be displayed in the same period or may not be displayed in the same period (that is, each object may be displayed alone), a plurality of effects are executed using each object image. Therefore, the object image can be effectively used.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55, for example, the object A includes the display pattern (A1), the display pattern (A1-A2), and the display pattern (A1-A2-A3). ) May be displayed in three different display modes. Corresponding to each display mode, relative positions with respect to other object images (object B, object C) are displayed on the display surface 41a in a predetermined arrangement. Therefore, various effects using each object image can be executed. Further, according to each of a plurality of different display modes (display patterns), the relative position between the object images is displayed on the display surface 41a at a predetermined arrangement position. The images are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, the various effects executed by displaying each object image in the same period do not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effects can be improved.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 55, the timing for starting display of each object on the display surface 41a is set in advance by the arrangement / timing setting table. Therefore, when each object image is displayed in the same period, each object image is displayed at a predetermined timing relatively, so that each object image is displayed at a timing having no relation to each other. Never. Therefore, the effect performed by displaying each object image in the same period does not give a complicated impression to the player, and the quality of the effect can be further improved.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, since each object image is an image that changes with time (a moving image in the present embodiment), various effects can be performed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the probability of being a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object A is displayed as the notice effect, the probability of being a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when the object B is displayed as the notice effect, and the object C. The probability of being a jackpot in the jackpot lottery when is displayed as a notice effect is different from each other. Further, the jackpot probability in the jackpot lottery when the object images are combined and displayed as the notice effect is also different. By doing so, the degree of attention of the player to the object image can be improved.

F. Sixth embodiment (another example of effect type setting processing):
Next, as the sixth embodiment, another example of the effect type setting process (FIG. 37: S2303) will be described. As described above, the effect type setting process is a process of setting the content of the effect to be executed in the game game in the sound emission control device 90 (sound light side MPU 92). In the present description, the outline of the effect type setting processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 in the present embodiment will be described first. After that, the details of the process will be described using a flowchart.

  FIG. 58 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the outline of the effect type setting processing in the sixth embodiment. The difference between the present embodiment and the fifth embodiment described above is the method of determining the type of object to be displayed as the notice effect. In the fifth embodiment, the combination of objects displayed in the notice effect is determined by the display pattern random number and the display pattern table prepared for each object.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, a plurality of combinations of objects to be displayed in the notice effect are preset by the display object table, and the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires the counter value from the display object random number counter C21 and displays it. By comparing with the object table, the combination of objects to be displayed in the notice presentation is determined.

  Further, in the fifth embodiment, the arrangement position and the display start timing of the object displayed in the notice effect are determined by the arrangement / timing setting table. The arrangement position of each object and the display start timing are set in advance corresponding to the display pattern. The details will be described below.

  Upon starting the effect type setting processing, the sound-light side MPU 92 acquires a counter value from the display object random number counter C21 at a predetermined timing. The display object random number counter C21 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display object random number counter C21 is configured to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value, returns to 0.

  After acquiring the counter value from the display object random number counter C21, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display object table, executes the matching with the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21, and displays the object to be displayed in the notice effect. Determine the combination.

  FIG. 59 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the display object table. As illustrated, in the display object table, a combination of the counter value of the display object random number counter C21 and each object displayed as the notice effect is set in association with each other. For example, when the value of the acquired display object random number counter C21 is 75, the objects A and C are set as the object images displayed in the notice effect. The display object table in the present embodiment is different in the method of allocating the value of the display object random number (the number of values to be allocated) to the combination of each object displayed as the notice effect. For example, the value of the display object random number when only the object A is displayed as the display object is 0 to 19, and 20 values are assigned. When the object A and the object B are displayed, the value of the display object random number is 60 to 71, and 12 values are assigned. When the object A, the object B, and the object C are displayed, the display object random number values are 96 to 99, and four values are assigned. As described above, the number of display object random numbers assigned to each combination of objects is different, so that the frequency of displaying each combination of objects as a notice effect is different.

  The description returns to FIG. 58. After determining the combination of objects to be displayed in the notice effect, the sound-light side MPU 92 next acquires a counter value from the display pattern random number counter C22 at a predetermined timing. The display pattern random number counter C22 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value each time it is updated, and the counter returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter value is updated at short intervals. The display pattern random number counter C22 is configured so that it is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 99, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  After acquiring the counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the display pattern table corresponding to the previously determined combination of display objects, and collates with the acquired counter value of the display pattern random number counter C22. Is executed to determine the display pattern corresponding to the combination of the display objects. In FIG. 58, the case where it is determined that the object A and the object C are displayed as the combination of the objects displayed in the notice effect by the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table is shown. In this case, the sound-light side MPU 92 refers to the AC display pattern table as the display pattern table.

  FIG. 60 is an explanatory diagram showing an AC display pattern table as an example of the display pattern table. As shown in the figure, the AC display pattern table is divided into three cases, that is, a big hit, out (with reach), and out (without reach). Then, for each case, the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 and the display pattern of the effect using the objects A and C are set in association with each other.

  In the present embodiment, as a display pattern using the object A and the object C, a pattern in which neither the object A nor the object C is displayed (non-display), the image A1 of the object A and the image C1 of the object C are combined. The pattern (A1 / C1) to be displayed, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are displayed in order, and the pattern C1 and the image C2 of the object C are displayed (A1-A2 / C1-C2), the image of the object A. A display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) that sequentially displays A1 and the image A2 and sequentially displays the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3 of the object C is set. Further, in the present embodiment, the arrangement position of each object on the display surface 41a and the display start timing are set in advance for each display pattern, and the display pattern is determined to determine each object in the notice effect. The arrangement position and the display start timing are determined.

  For example, when the game number is a big hit and it is determined that the display object random number counter C21 and the display object table display the object A and the object C as a combination of the objects displayed in the notice effect. In, when the counter value acquired by the display pattern random number counter C22 is "62", the display pattern of the notice effect is determined to be (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  FIG. 61 is an explanatory diagram showing a notice effect when a display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3) is set as an example of the display pattern. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 61 (a), FIG. 61 (b), and 54 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice effect, the image A1 and the image A2 of the object A are displayed in order on the display surface 41a, and the image C1 and the image C2 of the object C are displayed in order. As described above, in the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3), the arrangement positions of the images A1 and A2 of the object A and the display start timing, the images C1, C2, and C3 of the object C are displayed. Since the arrangement position and the display start timing are set in advance, the mode of the notice effect is determined by determining the display pattern (A1-A2 / C1-C2-C3).

  Although the display pattern table for AC has been described with reference to FIG. 60, a display pattern table is prepared for each combination of objects. Further, a plurality of types of display patterns are set for each display pattern table by combining the images of the objects.

  FIG. 62 is an explanatory diagram showing a display pattern table for A. In the case of the display pattern table for A, in the three cases of jackpot, out (with reach) and out (without reach), non-display, display pattern (A1), display pattern (A1-A2), display pattern (A1) -A2-A3) (see FIG. 51) are assigned to four display patterns. As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for A is out (without reach), the display pattern (A1) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and when there is out (with reach) Among the above four display patterns, the display pattern (A1-A2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the above display pattern (A1-A2-A3) is the most frequently displayed. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency of display is high. By allocating the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player is more likely to be when the image A2 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image A1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is higher, and the image A3 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than the image A2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Expectations for winning increase.

  Next, the B display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 63 is an explanatory diagram showing a B display pattern table. In the case of the B display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach), non-display, display pattern (B1-B2-B3), display pattern (B1-B2), Four display patterns of display pattern (B1) (see FIG. 52) are assigned. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for B has the highest frequency of display of the display patterns (B1-B2-B3) among the above-mentioned four display patterns when it is out (no reach), and is out of reach (reach). Yes), the display pattern (B1-B2) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (B1) among the above four display patterns is the most frequent. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency of display is high. That is, by allocating the value of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, unlike the above-described notice effect by the object A, the player is more likely than when the image B1 is displayed on the display surface 41a, after that. When the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lowered, and after that, the image B2 is displayed on the display surface 41a after the image B1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When the image B3 is displayed, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery is lower.

  Next, the C display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 64 is an explanatory diagram showing a C display pattern table. In the case of the C display pattern table, in the three cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (no reach), non-display, display pattern (C1), display pattern (C1-C2), and display pattern (C1), respectively. -C2-C3) (see FIG. 53) are assigned to four display patterns. As shown in the figure, the display pattern (C1) is most frequently displayed out of the above four display patterns in the case of the out (no reach), and the above four display patterns in the case of the out (reach). Of the patterns, the display pattern (C1-C2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. As described above, the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned. By allocating the values of the display pattern random number counter C22 in this way, the player is more likely to play the image C2 on the display surface 41a later than the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. However, the expectation for winning the jackpot lottery increases, and when the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a later than when the image C2 is displayed after the image C1 on the display surface 41a, the jackpot lottery is selected. Expectations for winning increase.

  Next, the AB display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 65 is an explanatory diagram showing an AB display pattern table. In the case of the AB display pattern table, the non-display, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3), and the display pattern (A1) are respectively set in three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). -A2-A3 / B1) and display patterns (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) are assigned. As shown in the figure, the AB display pattern table has the highest frequency of display of the display patterns (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) among the above-mentioned four display patterns in the case of deviation (no reach). , The display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) out of the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed in the case of deviation (with reach), and the display pattern among the four display patterns in the case of a big hit. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is most frequently displayed.

  FIG. 66 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 66 (a), FIG. 66 (b), and FIG. 66 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice presentation expresses a situation in which a walking person gets wet while the weather changes from sunny, cloudy, and rain.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 66 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and a bad impression is generally given. Since it is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 66 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy is expressed in the image. In general, the image shown in FIG. 66 (a) is not good enough to be compared with the image shown in FIG. 66 (a). Gives unrecognizable recognition. When an image composed of the image A2 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 66 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who gets wet with rain is expressed in the image, which generally gives a bad impression. It gives the player an unfavorable perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect with the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) changes the recognition of the game situation to the disadvantageous recognition for the player as the notice effect is displayed.

  FIG. 67 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 67 (a), FIG. 67 (b), and FIG. 67 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice production expresses that the walking person notices that it is sunny and puts an umbrella to prevent sunburn.

  When the image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67A is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and a bad impression is generally given. Since it is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who has noticed that it is sunny is expressed in the image, and the image also includes Similar to the image in FIG. 67 (a), generally, a bad impression is not given, and therefore, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 67C is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who puts an umbrella to prevent sunburn is expressed in the image, which is generally bad. It does not give an impression and gives a not-unfavorable perception of the game situation. That is, the advance notice effect with the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1) gives the player a recognition that it is difficult to determine whether the situation of the game is advantageous or disadvantageous, even if the advance notice display is advanced.

  FIG. 68 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) is set by the AB display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 68 (a), FIG. 68 (b), and FIG. 68 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice production, while the weather changed from sunny to cloudy and rainy, the walking person noticed the change in weather, put an umbrella, and could respond appropriately to the deterioration of weather. Is expressed.

  When an image composed of the image A1 and the image B1 shown in FIG. 68 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person walking on a sunny day is represented in the image, and a bad impression is generally given. Since it is not given, the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation. Thereafter, when an image composed of the image A2 and the image B2 shown in FIG. 68 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a state in which the person notices that the weather has changed from sunny to cloudy is expressed in the image. In general, the image shown in FIG. 68 (a) is not good enough to be compared with the image shown in FIG. 68 (a). Gives recognition that can not be said. Then, when an image composed of the image A3 and the image B3 shown in FIG. 68 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person who can appropriately respond to the bad weather with an umbrella is represented in the image. It has been done and generally gives a good impression and gives a good perception of the playing situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) gives the player in the image of FIG. 68 (a) a recognition that is not disadvantageous regarding the game situation, and then, In the image of FIG. 68 (b), the player is given an unfavorable recognition of the game situation, and then in the image of FIG. 68 (c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. . By displaying such a notice effect, the player's expectation for the game can be changed.

  As shown in FIGS. 66, 67, and 68, the effect set by the AB display pattern table causes the player to recognize that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous as the notice effect advances. Is configured to give. Particularly, when the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 66 and the notice effect by (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3) described in FIG. 68 are compared. 66 (a) and FIG. 68 (a) are the same image, and FIG. 66 (b) and FIG. 68 (b) are the same image. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to which of the notice effect shown in FIG. 66 and the notice effect shown in FIG. 68 is changed. More specifically, a person who is aware of a change in weather can give the player a sense of urgency with respect to a change such as whether or not to finally hold an umbrella, and the player's attention to the notice production It is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Next, the BC display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 69 is an explanatory diagram showing a BC display pattern table. In the case of the BC display pattern table, the non-display, the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3), and the display pattern (B2-B3) are respectively set in three cases of jackpot, out (reach) and out (no reach). / C1-C3) and four display patterns (B1 / C1-C2-C3). As shown in the figure, when the display pattern table for BC is out (without reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, In the case of (with reach), the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) of the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (of the above four display patterns ( The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is most frequently displayed.

  FIG. 70 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 70 (a), FIG. 70 (b), and FIG. 70 (c). As shown in the figure, in the notice production, the weather changes from cloudy to rain, while the dog appears in the box and the dog gets wet.

  When an image composed of the image B2 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the cloud, and generally, Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. Then, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 70 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain. The image also does not give the player any disadvantageous perception about the game situation. However, after that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 70C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the dog having a large face out of the box gets wet with rain. Is given, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player a disadvantageous perception of the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) gives the player a disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation when the image of FIG. 70 (c) is displayed.

  FIG. 71 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 71 (a), FIG. 71 (b), and FIG. 71 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses that the weather is changing from cloudy to rain and the box is placed in such weather.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a state in which a box is placed in the cloud is expressed in the image, and in general, Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the rain. The image also does not give the player any disadvantageous perception about the game situation. When an image composed of the image B3 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 71 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image has not changed from the image in FIG. 71 (b), and the image is also a game. It does not give any disadvantageous recognition to the player about the game situation. In this way, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1) does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 72 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the BC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 72 (a), FIG. 72 (b), and FIG. 72 (c). As shown in the figure, the advance notice effect expresses the appearance of a dog in the box on a sunny day.

  When an image composed of the image B1 and the image C1 shown in FIG. 72 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that a box is placed in the clear, and generally, Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image including the image B1 and the image C2 shown in FIG. 72B is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the dog appears in the box in the sunny weather. Therefore, as compared with FIG. 72 (a), the player is given more advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. When the notice effect based on the display pattern table for C of FIG. 64 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 and the image C3 is higher in the jackpot lottery, and therefore, in FIG. Also in the notice effect by the objects B and C shown, when the image advances from FIG. 72 (a) to FIG. 72 (b), the image of the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2, so that the player is informed. On the other hand, it gives an advantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image including the image B1 and the image C3 shown in FIG. 72C is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows that the dog makes a big face in the box in the sunny weather. Since, in general, a good impression is given, the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. As described above, the effect by the display pattern (B1 / C1-C2-C3) is similar to the notice effect by the C display pattern table of FIG. 64, the object C changes from the image C1 to the image C2, the image C3, and Since an image that gives a bad impression is not displayed, it is possible to give the player an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game as the notice effect is advanced.

  Here, of the effects set by the BC display pattern table, the notice effect by the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1-C3) shown in FIG. 70 and the display pattern (B2-B3 / C1) shown in FIG. A comparison with the notice effect by C3) will be described.

  The two preliminary announcement effects are the same image up to an intermediate image. Specifically, FIG. 70 (a) and FIG. 71 (a) are the same image, and FIG. 70 (b) and FIG. 71 (b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of these two notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed thereafter, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two notice effects. The image of FIG. 70 (c) is an image in which the image C3 is combined with the image B3, and the image of a dog that gets wet with rain is an image that generally gives a bad impression. Therefore, the situation of the game to the player. Give a disadvantageous perception about. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 71 (c) is an image in which the image C1 is combined with the image B3, and the image in which the box is placed in the rain does not give a bad impression to the player. On the other hand, it does not give a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. In other words, when the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed and then the image C1 changes to the image C3, the image is as shown in FIG. Against the game situation, on the other hand, in the state where the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined is displayed, after that, when the image C1 does not change, Since the image is shown in FIG. 71 (c), it does not give a disadvantageous recognition to the player about the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 70 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 71 and displaying the image in which the image B2 and the image C1 are combined, it is possible to determine whether or not the image C1 changes to the image C3. It is possible to attract the attention of the player and give the player a sense of urgency.

  In the notice effect by the display pattern table for C of FIG. 64, when the image of the object C is displayed without being combined with the image B3, the image C3 is displayed more than when the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. When is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player is given a better recognition of the game situation. Specifically, an image that shows the appearance of a dog in the box generally gives a better impression than an image that shows the state that the box is placed, The player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, when the notice effect based on the C display pattern table of FIG. 64 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image C1 to the image C2 or the image C3 is high in the jackpot lottery, and thus the image Regarding the situation of the game to the player, the case where the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3 is more than the case where the image C3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image B3. Give a positive recognition.

  However, when the image B3 is combined with the images C1 and C3 and the image C1 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image B3 (FIG. 71 (c)), the image C3 is smaller. This gives the player more favorable recognition of the game situation than the case where the image is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image B1 (FIG. 70 (c)).

  That is, when the image B3 (the image of rain) is not combined with each of the images C1 and C3, the image C3 (in the box) is displayed more than when the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Although the image of the dog) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image B3 (the image of the rain) is added to each of the image C1 and the image C3, although the player is more likely to recognize the game situation. ), The case where the image C1 (the image of the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a is better than the case where the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed on the display surface 41a. Gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation.

  Therefore, the player can be given various kinds of recognition about the game situation depending on how the images are combined. In the case of the present embodiment, when a predetermined image is combined with the effect image that is stepped up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation is higher, the player recognizes a completely different recognition of the game situation. Can be given to. Whether or not the player recognizes the image C1 (the image of the box) or the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) displayed on the display surface 41a, whether or not the image B3 (the image of the rain) is displayed Recognize that the game situation is different depending on. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the image displayed on the display surface 41a.

  Further, as described in the C display pattern table of FIG. 64, in the case of the present embodiment, the image C3 (image of the box) is displayed more than the image C3 (image of the rain) without being combined with the image B3 (image of the rain). When the image of the dog in the box) is displayed without being combined with the image B3 (image of rain), the image C1 (image of the box) is displayed although the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher. The case of displaying in combination with the image B3 (image of rain) wins the jackpot lottery than the case of displaying the image C3 (image of the dog in the box) in combination with the image B3 (image of rain). There is a high probability that Therefore, when the object C or a part of the image such as the image C1 (the image of the box) and the image C3 (the image of the dog in the box) is displayed, whether the image B3 (the image of the rain) is displayed or not is displayed. It is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player.

  In general, the effect image in which the higher the step-up (for example, the more the effect image progresses in the order of the image P1 → the image P2 → the image P3), the higher the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is the image P2 than the image P1 and the image P2. P3 is configured so as to be an image that gives a good impression to the player. That is, in the images P1, P2, and P3, the order in which the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is high and the order in which the impression given to the player is good or bad are aligned. With such a configuration, the player's expectation can be improved as the effect image is stepped up (progressed). Displaying [Image P1 + Image Q], [Image P2 + Image Q], [Image P3 + Image Q] by combining another image (for example, image Q) with such a normal effect image. Even so, the [image P2 + image Q] rather than the [image P1 + image Q] and the [image P3 + image Q] than the [image P2 + image Q] are images that give a better impression to the player. Is composed of. That is, when the image P3 gives a better impression to the player than the image P2, even if the images Q are simply combined, the [image P2 + image Q] is given to the player more than the [image P3 + image Q]. It is difficult to make an image that gives a good impression. In the present embodiment, such a problem is solved by devising the content of the image displayed as the effect image to be stepped up and the content of the combined image. In the present embodiment, the images Q are combined although the images P3 give a better impression to the player than the images P2 by devising the contents of the images P1, P2, P3 and Q. In this case, the [image P2 + image Q] can give a better impression to the player than the [image P3 + image Q].

  By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect that gives the player the following recognition. That is, in the effect image that is not combined with the image Q, it is recognized that the game situation is more advantageous as the image P1 → image P2 → image P3 progresses, and in the effect image combined with the image Q, [image P1 + image It becomes possible to give recognition that the situation of the game is disadvantageous as the progress proceeds from [Q] → [image P2 + image Q] → [image P3 + image Q].

  FIG. 73 is an explanatory diagram showing an ABC display pattern table. In the case of the ABC display pattern table, the non-display and the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are provided for each of the three cases of jackpot, out (reach), and out (no reach). ), Display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3), and display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) are assigned. There is. As shown in the figure, the display pattern table for ABC has the most display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) among the above-mentioned four display patterns when it is out (no reach). Often displayed, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) among the above four display patterns is the most frequently displayed and the jackpot. In the case of, the display pattern of 0 to 99 is selected so that the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) among the above four display patterns is most frequently displayed. The value of the random number counter C22 is assigned.

  Next, the AC display pattern table will be described.

  FIG. 74 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 74 (a), FIG. 74 (b), and FIG. 74 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice production expresses how a walking person and a dog with a face out of the box get wet when the weather changes from sunny, cloudy, and rain. There is.

  When the image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 74 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a box are represented in the image in the clear, and generally, Since it does not give a bad impression, it does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. After that, when an image including the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 74 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the weather changes from fine to cloudy, and the person changes the weather. In addition to the fact that the dog appears slightly from the inside of the box, the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. However, after that, when an image including the image A2, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 74 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the person who notices the change in weather and the inside of the box are included in the image. It expresses that a dog with a big face on it gets wet with rain, which generally gives a bad impression and gives the player a disadvantageous perception about the game situation. That is, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives an intonation to the player's expectation of the game and, at the end of the notice effect, gives the player , Give a disadvantageous perception about the game situation.

  FIG. 75 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 75 (a), FIG. 75 (b), and FIG. 75 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice effect expresses a person who notices the change in the weather and the appearance of a dog in the box while the weather changes from sunny to cloudy.

  When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 75 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking in sunny weather and a box. Is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so that the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 75 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices the change of the weather in the weather changing from fine to cloudy. A person and the appearance of a dog slightly appearing in the box are expressed, and the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. Then, when the image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 75 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a person and a dog with a large face out of the box are expressed in the cloudy weather. , The image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. In this way, the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2 / C1-C2-C3) does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  FIG. 76 is an explanatory diagram showing the notice effect when the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) is set by the ABC display pattern table. The notice effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 76 (a), FIG. 76 (b), and FIG. 76 (c). As shown in the figure, the notice production expresses that a walking person notices the change in weather as the weather changes from sunny, cloudy, and rain, and puts an umbrella on the dog out of the box. Has been done.

  When an image composed of the image A1, the image B1, and the image C1 shown in FIG. 76 (a) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image shows a person walking in the clear weather and a box. Is expressed, and generally does not give a bad impression, so that the player is not given a disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. After that, when an image composed of the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 shown in FIG. 76 (b) is displayed on the display surface 41a, the image notices the change in the weather in the weather changing from fine to cloudy. A person and the appearance of a dog slightly appearing in the box are expressed, and the image does not give the player any disadvantageous recognition of the game situation. Then, when an image consisting of the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 shown in FIG. 76 (c) is displayed on the display surface 41a, a dog with a large face out of the box in the rain and an umbrella for the dog are displayed. The person to be mentioned is expressed, and since the image gives a moving impression in general, it gives the player an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation. In this way, the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) gives the player an advantageous recognition regarding the game situation.

  Here, among the effects set by the ABC display pattern table, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 74 and the effect shown in FIG. A comparison with the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) will be described.

  The two preliminary announcement effects are the same image up to an intermediate image. Specifically, FIG. 74 (a) and FIG. 76 (a) are the same image, and FIG. 74 (b) and FIG. 76 (b) are the same image. Therefore, regardless of which of these two notice effects is displayed, the recognition of the game situation given to the player is the same until the middle. However, depending on the image displayed thereafter, the recognition of the game situation given to the player greatly differs between the two notice effects. The image in FIG. 74 (c) is an image in which the image A2, the image B3, and the image B3 are combined, and the image in which the person and the dog get wet with rain is an image that generally gives a bad impression. On the other hand, it gives a disadvantageous recognition about the game situation. On the other hand, the image in FIG. 76 (c) is an image in which the image A3, the image B3, and the image C3 are combined, and an image in which a person puts an umbrella in the rain to prevent the dog from getting wet with the rain. Is an image that gives a good impression, and therefore gives the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. In other words, in the state where the image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined is displayed, when the image A2 does not change thereafter, the image is as shown in FIG. 74 (c). , The player is given an unfavorable recognition of the game situation, while the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are displayed, and then the image A2 is changed to the image A3. When it changes to, since the image is as shown in FIG. 76 (c), the player is given an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, by executing the notice effect shown in FIG. 74 or the notice effect shown in FIG. 76 and displaying an image in which the image A2, the image B2, and the image C2 are combined, whether the image A2 changes to the image A3 or not. It is possible to attract the attention of the player in this respect and to give the player a sense of urgency.

  Further, the notice effect by the display pattern (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) shown in FIG. 76 has the following characteristics.

  In the notice effect by the display pattern table for B of FIG. 63 described above, it is expressed that the weather is getting worse as the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3 and the effect image progress, so that the effect image progresses. As it does, it gives a disadvantageous recognition to the player about the game situation. When the notice effect based on the B display pattern table of FIG. 63 is set, the probability that the notice effect changes from the image B1 to the image B2 and the image B3 is set to be low in the jackpot lottery. Therefore, as the image B1, the image B2, the image B3 and the effect image progress, the player is further disadvantageously recognized about the game situation. That is, the object B gives a disadvantageous recognition to the player by advancing the images in the order of the image B1, the image B2, and the image B3.

  However, the object B is combined with the object A whose image progresses in the order of the image A1, the image A2, and the image A3, and the object C whose image progresses in the order of the image C1, the image C2, and the image C3, and the display pattern (A1-A2- By displaying as A3 / B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3), it is possible to change the effect image to the content that gives the player an impression, and it is advantageous for the player about the game situation. The image can be changed to give recognition. As described above, the images configured as the object A, the object B, and the object C in the present embodiment are displayed as one object and in combination with other objects by devising the content of the image. In some cases, it is possible to greatly change the impression given by the image, and it is possible to greatly change the recognition of the game situation given to the player.

  In the present embodiment, the notice effect by the object A, the object B, and the object C, or the notice effect composed of the combination thereof is used as an effect that suggests whether or not the jackpot lottery is won. That is, although these notice effects are used as effects that show the expectation degree of the jackpot, they may be used as effects that show the expectation degree of the probability variation jackpot or the expectation degree of being in the probability variation state to the player. Even in this case, similarly to the present embodiment, it is possible to give the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous or disadvantageous depending on how the images of the respective objects are combined.

  Next, the effect type setting processing in the sixth embodiment described above will be described with reference to a flowchart.

  FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing the effect type setting process in the sixth embodiment. The effect type setting process is executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a sub-routine (FIG. 37: S2303) of the effect setting process.

  In step S3301, the counter value is acquired from the display object random number counter C21. After that, the process advances to step S3302, the display object table is referred to, the acquired counter value of the display object random number counter C21 is compared, and the combination of objects to be displayed as the notice effect is determined. After executing step S3302, the process proceeds to step S3303.

  In step S3303, the counter value is acquired from the display pattern random number counter C22. After that, the process advances to step S3304, and it is confirmed whether the game times for which the notice effect is to be set are jackpot, miss (reach), or miss (no reach). After executing step S3304, the process advances to step S3305.

  In step S3305, the display pattern table corresponding to the combination of the objects to be displayed as the notice effect is referred to, the acquired display pattern random number counter C22 is compared, and the display pattern is determined. After that, the process advances to step S3306 to set the determined display pattern as a notice effect. After executing step S3306, the process advances to step S3307.

  In step S3307, it is determined whether or not the game number is a big hit. When it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is a big hit (S3307: YES), the process proceeds to step S3308.

  In step S3308, it is determined whether or not the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S3306 is a full display pattern. Here, the full display pattern is three combinations of objects displayed as the notice effect, that is, object A, object B, and object C, and the display pattern is (A1-A2-A3 / B1-B2-). B3 / C1-C2-C3). That is, it means the display pattern shown in FIG. When it is determined in step S3308 that the set display pattern of the notice effect is the full display pattern (S3308: YES), the process proceeds to step S3309.

  In step S3309, as the reach effect setting processing, the reach effect executed after the notice effect of the full display pattern is set to the sequel effect representing the sequel of the effect expressed in the full display pattern.

  FIG. 78 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a sequel effect executed as a reach effect. The sequel effect is displayed on the display surface 41a in the order of FIG. 78 (a), FIG. 78 (b), and FIG. 78 (c). As illustrated, the sequel effect is an effect in which a person walks in the rain with a dog under his umbrella. By executing such a sequel effect, it is possible to show the player that the probability of being a big hit is high, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation.

  The description returns to FIG. 77. In step S3309, after setting the sequel effect as the reach effect, the process proceeds to step S3310.

  When it is determined in step S3307 that the game number is not a big hit (S3307: NO), the process proceeds to step S3311.

  In step S3311, it is determined whether or not the game time is a reach, that is, whether or not it is out (reach is present). When it is determined in step S3311 that the game time is reach (S3311: YES), or when it is determined that the display pattern of the notice effect set in step S3308 is not the full display pattern (S3308: NO), Proceeds to step S3312.

  In step S3312, a normal reach effect is set as the reach effect setting process. Then, it progresses to step S3310.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3311 that the game time is not reach (S3311: NO), step S3312 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S3310.

  In step S3310, the notice effect set in step S3306 and the reach effect set in step S3309 are set as effect commands. After that, the effect type setting process ends.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to change the recognition of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation given to the player depending on how the objects are combined, so that various effects using each object are executed. It is possible to effectively use each object image. For example, even when the object A is displayed, there is an advantage about the situation of the game given to the player depending on how the object A is combined with another object or whether it is displayed in the same period as the other object. Since the recognition of disadvantages is different, it is possible to execute various effects using each object image, and each object image can be effectively used. Also, for each of the various display patterns consisting of a combination of each object image, since the probability of winning the jackpot lottery when the display pattern is displayed is different, the degree of attention of the player to the effect constituted by each display pattern, It is possible to improve interest level and expectation.

  Furthermore, when combining and displaying each object image, a display pattern in which the relative arrangement position of each object is changed according to the game situation (for example, jackpot, out (reach), out (no reach)) Thus, by adjusting the arrangement position, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game. Furthermore, when displaying each object image in combination, a display pattern in which the display start timing of each object is changed is set according to the game situation, so by adjusting the display start timing of each object It is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

G. Seventh embodiment:
FIG. 79 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 according to the seventh embodiment. The difference between the present embodiment and the above-described first to sixth embodiments is that an RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) that outputs date information and time information is provided in the sound emission control device 90. is there. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply and can update the date information and the time information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off.

  The MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires the date information and the time information output from the RTC 96, and executes the RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date information and the time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. Start the process for execution. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is configured by an RTC effect moving image for 300 seconds and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed every hour.

  FIG. 80 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the pattern display device 41 is displaying the background moving image. The RTC effect in progress flag shown in the figure is a flag that is turned on when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied and the RTC effect is started, and is turned off when the RTC effect is finished.

  The display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 on the background when the time becomes 00 / hr and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image (time t1). The mode of displaying the moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music. At the same time, the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound preset by the player.

  When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image on the display mode of the symbol display device 41. The mode is changed to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed. Then, when the display control device 100 shifts to a mode in which the background moving image is displayed, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the background moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to a mode in which the background moving image is displayed (time t2), the audio emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music, and is preset by the player. While the output level (volume) of the generated voice is maintained, the output is started from the time head position "01" of the background music.

  The sound emission control device 90 can output a plurality of types of background music, and when performing background music cueing processing (processing for starting output or display from the temporal start position “01”). The type of background music to be subjected to the cueing process is randomly selected by lottery, and the display control device 100 is capable of displaying a plurality of types of background moving images corresponding to a plurality of types of background music and is selected. Alternatively, a background moving image corresponding to the background music may be selected to execute the cueing process. With such a configuration, it is possible to allow the player to enjoy a plurality of types of background music and background moving images, so that the interest of the game can be improved. In FIG. 83 described later, also in the case where the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 execute the cueing process of the background music and the background moving image, similarly, a configuration for selecting the background music and the background moving image from a plurality of types Can be adopted.

  FIG. 81 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo moving image.

  When the time becomes 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo video (time t1), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as the demo video. Is changed to a mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 temporally changes the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  When the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends (time t2), the display control device 100 displays the RTC effect moving image on the display mode of the symbol display device 41. The mode is changed to the mode for displaying the demo moving image. Then, when the display control device 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the demo moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image (time t2), the audio emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the audio output level ( Volume) to zero.

  FIG. 82 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the transition condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As described above, the shift condition shifts the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to a mode in which a demo video is displayed, and shifts the voice output mode to a mode in which the volume is zero (silent state). It is a condition.

  When the time becomes 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the background moving image (time t1), the display control device 100 sets the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to the background moving image. Is changed to a mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the background music. At the same time, the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the RTC effect music while maintaining the output level (volume) of the sound preset by the player.

  In the display control device 100, the fluctuation of the symbol on the main display unit 45 is stopped while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t2), and 15 seconds have passed after the fluctuation of the symbol was stopped and the transition condition is satisfied. When is established (time t3), after the predetermined display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) of the RTC effect moving image ends, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to the mode of displaying the demo moving image. It is shifted (time t4). Then, when the display control device 100 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the display control device 100 starts the display from the temporal start position “01” of the demo moving image. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image (time t4), the audio emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and outputs the audio output level ( Volume) to zero.

  FIG. 83 is a timing chart showing an example of processing when the return condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image. As the return condition, as described above, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed, and the output mode of the sound is such that the background music is output at the preset volume. It is a condition for returning to the mode.

  When the time becomes 00 minutes and the RTC effect start condition is satisfied while the symbol display device 41 is displaying the demo video (time t1), the display control device 100 displays the display mode of the symbol display device 41 as the demo video. Is changed to a mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed. Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 shifts from the mode of displaying the demo moving image to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image (time t1), the sound emission control device 90 temporally changes the RTC effect music. The output is started from the head position "01", and the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the output level preset by the player.

  When the symbol display device 41 is displaying the RTC effect moving image and the change of the symbol on the main display unit 45 starts and the return condition is satisfied (time t2), the display control device 100 determines the RTC effect moving image in advance. After the display period (300 seconds in the present embodiment) ends, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is returned to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed (time t3). Further, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 returns to the mode of displaying the background moving image (time t3), the sound emission control device 90 stops the output of the RTC effect music and sets it in advance by the player. While the output level (volume) of the generated voice is maintained, the output is started from the time head position "01" of the background music.

  Next, an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, processing different from that of the first embodiment will be described, and description of the same processing as that of the first embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the timer interrupt process (FIG. 32) executed in the sound-light side MPU of the first embodiment is that after the command corresponding process (step S1802) is executed, the standby state transition process (step S1803) is executed. Before this, the RTC effect process (step S1802a) is executed, and the other processes are the same as in the first embodiment. In the RTC effect processing, processing for executing the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below.

  FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. In step S3401, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON. The RTC effect flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S3401: NO), the flow advances to step S3402 to read the time information output from the RTC 96. Then, it progresses to step S3403.

  In step S3403, it is determined whether the read time information coincides with the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information coincides with 00 minutes every hour. When it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information does not match the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect (S3403: NO), the RTC effect process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3403 that the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect (S3403: YES), the flow proceeds to step S3404.

  In step S3404, RTC effect time setting processing is executed. Specifically, "150,000" (that is, 5.0 min) is set to the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring an elapsed time from the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step S3404, the process advances to step S3405.

  In step S3405, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. Upon receiving the RTC effect moving image start command, the display-side MPU 102 starts the process for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S3405, the process advances to step S3406.

  In step S3406, an output start process of RTC effect music is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal head position of the RTC effect music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped and the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S3407, and the RTC effect production flag is turned ON. Then, it progresses to step S3408.

  In step S3408, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag are ON. A situation in which any of the volume reduction flag, the temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag is ON means that the transition condition described above is satisfied and the audio output level (volume) is reduced. I mean. When it is determined in step S3408 that any of the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S3408: YES), the process proceeds to step S3409.

  In step S3409, the output level (volume) of the reduced voice is returned to a value preset by the player. After that, the process advances to step S3410, and the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is turned ON. The post-RTC effect demo video start flag is a flag for starting the demo video after the RTC effect is finished, and when the transition condition is satisfied before the RTC effect is started or when the RTC effect is being executed. This flag is turned on when is satisfied. After executing step S3410, the flow proceeds to step S3411, and among the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag, the flag that has been turned on is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S3412. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3408 that all of the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start wait flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag are OFF (S3408: NO), the processes of steps S3409 to S3411 should be executed. No, the process advances to step S3412.

  In step S3412, it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is ON (S3412: YES), the flow advances to step S3413 to turn off the RTC post-production demonstration animation start flag, and to step S3414, the return condition is established. Turn off the flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3412 that the return condition satisfaction flag is not ON (S3412: NO), the RTC effect process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S3413 and S3414.

  When it is determined in step S3401 that the RTC effect flag is ON (S3401: YES), that is, when the RTC effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S3415.

  In step S3415, it is determined whether it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S3403 is 0. When it is determined in step S3415 that it is time to end the RTC effect (S3415: YES), the process proceeds to step S3416, and the process when the RTC effect ends is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3415 that it is not the timing to end the RTC effect (S3415: NO), the process proceeds from step S3408 to step S3414 described above. This is because the transition condition and the return condition may be satisfied even during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processes of steps S3408 to S3414.

  In step S3416, the flag during RTC production is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S3417, and RTC effect music output stop processing is executed. Then, it progresses to step S3418.

  In step S3418, it is determined whether the RTC post-rendering demonstration moving image start flag is ON. If it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is not ON (S3418: NO), the process proceeds to step S3419, and a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts the process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S3420, and background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the background music. Then, this RTC effect processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S3418 that the post-RTC demonstration demo moving image start flag is ON (S3418: YES), the process proceeds to step S3421 and a demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts the process for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S3422, and the demo movie display flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S3423.

  In step S3423, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because the music output together with the demo video is not set in the present embodiment. After executing step S3423, the process advances to step S3424 to turn on the cue determination flag. By this processing, the cue determination flag can be turned ON while the demo moving image is displayed. After executing step S3424, the process proceeds to step S3425, and the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is turned off. Then, this RTC effect processing is ended.

  FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the standby state transition processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the standby state transition process (FIG. 41) executed in the sound-light side MPU 92 of the first embodiment is that before executing the process (step S2701) for determining whether or not the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. , RTC performance flag is ON (step S2700) is determined, and other processes are the same as in the first embodiment.

  In step S2700, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON, and when it is determined that the RTC effect flag is ON (S2700: YES), this standby state transition processing is ended. That is, it is configured not to shift to the standby state while the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2700 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S2700: NO), the flow proceeds to step S2701, and it is determined whether the return condition satisfaction flag is ON. The following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.

  FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the command handling process executed by the display-side MPU 102 of the seventh embodiment. The difference from the command corresponding process (FIG. 45) executed in the display-side MPU 102 of the first embodiment is that after the process of starting the display of the background moving image (step S3112) is executed, and other processes (step S3113). ) Is performed, and the other processes are the same as those in the first embodiment.

  In step S3112a, it is determined whether or not an RTC effect moving image start command is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. If it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is stored, the process proceeds to step S3112b, and processing for starting the display of the RTC effect moving image is executed. Specifically, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the RTC effect moving image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After executing step S3112b, the process proceeds to step S3113. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3112a that the RTC effect moving image start command is not stored, the process proceeds to step S3113 without executing step S3112b. The following processing is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description is omitted.

  As described above, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80, the mode in which the background moving image is displayed is changed to the mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed, and thereafter, the predetermined display of the RTC effect moving image is performed. When the period ends, the mode is changed from the mode displaying the RTC effect moving image to the mode displaying the background moving image, and at the time of shifting to the mode displaying the background moving image, from the predetermined temporal position of the background moving image. Start display. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image is started changes when the mode is changed to the display of the background moving image. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the background moving image is displayed when the display mode of the background moving image is displayed is changed, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the RTC effect is generated. A configuration for starting the display of the background moving image from the temporal position of the background moving image displayed immediately before the transition to the mode for displaying the moving image, or a transition from the mode for displaying the RTC effect moving image to the mode for displaying the background moving image In this case, the temporal position of the background moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode of displaying the background moving image. Even after the transition to the mode, the background video is continuously reproduced as an internal process, and the mode in which the RTC effect video is displayed is switched to the mode in which the background video is displayed. Configuration or the like for displaying a background video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 81, the mode of displaying the demo moving image is changed to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and thereafter, the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends. In this case, when the mode is changed from displaying the RTC effect moving image to displaying the demo moving image, and when moving to the mode displaying the demo moving image, the display of the demo moving image is started from a predetermined time position. . Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demo moving image is started changes when the mode is changed to display the demo moving image. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the demo moving image is started changes when the display mode of the demo moving image is displayed, for example, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image is finished, the RTC effect is displayed. A configuration for starting the display of the demo video from the temporal position of the demo video displayed immediately before the transition to the mode for displaying the video, or a transition from the mode for displaying the RTC effect video to the mode for displaying the demo video In this case, the time position of the demo moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of displaying the RTC effect moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed from the mode of displaying the demo moving image. Even after the transition to the mode, the reproduction of the demo video is continued as an internal process, and the mode of displaying the RTC effect video is switched to the mode of displaying the demo video. Configuration and the like for displaying the demonstration video being played continuously as internal processing on the symbol display device 41 may be mentioned when.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 82, even if the transition condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image should be interrupted in the middle of a predetermined display period. Instead, the display shifts to the mode in which the demo moving image is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, so that it is possible to reduce the sense of incongruity given to the player and improve the enjoyment of the game.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 83, even if the return condition is satisfied while the RTC effect moving image is being displayed, the RTC effect moving image should be interrupted in the middle of a predetermined display period. Instead, the mode returns to the mode in which the background moving image is displayed after the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, so that a sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends at substantially the same time in each pachinko machine 10. While moving to the mode of displaying the background video, each pachinko machine 10 starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the background video when displaying the background video, and thus is displayed on each pachinko machine 10. Background videos can be synchronized. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed sees a spectacular situation in which the background moving images displayed on each pachinko machine 10 are synchronized. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player have an interest in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the temporal start position of the background moving image is changed. Since the display is started from, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the display is started from a temporal middle position of the background moving image when shifting to a mode of displaying the background moving image. . For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the background video is displayed at a position midway in time when the background video is displayed, the player views the background video from a position midway in time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the viewer feels something is wrong or that there is a portion of the background video that he / she is not watching. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the background video can be viewed by the player from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and to display the background video. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that everything can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 80 and FIG. 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, from the predetermined temporal position. Since the output of the background music is started, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music can be easily synchronized, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music is started changes. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the background music starts is changed, for example, in FIG. 80, when the predetermined display period of the RTC effect moving image ends, the mode in which the RTC effect music is output is shifted to. The output is started when the background music is started to be output from the temporal position of the background music that was being output immediately before, or when the mode of outputting the RTC effect music is changed to the mode of outputting the background music. The configuration in which the temporal position of the background music is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode of outputting the RTC effect music, and even after the transition from the aspect of outputting the background music to the aspect of outputting the RTC effect music The background music is continuously reproduced as an internal process, and the internal process is performed when the mode of outputting the RTC effect music is changed to the mode of outputting the background music. Configuration and the like for outputting the background music being played continuously Te.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 80 and 83, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the background moving image, the temporal start position of the background music is increased. Since the output is started from, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the output is started from a position midway in time of the background music. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output is started from a position midway in time of the background music, the player will feel the sense of discomfort because he will appreciate the background music from the position midway in time. There is a possibility that you may feel that you are not satisfied with the part of the background music that you are not listening to. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is possible to allow the player to listen to the background music from the temporal start position, so that it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player and to play the background music. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that everything can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, when a plurality of pachinko machines 10 according to the present embodiment are installed, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends at substantially the same time in each pachinko machine 10. While moving to the mode of displaying the demo video, each pachinko machine 10 starts displaying from a predetermined time position of the demo video when displaying the demo video, and thus is displayed on each pachinko machine 10. You can sync demo videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the demo videos displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. Therefore, a player who visits a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 of the present embodiment are installed sees a spectacular situation in which demo videos displayed on the respective pachinko machines 10 are synchronized. As a result, it becomes possible to make the player have an interest in the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode in which the demo moving image is displayed, the temporal start position of the demo moving image is increased. Since the display is started from, the discomfort given to the player is compared with the configuration in which the display is started from the position midway in time of the demo video when the demo video is displayed and the demo video is displayed. Can be reduced. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the demo video is displayed and the demo video is displayed at a position midway in time when the demo video is displayed, the player can display the demo video temporally. Since you will be watching from the middle position, you may feel discomfort or feel unsatisfactory because there are some parts of the demo video that you have not watched. On the other hand, according to this embodiment, since the demo video can be viewed by the player from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player and to display the demo video. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that everything can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

H. Eighth embodiment:
Next, an eighth embodiment will be described. First, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the eighth embodiment, and then the details of the processing will be described. The hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment is the same as that of the first embodiment, and the description thereof will be omitted.

H1. Overview of processing by game machines:
FIG. 88 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an overview of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. FIG. 88 (a) shows a display surface 41a included in the pachinko machine 10.

  As shown in the figure, a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the pachinko machine 10. In the first hold display area Ds1, hold displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 indicating the number of hold based on winning in the first starting opening 33 are displayed. In the second hold display area Ds2, hold displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24 indicating the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 are displayed. Each hold display corresponds to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is acquired and stored based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. The maximum value of the number of reserved displays is four in the first reserved display area Ds1, Dm11 to Dm14, and four in the second reserved display area Ds2, Dm21 to Dm24.

  For each hold display displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display in the order of the hold displays Dm11, Dm12, Dm13, and Dm14 is the object of the big hit lottery. Similarly, for each of the hold displays displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is a jackpot selection target in the order of the hold displays Dm21, Dm22, Dm23, and Dm24.

  The display mode of each hold display suggests that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to each hold display may win the big hit lottery, and corresponds to the possibility of the possibility, a plurality of stages from upper to lower levels. The display mode of is set. As the display mode of the hold display becomes higher (ranks up) among a plurality of stages, it is suggested that the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display is highly likely to win the jackpot lottery.

  FIG. 88 (b) is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of the hold display set in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment. As shown in the figure, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is set to display modes of a plurality of stages from upper ranks to lower ranks, corresponding to the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery. The display mode of the hold display is set in order from the higher order of the five levels of the actual display level Lvr5, the actual display level Lvr4, the actual display level Lvr3, the actual display level Lvr2, and the actual display level Lvr1. The display mode corresponding to the higher actual display level Lvr is set as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher, and the display mode corresponding to the lower actual display level Lvr is set as the possibility of winning the jackpot lottery is lower. .

  In the present embodiment, the display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is represented by color. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr5 is displayed in yellow, the actual display level Lvr4 is displayed in red, the actual display level Lvr3 is displayed in green, the actual display level Lvr2 is displayed in blue, and the actual display level Lvr1 is displayed in white. The display mode corresponding to each actual display level Lvr is not limited to the mode expressed by color, but may be a mode recognizable by the player, such as a mode expressed by a pattern or a mode expressed by a character. Various display modes can be adopted as long as the difference between the actual display levels Lvr is expressed.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes an effect that changes the display mode of the hold display. For example, an effect of changing the white hold display to blue and an effect of changing the blue hold display to red are executed.

  In the present embodiment, when performing an effect of changing the display mode of the hold display, the display order changes as the order in which the changing hold display is the target of the jackpot lottery is later. The effect is executed such that the number of steps in which the actual display level Lvr is increased between before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display is increased. To be more precise, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the subsequent big hit random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. Is changed in a plurality of stages (actual display level Lvr1 to actual display level Lvr5) of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display (before the change of the display mode). The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the actual display level Lvr after the change and the difference after the change becomes large.

  Specifically, when the display form of the hold display Dm11 is changed to a higher display form, the display form of the hold display Dm12 is displayed as a higher display than the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference of the actual display level Lvr). The difference between the stages before and after the change (the difference between the actual display levels Lvr) in the case of changing to the mode is larger, and before and after the change when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to the higher display mode. The difference between the stages before and after the change (difference between the actual display levels Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a higher display mode is larger than the difference between the steps (difference between the actual display levels Lvr). , The display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to a higher display mode from the difference between the stage before and after the change (difference of the actual display level Lvr) when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to a higher display mode. If Difference change before and a later stage changes as towards the (actual differential display level Lvr) increases, changing the display mode of the hold display.

  In the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the display mode of the next higher stage is changed. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to a higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference between the actual display levels Lvr) is one. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, it is changed to the display mode of the next higher level. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to a higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (the difference between the actual display levels Lvr) is two. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, it is changed to the display mode of the three higher stages. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 to a higher display mode, there are three differences between the stages before and after the change (difference in the actual display level Lvr). When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, it is changed to a display mode of four higher stages. That is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to a higher display mode, the difference between the stages before and after the change (difference between the actual display levels Lvr) is four.

  In the case of the hold display Dm11, for example, when the hold display Dm11 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to blue (actual display level Lvr2) which is the display mode of the next higher stage, and the hold display Dm11 is also set. Is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4) which is the display mode of the next higher stage. In the case of the hold display Dm12, for example, when the hold display Dm12 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to the green (actual display level Lvr3) which is the display mode of the next higher step, and the hold display Dm12 is also used. Is green (actual display level Lvr3), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode of the two higher stages. In the case of the hold display Dm13, for example, when the hold display Dm13 is white (actual display level Lvr1), the hold display Dm13 is changed to red (actual display level Lvr4) which is the display mode of the three higher stages. Is blue (actual display level Lvr2), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5), which is the display mode of the three higher stages. In the case of the hold display Dm14, for example, when the hold display Dm14 is white (actual display level Lvr1), it is changed to yellow (actual display level Lvr5) which is the display mode of the four higher stages.

  Even when changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display region Ds2, it is the same as changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display region Ds1. In the hold display being displayed, the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger as the order of the jackpot lottery changes the display mode of the subsequent hold display. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of steps of is increased.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before changing the display mode of the hold display. In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared in accordance with a target whose display mode is changed, among the displayed pending displays. Hereinafter, the effect including the effect for changing the display mode of the hold display and the suggestion effect is also referred to as the hold effect.

  89 and 90 are explanatory diagrams for explaining suggestive effects executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 89A shows a suggestive effect (pattern 1) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11. In the suggestive effect (pattern 1), the gun W1 having a short range is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W1 and hits the hold display Dm11. Then, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. In other words, when the gun W1 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display whose display mode is changed is the hold display Dm11.

  FIG. 89 (b) shows a suggestive effect (pattern 2) executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. In the suggestive effect (pattern 2), a gun W2 having a range longer than that of the gun W1 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a bullet is fired from the gun W2 and hits the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm11 or hold display Dm12) hit by the bullet changes. In other words, when the gun W2 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm12.

  FIG. 90A shows a suggestive effect (pattern 3) that is executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. In the suggestive effect (pattern 3), a tank W3 equipped with a cannon having a range longer than that of the gun W2 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, a shell is fired from the cannon of the tank W3 and hits the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12 or hold display Dm13) hit by the shell changes. In other words, when the tank W3 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display whose display mode is changed is the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm13.

  FIG. 90B shows a suggestion effect (pattern 4) that is executed prior to changing the display mode of any of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14. In the suggestive effect (pattern 4), a missile W4 having a range longer than that of a cannon included in the tank W3 is displayed on the display surface 41a. Then, the missile W4 is fired and hits any one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14. After that, the display mode of the hold display (hold display Dm12, hold display Dm13, or hold display Dm14) hit by the missile W4 changes. In other words, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestive effect, the hold display whose display mode is changed is any one of the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14.

  That is, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes the suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before changing the display mode of the hold display, and displays the displayed hold display. Of these, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from among a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is changed.

  For example, when the missile W4 is displayed as the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90 (b)), the pending display that may change the display mode is the pending display Dm12, the pending display Dm13, or the pending display Dm14. The number of steps in which the actual display level Lvr increases before and after the display mode changes when the hold display against which the missile W4 is launched is the hold display Dm13 rather than the hold display Dm12 and the hold display Dm14 is more than the hold display Dm13. growing. Therefore, when the suggestive effect is displayed on the display surface 41a, the player is aware of which range of the display mode of the pending display changes (for example, if the suggestive effect pattern 4 is displayed, Dm12 to Dm14 While recognizing that the display mode of any of the hold displays in the range changes), the player is made to guess which hold display mode among the hold displays of the range will change, and gives the player a sense of expectation and tenseness. can do.

  Hereinafter, an example of processing for realizing the present exemplary embodiment will be described in detail.

H2. Processing details:
The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment is the processing content of the update process (first embodiment: FIG. 36) and the effect setting process (first embodiment: FIG. 37) at the time of winning. Therefore, in this description, the update process and the effect setting process at the time of winning in the present embodiment will be described, and the description of the other processes will be omitted.

<Update process at the time of winning>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the update process at the time of winning in the eighth embodiment. The update process at the time of winning is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 35: S2101) of the hold command corresponding process.

  The difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 36) in the update processing at the time of winning is that a hold effect parameter setting processing is added as step S3505 to the present embodiment. Steps S3501 to S3504 in the winning update processing of this embodiment and steps S2201 to S2204 (FIG. 36) in the winning update processing of the first embodiment are the same processing. Therefore, description of the processes of steps S3501 to S3504 will be omitted.

  The holding effect parameter setting process in step S3505 is a subroutine executed to set various parameters necessary for executing the suggestion effect and changing the display mode of the hold display. Details of the holding effect parameter setting process will be described later.

  Here, the storage area for hold effect used for the parameter setting process for hold effect will be described. The parameters set by the holding effect parameter setting process are stored in the holding effect storage area provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment. The hold effect storage area is a storage area provided in the sound-light side RAM 94 included in the sound emission control device 90.

  FIG. 92 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a storage area for holding effect. The hold effect storage area includes a first hold effect storage area and a second hold effect storage area. FIG. 92 (a) shows the first holding effect storage area, and FIG. 92 (b) shows the second holding effect storage area.

  The first hold effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14, which are hold displays in the first hold display area Ds1. The second hold effect storage area is a storage area for storing various parameters necessary for changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24, which are hold displays in the second hold display area Ds2. Since the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area have the same structure, the first holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (a) will be described and shown in FIG. 92 (b). A description of the second holding effect storage area will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the first holding effect storage area stores various parameters and flags for each holding game time (n) for the first starting opening. The holding game times (n = 1 to 4) for the first starting port illustrated correspond to the holding display Dm11 to the holding display Dm14. That is, the holding game times are executed in the order of the holding game times (n = 1) of the first starting opening to the holding game times (n = 4) of the first starting opening.

  As shown in the figure, in the first holding effect storage area, the additional level Lva, the display level upper limit Lvm, the actual display level Lvr, and the hold changeable flag are set for each holding game time (n) for the first starting opening. Memorize

  The additional level Lva is a parameter whose value is fixed for each storage area corresponding to each holding game time (n = 1 to 4). That is, the additional level Lva of the holding game times (n = 1) of the first starting opening is fixed at 1, and the additional level Lva of the holding game times (n = 2) of the first starting opening is fixed at 2. And, the additional level Lva of the holding game times (n = 3) of the first starting opening is fixed at 3, and the additional level Lva of the holding game times (n = 4) of the first starting opening is fixed at 4. There is. When changing the display mode of the hold display, the additional level indicates the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. It is possible to make the stepwise width (difference of the actual display level Lvr) in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display larger as changing. It is a parameter used for this purpose, and is a value corresponding to the number of steps of the actual display level Lvr that rises when the display mode of the hold display changes. Therefore, the value of the additional level Lva is larger as the pending display corresponding to the subsequent value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the jackpot lottery target order. In other words, it is the level value potentially given to each of the pending game times.

  On the other hand, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are associated with various parameters such as the jackpot random number counter C1 in each holding game time, and each time the game time is executed, the area to be stored is next to each other. Shift to the storage area for reserved game times. For example, as shown in FIGS. 92 (a) and 92 (b), the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr stored in the storage area of the holding game times (n = 4) of the first starting opening Each parameter of, when the game time is executed once, shifts to the storage area of the first starting opening holding game time (n = 3) in the first holding effect storage area, and the game time is further executed once. When it is done, it shifts to the storage area of the holding game times (n = 2) of the first starting opening in the first holding effect storage area.

  The display level upper limit value Lvm is a parameter that defines an upper limit value of how high the actual display level Lvr can be changed when changing the display mode of the hold display. For example, in the hold display in which the display level upper limit Lvm is 5, the actual display level Lvr can be changed to 5. In the hold display in which the display level upper limit Lvm is 3, the actual display level Lvr can be changed up to 3, but the actual display level Lvr can be changed up to 3 or higher actual display level Lvr such as 4 or 5. Can not.

  The actual display level Lvr is a parameter indicating the level of the display mode of the current hold display, as described in FIG. 88.

  The values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are values that are stored in correspondence with the holding game times when a game ball enters the starting opening and there are holding game times. Therefore, as shown in an example in FIG. 92 (b), for example, at a certain time, there is a holding game time for the second starting opening (n = 3) and a holding game time for the second starting opening (n = 4). If not, the values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to the pending game time are not stored.

  The hold changeable flag is used when executing the process of changing the display mode of the hold display. Specifically, the hold changeable flag is turned ON in the hold game times that satisfy the condition that the display mode of the hold display can be changed, and is turned OFF after the hold display for changing the display mode is determined. It Hereinafter, the flowchart of the holding effect parameter setting process executed using the holding effect storage area will be described.

<Parameter setting process for hold effect>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the holding effect parameter setting process. The holding effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

  In step S3601, display level upper limit value setting processing is executed. The process is a process executed to set the display level upper limit value Lvm. The details of the display level upper limit value setting process will be described later. After the display level upper limit value setting process is executed in step S3601, the process proceeds to step S3602.

  In step S3602, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times corresponding to the entry of the current game ball. This reserve effect parameter setting process is a process executed every time a game ball enters the starting opening, and in step S3602, each time the game ball enters the starting opening, the storage area for the reserve effect is set to the first value. In the 1 hold effect storage area or the 2nd hold effect storage area, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the hold game times storage area corresponding to the entry. In this processing, 1 is set to the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times corresponding to the entry, so the display mode is set to white corresponding to 1 of the actual display level Lvr. In the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the starting opening, the actual display level Lvr of the storage area of the reserved game times corresponding to the game ball is set to 1. However, for example, When the obtained reach random number counter C3 is scheduled to execute the reach effect by the reach determination table, the actual display level Lvr is set to 2 or the jackpot random number counter C1 obtained by the entrance. When the value of is a value corresponding to the jackpot lottery, the actual display level Lvr is set based on the values of various counters acquired by entering the starting opening, such as setting the actual display level Lvr to a value of 2 or more. May be determined. After executing step S3602, the process proceeds to step S3603.

  In step S3603, the additional level Lva is set. As described above, the additional level Lva has a fixed value corresponding to each holding game time. Therefore, when the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the game ball this time is the pending game time (n = 1), 1 is set as the additional level Lva, and the pending game time (n = 2). In this case, 2 is set as the additional level Lva, and 3 is set as the additional level Lva if it is the holding game time (n = 3), and it is the holding game time (n = 4). 4 is set as the additional level Lva.

  After executing step S3603, the parameter setting process for the holding effect is ended.

<Display level upper limit setting process>
FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the display level upper limit value setting processing. The display level upper limit value setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 93: S3601) of the holding effect parameter setting process.

  In step S3701, the value of the upper limit setting counter Cm is acquired. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is used when the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the display level upper limit value Lvm. The upper limit value setting counter Cm is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99 and then returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. After executing step S3701, the process proceeds to step S3702.

  In step S3702, it is determined whether or not the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 in the pending game times corresponding to the entry of the current game ball has been won in the jackpot lottery. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the destination determination process included in the hold command acquired from the main MPU 62 by the sound-light side MPU 92 by the destination determination process executed with the entry into the starting opening this time. To judge.

  When it is determined in step S3702 that the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball has been won in the jackpot lottery (S3702: YES), the process proceeds to step S3703.

  In step S3703, the jackpot upper limit value table is referred to. Specifically, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted with reference to the jackpot upper limit table.

  FIG. 95 is an explanatory diagram showing an upper limit value table. FIG. 95 (a) shows a jackpot upper limit value table.

  The jackpot upper limit value table is table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are associated and recorded. The sound-light side MPU 92 extracts the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit value setting counter Cm by referring to the jackpot upper limit table.

  As shown in the figure, in the jackpot upper limit value table, 80 values 20 to 99 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 5 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm, and as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm. 10 values of 10 to 19 correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 4, and 5 values of 5 to 9 as the value of the upper limit value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit value Lvm = 3. Five values 0 to 4 as the value setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm = 2, and 0 values of the upper limit setting counter Cm correspond to the display level upper limit Lvm = 1. Is set. That is, in the pending game times in which the jackpot lottery is won, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm becomes 5 is the highest.

  FIG. 95B shows the reach upper limit value table. The reach upper limit value table is an upper limit value table used in step S3705 described later. Similarly to the jackpot upper limit table, the reach upper limit table is also recorded with table data in which each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit setting counter Cm and the display level upper limit Lvm are associated with each other and recorded. Is. In the pending game times in which the reach occurs, the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 4 is the highest, and then the probability that the display level upper limit Lvm is 5 or 3 is high.

  FIG. 95C shows the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table. The reach non-occurrence upper limit value table is an upper limit value table used in step S3706 described later. In the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table, similarly to the jackpot upper limit value table, each value (0 to 99) of the upper limit value setting counter Cm and the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm are recorded in association with each other. It is table data. In the hold non-reaching game times, the display level upper limit value Lvm is configured to have the highest probability of 1, and then the probability of becoming 2.

  The description returns to FIG. 94. In step S3703, after referring to the jackpot upper limit value table, the process proceeds to step S3707.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S3702 that the pending game times corresponding to the entry of the current game ball has not been won in the jackpot lottery (S3702: NO), the flow proceeds to step S3704.

  In step S3704, it is determined whether or not the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball corresponds to the game time that causes the reach. That is, it is determined whether or not the reach random number counter C3 corresponding to the current pending game time corresponds to the occurrence of the reach. Specifically, based on the information about the determination result of the destination determination process included in the hold command acquired from the main MPU 62 by the sound-light side MPU 92 by the destination determination process executed at the time of entering the starting opening this time. judge.

  When it is determined in step S3704 that the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball corresponds to the game time that causes the reach (S3704: YES), the process proceeds to step S3705.

  In step S3705, the reach upper limit value table is referenced. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach upper limit table. Then, it progresses to step S3707.

  On the other hand, in step S3704, when it is determined that the pending game time corresponding to the entry of the current game ball does not correspond to the game time causing the reach (S3704: NO), the process proceeds to step S3706.

  In step S3706, the reach non-occurrence upper limit value table is referred to. More specifically, the value of the display level upper limit Lvm corresponding to the acquired upper limit setting counter Cm is extracted by referring to the reach non-occurrence upper limit table. Then, it progresses to step S3707.

  In step S3707, the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm extracted in any of step S3703, step S3705, or step S3706 is set as the current pending game in the first holding effect storage area or the second holding effect storage area. It is set in the storage area of the display level upper limit value Lvm corresponding to the number of times. Then, this display level upper limit value setting process ends.

<Production setting processing>
Next, the effect setting process will be described.

  FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the effect setting process in the eighth embodiment. The effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 33: S1906) of the command corresponding process.

  In the effect setting process, the difference between the present embodiment and the first embodiment (FIG. 37) is that in the present embodiment, a hold effect setting process is added as step S3801. Steps S3802 to S3815 in the effect setting process of the present embodiment and steps S2301 to S2314 in the effect setting process of the first embodiment (FIG. 37) are the same process. Therefore, description of the processes of steps S3802 to S3815 is omitted.

  The hold effect setting process in step S3801 is executed in order to determine the hold game times for which the hold effect (indication effect and effect for changing the display mode of the hold display) is to be executed, and to set the content of the hold effect. It is a subroutine that is executed. The details of the holding effect setting process will be described below.

<Hold production setting process>
FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing the holding effect setting process in the eighth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

  In step S3901, a holding effect execution lottery process is executed. The hold effect execution lottery process is a process of determining whether or not to execute the hold effect by lottery. Specifically, a value is acquired from the random number counter for lottery, and whether or not there is a number corresponding to the acquired value of the random number counter among the plurality of numbers stored in the preset table data for lottery. To determine. If there is a number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number among the multiple numbers stored in the table data, it is decided to execute the hold effect, and if there is no number corresponding to the value of the acquired random number, the number is held. It is decided not to execute the performance. After executing step S3901, the process proceeds to step S3902.

  In step S3902, it is determined whether or not to execute the hold effect based on the result of the hold effect execution lottery process. When it is determined in step S3902 that the holding effect is to be executed (S3902: YES), the process proceeds to step S3903. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S3902 that the holding effect is not executed (S3902: NO), the holding effect setting process is ended.

  In step S3903, the display level upper limit Lvm for each holding game is read. Specifically, the display level upper limit value of each holding game time stored in the first holding effect storage area (see FIG. 92 (a)) and the second holding effect storage area (see FIG. 92 (b)) Read Lvm. After executing step S3903, the process proceeds to step S3904.

  In step S3904, the actual display level Lvr of each holding game is read. Specifically, the actual display level Lvr of each holding game time stored in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area is read. After executing step S3904, the process proceeds to step S3905.

  In step S3905, the additional level Lva is added to the actual display level Lvr of each holding game time, and the added value in each holding game time is stored. Then, it progresses to step S3906.

  In step S3906, the reserved game times of the display level upper limit value Lvm ≧ actual display level Lvr + additional level Lva are extracted. Specifically, the comparison value of the added value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional level Lva calculated in step S3905 and the value of the display level upper limit Lvm are compared at each holding game time, and the added value is displayed. The reserved game times less than or equal to the upper limit Lvm are extracted. That is, the actual display level Lvr has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is advanced by the level value (additional level Lva) determined for each holding game time. Extract the reserved game times that have room to change. Not limited to the above extraction method, the actual display level Lvr has not reached the predetermined upper limit value (display level upper limit value Lvm), and the actual display level Lvr is the level value determined for each holding game time. Other extraction methods may be used as long as it is possible to extract the reserved game times that can be changed to the upper level by (additional level Lva). After executing step S3906, the process advances to step S3907.

  In step S3907, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times, which is the display level upper limit Lvm ≧ the actual display level Lvr + the additional level Lva, is turned ON. That is, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times, which can change the display mode of the hold display, is turned on. After executing step S3907, the process advances to step S3908.

  In step S3908, a pending effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the pending effect content determination processing will be described later. After executing step S3908, the process advances to step S3909.

  In step S3909, a holding effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information regarding the content of the holding effect determined in step S3908 is set as a command and transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After that, this holding effect setting process ends.

<Deferred production content determination processing>
FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the holding effect content determination processing. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 97: S3908) of the hold effect setting process.

  In step S4001, it is determined whether or not there is a holding game time in which the holding changeable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the holding game times of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area. To do.

  When it is determined in step S4001 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4001: NO), this hold effect content determination processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S4001 that the hold changeable flag is ON (S4001: YES), the process proceeds to step S4002.

  In step S4002, it is determined whether the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. In step S4002, when it is determined that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area (S4002: YES), the process proceeds to step S4003.

  In step S4003, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed first is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. That is, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the hold game time executed as early as possible is changed. After executing step S4003, the process proceeds to step S4005.

  On the other hand, in step S4002, if it is determined that the hold changeable flag is not ON in any of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area (S4002: NO), the process proceeds to step S4004.

  In step S4004, among the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the second holding effect storage area, the holding game time to be executed first is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. Then, it progresses to step S4005.

  In step S4005, the value of the holding effect counter Ce is acquired. The hold effect counter Ce is used when the sound-light side MPU 92 determines the effect content of the hold effect. The hold effect counter Ce is configured as a loop counter that is sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 99 and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Then, after executing step S4005, the process proceeds to step S4006.

  In step S4006, the hold effect determination table corresponding to the hold game times for which the display mode of the hold display is changed is referred to.

  FIG. 99 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a holding effect determination table. The holding effect determination table is set separately for each holding game time.

  In FIG. 99 (a), the game time determined as the target for changing the hold display is the hold game time for the first starting opening (n = 1) (see FIG. 92 (a)) or the second starting opening. In the case of the holding game times (n = 1) (see FIG. 92 (b)), that is, the holding effect determination used when changing the display mode of the holding display Dm11 or the holding display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88 (a). It is a table for use. In the case of n = 1, 80 values of 22 to 99 are set as the values of the holding effect counter Ce for which the pattern 1 of the suggested effect (see FIG. 89 (a)) is selected. Further, 20 values 0 to 19 are set as the values of the holding effect counter Ce for which the pattern 2 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 89B) is selected. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11 or the hold display Dm21 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the probability that the suggestion effect pattern 1 is executed is high.

  In FIG. 99 (b), the game time determined as a target for changing the hold display is a hold game time for the first starting opening (n = 2) or a hold game time for the second starting opening (n = 2). 88, that is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed, the hold effect determination table is used. In the case of n = 2, the pattern 2 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 89 (b)) is selected, and 70 values of 30 to 99 are set as the value of the holding effect counter Ce. Pattern 3 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90 (a)) is selected, and 20 values 10 to 29 are set as the values of the hold effect counter Ce. Further, the pattern 4 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90 (b)) is selected, and ten values 0 to 9 are set as the value of the hold effect counter Ce. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12 or the hold display Dm22 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the suggestion effect pattern 2 is most likely to be executed, and then the suggestion effect pattern 3 is executed. The probability is high.

  In FIG. 99 (c), the game time determined as a target for changing the hold display is a hold game time for the first starting opening (n = 3) (see FIG. 92 (a)) or for the second starting opening. In the case of the hold game times (n = 3) (see FIG. 92 (b)), that is, the hold effect determination used when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88 (a). It is a table for use. In the case of n = 3, 80 values of 20 to 99 are set as the value of the holding effect counter Ce for which the pattern 3 of the suggested effect (see FIG. 90 (a)) is selected. Further, 20 values 0 to 19 are set as the values of the holding effect counter Ce for which the pattern 4 of the suggestive effect (see FIG. 90 (b)) is selected. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13 or the hold display Dm23 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the suggestive effect pattern 3 is likely to be executed.

  In FIG. 99 (d), the game time determined as a target for changing the hold display is a hold game time for the first starting opening (n = 4) or a hold game time for the second starting opening (n = 4). 88, that is, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88 (a) is changed, the hold effect determination table is used. In the case of n = 4, 0 to 99 (100), which are the values of all the holding effect counters Ce, are set to the suggestion effect pattern 4 (see FIG. 90 (b)). That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14 or the hold display Dm24 shown in FIG. 88 (a), the suggestive effect pattern 4 is executed in all cases.

  By setting the hold effect determination table as described above, for example, when the gun W2 is displayed, that is, when the suggestion effect pattern 2 is displayed, the hold display Dm11 (Dm21) or Dm12 (Dm22). The display mode of changes. When the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes, only one actual display level Lvr rises to the higher level according to the value of the additional level Lva, but when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes. , The actual display level Lvr goes up by two higher levels according to the value of the additional level Lva.

  Further, for example, when the missile W4 is displayed, that is, when the suggestive effect pattern 4 is displayed, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 (Dm22), Dm13 (Dm23), or the hold display Dm14 (Dm24) is Change. When the display mode of the hold display Dm12 changes, the actual display level Lvr rises by two levels according to the value of the additional level Lva, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 changes, the additional level According to the value of Lva, the actual display level Lvr goes up by three levels, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes, the actual display level Lvr goes up by four levels depending on the value of the additional level Lva. Level up.

  Therefore, by executing the suggestive effect, the player is roughly inferred which display mode of the hold display changes. Further, since the number of levels at which the actual display level Lvr rises differs depending on the pending display for which the display mode is changed, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  After executing step S4006, the process proceeds to step S4007.

  In step S4007, the content of the determined holding effect is set in the holding effect command. For example, when it is determined to change the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the suggestion effect to be executed is the suggestion effect (pattern 3), and the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed from white to blue. Is set as a command to identify information. Then, it progresses to step S4008.

  In step S4008, all the hold changeable flags that have been turned ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S4009.

  In step S4009, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times for which the display mode is changed is updated to Lvr ← Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level Lvr is changed (increased) by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for holding effect is changed to the actual value after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of the display level Lvr. After that, the process of determining the content of the holding effect is ended.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the jackpot random number counter C1 which is later in the jackpot lottery target order among the displayed hold displays. When the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of is changed, the hold display is increased so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. The display mode of is changed. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the above-described processing, so that the following effects are achieved.

  Normally, when the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the value of the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display becomes the target of the big hit lottery, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in which the jackpot lottery target is displayed first in the displayed pending displays is the order in which the jackpot lottery is targeted in the displayed pending display. Is relatively shorter than the pending display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 later, and the display mode is less likely to change. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially displays from the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. Hope to change. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 that is later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of the hold display becomes larger as the display mode of (1) is changed. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display that is relatively later in the order of the jackpot lottery among the displayed hold displays changes, the hold display Since the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, further expectation. A feeling can be imparted.

  That is, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the hold based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for determining the display mode. The display mode of the display is determined. Therefore, by using the hold display of the object whose display mode is determined, it is possible to suggest the player information about the hold game times corresponding to other hold displays.

  More specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the target hold display whose display mode is changed. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest to the player the information about the pending game times corresponding to the other pending displays by using the pending display whose display mode is changed.

  When determining the display mode of the hold display, the process of determining the display mode of the hold display is performed based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of which the display mode is determined. As another example, it is possible to execute the following processing.

  For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display for which the display mode is determined is a jackpot random number counter that is a target of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1. In the case where it is more advantageous to the player than the value of C1, the display mode of the hold display, which is the target for determining the display mode, is determined to be a specific display mode. In addition, information about other pending displays can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player is not limited to guessing the outcome of one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, and is executed before and after that. Various inferences are also made regarding the outcome of the held game times. Therefore, a new playability can be created by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency as compared with the past, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

  Further, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed is based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display whose display mode is changed. As another example of the process of determining the display mode after the display is changed, the following process can be executed.

  For example, based on the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed prior to the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the display mode change target hold display of the display mode change The display mode after the change of can be determined. As a result, the following playability can be realized. For example, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the determination by the determination means is preceded by the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is changed. It is possible to change the display mode to a higher level than the display mode (display mode that is advantageous to the player). In this way, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest in the game can be improved.

  Furthermore, since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes the suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the change of the display mode of the hold display is performed. On the other hand, it is possible to draw the player's attention and to give a sense of expectation. In other words, it is possible to let the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggested effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggested effect can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be paid attention to. In other words, in addition to the effect of performing a suggestive effect such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension to the subsequent game times, a suggestive effect By changing the display mode of the hold display after the above, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display, and to enhance the interest of the game in a synergistic manner. be able to.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment selects a suggestive effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared according to the target whose display mode is changed, among the displayed pending displays. It is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect, and to give the player an expectation as to which of the pending displays is the target of which the display mode changes.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when performing the suggestive effect, a stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode (before the change of the display mode) between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Depending on the magnitude of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the actual display level Lvr), a process of selecting a suggestive effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggestive effects to be executed may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, and in addition to the effect executed as the suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the display mode is changed to the display mode of the one higher level, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, the display mode of the two higher levels is changed. When the display mode is changed to the display mode of the hold display Dm13, the display mode is changed to a three-step higher display mode, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, a four-step higher display mode. However, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed (actual display between before and after the change of display mode) Other modes may be adopted as the magnitude of the difference between the levels Lvr).

  For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, it is changed to the display mode of one higher level, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, it is changed to the display mode of four higher levels. When changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, it is changed to a display mode of six higher levels, and when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm14, it is changed to a display mode of ten higher levels. In the case of changing the display mode of, the order of the jackpot lottery being displayed is changed relative to the case where the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the value of the subsequent jackpot random number counter C1 is changed. Specifically, the stepwise width (table display) at a plurality of stages (actual display level Lvr1 to actual display level Lvr5) between the pre-change and the post-change in the display mode of the hold display. As the difference between the actual display level Lvr) increases between the front change aspects and after the change, if the mode changing the display mode of the hold display, may be employed other aspects. The additional holding level values in the first holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (a) and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 92 (b) are in the order in which the jackpot lottery targets. This can be realized by setting the pending game times such that the order of the jackpot lottery target becomes a relatively large value as compared with the previous pending game times. In this case, the upper limit of the possible actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm may be set to a value higher than the maximum possible additional display level Lva such as 15 or 20. In addition, the display mode pattern of the hold display may be set corresponding to each possible value of the actual display level Lvr.

  Furthermore, as the order for the jackpot lottery to be held later is larger, the order for the jackpot lottery to be held has a plurality of additional level patterns in which the order is a relatively large value compared to the previous held game times. May be That is, as in the present embodiment, a pattern in which the value of the additional level Lva corresponding to the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14 is (1, 2, 3, 4), or (2, 4 , 6, 10) and (1, 5, 8, 10) patterns, and a plurality of patterns of the additional level Lva, and which pattern to apply may be determined by lottery.

  Further, the display mode of the hold display may be changed by applying the processing described in the above embodiment only when a specific condition is satisfied. Further, a case where the display mode of the hold display is changed by applying the process described in the above embodiment and a case where the display mode of the hold display is changed without applying the process described in the above embodiment are determined by lottery. You may.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are determined based on the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, but the values of the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, the variation type counter CS, etc. , May be determined based on various parameters associated with each holding game time. The display level upper limit Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be determined based on a plurality of parameters among these various parameters. For example, the values of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr are set to a higher value in the case of a big hit than in the case of a miss based on the big hit random number counter C1, and the big hit type counter is set. Based on the value of C2, the probability variation jackpot may be set higher than the normal jackpot case. Further, based on the value of the reach random number counter C3, when the reach is generated, the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr may be set higher than when the reach is not generated.

I. Ninth embodiment:
Next, a ninth embodiment will be described. First, an outline of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described as the ninth embodiment, and then the details of the processing will be described. Since the hardware structure of the pachinko machine 10 is the same as that of the first embodiment, the description thereof will be omitted.

I1. Overview of processing by game machines:
The feature of this embodiment is that the hold effect (effect and suggestion effect for changing the display mode of the hold display) is executed as in the eighth embodiment. The difference from the eighth embodiment is how to change the display mode of the hold display.

  In the eighth embodiment, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the value of the big hit random number counter C1 that is later in the jackpot lottery selection among the displayed hold displays. The more the display mode is changed, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display (actual between the before and after the change of the display mode). The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the difference between the display levels Lvr) becomes large.

  On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the hold display, a hold higher than the display mode of the hold game times hold display executed before the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed Change to display. To be more precise, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the big hit random number counter C1 which is the target of the big hit lottery is held before the big hit random number counter C1 which is the target of the hold display whose display form is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode.

  As a specific example using FIG. 88 (a), for example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is green, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is white, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed, , The display mode is changed to a higher display mode than green, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11 which is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm12, it is changed to the display mode of red or yellow which is a display mode higher than green.

  As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is blue, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is green, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is white, and when the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed, The display mode is changed to a display mode higher than blue, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm11, which is the hold display of the hold game times executed before the hold display Dm13, and green, which is the display mode of the hold display Dm12. That is, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm13, it is changed to the display mode of red or yellow which is a display mode higher than blue and green.

  When changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the display mode of the hold displays Dm11 to Dm14 displayed in the first hold display area Ds1 is changed. Similarly, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is changed to a higher display level than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game time that is executed prior to the hold display of the target for changing the display mode.

  Further, similarly to the eighth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display. . In the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, a suggestion effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared in accordance with a target whose display mode is changed, among the displayed pending displays.

  FIG. 100 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a suggestion effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment.

  In FIG. 100, suggestive effect (Pattern 1), suggestive effect (Pattern 2), suggestive effect that is executed prior to changing each display mode of the hold display Dm11, the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, and the hold display Dm14. (Pattern 3) and suggestive effect (Pattern 4) are shown.

  This suggested production is a production that imitates a long jump. For example, when changing the display mode of the hold display Dm11, the suggestive effect (pattern 1) is executed. The suggestive effect (Pattern 1) is an effect in which the character Ch jumps after running, and gets on the hold display Dm11. After the suggestion effect (pattern 1) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 changes. As another example, when the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed, the suggestive effect (pattern 4) is executed. The suggestive effect (Pattern 4) is an effect in which the character Ch makes a jump and then jumps to get on the hold display Dm14. After the suggestion effect (pattern 4) is executed, the display mode of the hold display Dm14 changes.

  In addition, also when changing the display mode of the hold displays Dm21 to Dm24 displayed in the second hold display area Ds2, the same effect as the suggestion effect described above is executed, and thereafter, the hold display Dm21, the hold display Dm22, The display mode of the hold display Dm23 or the hold display Dm24 changes.

  The above-mentioned suggestive effect is an effect in which the hold display for changing the display mode is determined according to the flight distance of the jump after the character Ch has run. Therefore, for example, by prolonging the airborne time after the character Ch jumps, it is possible to make the player guess which hold display will be landed, and to give a sense of expectation and tension.

  Hereinafter, an example of processing for realizing the present exemplary embodiment will be described in detail.

I2. Processing details:
In this description, differences from the processing in the eighth embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 101 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a holding effect storage area according to the ninth embodiment. The hold effect storage area in the ninth embodiment includes a first hold effect storage area and a second hold effect storage area, as in the eighth embodiment. 101 (a) shows the first holding effect storage area, and FIG. 101 (b) shows the second holding effect storage area.

  The difference between the present embodiment and the eighth embodiment is that the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area of the present embodiment do not include a storage area for storing the additional level Lva. In the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed to each holding game time, but is a holding game time of a holding display that changes the display mode in the course of a series of processes for changing the display mode of the holding display. It is determined (see FIG. 104: step S4305). The rest effect storage area of the ninth embodiment is the same as that of the eighth embodiment in other respects, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

<Parameter setting process for hold effect>
FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the holding effect parameter setting process in the ninth embodiment. The holding effect parameter setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 91: S3505) of the update process at the time of winning.

  The difference between the holding effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment and the holding effect parameter setting process in the eighth embodiment is that the holding effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment is the addition performed in the eighth embodiment. This means that there is no process (FIG. 93: S3603) for setting the level Lva in the hold information storage area 64b. As described above, in the present embodiment, the additional level Lva is not a value fixed for each holding game time in the holding information storage area 64b, but is determined in the process of a series of processing for changing the display mode of the holding display. To be done. Therefore, in the holding effect parameter setting process in the present embodiment, the process of setting the additional level Lva is not executed.

  The other processing is the same as the holding effect parameter setting processing in the eighth embodiment, and therefore description thereof will be omitted. Note that the processing contents of the display level upper limit value setting processing, which is a subroutine executed in step S4101, are the same, so description thereof will be omitted.

<Hold production setting process>
FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the holding effect setting process in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect setting process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine of the effect setting process (FIG. 96: S3801).

  Steps S4201 to S4204 of the holding effect setting process in the present embodiment and steps S3901 to S3904 of the holding effect setting process (FIG. 97) in the eighth embodiment are the same process. Therefore, the processing after step S4205 will be described.

  The processes of steps S4205 to S4209 are processes executed to extract a pending display whose display mode can be changed. That is, it is a process of extracting a hold display that can be changed to a higher hold display than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times that is executed before the hold display of the display mode change target.

  In step S4205, the actual display level Lvr and the display level upper limit value Lvm of each holding game time recorded in the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area are read, and whichever hold is executed first. The reserved game times in which the display level upper limit Lvm having a value larger than the actual display level Lvr of the game times is recorded are extracted.

  To explain using the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101A as an example, the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) of the hold game times (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the hold game times ( Since it is larger than the value of the actual display level Lvr of any of the holding game times executed before n = 3), the condition in step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, the reserved game number (n = 3) is the game number extracted in step S4205.

  On the other hand, the display level upper limit Lvm (= 1) of the holding game times (n = 2) (holding display Dm12) is the holding game times (n = 1) executed before the holding game times (n = 2). Since it is smaller than the actual display level Lvr (= 2), the condition in step S4205 is not satisfied. Therefore, the reserved game times (n = 2) are game times not extracted in step S4205.

  In the hold game times, there is no game time executed before the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21. That is, in the first hold effect storage area, there is no game time to be executed before the hold game time (n = 1). Further, in the second hold effect storage area, there is no game time to be executed before the hold game time (n = 1). Therefore, for the pending game times corresponding to the pending display Dm11 and the pending display Dm21, it is not possible to determine whether or not the condition of step S4205 is satisfied. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, when the hold game times are present, it is automatically regarded as satisfying the condition in step S4205, Extracted in the process. After executing step S4205, the process advances to step S4206.

  In step S4206, the hold game times for which the display level upper limit value Lvm> actual display level Lvr is extracted from the hold game times extracted in step S4205. That is, the reserved game times that have room to change the display mode are extracted.

  To explain using the first hold effect recording area shown in FIG. 101A as an example, the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold game times (n = 3) (hold display Dm13) is the display level upper limit value Lvm ( = 4) less than. Therefore, in this case, the reserved game number (n = 3) satisfies the condition in step S4206 and is extracted by the process.

  After executing step S4206, the process advances to step S4207.

  In step S4207, the hold changeable flag of the hold game times extracted in the process of step S4206 is turned on. After executing step S4207, the process advances to step S4208.

  In step S4208, a pending effect content determination process is executed. The hold effect content determination process is a process of determining the content of the hold effect. Details of the pending effect content determination processing will be described later. After executing step S4208, the process proceeds to step S4209.

  In step S4209, a holding effect command is transmitted. Specifically, information regarding the content of the holding effect determined in step S4208 is set as a command and transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. After that, this holding effect setting process ends.

<Deferred production content determination processing>
FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the holding effect content determination processing in the ninth embodiment. The hold effect content determination process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 103: S4208) of the hold effect parameter setting process.

  In step S4301, it is determined whether or not there is a holding game time in which the holding changeable flag is ON. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the holding game times of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area. To do.

  If it is determined in step S4301 that the hold changeable flag is not ON (S4301: NO), this hold effect content determination processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S4301 that the hold changeable flag is ON (S4301: YES), the flow advances to step S4302.

  In step S4302, it is determined whether the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times in the first hold effect storage area. In step S4302, when it is determined that the hold changeable flag is ON in any of the hold game times of the first hold effect storage area (S4302: YES), the process proceeds to step S4303.

  In step S4303, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time executed most recently is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the hold display. In the above-described eighth embodiment, in step S4003 (FIG. 98), the hold game time to be executed first among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the first hold effect storage area is displayed as a hold display. However, in the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the hold game time executed most later. In the present embodiment, as described in step S4205 of the hold effect setting process (FIG. 103), in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, if the hold game times are present, It is automatically regarded as satisfying the condition in step S4205, and is extracted in the process. Therefore, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display Dm11 and the hold display Dm21, there is a high possibility that the hold changeable flag will be ON, and in step S4303, similarly to the process in the eighth embodiment, the first If the hold game time executed first among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in the hold effect storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display Dm11 has a high probability. Also, the hold display Dm21 becomes a target for changing the display mode, and it becomes difficult to give the player a sense of expectation or tension even if the display mode of the hold display is changed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, of the holding game times for which the holding changeable flag is ON in the first holding effect storage area, the holding game time that is executed most recently is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. To do. After executing step S4303, the process advances to step S4305.

  On the other hand, in step S4302, when it is determined that the hold changeable flag is not ON in any of the holding game times of the first holding effect storage area (S4302: NO), the process proceeds to step S4304.

  In step S4304, of the holding game times in which the holding changeable flag is ON in the second holding effect storage area, the holding game time executed most recently is determined as the target for changing the display mode of the holding display. After executing step S4304, the process proceeds to step S4305.

  In step S4305, the additional display level Lva is determined. That is, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, how much higher the display mode is changed is determined. More specifically, the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode of the hold display is determined.

  Specifically, the difference value between the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display whose display mode is changed is calculated, and one value is determined from the difference values. To do. For example, when the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm13 shown in the first holding effect recording area of FIG. 101A is determined as the target for changing the display mode, the display level upper limit Lvm (= of the holding display Dm13 is set. 4) and the difference value (= 3) between the actual display level Lvr (= 1) is calculated. Then, one value is determined from the values from 1 to 3 which is the difference value, and the determined value is determined as the additional display level Lva. As a method of determining one value, a random number may be used, or the maximum possible value (3 in this specific example) may always be adopted. In this way, the additional display level Lva is determined. After executing step S4305, the process advances to step S4306.

  In step S4306, the content of the holding effect is determined. Specifically, the content of the suggestive effect according to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed and the display mode of the changed hold display are determined. For example, when the target whose display mode is changed is the hold display Dm11, the suggestive effect is determined to be the suggestive effect (pattern 1) shown in FIG. Similarly, when the target whose display mode is changed is the hold display Dm12, the hold display Dm13, or the hold display Dm14, the suggestive effect (Pattern 2), the suggestive effect (Pattern 3), or the suggestive effect ( Select pattern 4).

  Further, when determining the display mode of the changed hold display, the added value of the actual display level Lvr and the additional display level Lva of the hold display of which the display mode is changed is calculated, and the added value is dealt with. The display mode is determined based on the correspondence between the actual display level Lvr and the display mode of the hold display shown in FIG. 88 (b). For example, when the holding game times corresponding to the holding display Dm13 shown in the first holding effect recording area of FIG. 101 (a) is determined as the target for changing the display mode, the additional display level Lva is set to 2. In this case, since the added value of the actual display level Lvr (= 1) and the additional display level Lva (= 2) is 3, the actual display level Lvr and the hold display mode shown in FIG. 88 (b) are displayed. On the basis of the correspondence relationship with, the display mode of the changed hold display is determined to be green. After executing step S4306, the process advances to step S4307.

  In step S4307, the content of the determined holding effect is set in the holding effect command. Then, it progresses to step S4308.

  In step S4308, all the hold changeable flags that have been turned ON in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area are turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S4309.

  In step S4309, the value of the actual display level Lvr of the pending game times for which the display mode is changed is updated to Lvr ← Lvr + Lva. That is, since the actual display level is changed by changing the display mode of the hold display, the value of the actual display level Lvr recorded in the storage area for holding effect is changed to the actual display level Lvr after the display mode is changed. Update to the value of. After that, the process of determining the content of the holding effect is ended.

  As described above, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is an object of the jackpot lottery prior to the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display, which is the target of changing the display mode. The jackpot random number counter C1 is changed to a higher display mode than the hold display mode. The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment performs the above-described processing, so that the following effects are achieved.

  For example, when there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player can change the display mode of the specific hold display. You may want to change. However, contrary to the wishes of the player, the pending display corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery after the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the pending display in which the player desires to change the display mode. The display mode of may change. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  According to the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when changing the display mode of the predetermined hold display, the big hit random number counter C1 which is the target of the big hit lottery is preceded by the big hit random number counter C1 corresponding to the predetermined hold display. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the corresponding display mode of the hold display. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the desire of the player, the display of the hold display corresponding to the jackpot random number counter C1 which is the target of the jackpot lottery after the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display that the player desires to change the display mode. Even when the mode is changed, the hold display in which the display mode is changed changes to a display mode higher than the display mode of the hold display in which the player desires to change the display mode. It is possible to suppress the decrease of the above-mentioned, and rather, it is possible to impart a further expectation.

  Further, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, when determining the display mode of the hold display, corresponds to another hold display different from the hold display for which the display mode is determined, as in the case of the eighth embodiment. The display mode of the hold display is determined based on the jackpot random number counter C1. Therefore, by using the hold display of the object whose display mode is determined, it is possible to suggest the player information about the hold game times corresponding to other hold displays.

  More specifically, when the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold display, the pachinko machine 10 of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display different from the target hold display whose display mode is changed. Based on the value, the display mode after the change of the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed is determined. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the information about the pending game times corresponding to the other pending displays to the player by using the pending display whose display mode is changed.

  Further, similarly to the eighth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment executes a suggestive effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display. Therefore, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display and to give a sense of expectation. In other words, it is possible to let the player recognize that there is a correlation between the suggested effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and the execution of the suggested effect can be used to change the display mode of the hold display. On the other hand, the player can be paid attention to. In other words, in addition to the effect of performing a suggestive effect such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as giving an expectation or a feeling of tension to the subsequent game times, a suggestive effect By changing the display mode of the hold display after the above, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display, and to enhance the interest of the game in a synergistic manner. be able to.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when performing the suggestive effect, a stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the set display mode (before the change of the display mode) between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Depending on the magnitude of the difference between the actual display level Lvr and the actual display level Lvr), a process of selecting a suggestive effect to be executed from among a plurality of types of suggestive effects to be executed may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, and in addition to the effect executed as the suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type.

J. Tenth Embodiment:
It is also possible to employ suggestive effects different from those of the eighth and ninth embodiments. Hereinafter, other suggestive effects that can be adopted will be described.

<Other example 1 of suggestive production>
FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggestive effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 1 of the suggestive effect. As shown in FIG. 105 (a), in the suggestion effect of this another example, the player selects a hold display which is a target for changing the display mode. Specifically, at the same time when the game time is started, a display prompting the player to select a hold display whose display mode is to be changed within the time limit by operating the effect operation buttons 24 is displayed on the display surface 41a. To do. The time limit is set to a time that allows the player to select the hold display within the fluctuation time of the game cycle being executed, for example, a time shorter than the fluctuation time of the game cycle to be executed by 1 second. To do.

  Each time the player operates the effect operation button 24, the arrow YJ displayed on the hold display moves one position to the left, and the effect operation button 24 operates after the arrow YJ moves to the end of the existing hold display. When it is done, the arrow YJ is moved again onto the hold display Dm11.

  As shown in FIG. 105 (b), at the timing when the time limit has expired, another object (the object X1 of "smoke" in FIG. 105 (b)) is temporarily displayed on the hold display located under the arrow YJ. By doing so, the player cannot see the hold display.

  After that, when the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode.

  On the other hand, if the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  Hereinafter, a process for realizing the suggestive effect in the different example 1 will be specifically described.

  FIG. 106 is a storage area for holding effect in another example 1. 106 (a) shows the first holding effect storage area in the different example 1, and FIG. 106 (b) shows the second holding effect storage area in the different example 1. The storage area for holding effect in another example 1 includes a storage area for storing the display level upper limit value Lvm and the actual display level Lvr corresponding to each holding game time. The method of determining the value of the display level upper limit value Lvm and the value of the actual display level Lvr of each holding game time is the same as in the eighth and ninth embodiments, and is determined in the holding effect parameter setting process.

  In the suggestion effect, when the time limit has elapsed and the pending game time selected by the player has been determined, it is determined whether the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in the selected pending game time, and the display level upper limit value. When Lvm> actual display level Lvr, the display mode of the hold display is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold game times selected by the player is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 is the display level upper limit Lvm> actual display level Lvr, so the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is The display mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). That is, the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed to the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed. Change the mode. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  If the hold game time selected by the player is not the display level upper limit Lvm> actual display level Lvr (for example, the hold display Dm11 in FIG. 106 (a)), the display mode of the selected hold display is Do not change.

  The suggestion effect in the other example 1 can be applied to the above eighth embodiment and ninth embodiment.

  First, a case where the suggestive effect in the different example 1 is applied to the above eighth embodiment will be described. In the above-described eighth embodiment, the first hold effect among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in step S4003 or step S4004 (FIG. 98) when determining the hold display for changing the display mode. The holding display corresponding to the holding game time executed first in the storage area for use or the second holding effect storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode, but instead of the process, the player performs a production operation. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by operating the button 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by operating the effect operation button 24 is not ON. In this case, a process of not changing the hold display may be applied.

  Then, when the suggestion effect of another example 1 is applied and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located below the arrow is temporarily changed to another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105 (b)). By displaying it, the player can not visually recognize the hold display.

  After that, when the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode.

  On the other hand, if the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  By doing this, a new playability is created in which the player selects the hold display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed or not. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency. Furthermore, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable, the order in which the hold display selected by the player among the existing hold displays is the target of the jackpot lottery is later. , The number of steps of rank increase of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode in the hold display, which is the target of the display mode change, is increased, and the same effect as that of the eighth embodiment is achieved, and the game is played. It is possible to give the person a sense of expectation.

  Next, a case where the suggestive effect in the different example 1 is applied to the above ninth embodiment will be described. In the above-described ninth embodiment, the first hold effect among the hold game times in which the hold changeable flag is ON in step S4303 or step S4304 (FIG. 104) when determining the hold display for changing the display mode. The holding display corresponding to the holding game time executed most later in the storage area for storage or the second holding production storage area is determined as the target for changing the display mode, but instead of the processing, the player operates the production operation button. When the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the operation of 24 is ON, the hold display is changed, and the hold changeable flag of the hold display selected by the player by operating the effect operation button 24 is not ON. May be applied to the process of not changing the hold display.

  Then, when the suggestion effect of another example 1 is applied and at the timing when the time limit ends, the hold display located below the arrow is temporarily changed to another object (the object X1 of “smoke” in FIG. 105 (b)). By displaying it, the player can not visually recognize the hold display.

  After that, when the display mode can be changed, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the hold display is displayed in the changed display mode.

  On the other hand, if the display mode cannot be changed, the hold display is displayed in the same display mode as before the change without changing the display mode.

  By doing this, a new playability is created in which the player selects the hold display whose display mode is desired to be changed, and whether the display mode of the hold display selected by the player can be changed or not. It is possible to give the player a sense of urgency. Furthermore, when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changeable, it is higher than the display mode of the hold display of the hold game times executed prior to the hold display of the target whose display mode is changed. Since the display is changed to the hold display, the same effect as that of the ninth embodiment can be obtained, and the player can be provided with an expectation.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the other example 1 can create a new game property such as allowing the player to select the hold display in the suggestion effect. In addition, as described above, the suggestive effect for allowing the player to select the hold display in the other example 1 can be applied to the above eighth embodiment and ninth embodiment. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the display mode of the hold display is changed depending on whether the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is ON. Therefore, it is possible to create new playability such as whether or not the display mode of the hold display selected by the player himself changes.

  In this case, if the hold changeable flag corresponding to the hold display selected by the player is not ON, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the suggestive effect is executed. Therefore, it is possible to reverse the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display is changed after the suggestive effect is executed, and it is possible to give the game an unexpected effect. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  As described in the eighth embodiment, also in the other example 1, when the suggestive effect is executed, a plurality of set display modes are set between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. A suggestive effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared in accordance with the size of the stepwise width (difference in the actual display level Lvr between before and after the change of the display mode) in the stage. The processing may be adopted. By doing so, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, and in addition to the effect executed as the suggestion effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type.

<Other example 2 of suggestive production>
FIG. 107 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggested effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggested effect. FIG. 107A shows a state of suggestive effect in this another example. FIG. 107 (b) shows a hold display that is displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect in this another example is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the suggestive effect of the present another example is the suggestive effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in this another example, the missile W5 explodes without hitting any of the hold displays, even though the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode. Then, as shown in FIG. 107 (b), the display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a does not change after the suggestive effect is executed, even though the suggestive effect in this another example is executed. . The specific processing will be described below.

  This second modified example also uses the first holding effect storage area and the second holding effect storage area shown in FIG. 106. Then, the pending display that is the target of changing the display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined pending game times, it is determined whether or not the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, FIG. 90 of the eighth embodiment ( Like the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in b), a suggestive effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm. Change to.

  For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 is the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and thus the diagram of the eighth embodiment. A suggestive effect similar to the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and thereafter, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). That is, the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed to the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed. Change the mode. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  On the other hand, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode, if the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied, it is shown in FIG. Perform suggestive performance.

  By executing the suggestion effect in the second example as described above in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. The recognition can be overturned, and the game can be given unexpectedness. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Other example 3 of suggestive production>
FIG. 108 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggested effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 2 of the suggested effect. FIG. 108 (a) shows a state of suggestive effect in this another example. FIG.108 (b) has shown the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after completion | finish of the suggestion production in this another example.

  As shown in FIG. 108 (a), the suggestive effect of the present another example is the suggestive effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode. However, in the suggestion effect in this another example, as shown in FIG. 108 (b), the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target of changing the display mode, and as shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold display displayed on the display surface 41a does not change after the suggestive effect is finished.

  The suggestive effect can be realized by executing the same processing as that of the second modification. Specifically, the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 106 are used. Then, the pending display that is the target of changing the display mode is determined by lottery. In the determined pending game times, it is determined whether the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, then in FIG. 90 (b) of the eighth embodiment. Like the suggested effect (Pattern 4) shown, a suggestive effect that changes the display mode of the hold display is executed, and then the display mode of the hold display is changed to a display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm. .

  For example, in FIG. 106, when the hold display for which the display mode is changed is the hold display Dm13, the hold display Dm13 is the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr, and thus the diagram of the eighth embodiment. A suggestive effect similar to the suggestive effect (pattern 4) shown in 90 (b) is executed, and thereafter, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to the display mode corresponding to the display level upper limit value Lvm (= 4). That is, the display mode “white” corresponding to the actual display level Lvr (= 1) of the hold display Dm13 before the display mode is changed to the display mode “red” corresponding to the display level upper limit Lvm (= 4) is displayed. Change the mode. Then, after changing the display mode, the actual display level Lvr of the hold display Dm13 is updated from 1 to 4.

  On the other hand, in the hold game times corresponding to the hold display that is the target of changing the display mode, if the display level upper limit value Lvm> the actual display level Lvr is not satisfied, the suggestion shown in FIG. To execute.

  By executing the suggestion effect in the third example as described above in combination with the suggestion effect executed in the eighth embodiment, the display mode of the hold display changes after the suggestion effect is executed. The recognition can be overturned, and the game can be given unexpectedness. Furthermore, when the suggestive effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

<Other example 4 of suggestive production>
After the suggestive effect is executed, the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays may be changed. For example, in the first hold effect storage area and the second hold effect storage area shown in FIG. 106, when the display level upper limit Lvm> the actual display level Lvr in two or more adjacent hold game times, The display modes of the two or more adjacent hold displays are changed at substantially the same time.

  Further, for example, the following suggestive effect can be executed prior to changing the display mode of two or more adjacent hold displays.

  FIG. 109 is an explanatory diagram showing a suggested effect executed by the pachinko machine 10 as another example 4 of the suggested effect. FIG. 109 (a) shows a state of suggestive effect in this another example. FIG. 109 (b) shows a hold display displayed on the display surface 41a after the suggestion effect in this another example is finished.

  As shown in FIG. 109 (a), the suggestive effect of the present another example is the suggestive effect that the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode. In the suggestion effect of this another example, the missile W5 is fired toward the hold display, which is the target for changing the display mode, and hits two adjacent hold displays. After that, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), the display mode of two adjacent hold displays changes,

  By executing such suggestive effect, it is possible to give the player an expectation of how many display modes of the hold display will change after the suggestive effect is executed.

K. Eleventh embodiment:
K1. Gaming machine structure:
The structure of the gaming machine in this embodiment will be described. It should be noted that components having the same functions as those in the above embodiment will be described using the same reference numerals.

  FIG. 110 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eleventh embodiment. The pachinko machine 10 includes a wooden outer frame 11 combined in a substantially rectangular shape. When the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall, the outer frame 11 is fixed to the island facility of the game hall. Further, the pachinko machine 10 includes a pachinko machine body 12 rotatably supported by the outer frame 11. The pachinko machine body 12 includes an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 is rotatably supported by the metal hinge 15 with respect to the outer frame 11. The front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by a metal hinge 16. On the back surface of the inner frame 13, control devices such as a main control device, a sound emission control device, and a display control device that control the pachinko machine body 12 are arranged. Details of these control devices will be described later. Further, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a cylinder lock 17. The cylinder lock 17 has a function of locking the inner frame 13 to the outer frame 11 in a non-releasable manner and a function of locking the front door frame 14 to the inner frame 13 in a non-releasable manner. Each lock is unlocked by performing a predetermined operation on the cylinder lock 17 using a dedicated key.

  An open window portion 18 is formed in a substantially central portion of the front door frame 14. Around the window 18 of the front door frame 14, resin parts and electric parts for decorating the pachinko machine 10 are provided. The illuminated component is configured by light emitting means including various lamps such as LEDs. The light emitting means plays a role of enhancing the effect by turning on or blinking at the time of a big hit lottery performed by the pachinko machine 10, at the time of a big hit win, when a reach occurs, and the like. A glass unit 19 made of two sheet glasses is arranged on the back side of the front door frame 14, and the opened window portion 18 is closed by the glass unit 19. A game board described later is detachably attached to the inner frame 13, and a player of the pachinko machine 10 can visually recognize the game board from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 19. Details of the game board will be described later.

  The front door frame 14 is provided with an upper plate 20 and a lower plate 21 for storing game balls. The upper plate 20 is formed in the shape of a box with an open upper surface, and stores game balls such as lent balls lent from a lending machine (not shown) and prize balls discharged from the pachinko machine body 12. The game balls stored in the upper plate 20 are supplied to the game ball launching mechanism provided in the pachinko machine body 12. The game ball launching mechanism is driven by the operation of the operation handle 25 by the player, and launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 20 to the front surface of the game board. The lower plate 21 is arranged below the upper plate 20, and is formed in a box shape having an open upper surface. The lower plate 21 stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 20. On the bottom surface of the lower plate 21, a discharge port 22 for discharging the game balls stored in the lower plate 21 is formed. A lever 23 is provided below the discharge port 22, and a player can switch the discharge port 22 between a closed state and an open state by operating the lever 23. When the player operates the lever 23 to open the discharge port 22, the game ball falls from the discharge port 22 and the game ball is discharged from the lower plate 21 to the outside.

  An effect operation button 24 as an operation receiving means is provided in front of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20. The effect operation button 24 is an operation unit for the player to perform an input operation for the game effect performed by the pachinko machine 10. When the player operates the staging operation button 24 at a predetermined timing prepared by the pachinko machine 10, a game effect in which the operation is reflected is performed by the pachinko machine 10.

  Further, an operation handle 25 for a player to operate is provided on the right side of the front door frame 14 in a front view. When the player operates (rotates) the operation handle 25, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board in conjunction with the operation. Inside the operation handle 25, a touch sensor 25a for allowing the driving of the game ball launching mechanism, a weight button 25b for stopping the launch of the game ball by the game ball launching mechanism by the player's pressing operation, and an operating handle 25. There is provided a variable resistor 25c for detecting the amount of turning operation of the device by a change in electric resistance. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25 clockwise, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount. Then, the game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c.

  On the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 in front view, a game ball launch button 26 for a player to operate is provided. The game ball launch button 26 is operated by the player to launch the game ball to the front surface of the game board with a predetermined launch intensity regardless of the amount of rotation of the operating handle 25 by the player. Specifically, when the player operates the game ball firing button 26, the game ball is fired on the front surface of the game board with the same firing strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operation handle 25 is maximum. In the case of the present embodiment, when the game ball is fired by operating the game ball firing button 26, the game ball flows to the right side of the game board in front view and flows down the right side of the game board. That is, by operating the game ball firing button 26, the player can make a so-called "right hit". In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball launch button 26 is operated, the game ball is launched to the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on. . That is, the player turns on at least the touch sensor 25a by grasping the operation handle 25, and then operates the game ball launch button 26 to launch the game ball triggered by the operation of the game ball launch button 26. Can be realized.

  In the present embodiment, the game ball launch button 26 is arranged on the left side of the peripheral portion of the upper plate 20 when viewed from the front, but the game ball launch button 26 is arranged at another position. May be adopted. For example, a configuration may be adopted in which the game ball firing button 26 is arranged inside (peripheral portion) of the operation handle 25, like the weight button 25b. By doing so, the player can operate the operation handle 25, the weight button 25b, and the game ball firing button 26 with only the right hand.

  FIG. 111 is a front view of the game board 30. The game board 30 is made of plywood, and a game area PA is formed on the front surface thereof. An inner rail portion 31a and an outer rail portion 31b are attached to the game board 30 so as to partition a part of the outer edge of the game area PA. A guide rail 31 for guiding a game ball is formed between the inner rail portion 31a and the outer rail portion 31b. The game ball fired from the game ball firing mechanism is guided by the guide rail 31 and discharged to the upper part of the game area PA, and thereafter flows down the game area PA. In the game area PA, a plurality of nails 42 are planted substantially perpendicularly to the game board 30, and each accessory such as a windmill is provided. These nails 42 and the windmill disperse and organize the falling directions of the game balls flowing down the game area PA.

  The game board 30 is provided with a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, and a V winning opening 48. Further, the game board 30 is provided with a variable display unit 40 and a main display portion 45. The main display unit 45 has a special drawing unit 37, a general drawing unit 38, and a round display unit 39.

  The general winning openings 32 are entrances into which game balls can enter, and a plurality of them are provided on the game board 30. In this embodiment, when the game balls enter the general winning opening 32, 10 game balls are paid out from the payout device 71 as prize balls.

  The first starting opening 33 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter. The first starting port 33 is provided below the center of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33, three game balls are paid out as prize balls, and a jackpot lottery described later is executed.

  The second starting port 34 is a ball entrance into which a game ball can enter, and is provided on the right side of the game board 30. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball, and a jackpot lottery to be described later is executed. Further, the second starting port 34 is provided with an electric accessory 34a.

  The through gate 35 has a through hole penetrating in the vertical direction. The through gate 35 is a through gate that serves as a trigger for executing a lottery for opening the electric accessory 34a. Specifically, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the main control device 60 performs an internal lottery (electric accessory release lottery) triggered by the passage. As a result of the internal lottery, when the power combination opening is won, the electric accessory 34a shifts to the power combination opening state in which it is opened in a predetermined manner. Since the through gate 35 is arranged on the upstream side of the second starting port 34 with respect to the flow direction of the game ball, the game ball that has passed through the through gate 35 flows down in the game area PA after passing to the second position. It is possible to enter the starting port 34. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the payout of the prize ball is not executed.

  The variable winning device 36 is provided with a big winning opening 36a leading to the back side of the game board 30 and an opening / closing door 36b for opening and closing the big winning opening 36a. The opening / closing door 36b is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot enter the special winning opening 36a. When the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the main control device 60 executes a jackpot lottery (internal lottery). As a result of the big hit lottery, if the big hit or the small hit is won, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the open / close execution mode. The opening / closing execution mode is a mode in which the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is executed. Specifically, when the open / close door 36b of the variable winning device 36 shifts to the open / close execution mode, the closed state in which the game ball cannot enter changes to the open state in which the game ball can enter and a predetermined condition is satisfied. After that, the state transits to the closed state again. In this embodiment, when a game ball enters the special winning opening 36a of the variable winning device 36, the payout device 71 pays out 15 game balls as prize balls.

  The V winning opening 48 is a winning opening into which a game ball can enter and is a winning entrance that is a condition for operating the high probability mode. The V winning opening 48 is provided with an opening / closing door 48a. The opening / closing door 48a is changed from a closed state to an open state at a predetermined timing in a round game that occurs in an open / close execution mode executed in response to the jackpot lottery, and then is closed after a certain period of time. Return. When the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 while the opening / closing door 48a is in the open state, the lottery mode shifts to the high-probability mode after the round game ends. When the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment executes 120 game times in the game state of the high probability mode, after that, the lottery mode shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. Although illustration is omitted, a distribution piece is provided on a path through which the game ball flows from the opening / closing door 48a to the V winning opening 48. The game balls that have entered from the opening / closing door 48a are distributed by the distribution piece into a path that enters the V winning opening 48 and a path that does not enter the V winning opening 48. When it is detected that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 except when the opening / closing door 48a is controlled to be opened as an internal control and the distribution piece is controlled in the direction of entering the V winning opening 48. Is determined to be an illegal prize and notifies that an illegal prize has occurred. In the present embodiment, the notification sound is output and the LED lamp blinks.

  Further, an out port 43 is provided at the bottom of the game board 30, and game balls that have not entered the various ball inlets are discharged from the game area PA through the out port 43.

  The special drawing unit 37 includes a first symbol display portion 37a and a second symbol display portion 37b. The first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b are each configured by a segment display in which a plurality of segment light emitting portions are arranged in a predetermined manner.

  The first symbol display portion 37a is a display portion for displaying the first symbol. The first symbol refers to a symbol that is variably displayed or stopped based on the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is performed, the first symbol display portion 37a is a display mode until the segment display is caused to perform a display corresponding to the lottery result. , The variable display or predetermined display of the first symbol is performed. When the lottery is finished, the first symbol display unit 37a causes the segment display to perform a stop display of the first symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the big hit lottery is executed when the game balls enter the first starting opening 33 are also referred to as the first starting opening game times.

  The second symbol display portion 37b is a display portion for displaying the second symbol. The second symbol refers to a symbol that is displayed in a variable or stopped manner based on the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. When the jackpot lottery triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is performed, the second symbol display portion 37b is a display mode until the segment display displays the lottery result. , The variable display of the second symbol or a predetermined display is performed. When the lottery is completed, the second symbol display section 37b causes the second symbol display section 37b to cause the segment display to perform a stop display of the second symbol corresponding to the lottery result. Hereinafter, the game times in which the jackpot lottery is executed when the game balls enter the second starting opening 34 are also referred to as the second starting opening game times.

  Here, the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a, or the time from the start of the variable display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b to the stop display, It is also called the fluctuation time. Specifically, the time from the start of the variable display of the first symbol displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a to the stop display is also called the first variation time, and on the second symbol display portion 37b. The time from the start of the variable display of the displayed second symbol to the stop display is also called the second variable time.

  The special figure unit 37 further includes a first hold display section 37c and a second hold display section 37d, which are LED lamps, at positions adjacent to the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b.

  The 1st reservation display part 37c displays the number of reservations of the 1st starting opening 33 by the color and combination of the LED lamp to light. In this embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the first starting opening 33 are reserved.

  The second hold display section 37d displays the number of hold of the second starting port 34 depending on the color and combination of the LED lamps to be turned on. In the present embodiment, up to four game balls that have entered the second starting port 34 are reserved.

  The universal figure unit 38 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner. When the electric accessory opening lottery triggered by the passage of the through gate 35 is performed, the universal figure unit 38 causes the light emitting display to display a lighting display, a blinking display, or a predetermined display. When the electric accessory release lottery is finished, the universal figure unit 38 displays a predetermined mode corresponding to the lottery result.

  The round display unit 39 is composed of a light emitting display unit in which a plurality of LED lamps are arranged in a predetermined manner, and displays the number of round games that occur in the open / close execution mode or a display corresponding to it. The round game is opened and closed until either a predetermined upper limit duration time elapses or a predetermined upper limit number of game balls enter the variable winning device 36 is satisfied. It is a game in which the open state of the door 36b is continued. The number of round games depends on the type of jackpot winning that triggered the transition. The round display unit 39 starts displaying the number of round games when the opening / closing execution mode is started, and ends when the opening / closing execution mode is ended.

  Note that the special drawing unit 37, the general-purpose drawing unit 38, and the round display unit 39 are not limited to being configured by a segment display or a light emitting display using an LED lamp, and include, for example, a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, It may be configured by various display devices such as a CRT or a dot matrix display capable of showing the lottery results during the lottery.

  The variable display unit 40 is arranged substantially in the center of the game area PA. The variable display unit 40 includes a symbol display device 41. The symbol display device 41 includes a liquid crystal display. The display content of the symbol display device 41 is controlled by the display control device 100. The configuration of the display device included in the variable display unit 40 is not limited to the symbol display device 41, and may be configured by various display devices such as a plasma display device, an organic EL display device, or a CRT.

  The symbol display device 41, when the first symbol display portion 37a displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of a game ball into the first starting opening 33, a variable display or a predetermined display of the symbol in accordance therewith. I do. Further, the symbol display device 41, when the second symbol display section 37b displays a variable display or a predetermined display based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbol in accordance therewith. Is displayed. The symbol display device 41 is not limited to the variable display or the predetermined display of the symbols triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, and when the jackpot is won. The effect display during the opening / closing execution mode to be changed is also performed. Hereinafter, details of the symbol display device 41 will be described.

  FIG. 112 is an explanatory diagram showing the symbols and the display surface 41a that are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. FIG. 112A is an explanatory diagram showing the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol that is variably displayed on the symbol display device 41. The first liquid crystal design is an image displayed on the design display device 41, and is a design corresponding to the first design displayed on the first design display portion 37a. The second liquid crystal design is an image displayed on the design display device 41 and is a design corresponding to the second design displayed on the second design display portion 37b.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (a), the symbols indicating the numbers 1 to 8 are variably displayed on the symbol display device 41 as the symbols for the first liquid crystal or the symbols for the second liquid crystal. In addition, as the variable displayed symbols, it is also possible to adopt a symbol in which a symbol such as a character is added to each symbol showing numbers 1 to 8.

  FIG. 112 (b) is an explanatory view showing the display surface 41 a of the symbol display device 41. As shown in the figure, a main display area MA and a first sub display area SA1 are displayed on the display surface 41a. In the main display area MA, there are cases where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and cases where an image of the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed. Similarly, in the first sub display area SA1, similar to the main display area MA, there are cases where an image of the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and where there is an image of the second liquid crystal symbol. Specifically, when the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA, the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub display area SA1, and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA. When is displayed, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. That is, the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the main display area MA and the liquid crystal symbol displayed in the first sub display area SA1 are switched and displayed in a predetermined case.

  In the main display area MA, three symbol columns Z1, Z2, Z3 on the left, center, and right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 as the symbols for the first liquid crystal or the symbols for the second liquid crystal shown in FIG. 112 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol A floating display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L1.

  Specifically, when a game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol columns Z1 to Z3 are periodically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol sequence Z1, the symbol sequence Z3, and the symbol sequence Z2, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the symbol sequences Z1 to Z3. . In the case where the variable display of the symbols is finished and the symbols are stopped and displayed, and when the result of the jackpot lottery by the main control device 60 is the jackpot, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L1. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the activated line L1. It should be noted that the modes of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol in the main display area MA are not limited to the above-described modes. For example, the number of symbols in the main display area MA, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbols, the number of symbols in each symbol, etc., the display mode of the symbols for the first liquid crystal and the symbols for the second liquid crystal. Can adopt various modes.

  In the first sub display area SA1, three symbol rows Z4, Z5, Z6 on the left, the center and the right are displayed. In each of the symbol columns Z4 to Z6, the symbols of the numbers 1 to 8 as the symbols for the first liquid crystal or the symbols for the second liquid crystal shown in FIG. 112 (a) are arranged in ascending or descending order of the numbers, and each symbol A floating display is provided in which the columns scroll periodically from top to bottom or from bottom to top. As shown in FIG. 112 (b), after the variable display by scrolling, one symbol for each symbol row is displayed in a stopped state on the activated line L2.

  Specifically, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34, the variable display in which the symbols in each of the symbol rows Z4 to Z6 are cyclically scrolled in a predetermined direction is started. Then, each symbol to be scrolled is changed from the variable display to the standby display in the order of the symbol sequence Z4, the symbol sequence Z6, and the symbol sequence Z5, and finally the predetermined symbols are stopped and displayed in the respective symbol sequences Z4 to Z6. . In the case where the variable display of the symbols ends and the display is stopped, if the result of the big hit lottery by the main control device 60 is the big hit, a predetermined combination of predetermined symbols is displayed on the activated line L2. It is formed. For example, the same combination of symbols is formed on the activated line L2. In addition, the aspect of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol in the first sub-display area SA1 is not limited to the above-described aspect. For example, the number of symbols in the first sub-display area SA1, the number of effective lines, the direction of variable display of symbols in the symbols, the number of symbols in each symbol, etc., the display of the symbols for the first liquid crystal and the symbols for the second liquid crystal. Various modes can be adopted as the mode.

  In the present embodiment, the same type of design is adopted as the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design. Specifically, as the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design, a design showing numbers 1 to 8 was adopted. In this way, by making the types of symbols displayed as the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design the same, for example, the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are displayed. When the display area to be displayed is switched between the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the display switching of the liquid crystal symbols. Further, for the player, it is possible to distinguish whether the liquid crystal design which is variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 is the first liquid crystal design or the second liquid crystal design. Can be hardened. By doing so, for example, from the state in which the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub display area SA1, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA. When switching to a state in which the two liquid crystal symbols are displayed and the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, it is possible to perform natural display switching without giving the player a feeling of strangeness. Also, by making it difficult for the player to distinguish the liquid crystal symbols that are variably displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1, the liquid crystal symbols are displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. Regardless of the type of design (design for the first liquid crystal or design for the second liquid crystal), the player is concentrated on the design for liquid crystal displayed in the main display area MA, or the main display area MA or The liquid crystal symbol displayed in the 1st sub-display area SA1 can be added with a game play which makes the player guess whether it is the first liquid crystal symbol or the second liquid crystal symbol.

  Also, different types of symbols can be adopted between the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol. For example, eight symbols showing numbers 1 to 8 may be adopted as the first liquid crystal design, and eight symbols showing alphabets A to H may be adopted as the second liquid crystal design. By doing so, it is possible for the player to determine which of the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in each of the main display region MA and the first sub display region SA1. It can be easily identified. As a result, it is possible for the player to easily understand the game situation.

  Also, different types of symbols can be adopted between the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. For example, eight symbols showing numbers 1 to 8 are adopted as liquid crystal symbols to be displayed in the main display area MA, and eight alphabets A to H are shown as liquid crystal symbols to be displayed in the first sub display area SA1. The pattern of may be adopted. Further, a display mode for displaying different kinds of symbols (the symbols of numbers 1 to 8 and the symbols of alphabets A to H) between the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol, and the main display area MA. You may combine with the display mode which displays a different kind of symbol with 1st sub display area SA1. As described above, various display modes can be adopted as the display modes of the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), a liquid crystal general-purpose display area NA is displayed on the display surface 41a. In the liquid crystal universal figure display area NA, a symbol corresponding to the universal figure unit 38 is displayed. Specifically, the symbols corresponding to the lottery results of the electric accessory release lottery, which is performed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, are displayed. In the present embodiment, three numbers 1 to 8 are vertically displayed in the liquid crystal universal image display area NA. The three numbers arranged vertically vary with periodicity. After the variable display, a set of vertically arranged numbers is displayed in a stopped state.

  As shown in FIG. 112 (b), a first reserved display area Ds1 and a second reserved display area Ds2 are displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. In the first holding display area Ds1, the number of holdings based on winning in the first starting opening 33 is displayed. In the second holding display area Ds2, the number of holdings based on winning in the second starting opening 34 is displayed. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of reserved game balls that have won in the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is four, respectively.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 112 (b), on the display surface 41a, blinking display and lighting synchronized with the variable display and the stop display of the first symbol displayed in the first symbol display portion 37a of the special symbol unit 37. The first synchronous display section Sync1 for displaying and the second synchronous display for performing blinking display and lighting display in synchronization with the variable display and the stop display of the second symbol displayed on the second symbol display section 37b of the special drawing unit 37. And a section Sync2. Specifically, when the first symbol display unit 37a is performing variable display, the first synchronization display unit Sync1 displays a blinking display, and when the first symbol display unit 37a displays a stop display, The 1-synchronization display portion Sync1 displays a light. In addition, when the second symbol display portion 37b is variably displayed, the second synchronization display portion Sync2 displays blinking, and when the second symbol display portion 37b displays stop, the second synchronization display. The section Sync2 displays a light.

  In the present embodiment, the display surface 41a is configured to display the main display area MA, the first sub display area SA1, the first sync display section Sync1, and the second sync display section Sync2. A configuration in which 41a does not display some or all of these displays may be adopted.

K2. Electrical configuration of the gaming machine:
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described. In this description, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described using block diagrams.

  FIG. 113 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10. The pachinko machine 10 mainly includes a main control device 60, and includes a sound emission control device 90 and a display control device 100. The main control device 60 includes a main control board 61 that controls the main control of the game. The main control board 61 includes an MPU 62 configured by elements having a plurality of functions. The MPU 62 includes a ROM 63 in which various control programs and fixed value data are recorded, and a RAM 64 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when executing the programs recorded in the ROM 63. The MPU 62 also includes an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and a counter circuit as a random number generator. Note that another element may have a part of the function of the MPU 62. The details of various areas provided in the ROM 63 and the RAM 64 will be described later.

  The main control board 61 is provided with input ports and output ports, respectively. The payout control device 70 and a power failure monitoring circuit 86 provided in the power supply device 85 are connected to the input side of the main control board 61. The main control board 61 receives a stable DC 24V power supply from the power supply device 85 via the power failure monitoring circuit 86. The power supply device 85 is connected to a commercial power supply as an external power supply, converts external power supplied from the commercial power supply into operating power required by the main control device 60, the payout control device 70, etc. Supply power. In addition, on the input side of the main control board 61, various winning openings such as a general winning opening 32, a first starting opening 33, a second starting opening 34, a through gate 35, a variable winning device 36, a V winning opening 48, and the like. Various detection sensors provided on the through gate are connected. Based on the signals from these detection sensors, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 determines whether or not a game ball flowing down the game area PA has entered each entrance, and the game ball passes through the through gate. Whether or not it is determined. Further, the MPU 62 executes a jackpot lottery based on the game balls entering the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34.

  On the output side of the main control board 61, there are a variable winning drive unit 36c for opening and closing the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36, and an electric auditors product driving unit 34b for opening and closing the electric auditors product 34a of the second starting opening 34. An open / close door drive unit 48b for opening / closing the open / close door 48a is connected to the main display unit 45. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 61, and the MPU 62 executes drive control of various drive units through the driver circuits.

  Specifically, in the open / close execution mode, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the variable winning award drive unit 36c so that the open / close door 36b is opened / closed. In addition, as a result of the electric accessory release lottery, when the electric role is released, the MPU 62 executes the drive control of the electric accessory drive unit 44b so that the electric accessory 34a is opened. Further, when a predetermined lottery result is obtained in the lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34, the V winning opening 48 is opened at a predetermined timing during the round game. The drive control of the open / close door drive unit 48b is executed so that the open / close door 48a to be closed is opened / closed. Further, in each game time, the MPU 62 executes the display control of the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b in the main display portion 45, and in the opening / closing execution mode, the round display in the main display portion 45. The display control of the unit 39 is executed.

  A payout control device 70 and a sound emission control device 90 are connected to the transmission side of the main control board 61. To the payout control device 70, for example, a prize ball command is transmitted from the main control device 60 based on the result of ball entry determination. When the main control device 60 transmits the prize ball command, the MPU 62 of the main control board 61 refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Specifically, when the entry of a game ball into the general winning opening 32 is specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and then to the first starting opening 33. When the entry of the game ball is specified, the prize ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is transmitted from the main control device 60, and the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is specified. A prize ball command corresponding to the payout of one game ball is transmitted from the main controller 60. The payout control device 70 controls the payout device 71 based on the prize ball command received from the main control device 60 to pay out the prize balls.

  A launch controller 80 is connected to the payout controller 70. The firing control device 80 controls the firing of the game ball firing mechanism 81. The game ball firing mechanism 81 is driven when a predetermined firing condition is satisfied. The operation handle 25 is connected to the firing control device 80. As described above, the operation handle 25 includes the touch sensor 25a, the weight button 25b, and the variable resistor 25c. When the player grips the operation handle 25, the touch sensor 25a is turned on, and when the player turns the operation handle 25, the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c changes corresponding to the turning operation amount, A game ball is launched from the game ball launching mechanism to the front surface of the game board with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor 25c. Further, the game ball launch button 26 is connected to the launch control device 80. When the player operates the game ball launch button 26, the game ball is launched onto the game board on condition that the touch sensor 25a is on.

  The voice emission control device 90 receives various commands transmitted from the main control device 60, and executes processing corresponding to the received various commands. When the main control device 60 transmits various commands, it refers to the command information storage area 63f of the ROM 63. Details of these various commands will be described later.

  In addition, the sound emission control device 90 controls the drive of various lamps 47 including light emitting means such as LEDs arranged in the front door frame 14 and the drive control of the speaker 46 based on various commands received from the main control device 60. And the display control device 100 is controlled. In addition, the production operation button 24 is connected to the sound emission control device 90, and when the production operation button 24 is operated by the player at a predetermined timing, the game production that reflects the operation is performed. The various lamps 47, the speaker 46, the display control device 100, and the like are controlled.

  The display control device 100 executes display control of the symbol display device 41 based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90. Specifically, the display control device 100 grasps, based on various commands received from the voice emission control device 90, the variation time of the symbols in the symbol display device 41 and the type of symbol combination to be finally stopped and displayed. The presence / absence of a reach, the contents of the reach effect, and the contents of the effect executed while the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design are variably displayed are understood. In the present embodiment, the stop time, which is the time during which the first liquid crystal design or the second liquid crystal design is stopped and displayed, is constant. Therefore, by determining the variable time, the unit game time, which is the time required for one game, is uniquely determined. The electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 has been described above.

  FIG. 114 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of various counters used in a jackpot lottery or the like. The various counter information is used when the MPU 62 makes a jackpot lottery, sets the display of the main display unit 45, and sets the symbol display of the symbol display device 41. Specifically, the big hit random number counter C1 is used for the big hit lottery. When sorting the jackpot type, the jackpot type counter C2 is used. A reach random number counter C3 is used for reach determination as to whether or not a reach is generated when the symbol sequence displayed on the symbol display device 41 is displaced and changed.

  The random number initial value counter CINI is used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. Further, the variation type counter CS is used when determining the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b of the main display portion 45, and the symbol display device 41. Further, the electric accessory release counter C4 is used for the electric accessory release lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34.

  Each of the counters C1 to C3, CINI, CS, and C4 is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the counter value every time it is updated, and the counter value returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in the lottery counter buffer 64a set in a predetermined area of the RAM 64.

  Further, the RAM 64 is provided with a holding information storage area 64b and a determination processing execution area 64c. The reserved information storage area 64b is provided with a first reserved area Ra and a second reserved area Rb. In the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first starting port 33 or the first starting port 44, the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are stored as pending information. The first reservation area Ra of the area 64b is chronologically stored. Further, when a game ball enters the second starting opening 34, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 at the timing of entering the ball are stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b. It is stored in time series.

  The jackpot random number counter C1 will be described in detail. The jackpot random number counter C1 is used in the jackpot lottery as described above. The jackpot random number counter C1 is configured, for example, to be sequentially incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 1199, and then returned to 0 after reaching the maximum value. When the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 1199).

  The big hit random number counter C1 is regularly updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When the game ball is stored in the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

  The value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra moves to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, is collated with the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and hits the jackpot. It is determined whether or not Further, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb moves to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c and is collated with the win / loss table stored in the win / loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63. , It is determined whether or not a big hit.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra is set to the first value in the determination processing execution area 64c. The process of moving to the execution area, collating with the win / loss table stored in the win / loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63, and determining whether or not to be a big hit, and the game ball entering the second starting opening 34 In this case, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c, and the value of the hit / miss table stored in the hit / miss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63 is stored. The process of collating and determining whether or not to be a jackpot is executed in parallel. In the following, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the game ball into the first start opening 33 is a big hit, and whether the jackpot of the game ball into the second start opening 34 is a big hit. Simultaneous variation of a pachinko machine capable of executing the determination process of whether or not in parallel and performing the variation display of the first symbol display portion 37a and the variation display of the second symbol display portion 37b in parallel. Also called.

  Next, the details of the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is used when determining the jackpot type. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that it is incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 39, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The jackpot type counter C2 is periodically updated, and when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering. When the game ball enters the second starting opening 34, it is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing of the entering.

  As described above, the MPU 62 performs the jackpot lottery using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c, and when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the determination processing execution area 64c. The jackpot type is determined using the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in. Further, the MPU 62 uses the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the jackpot type counter C2 to determine the display mode of the segment display stopped and displayed on the first symbol display section 37a and the second symbol display section 37b. . When making the determination, the stop result table stored in the stop result table storage area 63e of the ROM 63 is referred to.

  Next, details of the reach random number counter C3 will be described. The reach random number counter C3 is used when it is determined whether a reach occurs when the result of the jackpot lottery is not a jackpot. The reach random number counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 238, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The reach random number counter C3 is regularly updated, and the updated value is stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34 The game ball is stored in the second holding area Rb of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c, and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. The value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second holding area Rb is moved to the determination processing execution area 64c and then collated with the reach determination table stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63 to reach. Is determined. However, when the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 62 determines the reach generation regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3.

  Reach means that for some of the plurality of symbol strings displayed on the display screen of the symbol display device 41, a combination of symbols corresponding to the jackpot may be established. It is displayed and refers to a display state in which the symbols are displayed in a variable manner in the remaining symbol columns in that state. In addition, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, a combination of symbols corresponding to a big hit means a combination of the same symbols on a predetermined effective line. As a specific example, in the main display area MA of the display surface 41a of FIG. 112 (b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z1, and then the same symbols as Z1 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z3. The reach line is formed, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z2. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbols as the symbols forming the reach line are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z2.

  As another specific example, in the first sub display area SA1 of the display surface 41a of FIG. 112 (b), the symbols are first stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z4, and then the same symbols as Z4 are stopped and displayed in the symbol column Z6. The reach line is formed by doing this, and in the situation where the reach line is formed, the reach is achieved by performing variable display of the symbols in the symbol row Z5. Then, when a big hit occurs, the same symbol as the symbol forming the reach line is stopped and displayed in the symbol row Z5.

  Also, in the reach, while the reach line is formed, while performing the variable display of the symbols in the remaining symbol columns, and performing the reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on the background screen, In addition to reducing or displaying the combination of the symbols in which the reach line is formed, the reach effect is included by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display surface 41a. Further, the reach random number counter C3 and other counters are used to determine whether or not to perform advance notice display using a predetermined image such as a predetermined character when the reach effect is being performed or before the reach display. May be.

  Next, details of the fluctuation type counter CS will be described. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 62 determines the variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b and the variation time of the symbol in the symbol display device 41. The variation type counter CS is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 198, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value.

  The fluctuation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process described below is executed once, and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display on the first symbol display portion 37a or the second symbol display portion 37b and at the beginning of variation of the symbol by the symbol display device 41. The variable time table stored in the variable time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is used to determine the variable time in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b.

  Next, details of the electric accessory release counter C4 will be described. The electric accessory release counter C4 is configured to be incremented by 1 in the range of 0 to 465, for example, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The electric accessory release counter C4 is regularly updated and is stored in the electric reserve holding area 64d of the RAM 64 at the timing when the game ball enters the through gate 35. Then, at a predetermined timing, after the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 stored in the electric power holding area 64d moves to the electric accessory execution area 64e, the electric accessory release is performed in the electric accessory execution area 64e. A lottery is performed using the value of the counter C4 to control the electric accessory 34a in the open state. For example, if C4 = 0 to 463, the electric accessory 34a is controlled to the open state, and if C4 = 464 and 465, the electric accessory 34a is maintained in the closed state.

  Note that at least one of the value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, the value of the reach random number counter C3, and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 corresponds to the special information in the present invention. The value of the jackpot random number counter C1, the value of the jackpot type counter C2, and the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first holding area Ra and the second holding area Rb are also called holding information.

  Next, the hit / miss table will be described. The win / loss table is table data for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 when performing the jackpot lottery based on the jackpot random number counter C1. In the pachinko machine 10, a low-probability mode and a high-probability mode are set as lottery modes for the jackpot lottery, and the win / loss table for the low-probability mode is referred to in the jackpot lottery in the low-probability mode. In the jackpot lottery in the probability mode, the win / loss table for the high probability mode is referred to. Further, in the present embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 collates with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first holding area Ra of the holding information storage area 64b at the timing when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. The hit / no hit table and the hit / no hit table for collating with the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the determination processing execution area 64c at the timing when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 are stored as separate table data. ing. Specifically, the pachinko machine 10 includes a win / loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode), a win / loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode), and a win / loss table for the second starting opening (low). Four win / loss tables for the probability mode) and a win / loss table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode) are stored in the win / loss table storage area 63a of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 115 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win / fail table for the first starting opening. FIG. 115 (a) shows a win / loss table for the first starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 115 (b) shows a win / loss table for the first starting port (for high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 115 (a), in the hit / miss table for the first starting opening (for the low probability mode), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. There is. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values (5 to 1199) other than the five values of 0 to 4 are out. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), 16 values 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 that is a jackpot in the hit / miss table for the first starting opening (for the high probability mode). Has been done. Then, among the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 16 values of 0 to 15 are out. As described above, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery than the low-probability mode.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the low probability mode is the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 set as the jackpot in the hit table for the high probability mode. Included in the group. However, as a result of the jackpot lottery, the number and value of the random numbers set as the jackpot are arbitrary as long as the probability of the jackpot in the high-probability mode is higher than that in the low-probability mode.

  FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the win / fail table for the second starting opening. FIG. 116 (a) shows a win / loss table for the second starting port (for low probability mode), and FIG. 116 (b) shows a win / loss table for the second starting port (for high probability mode).

  As shown in FIG. 116 (a), in the hit / miss table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode), five values 0 to 4 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. . Moreover, 500 values of 5 to 504 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the first small hit, and 50 values of 505 to 554 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the second small hit. 50 values of 555 to 604 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the third small hit. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 605 values of 0 to 604 are out.

  Here, the "small hit" is a transition trigger to the opening / closing execution mode in which the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed, but it is a win / fail result that is not a transition trigger in both the lottery mode and the support mode described later. is there. On the other hand, "disengagement" is a result of the judgment that neither the opening / closing execution mode transition trigger nor the lottery mode and the support mode transition trigger.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the first small hit, the second small hit, and the third small hit are set as the small hits. In the first small hit, the variable winning a prize device 36 having the opening period of 1.6 sec is opened once as the opening / closing execution mode. In the second small hit, the variable winning a prize device 36 having the opening period of 60 msec is opened 6 times as the opening / closing execution mode. In the third small hit, the variable winning a prize device 36 having the opening period of 60 msec is opened eight times as the opening / closing execution mode.

  As shown in FIG. 116 (b), in the hit / miss table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode), 16 values 0 to 15 are set as the values of the jackpot random number counter C1 which is a jackpot. . Further, 500 values of 16 to 515 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the first small hit, and 50 values of 516 to 565 are set as the value of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the second small hit. 50 values of 566 to 615 are set as the values of the big hit random number counter C1 which is the third small hit. Then, out of the values of 0 to 1199, values other than the 616 values of 0 to 615 are out.

  As described above, also in the win / loss table for the second starting opening, the high-probability mode has a higher probability of winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery, as compared to the low-probability mode, as in the win / loss table for the first starting opening. ing. Further, in the win / loss table for the second starting opening, in both the win / loss table for the low probability mode and the win / loss table for the high probability mode, a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) ) Is set to 500, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 is set, and when the jackpot lottery is executed triggered by the game ball entering the second starting opening, there is a probability of 500/1200. Is set to be

Next, the jackpot type will be described. A plurality of types of jackpots can be set in the pachinko machine 10. Specifically, for example, a plurality of types of jackpots can be set by providing differences in the following three modes or modes.
(1) Number of times of opening / closing of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (number of rounds)
(2) Aspects of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode (3) Lottery mode (low probability mode or high probability mode) of jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode

  As a mode of the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the above (2) opening / closing execution mode, occurrence of a game ball entering the variable winning device 36 (winning) from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. It is possible to set the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode so that the frequencies are relatively high and low. In the present embodiment, in the high-frequency winning mode, one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode continues until 30 seconds elapses or the number of game balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. Is set as follows. On the other hand, two types of low-frequency winning modes are set. The first is a low frequency set so that one opening of the open / close door 36b in the open / close execution mode continues until 1.6 seconds elapses or until the number of balls entering the open / close door 36b reaches 10. It is a winning mode. The second is a low frequency that is set so that one opening of the opening / closing door 36b in the opening / closing execution mode continues until 0.06 seconds elapses or until the number of balls entering the opening / closing door 36b reaches 10. It is a winning mode.

  In addition, the opening limit time for one opening of the opening / closing door 36b and the opening limit number for one opening are the occurrence of a ball entering the variable winning device 36 from the start to the end of the opening / closing execution mode. As long as the frequency is higher in the high frequency winning mode than in the low frequency winning mode, the opening mode of the opening / closing door 36b is arbitrary. Specifically, it is sufficient that the high-frequency winning mode has a longer opening limit time for one opening or a larger opening limit number for one opening than the low-frequency winning mode. In order to clarify the difference between the high-frequency winning mode and the low-frequency winning mode, in the opening / closing execution mode of the low-frequency winning mode, the variable winning device 36 may be configured so that winning is not substantially generated.

  In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is selected as a result of the jackpot lottery, the jackpot type counter C2 is used to sort the jackpot types. The jackpot type distribution corresponding to the value of the jackpot type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table in the distribution table storage area 63b of the ROM 63.

  FIG. 117 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of the distribution table. FIG. 117 (a) shows a distribution table for the first starting port, and FIG. 117 (b) shows a distribution table for the second starting port. The distribution table for the first starting port is referred to in the jackpot drawing based on the entry of the game balls into the first starting port 33, and the distribution table for the second starting port is directed to the second starting port 34. It is referred to in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (a), in the distribution table for the first starting port, 8R first-class jackpots and 8R second as jackpot types based on the entry of game balls into the first starting port 33. Two kinds of jackpots are set.

  In the 8R first-class jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened is eight (8 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Is. The 8R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game. When a game ball enters the open V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode. However, the number of game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times of execution of the first start mouth game time and the second start mouth game time executed in the high probability mode. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In addition, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, when the jackpot is further won and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 48 opened due to the jackpot, in the high probability mode executed so far. The number of game times is reset, and after a round game that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger, 120 game times are newly counted from the game times in the high-probability mode executed thereafter. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

  In the 8R second-class jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the mode of opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Is. The 8R second-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the V winning opening 48 is opened for 0.006 seconds in the fifth round of the round game. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot drawing after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode, but since the opening time of the V winning opening 48 is 0.006 seconds, The probability that the game ball wins the V winning opening 48 is extremely low. Therefore, the 8R second-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode is substantially the low-probability mode.

  In this way, the first-class jackpot is longer than the second-class jackpot, the opening time of the V winning opening 48 during the round game is long, and the game ball easily enters the V winning opening 48, so the opening / closing execution mode There is a high probability that the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end will be the high-probability mode. On the other hand, the second-class jackpot is shorter than the first-class jackpot because the opening time of the V winning opening 48 during the round game is short, and it is difficult for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48. The probability that the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery becomes a high probability mode is very low.

  In the distribution table for the first starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of "0 to 39", "0 to 19" correspond to the 8R type 1 jackpot and "20 to 39" are the 8R second jackpots. It is set to handle species jackpots.

  As shown in FIG. 117 (b), in the distribution table for the second starting port, as the jackpot type based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting port 34, 16R type 1 jackpot and 8R One kind of jackpot is set.

  In the 16R first-class jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode is 16 times (16 rounds), and the open / close control mode of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is the high-frequency winning mode. Is. The 16R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the 13th round of the round game. When a game ball enters the open V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode. However, the number of game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times of execution of the first start mouth game time and the second start mouth game time executed in the high probability mode. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode. In addition, in the game times executed in the high probability mode, when the jackpot is further won and the game ball is won in the V winning opening 48 opened due to the jackpot, in the high probability mode executed so far. The number of game times is reset, and after a round game that is executed with the jackpot as a trigger, 120 game times are newly counted from the game times in the high-probability mode executed thereafter. Therefore, when the jackpot is won in the high probability mode, the game times in the high probability mode may be continuously executed 120 times or more.

  As described above, in the 8R first-class jackpot, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is opened / closed in the opening / closing execution mode is 8 times (8 rounds), and the opening / closing control of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is performed. Is the high frequency winning mode. In addition, the 8R first-class jackpot is a jackpot lottery after the end of the opening / closing execution mode, provided that the V winning opening 48 is opened for 10 seconds in the fifth round of the round game, and the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48. This is a big hit when the lottery mode of becomes a high probability mode. However, the number of game times executed in the high probability mode is limited to 120 times, and the total number of times of execution of the first start mouth game time and the second start mouth game time executed in the high probability mode. When the number of times reaches 120, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery shifts from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

  In the distribution table for the second starting opening, among the values of the jackpot type counter C2 of “0 to 39”, “0 to 19” correspond to the 16R type 1 jackpot and “20 to 39” are the 8R first. It is set to handle species jackpots.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the jackpot is a jackpot, the jackpot distribution mode is a jackpot based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, and It is different from the case of a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the 2 start opening 34, and a clear difference is provided in the advantage for the player.

  In the pachinko machine 10, as a mode of the support mode of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 after the above (3) opening / closing execution mode is finished, the firing of the game ball continues to the game area PA in the same mode. When the comparison is performed in the above situation, the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode are set so that the frequency of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting opening 34 being in the open state per unit time becomes relatively high and low. Can be set.

  Specifically, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory opening lottery using the electric accessory opening counter C4 is different between the high frequency support mode and the low frequency support mode. . In the high frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electric role in the electric accessory open lottery is higher than in the low frequency support mode. Further, in the high-frequency support mode, the one-time release time of the electric accessory 34a when the electric-role combination opening win is set is set longer than in the low-frequency support mode.

  Although not adopted in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, when the electric power combination open wins and the electric Auditor product 34a is in the open state a plurality of times, the next operation is performed after the end of the one open state. The closing time until the opening state is started may be set shorter than one opening time. Furthermore, in the high frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set to be shorter than that in the low frequency support mode in order to perform the next electric accessory release lottery after one electric accessory release lottery is performed. May be.

  As described above, in the high frequency support mode, the probability that the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 is higher than that in the low frequency support mode. That is, the high frequency support mode functions as an auxiliary game state that assists the establishment of the special information acquisition condition.

  FIG. 118 is an explanatory diagram showing the contents of a win / loss table (electric win / loft lottery win / loss table) used when executing the electric win open lottery.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a win / loss table (for high-frequency support mode) for electric accessory release lottery used in the high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 118 (a), in the winning / discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for high-frequency support mode), there are 464 of 0 to 463 as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric role. The value is set. Two values, 464 and 465, are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is disengaged. That is, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed in the high frequency support mode, the winning combination of the electric role is won with a probability of 232/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening is won in the high frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.6 seconds.

  FIG. 118 (b) shows a win / loss table for electric accessory release lottery (for low frequency support mode) used in the low frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 118 (b), in the winning / discarding table for electric accessory release lottery (for low-frequency support mode), 462 of 0 to 461 as the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 that is to win the electric accessory The value is set. Four values 462 to 465 are set as the values of the electric accessory release counter C4 which is out of alignment. That is, in the low frequency support mode, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35 and the electric accessory release lottery is executed, the probability of winning the electric role is 231/233. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the electric role opening is won in the low frequency support mode, the electric accessory 34a is opened once, and the opening time is 1.4 seconds.

K3. Amusement machine playability:
Next, the playability of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 114, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment determines whether or not it is a big hit triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, and the second starting opening 34. It is a simultaneous variation machine that executes, in parallel, the determination process of whether or not a big hit is triggered by the entry of the game ball. Therefore, the game ball triggered by the game ball shot by the player operating the operation handle 25 entering the first starting opening 33 (first starting opening game time), and the game ball The game times (second start game times) triggered by the fact that the player has entered the 2 start openings 34 are executed in parallel.

  In addition, as described above, when the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the electric accessory open lottery is executed, and in the high frequency support mode, the electric role is released with a probability of 232/233, and the low frequency support mode is selected. At that time, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric role release. Therefore, when the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball passes through the through gate 35, the electric accessory 34a is opened with a high probability. That is, when the game ball is distributed to the right side of the game board 30, it is possible to cause the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34 with a high probability. Therefore, the player adjusts the launch strength of the game ball by using the operation handle 25, distributes the game ball on the left side of the game board 30 (see FIG. 111), and inserts the game ball into the first starting opening 33. Along with the game board 30 (see FIG. 111), the game balls are circulated on the right side to enter the game balls into the second starting opening 34, and the first starting opening game times and the second starting opening game times are arranged in parallel. It is possible to make it execute.

  However, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time of the second start opening game time is set to be very long compared to the variation time of the first starting opening game time. It is set. Specifically, in the low frequency support mode, the variation time of one game time of the first starting mouth game times is in the range of 5 seconds to 2 minutes, and the variation of one game time of the second starting mouth game times. The time is set to 10 minutes.

  On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the variation time of the second starting mouth game times is set to be shorter than the variation time of the first starting mouth game times. Specifically, in the high frequency support mode, the variation time of one game time of the first starting mouth game time is 1 minute, and the variation time of one game time of the second starting mouth game time is 0.5. Seconds.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the first start opening 33 to play the first start opening game. On the other hand, in the high frequency support mode, the flow of the game in which the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 34 to execute the second starting opening game time. , Has a game play that is advantageous to the player.

  Further, as shown in the hit / miss table for the second starting opening in FIG. 116 (b), in the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting opening, there is a 1/2 probability. You win the small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit). When the small hit is won, the opening / closing execution mode is executed, the opening / closing door 36b is opened, the game ball enters the special winning opening 36a, and the prize ball is paid out to the player. Therefore, in the high-frequency support mode, the player distributes the game balls to the right side of the game board 30 to add prize balls based on the balls entering the second starting opening 34, as well as small hits (first small hit, In some cases, it is possible to obtain a prize ball based on the entrance into the special winning opening 36a opened by the second prize or the third prize.

  As described above, the standard game flow in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is as follows.

  In the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball is distributed to the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 33.

  If you win the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the first start opening 33, and the big hit is the second kind big hit, after 100 rounds, you have to execute 100 game times in the high-frequency support mode. It is possible. In this case, a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, an electric role opening win is generated based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, and the second starting opening 34 in a state where the electric accessory 34a is opened. A game ball is entered, and a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening is executed. Even if the big hit in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is not a big hit, if the result of the lottery is a small hit, the opening / closing door 36b opens, so the game ball enters the big winning opening 36a. You may be able to get a prize ball.

  When the big hit is not won in the big hit lottery during 100 times of game play in the high frequency support, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. The lottery mode is a low probability mode. When the mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated again on the left side of the game board 30 to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 33.

  In low probability mode and low frequency support mode, a game ball is distributed to the left side of the game board 30 to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 33, and a big hit based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. If the jackpot is a type 1 jackpot and the game ball enters the V winning hole 48 during the round game, the high probability mode and the high frequency are passed after the round game. It is possible to execute 120 game times in the support mode. In this case, a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, an electric role opening win is generated based on the passage of the game ball through the through gate 35, and the second starting opening 34 in a state where the electric accessory 34a is opened. A game ball is entered, and a jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening is executed. Even if the big hit in the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is not a big hit, if the result of the lottery is a small hit, the opening / closing door 36b opens, so the game ball enters the big winning opening 36a. You may be able to get a prize ball.

  If you do not win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery during 120 game times in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the high-frequency support mode is switched to the low-frequency support mode, and the high-probability mode is switched to the low-probability mode. Move to. When the mode is changed to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated again on the left side of the game board 30 to enter the game ball into the first starting opening 33.

  In the case where the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery during 120 times of the game in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, and the jackpot is the type 1 jackpot, the game ball becomes the V winning opening 48 during the round game. When the player has entered the ball, it is possible to execute 120 game times again in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode after the round game.

If you win the jackpot in the jackpot lottery during 120 game times in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, and the jackpot is the second-class jackpot, the low-probability mode and the high-frequency support after the round game. The game can be played 100 times in the mode.
The playability of the gaming machine has been described above.

K4. Process overview:
<Result image>
FIG. 119 is a time chart illustrating an example of processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. In this time chart, the game times for the first starting mouth, the game times for the second starting mouth, the special 2 main display flag, the high probability mode flag, and the display mode on the symbol display device 41 are shown.

  The numbers (115 to 125) shown in the convex portion of the waveform showing the execution of the first starting mouth game round and the convex portion of the waveform showing the execution of the second starting mouth game round are the latest type 1 jackpots. The number of game times executed after the high-probability mode is started triggered by (hereinafter, also referred to as the number of game times after probability change execution) is shown. That is, the time chart of FIG. 119 shows that 120 game times in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode have ended (time Tm4), and the mode shifts to the low-probability mode and low-frequency support mode.

  In the example shown in the time chart of FIG. 119, in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the player inserts a game ball into the second starting opening 34 to execute the second starting opening game time (FIG. The number of game times after the probability change of 119 is 115 to 120), and the game ball for the first start opening is entered by entering the game ball into the first start opening 33 with the transition to the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode. Is executed (the number of game times after the probability change in FIG. 119 is 121 to 125). As described in the game property of the gaming machine, the variation time of the second starting opening game times is 115 seconds after the probability change game times is 115 to 120 (example: time Tm1 to Tm2 = 0.5 seconds).

  The special 2 main display flag is a flag used to switch the liquid crystal design displayed in the main display area MA and the liquid crystal design displayed in the first sub display area SA1. The special 2 main display flag is turned on when the high frequency support mode is started, and turned off when the low frequency support mode is started. However, in the present embodiment, the game ball for the second start opening is executed by entering the game ball into the second start opening 34 in the low frequency support mode, and the big hit lottery is won (hereinafter, "special big hit"). (Also called), the special 2 main display flag is not turned on when the high-frequency support mode is started.

  As can be seen from the correspondence relationship between the special 2 main display flag shown in FIG. 119 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41, when the special 2 main display flag is ON, the second starting opening game is displayed in the main display area MA. The second liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the time is displayed, and the first liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the first starting opening game time is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. On the other hand, when the special 2 main display flag is OFF, the first liquid crystal symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the first start opening game time, is displayed in the main display region MA, and the second symbol is displayed in the first sub display region SA1. The design for the second liquid crystal, which is a design corresponding to the game opening for the starting opening, is displayed.

  As described in the game playability of the gaming machine, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment distributes the gaming ball to the left side of the gaming board 30 in the low probability mode and the low frequency support mode so that the gaming ball is the first gaming ball. The game ball for the first starting port is executed by entering the starting port 33, and in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode (including the low probability mode), the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30. The flow of the game in which the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 34 and the second starting opening game time is executed is provided with a gaming property that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the player executes the first starting mouth game times and the second starting mouth game times in accordance with the gaming characteristics of the gaming machine, the gaming characteristics are set according to the gaming characteristics. The liquid crystal design (first liquid crystal design or second liquid crystal design) corresponding to the executed game is displayed in the main display area MA. The chart showing the display mode of the symbol display device shown in FIG. 119 shows the second sub display area SA2, but the second sub display area SA2 will be described later.

  Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the two game times executed most recently after the last game time executed before the end of the high probability mode (hereinafter also referred to as the final specific game time) is started. The fluctuation time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time. Explaining it concretely with reference to FIG. 119, immediately after the last game time (the second start mouth game time in which the number of times of game times after probability change is 120) is executed before the end of the high-probability mode. After the probability change is the game time to be executed, the variation time of the game times is 121 times (time Tm5 to Tm7) and the variation time after the probability change is 122 times of the game time (time Tm8 to Tm9). And 12 seconds.

  Then, the pachinko machine 10 displays the result image, which is an image showing the information regarding the privilege given to the player in the high probability mode, during the execution of the two game times in which the variation time is set to 12 seconds, in the main display area. Display on MA for 10 seconds.

  120: is explanatory drawing which shows the display mode of the result image in the symbol display device 41. FIG. FIG. 120 (a) shows the display mode of the symbol display device 41 until the 120th game time ends when the number of game times after probability change is executed. FIG. 120 (b) is a period during which two game times are executed most recently after the last game time (hereinafter, the final specific game time) executed before the end of the high-probability mode is started. The display mode of the symbol display device 41 in the period in which the result image is displayed is shown. FIG. 120C shows a display mode of the symbol display device 41 after the display of the result image is completed. As for the correspondence between FIG. 120 and the time chart of FIG. 119, FIG. 120 (a) corresponds to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 until time Tm4 (FIG. 119), and FIG. 120 (b) shows time from time Tm4. It corresponds to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 up to Tm6, and FIG. 120 (c) corresponds to the display mode of the symbol display device 41 after time Tm6.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (a), the number of times of game execution after probability change is up to 120 times, in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41 (display surface 41a), a symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game number. The second liquid crystal symbol is displayed, and the first sub-display area SA1 displays the first liquid crystal symbol which is a symbol corresponding to the first starting opening game time.

  Further, a guide display GD1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The guide display GD1 is a guide display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the right side of the game board 30. As described above, after the probability change the number of times of game execution is up to 120 times, it is in the high frequency support mode state, and it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30, so the symbol display device. A guidance display GD1 is displayed on 41. By displaying the guidance display GD1, it is possible to guide the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (b), two game times to be executed most recently after the start of the final specific game time (in this embodiment, the game time after the probability change is the 120th game time) are executed. During the period in which the result image is displayed, the result image is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the second starting mouth game time is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. The corresponding design for the second liquid crystal is displayed. As described with reference to FIG. 119, since the special 2 main display flag is turned off at the end of the final specific game time (the game time after the probability change is 120th game time), the main display area MA is The principle is that the first liquid crystal design, which is a design corresponding to the game opening for one starting opening, is displayed. However, since the result image is displayed in the main display area MA, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the second sub display area SA2 is provided above the left end of the display surface 41a, and the second sub display area is provided. The first liquid crystal design is displayed on SA2. By doing so, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the visibility of the first liquid crystal design when the result image is displayed.

  Further, a guide display GD2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. The guide display GD2 is a guide display indicating that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the left side of the game board 30. As described above, after the 120th game time in which the number of game times after probability change execution is completed, the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. Therefore, since it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the left side of the game board 30, the guide display GD2 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. By displaying the guide display GD2, it is possible to guide the player to a game method that is advantageous to the player.

  As shown in FIG. 120 (c), after the display of the result image is finished, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the first sub-display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. The second liquid crystal design is displayed on.

  Here, the result image will be described. As described above, the result image is an image showing information regarding the privilege given to the player in the high probability mode. For example, when the high probability mode is transitioned to by the first-class jackpot, the first-class jackpot may be won again during the high-probability mode, and the high-probability mode may continue. During the high-probability mode, the number of times the first-class jackpot was won again to become the high-probability mode, information about the prize balls paid out by winning the jackpot, etc. were given to the player during the high-probability mode. Information about the privilege is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a result image.

  Next, another example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10 will be described.

  FIG. 121 is a time chart explaining another example of the processing executed by the pachinko machine 10. The time chart shown in FIG. 121 shows that, after the probability variation game number execution number is 120, the second starting mouth game number is completed and the high probability mode is terminated, but the probability variation game number execution number is the 121st time. The case where the second starting mouth game time is executed as the game time is shown. Such a time chart is, after the probability change after the probability change, when the number of times of execution of the game times for the second starting mouth is 120, when the number of times of holding the game for the second starting mouth remains It is a case where the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 before and after the game opening for the second starting opening where the number of times of executing the game is 120th is finished.

  As described above, the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variable machine in which the first start game time and the second start game time are executed in parallel, so as shown in the time chart of FIG. During the execution of the second starting mouth game times of the 121st times, the first starting mouth game times of the 122nd times of the after-probability game times execution times may be executed in parallel.

  Even in such a case, similarly to the example described with reference to FIG. 119, the last two game times executed before the end of the high-probability mode (final specific game time) are started, and then two times are executed. The variation time in the game game is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time. That is, the variation time of the second starting mouth game time of the 121st time after the probability change game time and the first starting mouth game time of the 122nd time after the probability change game time execution time is set to 12 seconds. Then, after the final specific game time is over, the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41 for 10 seconds.

  That is, as shown in the display mode of the symbol display device 41 in the time chart of FIG. 121, the number of times of game play after probability change is 120 (final specific game time), in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, The second liquid crystal symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game times, is displayed, and the first liquid crystal symbol, which is a symbol corresponding to the first starting mouth game times, is displayed in the first sub-display area SA1. Is displayed.

  Then, in the period in which the result image is displayed in the period in which two game times are executed most recently after starting the final specific game time, in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41. The result image is displayed, and in the first sub-display area SA1, the second liquid crystal design which is a design corresponding to the second starting opening game time is displayed.

  After the display of the result image is finished, the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed in the first sub display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. .

  In this way, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays, on the symbol display device 41, a result image showing information regarding the privilege given to the player in the high probability mode when the high probability mode ends. Since it takes several seconds for the player to visually recognize the information displayed as the result image and understand the display content, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment uses the result image for a fixed time of 10 seconds. indicate.

  Therefore, in order to display the result image on the symbol display device 41, the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment presets the variation time in the two game times to be executed most recently after starting the final specific game time. Set the time to 12 seconds.

  In the case of a simultaneous variable machine, either the first start mouth game time or the second start mouth game time is the other while the first start mouth game time or the second start mouth game time is executed. May be performed. Therefore, during the period when the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, for example, the first starting opening game time is ended and a new first starting opening game time is started, or the second starting opening game is started. There is a case where the game is ended and a new game opening for the second starting opening is started. Hereinafter, the timing of starting the game times and the timing of ending the game times are also referred to as “game time division”.

  If the “break of game times” occurs during the period when the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41, the player may have a complicated impression. Further, the player may not be able to concentrate on the result of the jackpot lottery in each game time.

  The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when displaying the result image on the symbol display device 41, the variation time of a plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel, the time to display the result image (this embodiment Since it is set to 10 seconds) or more (12 seconds), it is possible to prevent breaks in the game times during the period in which the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  Further, since the game time for which the variable time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time is the two game times to be executed most recently after starting the final specific game time, the result image is displayed on the symbol display device 41. It is possible to minimize the number of game times set to a variable time longer than or equal to the time when the result image is displayed, while suppressing the occurrence of breaks in the game times during the period.

<Demo image>
FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a demo image displayed by the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment. The demo image is an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 when the game time is not started for a predetermined period set in advance. In the present embodiment, a moving image (hereinafter, also referred to as a demo moving image) is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a demo image. The pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment displays the demonstration moving image on the symbol display device 41 when the first starting opening game times or the second starting opening game times are not started for a predetermined period or longer.

  Specifically, when the first starting mouth game time is not started for a predetermined period of time or longer, the display area displaying the symbol (first liquid crystal symbol) corresponding to the first starting mouth game time at that time ( In the main display area MA or the first sub display area SA1), a demo moving image for the area is displayed. Further, when the second starting mouth game times are not started for a predetermined period or longer, the display area (main display area) displaying the symbol (second liquid crystal symbol) corresponding to the second starting mouth game times at that time. In the MA or the first sub display area SA1), a demo moving image for the area is displayed.

  Usually, in a pachinko machine, when neither the first starting opening game times nor the second starting opening game times are started for a predetermined period or longer, a demo video is displayed on the entire display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41. However, in the pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the first start-up game time and the second start-up game time are set separately until the demo video is displayed, and the main display is performed. A demo moving image is displayed in each of the area MA and the first sub display area SA1.

  In FIG. 122 (a), a demo moving image is displayed in the main display area MA, and a game time (a first starting mouth game time or a second starting mouth) corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. It shows a state in which a symbol (a symbol for the first liquid crystal or a symbol for the second liquid crystal) of the game game) is displayed.

  When the special 2 main display flag is OFF, the state as shown in FIG. 122 (a) occurs in the following cases. In the main display area MA, the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting mouth game time is displayed, and in the first sub display area SA1, the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game time is displayed. In the case where the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 33 and the first starting opening game time is not started for a predetermined period, the demo video set for the main display area MA in the main display area MA. Is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, when the second starting mouth game time is being executed, the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game time is displayed in the first sub display area SA1.

  When the special 2 main display flag is ON, the state as shown in FIG. 122A occurs in the following cases. In the main display area MA, the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game times is displayed, and in the first sub display area SA1, the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting mouth game times is displayed. In the case where the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and the game time for the second starting port is not started for a predetermined period, the demonstration video set for the main display region MA in the main display region MA. Is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, when the first starting mouth game time is being executed, the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting mouth game time is displayed in the first sub display area SA1.

  FIG. 122 (b) is a symbol (first liquid crystal symbol or second symbol) in the main display area MA corresponding to the main display area MA in the game times (first starting mouth game times or second starting mouth game times). The liquid crystal pattern) is displayed, and the demonstration moving image is displayed in the first sub display area SA1.

  When the special 2 main display flag is OFF, the state as shown in FIG. 122 (b) occurs in the following cases. The first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting mouth game times is displayed in the main display area MA, and the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game times is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. In this case, when the game ball does not enter the second starting port 34 and the game time for the second starting port is not started for a while, the first sub display region SA1 is set for the first sub display region SA1. A demo video is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (b). At this time, when the game opening for the first starting opening is being executed, the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the game opening for the first starting opening is displayed in the main display area MA.

  When the special 2 main display flag is ON, the state as shown in FIG. 122 (b) occurs in the following cases. The second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game times is displayed in the main display area MA, and the first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting mouth game times is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. In the case, when the game ball does not enter the first starting opening 33 and the game time for the first starting opening is not started, the demonstration set for the first sub display area SA1 in the first sub display area SA1. The moving image is displayed as shown in FIG. 122 (b). At this time, when the second starting mouth game time is being executed, the second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting mouth game time is displayed in the main display area MA.

  122 (a) and 122 (b), the demonstration moving image is displayed in either the main display area MA or the first sub display area SA1, and the symbol corresponding to the display area is displayed in the other one. Although the displayed example is shown, when each of the game times corresponding to both display areas is not started for a predetermined period or longer, the display area is displayed in both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. The corresponding demo movie is displayed. That is, the main display area MA displays the demo moving image for the main display area MA shown in FIG. 122 (a), and the first sub display area SA1 shows the first sub display area SA1 shown in FIG. 122 (b). A demo video for is displayed.

  Also, when the game time corresponding to the display area in which the demo video is displayed is started during the display of the demo video, the display area displays the symbol corresponding to the game time from the display of the demo video. Return to.

  FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a relationship between an RTC (RTC: Real-Time Clock) effect moving image and a demo moving image.

  FIG. 123 (a) shows a case where the RTC effect moving image is displayed when the symbol corresponding to the display area is displayed in both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. . In this case, the symbol corresponding to the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 is displayed on the symbol display device 41 as a layer image higher than the layer image corresponding to the RTC effect moving image.

  FIG. 123 (b) shows a case where the RTC moving image production is started in a state where the demo moving image can be displayed in the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the main display area MA, when the RTC effect moving image is displayed, the RTC effect moving image is preferentially displayed in the main display area MA, After the end of the RTC effect movie, the display of the demo movie is started. On the other hand, in the first sub display area SA1, even when the RTC effect moving image is displayed, the demo moving image is preferentially displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), if the game time corresponding to the main display area MA is started, the main display area MA is displayed like the main display area MA shown in FIG. 123 (a). The pattern of the corresponding game time is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect moving image. In this case, when the game time corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 is not started, the first sub display area SA1 is maintained in the state in which the demonstration moving image is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 123 (b), if the game time corresponding to the first sub display area SA1 is started, as in the first sub display area SA1 shown in FIG. 123 (a), The symbol of the game time corresponding to the 1 sub display area SA1 is displayed as a layer image higher than the layer image of the RTC effect moving image. In this case, when the game time corresponding to the main display area MA is not started, the main display area MA maintains the state in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed with priority over the demo moving image, and the RTC effect moving image is displayed. After that, the demo video will start to be displayed.

K5. Various processes executed in the main controller:
Next, an example of specific processing executed in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described. The process executed by the main control device 60 will be described first, and then the process executed by the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  The MPU 62 of the main control device 60 executes timer interrupt processing and normal processing. The MPU 62 executes an NMI interrupt process started by input of a power failure signal in addition to the timer interrupt process and the normal process, but the description of these processes will be omitted.

<Timer interrupt processing>
FIG. 124 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing. As described above, the timer interrupt process is periodically (in this embodiment, 2 msec cycle) activated by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60.

  In step S5101, reading processing of various detection sensors is executed. Specifically, the states of various detection sensors connected to the main controller 60 are read, the states of the sensors are determined, and the detection information (ball entry detection information) is stored. Then, it progresses to step S5102.

  In step S5102, the random number initial value counter CINI is updated. Specifically, the random number initial value counter CINI is incremented by 1, and is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S5103.

  In step S5103, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3, and the electric accessory release counter C4 are updated. Specifically, the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, the reach random number counter C3 and the electric accessory release counter C4 are each incremented by 1, and when the respective counter values reach the maximum value, Clear to 0. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 64. Then, it progresses to step S5104.

  In step S5104, a ball entering process for the starting opening accompanying the entering of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 and the second starting opening 34 is executed. Details of the starting entrance ball entering process in step S5104 will be described later. After executing step S5104, the process proceeds to step S5105.

  In step S5105, a ball-in process for a through-gate is executed when the game ball enters (passes through) the through-gate 35. Details of the through-gate ball entering process in step S5105 will be described later. After executing step S5105, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Entering ball for starting opening>
Next, the ball entry process for the starting opening will be described. The ball entry process for the starting opening is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 124: S5104) of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 125 is a flowchart showing a ball entry process for the starting opening. In step S5201, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (start winning) based on the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the first starting opening 33. When it is determined in step S5201 that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 (S5201: YES), the process proceeds to step S5202, and the payout control device 70 pays out three game balls. Set the command. After that, the process advances to step S5203.

  In step S5203, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the first starting opening 33 to the management control device on the game hall side. Then, it progresses to step S5204.

  In step S5204, it is determined whether or not the first startup hold number RaN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S5204, if the first start pending number RaN is not less than the upper limit value (S5204: NO), the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S5204, if the first startup hold number RaN is less than the upper limit value (S5204: YES), the flow advances to step S5205 to add 1 to the first startup hold number RaN in the first hold area. Then, it progresses to step S5206.

  In step S5206, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) are set to the first storage area in the free storage areas of the first holding area, that is, step In step S5205, the value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the first starting pending number RaN to which 1 is added. After executing step S5206, the process advances to step S5207.

  In step S5207, a destination determination process is executed. The pre-judgment process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (held information), the jackpot lottery result (lottery result), the jackpot type, and the reach occurrence It is a process of performing the determination such as the presence or absence of the holding information before the holding information is subjected to the jackpot lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. After executing step S5207, the process advances to step S5208.

  In step S5208, the process of setting the first hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the first hold command.

  The first hold command is that the hold information is the main control for the determination result of the previous determination process based on the occurrence of the game ball entering the first starting opening 33 and the hold information acquired based on the ball entering. It is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize the target device before it is targeted for the jackpot lottery by the device 60. The first hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process described later.

  In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the first hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33, in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the display according to the increase in the number of held items is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the command changes the display in the first hold display area Ds1 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the hold number.

  If it is determined in step S5201 that the game ball has not entered the first starting opening 33 (S5201: NO), the flow advances to step S5209 to determine whether the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34. Is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the second starting port 34.

  If it is determined in step S5209 that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 (S5209: YES), the flow proceeds to step S5210 and the payout controller 70 pays out one game ball. Set the command. Then, it progresses to step S5211. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5209 that the game ball has not entered the second starting opening 34 (S5209: NO), the entering processing for the starting opening is ended.

  In step S5211, an external signal setting process is performed in order to output a signal indicating that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 to the management control device on the game hall side. Then, it progresses to step S5212.

  In step S5212, it is determined whether or not the second start pending number RbN is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment). In step S5212, if the second starting pending number RbN is not less than the upper limit value (S5212: NO), the ball entry process for the main starting port is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S5212, when the second start pending number RbN is less than the upper limit value (S5212: YES), the process proceeds to step S5213, and 1 is added to the second start pending number RbN in the second holding area. Then, it progresses to step S5214.

  In step S5214, the respective values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 125) are set to the first storage area of the free storage areas of the second holding area, that is, step The value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the value of the second start pending number RbN to which 1 is added in S5213. After executing step S5214, the process proceeds to step S5215.

  In step S5215, a destination determination process is executed. As described above, the destination determination process is based on the information (holding information) of the values of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 (held information), and the jackpot lottery determination result (lottery result) and jackpot This is a process of determining the type, whether or not a reach has occurred, and the like, before the suspension information is targeted for the jackpot lottery (determination process) by the main control device 60. After executing step S5215, the process proceeds to step S5216.

  In step S5216, the process of setting the second hold command is executed. Specifically, the determination result of the destination determination process executed based on the information (hold information) of the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 is set as the second hold command.

  The second hold command is the main control of the hold information, which indicates that the game ball has entered the second starting opening 34 and the result of the determination process based on the hold information acquired based on the ball. It is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize the target device before it is targeted for the jackpot lottery by the device 60. The second hold command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process described later.

  In addition, when the voice emission control device 90 receives the second hold command transmitted based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41. A command for changing the display according to the increase in the number of held items is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that receives the command changes the display in the second hold display area Ds2 of the symbol display device 41 in accordance with the increase in the number of hold.

  After executing step S5216, the ball entry process for the starting opening is ended.

<Entering ball for through gate>
Next, the ball entry process for the through gate will be described. The through-gate ball entry process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 124: S5105).

  FIG. 126 is a flowchart showing a ball entering process for a through gate. In step S5301, it is determined whether or not the game ball has entered (passed) into the through gate 35. If it is determined in step S5301 that the game ball has entered the through gate 35 (S5301: YES), the flow advances to step S5302 to determine whether the accessory holding number SN is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment). Determine whether or not. In addition, the accessory holding number SN is a value indicating the number of balls entering the through gate 35 which is reserved for performing the electric accessory opening lottery. In the present embodiment, the maximum value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is 4.

  If it is determined in step S5302 that the number is less than the upper limit (less than 4) of the accessory holding number SN (S5302: YES), the flow advances to step S5303 to add 1 to the accessory holding number SN. After that, the process advances to step S5304.

  In step S5304, the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 updated in step S5103 (FIG. 124) is stored in the first storage area of the empty storage areas of the power combination holding area 64d of the RAM 64. Then, the ball entry process for the through gate is completed.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5301 that the game ball has not entered the through gate 35 (S5301: NO), and when it is determined in step S5302 that the value of the accessory holding number SN is not less than the upper limit value. (S5302: NO), the value of the electric accessory release counter C4 is not stored in the electric accessory holding area 64d of the RAM 64, and the ball entering process for the through gate is ended.

<Normal processing>
Next, the normal processing will be described. The normal process is a process started by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 when the power is turned on. In the normal processing, the main processing of the game is executed.

  FIG. 127 is a flowchart showing normal processing. In step S5401, a startup process is executed. Specifically, the initialization of each control device upon power-on, the determination of the validity of the data stored and held in the RAM 64, and the like are executed. After that, the process advances to step S5402.

  In step S5402, output data such as a command set by the timer interrupt process or the normal process executed last time is transmitted to each control device on the sub side. Specifically, the presence / absence of a prize ball command is determined, and if the prize ball command is set, it is transmitted to the payout control device 70. Further, when commands related to effects such as a variable command and a hold command, which will be described later, are set, they are transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. After executing step S5402, the process proceeds to step S5403.

  In step S5403, the fluctuation type counter CS is updated. Specifically, 1 is added to the variation type counter CS, and the counter value is cleared to 0 when the counter value reaches the maximum value. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. After that, the process advances to step S5404.

  In step S5404, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 70 are read, and the flow proceeds to step S5405. In step S5405, game time control processing for controlling the game in each game time is executed. In the game time control process, jackpot lottery, setting of variable display of symbols by the symbol display device 41, display control of the first symbol display part 37a, the second symbol display part 37b, etc. are performed. Details of the game number control process will be described later. After executing step S5405, the process advances to step S5406.

  In step S5406, a game state transition process for shifting the game state is executed. By executing the game state shift processing, the game state shifts to the open / close execution mode, the high probability mode, the high frequency support mode, or the like. Details of the game state transition processing will be described later. Then, it progresses to step S5407.

  In step S5407, an electric power combination support process for driving and controlling the electric power accessory 34a provided in the second starting opening 34 is executed. In the electric power support process, it is determined whether or not the electric accessory 34a should be opened. The details of the process for supporting electric power combination will be described later. After that, the process advances to step S5408.

  In step S5408, a game ball launch control process is executed. The game ball launch control process is a process executed to launch a game ball into the game area PA when the player operates the operation handle 25 or the game ball launch button 26. Details of the game ball launch control process will be described later. After executing step S5408, the process advances to step S5409.

  In step S5409, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (start of the command output processing of step S5402 in the second and subsequent cycles). That is, it is determined whether or not the next normal processing execution timing has been reached.

  If it is determined in step S5409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has not elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S5409: NO), the execution timing of the next normal processing is reached in steps S5410 and S5411. Within the remaining time of, the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS are repeatedly executed. Specifically, in step S5410, 1 is added to the random number initial value counter CINI, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the random number initial value counter CINI is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64. Further, in step S5411, 1 is added to the fluctuation type counter CS, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value, it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the fluctuation type counter CS is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 64.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5409 that the predetermined time (4 msec) has elapsed from the start of the current normal processing (S5409: YES), the process returns to step S5402, and the processes from step S5402 to step S5408 are performed. Run.

  Since the execution time of each process of steps S5402 to S5408 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next normal process is not constant but fluctuates. Therefore, the values of these counters can be updated randomly by repeatedly updating the random number initial value counter CINI and the variation type counter CS using the remaining time.

<Game time control processing>
Next, the game time control process will be described. The game time control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 127: S5405).

  FIG. 128 is a flow chart showing the game number control processing. In step S5501, it is determined whether the open / close execution mode is in effect. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The open / close execution mode flag is a flag that is turned on when shifting the game state to the open / close execution mode, and turned off when ending the open / close execution mode.

  When it is determined in step S5501 that the opening / closing execution mode is being executed (S5501: YES), the present game number control processing is ended without executing any of the processing from step S5502. That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the game time is not started regardless of whether or not the game ball enters the first start opening 33 or the second start opening 34. . On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5501 that the open / close execution mode is not in effect (S5501: NO), the flow advances to step S5502.

  In step S5502, it is determined whether the special 1 changing flag is ON. The special 1 fluctuating flag is a flag for determining whether or not the symbol is fluctuating in the first symbol display portion 37a, and the first is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. The symbol of the symbol display portion 37a is turned on when the fluctuation starts, and turned off when the symbol stops changing. If it is determined in step S5502 that the special 1 changing flag is not ON (S5502: NO), the process advances to step S5503.

  In step S5503, variation start processing for the first symbol display portion is executed. The variation start process for the first symbol display unit is a process for starting the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display unit 37a. The details of the variation start process for the first symbol display unit will be described later. After executing step S5503, the process advances to step S5504.

  On the other hand, in step S5502, when it is determined that the special 1 changing flag is ON (S5502: YES), the change start process for the first symbol display unit in step S5503 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S5504. move on.

  In step S5504, it is determined whether the special 2 changing flag is ON. The special 2 fluctuating flag is a flag for determining whether or not the symbol is fluctuating in the second symbol display portion 37b, and is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. It is a flag that is turned on when the symbol of the symbol display portion 37b starts changing and turned off when the symbol stops changing. If it is determined in step S5504 that the special 2 varying flag is not ON (S5504: NO), the flow proceeds to step S5505.

  In step S5505, variation start processing for the second symbol display portion is executed. The variation start process for the second symbol display unit is a process for starting the variation of the symbol in the second symbol display unit 37b. Details of the variation start process for the second symbol display unit will be described later. After executing step S5505, the process advances to step S5506.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5504 that the special 2 fluctuating flag is ON (S5504: YES), the fluctuation start process for the second symbol display unit in step S5505 is not executed, and the process proceeds to step S5506. move on.

  In step S5506, fluctuation stop processing is executed. The fluctuation stop processing is processing for stopping fluctuation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b. Details of the fluctuation stop processing will be described later. After executing step S5506, the present game time control processing is ended.

<Variation start processing for the first symbol display section>
Next, the variation start process for the first symbol display section will be described. The variation start process for the first symbol display portion is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 128: S5503) of the game time control process.

  FIG. 129 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the first symbol display portion. In step S5601, it is determined whether or not the value of the first starting pending number RaN is 0. When it is determined in step S5601 that the value of the first startup hold number RaN is not 0 (S5601: NO), the process proceeds to step S5602. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5601 that the value of the first startup hold number RaN is 0 (S5601: YES), the fluctuation start process for the first symbol display unit is ended.

  In step S5602, a game number counting process is executed. The game number counting process is a process for counting the number of game times (variation of symbols) executed after the high-probability mode or the high-frequency support mode is started. Details of the game number counting process will be described later. After executing step S5602, the process proceeds to step S5603.

  In step S5603, a holding information shift process for the first symbol display portion is executed. The reservation information shift process for the first symbol display unit is a process of shifting the reservation information stored in the first reservation area Ra. The details of the hold information shift process for the first symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S5603, the process proceeds to step S5604.

  In step S5604, a determination process for the first symbol display portion is executed. In the determination process for the first symbol display portion, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit is determined based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the judgment processing execution area 64c. , The jackpot type is assigned, and the reach determination is made to determine whether or not the reach has occurred. The details of the determination process for the first symbol display unit will be described later. After executing step S5604, the process proceeds to step S5605.

  In step S5605, variable time setting processing for the first symbol display portion is executed. In the variation time setting process for the first symbol display portion, the variation time, which is the time from when the symbol on the first symbol display portion starts varying to when it stops, is set. Details of the variable time setting process for the first symbol display portion will be described later. After executing step S5605, the process advances to step S5606.

  In step S5606, high probability mode end processing is executed. The high-probability mode end process is a process of ending the high-probability mode when a predetermined number (120 times in the present embodiment) of determination processing (big hit lottery) has been executed since the transition to the high-probability mode. Details of the high-probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing step S5606, the process advances to step S5607.

  In step S5607, the special 1 variation command is set. The special 1 variation command includes information indicating that the game time to be started this time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. , Information on the presence or absence of a big hit, information on the type of a big hit, information on the presence or absence of a reach occurrence, and information on the variation time set in step S5604. The set special variable command for special 1 is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received special-purpose variation command, and controls various devices so that the determined content of the effect is executed. After executing step S5607, the process advances to step S5608.

  In step S5608, variable display of symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a is started. After that, the flow advances to step S5609, and the special 1 changing flag is turned ON. After executing step S5609, the variation start process for the first first symbol display portion is ended.

<Game count processing>
Next, the game number counting process will be described. The game number counting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5602) of the variation start process for the first symbol display section.

  FIG. 130 is a flowchart showing the game number counting process. In step S5701, it is determined whether the ST game count flag is ON. The ST game number count flag is a flag referred to for determining whether or not it is necessary to count the number of game times after the high-probability mode is started. When it is determined in step S5701 that the ST game number count flag is ON (S5701: YES), the process proceeds to step S5702, and 1 is added to the value of the ST game number counter PNC1. After that, the process advances to step S5703. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5701 that the ST game count flag is not ON (S5701: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing the processes of steps S5702 to S5704.

  In step S5703, it is determined whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 123. When it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 123 (S5703: YES), the process proceeds to step S5704, and the ST game number count flag is turned off. The reason for this is that, in the present embodiment, the number of game times after the high-probability mode is started does not have to be counted after 123 times. After executing step S5704, the process proceeds to step S5705. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5703 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not 123 (S5703: NO), the process proceeds to step S5705 without executing step S5704.

  In step S5705, it is determined whether or not the electric support game count flag is ON. The number-of-games count flag for electric support is required to count the number of game times after the high-frequency support mode is started, when the high-frequency support mode is started without transition to the high-probability mode. It is a flag that is referred to for determining whether or not. If it is determined in step S5705 that the electric support game count counter is ON (S5705: YES), the flow advances to step S5706 to add 1 to the value of the electric support game count counter PNC2. After that, the process advances to step S5707. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S5705 that the electric support game count count flag is not ON (S5705: NO), the present game count count process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S5706 to S5708.

  In step S5707, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric support game count counter PNC2 is 100. If it is determined in step S5707 that the value of the electric support game count counter PNC2 is 100 (S5707: YES), the flow advances to step S5708 to turn off the electric support play count counter. The reason for this is that in the present embodiment, when the high-frequency support mode is started without the transition to the high-probability mode, the number of game times after the high-frequency support mode is started is 100 or more. Because there is no need to count. After executing step S5708, the present game number counting process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5707 that the value of the electric support game count counter PNC2 is not 100 (S5707: NO), the present game count processing is ended without executing step S5708.

<Holding information shift process for the first symbol display section>
Next, the hold information shift process for the first symbol display section will be described. The holding information shift process for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5603) of the variation start process for the first symbol display unit.

  FIG. 131 is a flowchart showing a holding information shift process for the first symbol display section. In step S5801, 1 is subtracted from the value of the first startup hold number RaN in the first hold area Ra. After that, the process advances to step S5802.

  In step S5802, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the first holding area Ra is moved to the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process advances to step S5803.

  In step S5803, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the first holding area Ra is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S5803, the reservation information shift process for the first first symbol display unit is ended.

<Determination processing for the first symbol display section>
Next, the determination process for the first symbol display portion will be described. The determination process for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5604) of the variation start process for the first symbol display unit.

  FIG. 132 is a flowchart showing a determination process for the first symbol display portion. In step S5901, it is determined whether or not the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The high-probability mode flag is a flag for the MPU 62 to specify whether or not the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode, and in the present embodiment, the V winning opening 48 is played in the opening / closing execution mode related to the jackpot winning. When a ball has entered, it is turned ON when the opening / closing execution mode ends, and when the game ball does not enter the V winning opening 48 in the opening / closing execution mode related to the jackpot, or the high probability mode. It is turned OFF when 120 times of big hit lottery are finished without winning the big hit in the big hit lottery inside. When it is determined in step S5901 that the high probability mode is set (S5901: YES), the process proceeds to step S5902.

  In step S5902, the win / loss determination is performed by referring to the win / loss table for the first starting opening (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit / miss table for the first starting opening (for the high probability mode). It is determined whether or not Then, it progresses to step S5904. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5901 that the high probability mode is not set (S5901: NO), the flow proceeds to step S5903.

  In step S5903, the win / loss determination is performed by referring to the win / loss table for the first starting opening (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination process execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit table (for low probability mode) for the first starting opening. It is determined whether or not Then, it progresses to step S5904.

  In step S5904, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit determination in step S5902 or step S5903 is a big hit. When it is determined in step S5904 that the result of the hit determination is a big hit (S5904: YES), the process proceeds to step S5905.

  In step S5905, the special first hit flag of the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The special 1 hit flag is a flag that is turned ON when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed upon the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is "big hit". After executing step S5905, the process advances to step S5906.

  In step S5906, the distribution determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the first starting port. Specifically, it is determined which of the jackpot types the numerical value range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is included in. After executing step S5906, the process advances to step S5907.

  In step S5907, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step S5906 is the first type big hit. When it is determined in step S5907 that the sorted jackpot type is the first type jackpot (S5907: YES), the process proceeds to step S5908.

  In step S5908, the special 1st type 1 big jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, the type of the first-class jackpot that has been set is only the 8R first-class jackpot, so the special-purpose 8R first-class jackpot flag is set to ON. After executing step S5908, the process advances to step S5909.

  In step S5909, a first-class jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first-class jackpot, in the current game times of the first-class jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stop display) in the state in which any stop result is displayed on the first symbol display section 37a. Execute the process to set or. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first-class jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S5909, the process advances to step S5910.

  In step S5910, if the special jackpot flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON, the special jackpot flag is turned OFF. After that, the determination process for the first first symbol display unit ends. As will be described later, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 during the period when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. It is a flag that is set.

  When it is determined in step S5907 that the sorted jackpot type is not the first-class jackpot (S5907: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the second-class jackpot, the process proceeds to step S5911.

  In step S5911, the special 1st type 2 big jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is turned ON. In the present embodiment, the type of the second type jackpot that is set is only the 8R second type jackpot, so the special 1 8R second type jackpot flag is turned on. After executing step S5911, the process proceeds to step S5912.

  In step S5912, a second-class jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second-class jackpot, in the current game times of the second-class jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stop display) in the state where any of the stop results is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. Execute the process to set or. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second type jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S5907 is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S5912, the process advances to step S5910 described above, and the special jackpot flag that is in the ON state is turned OFF in the process. After that, the determination process for the first first symbol display unit ends.

  When it is determined in step S5904 that the result of the hit determination in step S5902 or step S5903 is not a big hit (S5904: NO), the process proceeds to step S5913 and the reach stored in the reach determination table storage area 63c of the ROM 63. The reach determination is made as to whether or not the reach occurs by referring to the determination table. Specifically, whether or not the value of the reach random number counter C3 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c matches the value set as the reach occurrence in the referred reach determination table. To judge. The process of step S5913 is executed when the result of the win / no determination (big hit lottery) in step S5904 is not a big hit. That is, in step S5913, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / miss determination is a game number at which a reach is generated among the game numbers that are not the big hit. After executing step S5913, the process proceeds to step S5914.

  In step S5914, it is determined whether the result of the reach determination in step S5913 is the occurrence of reach. If it is determined in step S5914 that a reach has occurred (S5914: YES), the process advances to step S5915 to turn on the special 1 reach occurrence flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64. After executing step S5915, the process proceeds to step S5916. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S5914 that the reach has not occurred (S5914: NO), the process proceeds to step S5916 without executing step S5915.

  In step S5916, a stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is disengaged, for setting which stop result is displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a (stop display) Execute the process. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the first execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is referred to by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S5916, the determination process for the first first symbol display unit ends.

<Processing of setting variable time for the first symbol display section>
Next, the setting process of the variable time for the first symbol display portion will be described. The setting process of the variation time for the first symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5605) of the variation start process for the first symbol display unit.

  FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the variable time for the first symbol display portion. In step S6001, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "121". When it is determined in step S6001 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "121", the process proceeds to step S6002 and it is determined whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122". . When it is determined in step S6002 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "122", the process proceeds to step S6003.

  In step S6003, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6003 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6003: NO), the process proceeds to step S6004.

  In step S6004, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. Then, it progresses to step S6005.

  In step S6005, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / non-judgment related to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special 1 8R first-class big hit flag or the special 1 8R second-class big hit flag is ON, and if either flag is ON (S6005: YES ), And proceeds to step S6006.

  In step S6006, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S6006, the process advances to step S6010 to set the acquired fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first first symbol display unit ends.

  When it is determined in step S6005 that the result of the hit / non-judgment related to the current game time is not a big hit (S6005: NO), the process proceeds to step S6007, and the result of the reach determination related to the current game time is reach occurrence. Or not. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the reach generation flag is ON, and when it is determined that the reach generation flag is ON (S6007: YES), the process proceeds to step S6008.

  In step S6008, the fluctuation time table for reach generation stored in the fluctuation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63 is referred to, and fluctuation time information corresponding to the current value of the fluctuation type counter CS is acquired. After executing step S6008, the process advances to step S6010 to set the acquired fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first first symbol display unit ends.

  In step S6007, when it is determined that the reach determination result related to the current game time is not the reach occurrence (S6007: NO), the process proceeds to step S6009, and the reach non-occurrence stored in the variable time table storage area 63d is not generated. The variable time table corresponding to the value of the current fluctuation type counter CS is acquired by referring to the variable time table for use. After executing step S6009, the process advances to step S6010 to set the acquired fluctuation time information in a fluctuation time counter area provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first first symbol display unit ends.

  When it is determined in step S6003 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (S6003: YES), the process proceeds to step S6011 and it is determined whether the special jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6011 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6011: YES), the process proceeds to step S6004 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6011 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6011: NO), the flow advances to step S6012 to set a value corresponding to 1 min in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Set. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first first symbol display unit ends.

  When it is determined in step S6001 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “121” (S6001: YES), and in step S6002, it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is “122”. In that case (S6002: YES), the process proceeds to step S6013, and a value corresponding to 12 sec is set in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the first first symbol display unit ends.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the variation time information stored in the reach non-occurrence variation time table is set such that the variation time becomes shorter as the number of the first start pending numbers RaN increases. . However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the configuration may be such that it does not depend on the number of the first starting pending numbers RaN, and the variation time is set to be shorter as the number of the first starting pending numbers RaN is smaller. May be.

  Further, the above configuration may be applied to the variation time when the reach occurs, and the variation time that is easily selected and the variation time that is difficult to be selected may be different between when the jackpot is won and when the reach is out. Good. Further, the variation time table for the first type jackpot and the variation time table for the second type jackpot may be individually set.

<Process for ending high probability mode>
Next, the process for ending the high probability mode will be described. The high probability mode end process is executed by the main MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 129: S5606) of the variation start process for the first symbol display unit.

  FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the processing for ending the high probability mode. In step S6101, it is determined whether the high probability mode flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6101 that the high probability mode flag is not ON (S6101: NO), the process for ending the high probability mode is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6101 that the high probability mode flag is ON (S6101: YES), the process proceeds to step S6102.

  In step S6102, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 120. When it is determined in step S6102 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not 120 (S6102: NO), the process for ending the high probability mode is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6102 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is 120 (S6102: YES), the process proceeds to step S6103, the high-probability mode flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S6104. Turn off the high-frequency support mode flag. Then, it progresses to step S6105.

  In step S6105, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6105 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6105: NO), the process proceeds to step S6106, and the final specific game time flag is turned ON. The final specific game time flag is a flag for specifying that it is the game time (120th game time) related to the last jackpot lottery in the high-probability mode. After executing step S6106, the process for ending the high probability mode ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6105 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6105: YES), the flow advances to step S6107 to turn the special jackpot flag OFF. Then, the process for ending the high probability mode ends.

<Variation start processing for the second symbol display section>
Next, the variation start process for the second symbol display section will be described. The variation start process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main controller 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 128: S5505) of the game time control process.

  FIG. 135 is a flowchart showing a variation start process for the second symbol display portion. In step S6201, it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting pending number RbN is 0. When it is determined in step S6201 that the value of the second startup hold number RaN is not 0 (S6201: NO), the process proceeds to step S6202. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6201 that the value of the second startup hold number RaN is 0 (S6201: YES), the variation start process for the second symbol display unit is ended.

  In step S6202, a game number counting process is executed. As described above, the game number counting process is a process for counting the number of game times (variation of symbols) executed after the high-probability mode or the high-frequency support mode is started. After executing step S6202, the process advances to step S6203.

  In step S6203, a holding information shift process for the second symbol display portion is executed. The reservation information shift process for the second symbol display unit is a process of shifting the reservation information stored in the second reservation area Ra. The details of the hold information shift process for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S6203, the process advances to step S6204.

  In step S6204, a determination process for the second symbol display portion is executed. In the determination process for the second symbol display portion, the jackpot lottery is executed based on the special information stored in the determination process execution area 64c. Specifically, whether or not there is a big hit or a small hit is determined based on the values of the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2, and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the second execution area of the decision processing execution area 64c. , The jackpot type is assigned, and the reach determination is made to determine whether or not the reach has occurred. The details of the determination process for the second symbol display section will be described later. After executing step S6204, the process advances to step S6205.

  In step S6205, variable time setting processing for the second symbol display portion is executed. In the setting process of the variation time for the second symbol display portion, the variation time which is the time from the start of the variation of the symbol on the second symbol display portion to the stop is set. Details of the setting process of the variable time for the second symbol display portion will be described later. After executing step S6205, the process advances to step S6206.

  In step S6206, high probability mode termination processing is executed. In the high-probability mode termination process, as described above, the high-probability mode is terminated when a predetermined number of times (120 times in the present embodiment) of the determination process (big hit lottery) has been performed since the transition to the high-probability mode. Processing. Details of the high-probability mode end processing will be described later. After executing step S6206, the process advances to step S6207.

  In step S6207, a special 2 variation command is set. The special 2 variation command includes information indicating that the game time to be started this time is related to the special information acquired based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 33. , Information on whether or not there is a big hit, information about the type of a big hit, information about whether or not a reach has occurred, and information about the variation time set in step S6204. The set special-purpose variable command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (step S5402) in the normal process (FIG. 127). The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect in the game time based on the received special-purpose variation command, and controls various devices so that the content of the determined effect is executed. After executing step S6207, the process advances to step S6208.

  In step S6208, the variable display of symbols in the second symbol display portion 37b is started. After that, the flow advances to step S6209, and the special 2 fluctuating flag is turned ON. After executing step S6209, the fluctuation start process for the second symbol display unit is finished.

<Holding information shift process for the second symbol display section>
Next, the hold information shift process for the second symbol display section will be described. The hold information shift process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S6203) of the variation start process for the second symbol display unit.

  FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing the hold information shift process for the second symbol display portion. In step S6301, 1 is subtracted from the value of the second starting reservation number RbN in the second reservation area Rb. After that, the process advances to step S6302.

  In step S6302, the data (holding information) stored in the first area of the second holding area Rb is moved to the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c. After that, the process advances to step S6303.

  In step S6303, a process of shifting the data stored in the storage area of the second holding area Rb is executed. This data shift process is a process of sequentially shifting the data stored in the first to fourth areas to the lower area side. Specifically, while clearing the data in the first area, the data in each area is shifted in the order of second area → first area, third area → second area, fourth area → third area. After executing step S6303, the holding information shift process for the second symbol display unit is finished.

<Determination process for the second symbol display section>
Next, the determination process for the second symbol display portion will be described. The determination process for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S6204) of the variation start process for the second symbol display unit.

  FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing a determination process for the second symbol display portion. In step S6401, it is determined whether or not the winning / winning lottery mode is the high-probability mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high probability mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S6401 that the high probability mode is set (S6401: YES), the process proceeds to step S6402.

  In step S6402, the win / loss determination is performed by referring to the win / loss table for the second starting opening (for high probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is set as the jackpot in the hit / miss table for the second starting opening (for the high probability mode). It is determined whether or not After that, it advances to step S6404. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6401 that the high probability mode is not set (S6401: NO), the process advances to step S6403.

  In step S6403, the win / loss determination is performed by referring to the win / loss table for the second starting opening (for low probability mode). Specifically, the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is the value set as the jackpot in the hit / miss table for the second starting opening (for the low probability mode). It is determined whether or not After that, it advances to step S6404.

  In step S6404, it is determined whether the result of the hit determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is a big hit. When it is determined in step S6404 that the result of the hit determination is a big hit (S6404: YES), the process proceeds to step S6405.

  In step S6405, the special 2 hit flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is turned on. The special 2 hit flag is a flag that is turned on when the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game ball enters the second starting opening 33 is “big hit” or “small hit”. . After executing step S6405, the process advances to step S6406.

  In step S6406, the distribution determination is performed by referring to the distribution table for the second starting opening. Specifically, it is determined which of the jackpot types the numerical range of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the second execution area of the determination processing execution area 64c is included in. After executing step S6406, the process advances to step S6407.

  In step S6407, it is determined whether or not the result of the distribution determination (big hit type) in step S6406 is the first type big hit. When it is determined in step S6407 that the sorted jackpot type is the type 1 jackpot (S6407: YES), the process proceeds to step S6408.

  In step S6408, the first-type jackpot flag for special 2 (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step S6407 is turned on. In the present embodiment, if the sorted jackpot type is the 8R type 1 jackpot, the special 2R 8R type 1 jackpot flag is turned ON, and if the sorted jackpot type is 16R type 1 jackpot, the bonus 2 For 16R, the first-class jackpot flag is turned ON. After executing step S6408, the process advances to step S6409.

  In step S6409, a first-class jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the first-class jackpot, in the current game times of the first-class jackpot, the variable display is terminated (stop display) in the state where any stop result is displayed on the second symbol display portion 37a. Execute the process to set or. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the first-class jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6409, the process advances to step S6410.

  In step S6410, it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. If it is determined in step S6410 that the high-frequency support mode is not set (S6410: NO), the process advances to step S6411 to turn on the special jackpot flag. That is, as described above, the special jackpot flag is turned ON when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 during the period when the support mode is the low frequency support mode. It is a flag that is set. After executing step S6411, the determination process for the second symbol display portion is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated without executing step S6411.

  When it is determined in step S6407 that the sorted jackpot type is not the first-class jackpot (S6407: NO), that is, when the sorted jackpot type is the second-class jackpot, the process proceeds to step S6412. In addition, in the present embodiment, since the second type jackpot is not set in the hit / miss table for the second starting port, the processes of steps S6412 and S6413 described below are not executed.

  In step S6412, the special 2nd class second jackpot flag (jackpot type flag) corresponding to the jackpot type assigned in step S6407 is turned on. After executing step S6412, the process advances to step S6413.

  In step S6413, a second-class jackpot stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for the second type jackpot, in the current game time to be the second type jackpot, the variable display is ended (stop display) in the state where any stop result is displayed on the second symbol display portion 37a. Execute the process to set or. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for the second-class jackpot stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the jackpot type distributed in step S6407 is acquired. , And stores the address information in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6413, the process proceeds to step S6410 described above, and it is determined whether the support mode is the high frequency support mode. If it is determined in step S6410 that the high-frequency support mode is not set (S6410: NO), the process advances to step S6411 to turn on the special jackpot flag. After executing step S6411, the determination process for the second symbol display portion is finished. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6410 that the support mode is the high frequency support mode (S6410: YES), the determination process for the second symbol display unit is terminated without executing step S6411.

  When it is determined in step S6404 that the result of the hit determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is not a jackpot (S6404: NO), the process proceeds to step S6414 and the result of the hit determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is a jackpot. Or not. If it is determined in step S6414 that the result of the hit determination is a small hit (S6414: YES), the process proceeds to step S6415 and the special 2 hit flag is turned on. After that, the process advances to step S6416, and the small hit flag corresponding to the result of the hit determination is turned on. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the first small hit flag is set to ON when the result of the hit determination is the first small hit, and the second small hit when the result of the hit determination is the second small hit. The hit flag is turned on, and when the result of the hit / miss determination is the third small hit, the third small hit flag is turned on. After executing step S6416, the process proceeds to step S6417.

  In step S6417, a small symbol stop symbol setting process is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for small hits, in the current game time that is a small hit, it is set in the second symbol display section 37a which stop result is displayed (stop display) in which variable display is displayed. Perform the processing for. Specifically, by referring to the stop result table for small hits stored in the stop result table storage area 63e, the address information of the stop result data corresponding to the result of the hit determination in step S6402 or step S6403 is acquired. Then, the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6417, the determination process for the second symbol display unit ends.

  When it is determined in step S6414 that the result of the hit determination is not a small hit (S6414: NO), the process proceeds to step S6418.

  In step S6418, a stop symbol setting process for detachment is executed. In the stop symbol setting process for disengagement, in the current game time that is disengaged, for setting which stop result is displayed (stop display) in the state in which the second symbol display portion 37a displays the stop result. Execute the process. Specifically, the stop result corresponding to the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 stored in the second execution area of the determination process execution area 64c is referred to by referring to the disengagement stop result table in the stop result table storage area 63e. The address information of the data is acquired, and the address information is stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64. After executing step S6418, the determination process for the second symbol display unit ends.

<Processing of setting variable time for second symbol display section>
Next, the setting process of the variable time for the second symbol display portion will be described. The setting process of the variation time for the second symbol display unit is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 135: S6205) of the variation start process for the second symbol display unit.

  FIG. 138 is a flowchart showing a setting process of the variable time for the second symbol display portion. In step S6501, it is determined whether or not the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "121". When it is determined in step S6501 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "121" (S6501: NO), the process proceeds to step S6502, and whether the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122". Determine whether or not. When it is determined in step S6502 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is not "122" (S6502: NO), the process proceeds to step S6503.

  In step S6503, it is determined whether the high frequency support mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6503 that the high frequency support mode flag is not ON (S6503: NO), the process proceeds to step S6504, and a value corresponding to 10 min in the variable time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Set. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the second symbol display portion is ended.

  When it is determined in step S6503 that the high frequency support mode flag is ON (S6503: YES), the process proceeds to step S6505, and it is determined whether the special jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the process proceeds to step S6504 described above. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S6505: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6506.

  Here, when it is determined in step S6505 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S6505: YES), the reason for proceeding to step S6504 is as follows. In the low frequency support mode, a game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30, and the game ball is inserted into the second start opening 34 to execute the second start opening game times and win the big hit lottery. Becomes Due to the playability of the gaming machine, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the left side of the game board 30 in the low frequency support mode. Therefore, in the low frequency support mode, the game is placed on the left side of the game board 30. It is desirable to guide the player to distribute the ball. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the game balls are circulated on the right side of the game board 30 to enter the game balls into the second starting opening 34, thereby executing the second starting opening game times and winning the jackpot lottery. In the low frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the left side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the first starting opening 33 to execute the first starting opening game time and win the jackpot lottery. It is desirable that the setting be advantageous. Therefore, in the low-frequency support mode, the game ball is circulated on the right side of the game board 30 and the game ball is inserted into the second starting opening 34 to execute the second starting opening game time and win the jackpot lottery (special jackpot). In the case of doing, the internal control is shifted to the high frequency support mode, but the second start is executed by circulating the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and inserting the game ball into the second start opening 34. By setting the variation time of the game time for the mouth to 10 minutes, the game action of distributing the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 during the low frequency support mode and entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is not advantageous. I am trying. In addition, when the special jackpot is used as a trigger, the effect and sound on the symbol display device 41 in the case of shifting to the high frequency support mode are set to be the same as those in the low frequency support mode, so that the player mistakenly plays the game ball. It may not be distributed on the right side of the game board 30.

  In step S6506, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS stored in the fluctuation type counter buffer in the lottery counter buffer 64a of the RAM 64 is acquired. After that, the process advances to step S6507.

  In step S6507, it is determined whether or not the result of the hit / non-win determination relating to the current game time is a big hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special 2 8R first type big hit flag or the special 2 16R first type big hit flag is ON, and if any of the flags is ON (S6507: YES ), And proceeds to step S6508.

  In step S6508, the variation time table corresponding to the value of the variation type counter CS of this time is acquired by referring to the variation time table for jackpot stored in the variation time table storage area 63d of the ROM 63. After executing step S6508, the process advances to step S6509 to set the acquired fluctuation time information in the fluctuation time counter area provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the second symbol display portion is ended.

  If it is determined in step S6507 that the result of the hit / no hit determination related to the current game number is not a big hit (S6507: NO), the process proceeds to step S6510, and the variable time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is set. Set the value corresponding to 0.5 sec. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the second symbol display portion is ended.

  When it is determined in step S6501 that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "121" (S6501: YES), and in step S6502 it is determined that the value of the ST game number counter PNC1 is "122". In that case (S6502: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6511, and a value corresponding to 12 sec is set in the variable time counter area provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64. After that, the setting process of the variable time for the second symbol display portion is ended.

<Variation stop processing>
Next, the fluctuation stop process will be described. The variation stop processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 128: S5506) of the game time control processing.

  FIG. 139 is a flowchart showing the fluctuation stop processing. In step S6601, it is determined whether the special 1 changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being variably displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. If it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 changing flag is ON (S6601: YES), the process advances to step S6602. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 changing flag is not ON (S6601: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619 described later.

  In step S6602, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation time in the first symbol display portion 37a has ended. In step S6602, when it is determined that the variation time of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a has ended (S6602: YES), the process proceeds to step S6603 and the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped. Then, it progresses to step S6604. On the other hand, in step S6602, when it is determined that the variation time of the symbol on the first symbol display portion 37a has not ended (S6602: NO), the process proceeds to step S6620 described later.

  In step S6604, the special 1 changing flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S6605, and it is determined whether the special 1 hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols on the first symbol display portion 37a is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S6605 that the special 1 hit flag is not ON (S6605: NO), the process advances to step S6606.

  In step S6606, it is determined whether or not the final specific game time flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6606 that the final specific game time flag is ON (S6606: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6607 to set a final specific game time end command. The final specific game time end command causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the last game time in the high-probability mode (120th game time after the transition to the high-probability mode in the present embodiment) ends. It is a command. The final specific game play end command that has been set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6607, the process advances to step S6608 to turn off the final specific game time flag. Then, it progresses to step S6609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6606 that the final specific game time flag is not ON (S6606: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6609 without executing steps S6607 and S6608.

  In step S6609, it is determined whether or not the value of the first startup hold number RaN is 0. If it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first startup hold number RaN is 0 (S6609: YES), the process advances to step S6610 to set a special 1 customer waiting command. The special 1 customer waiting command is a command for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the variation of the symbols in the first symbol display portion 37a has stopped and the value of the first start pending number RaN has become 0. . The set special customer waiting command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6610, the process advances to step S6619 described below. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first startup hold number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), the process proceeds to step S6619 described below without executing step S6610.

  When it is determined in step S6605 that the special 1 hit flag is ON (S6606: YES), the process proceeds to step S6611 and the special 1 hit flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S6612.

  In step S6612, it is determined whether or not the final specific game time flag is ON. If it is determined in step S6612 that the final specific game time flag is ON (S6612: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6613 and the final specific game time flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S6614. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6612 that the final specific game time flag is not ON (S6612: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6614 without executing step S6613.

  In step S6614, it is determined whether the special 2 changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being variably displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. If it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 varying flag is ON (S6614: YES), the process advances to step S6615. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 varying flag is not ON (S6614: NO), the flow advances to step S6637 to turn on the open / close execution mode flag, and then this variation stop process ends. .

  In step S6615, the fluctuation of the symbol in the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped by the symbol for deviation. After that, the flow advances to step S6616 to turn off the special 2 changing flag. After that, the process advances to step S6617.

  In step S6617, it is determined whether or not the special 2 hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols on the second symbol display portion 37b is a jackpot or a jackpot. When it is determined in step S6617 that the special 2 hit flag is ON (S6617: YES), the process proceeds to step S6618, the special 2 hit flag is turned OFF, and the special 2 first-class jackpot flag or Of the small hit flags, the flag that is on is turned off. After that, the flow advances to step S6637, the open / close execution mode flag is turned ON, and then this fluctuation stop process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6617 that the special 2 hit flag is not ON (S6617: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6618, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on, and thereafter, This fluctuation stop processing ends.

  As described above, when it is determined in step S6601 that the special 1 changing flag is not ON (S6601: NO), in step S6602, the variation time of the symbol on the first symbol display portion 37a has not ended. When it is determined (S6602: NO), when it is determined in step S6609 that the value of the first starting pending number RaN is not 0 (S6609: NO), and in step S6610, the special customer waiting command is set. After that, the process proceeds to step S6619 described below.

In step S6619, it is determined whether the special 2 varying flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being variably displayed on the second symbol display portion 37b. When it is determined in step S6619 that the special 2 varying flag is ON (S6619: YES), the process proceeds to step S6620. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6619 that the special 2 variation flag is not ON (S6619: NO), this variation stop processing ends.

  In step S6620, it is determined whether or not the symbol variation time in the second symbol display portion 37b has ended. In step S662, when it is determined that the variation time of the symbol on the second symbol display portion 37b has ended (S6620: YES), the process proceeds to step S6621, and the variation of the symbol on the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped. After that, the process advances to step S6622. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6620 that the symbol variation time in the second symbol display portion 37b has not expired (S6620: NO), this variation stop processing is terminated.

  In step S6622, the special 2 varying flag is turned off. After that, the flow advances to step S6623, and it is determined whether the special 2 hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols on the second symbol display portion 37b is a jackpot. If it is determined in step S6623 that the special 2 hit flag is not ON (S6623: NO), the process advances to step S6624.

  In step S6624, it is determined whether or not the final specific game time flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6624 that the final specific game time flag is ON (S6624: YES), the process proceeds to step S6625, and the final specific game time end command is set. The final specific game time end command causes the sub-side control device to recognize that the last game time in the high-probability mode (120th game time after the transition to the high-probability mode in the present embodiment) ends. It is a command. The final specific game play end command that has been set is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing step S6625, the process advances to step S6626 to turn off the final specific game time flag. After that, the process advances to step S6627. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6624 that the final specific game time flag is not ON (S6624: NO), the process proceeds to step S6627 without executing steps S6625 and S6626.

  In step S6627, it is determined whether or not the value of the second starting pending number RbN is 0. If it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second start pending number RbN is 0 (S6627: YES), the process advances to step S6628 to set a special 2 customer waiting command. The special 2 customer waiting command is a command for causing the control device on the sub side to recognize that the variation of the symbols on the second symbol display portion 37b has stopped and the value of the second start pending number RbN has become 0. . The special customer waiting command for special 2 that has been set is transmitted to the voice emission control device 90 in the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. After executing Step S6628, the present fluctuation stop process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6627 that the value of the second starting pending number RbN is not 0 (S6627: NO), the present fluctuation stop process is ended without executing step S6628.

  If it is determined in step S6623 that the special 2 hit flag is ON (S6623: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6629, and the special 2 hit flag is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S6630.

  In step S6630, it is determined whether or not the final specific game time flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6630 that the final specific game time flag is ON (S6630: YES), the process proceeds to step S6631 and the final specific game time flag is turned OFF. After that, it advances to step S6632. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6630 that the final specific game time flag is not ON (S6630: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6632 without executing step S6631.

  In step S6632, it is determined whether the special 1 changing flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbols are being variably displayed on the first symbol display portion 37a. If it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 changing flag is ON (S6632: YES), the process advances to step S6633. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 changing flag is not ON (S6632: NO), the flow advances to step S6637 to set the open / close execution mode flag to ON, and then this fluctuation stopping process ends. .

  In step S6633, the variation of the symbol on the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped by the symbol for deviation. After that, the flow advances to step S6634 to turn off the special 1 changing flag. Then, it progresses to step S6635.

  In step S6635, it is determined whether or not the special 1 hit flag is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to the variable display of the symbols on the first symbol display portion 37a is a jackpot. When it is determined in step S6635 that the special 1 hit flag is ON (S6665: YES), the process proceeds to step S6636, the special 1 hit flag is turned OFF, and the special 1 first-class jackpot flag or Of the special-purpose second-class jackpot flags, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Then, this fluctuation stop processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6635 that the special 1 hit flag is not ON (S6665: NO), the process proceeds to step S6637 without executing step S6636, and the opening / closing execution mode flag is turned on, and thereafter, This fluctuation stop processing ends.

  As described in the present processing, in the fluctuation stop processing of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special 2 fluctuation flag is ON in step S6614 (S6614: YES), the second symbol display unit in step S6615. The fluctuation of the symbol in 37b is stopped by the symbol for deviation. If it is determined in step S6632 that the special 1 changing flag is ON (S6632: YES), in step S6633 the fluctuation of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped with the deviation symbol. That is, when both the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b are being variably displayed, one of the two symbol display portions is stopped and displayed before the other. In the case of doing, when the result of the big hit lottery in the game times corresponding to the one symbol display portion is a big hit or a small hit, the variation of the other symbol display portion is deviated and stopped at the symbol. Therefore, there is a case where the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display portion where the variation of the symbol stops first is prioritized. By doing so, the following problems can be solved.

  Usually, in the simultaneous variation machine, when the variation of both the first symbol display portion 37a and the second symbol display portion 37b is started, the result of the jackpot lottery corresponding to either one of the symbol display portions is the jackpot or When it is determined that it is a small hit, the big hit lottery corresponding to the other symbol display portion is not executed, and the other symbol display portion is automatically stopped and displayed with the symbol for the removal. However, when the processing is executed, the following problems occur.

  When the player shifts from the high-frequency support mode to the low-frequency support mode, and the player switches from a game in which the game balls are distributed on the right side of the game board 30 to a game in which the game balls are distributed on the left side of the game board 30, The holding game times corresponding to the remaining second starting opening game times by inserting the game balls into the second starting opening 34 immediately before the end of the frequency support mode, even after shifting to the low frequency support mode. To be executed. The player switches from a game in which the game balls are distributed on the right side of the game board 30 to a game in which the game balls are distributed on the left side of the game board 30, and inserts the game balls into the first starting opening 33 and the first starting opening. When the game time for the second start opening of the reserved game time is executed and the big hit or the small hit is won in the big hit lottery, the above-mentioned normal simultaneous variation machine processing is executed. When is executed, the jackpot lottery for the first starting mouth game times is not executed. At this time, since the support mode has already transitioned to the low frequency support mode, the variation time of the second start opening game times is 10 minutes. As a result, the player inserts a game ball into the first starting opening 33 for 10 minutes until the second symbol display portion 37b stops at the big hit or small hit design, and plays the first starting mouth game time. Even if it is executed, the jackpot lottery itself will not be executed. That is, the player is forced to interrupt the game for 10 minutes until the second symbol display portion 37b stops at the symbol for big hit or small hit, which is a great disadvantage to the player. Will be given.

  In that respect, like the present embodiment, when the process of prioritizing the lottery result corresponding to the symbol display portion where the variation of the symbol is stopped first is performed, the game time for the second starting mouth of the reserved game time is executed. Even if the big hit or the small hit is won in the big hit lottery, and the variation time of the second symbol display portion 37b is set to 10 minutes, then the game ball enters the first starting opening 33. When the ball is hit, the jackpot lottery as the first start opening game time is executed. And, when the result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, and the fluctuation of the symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a stops before the fluctuation of the symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b, the first start The lottery result of the mouth game times is prioritized, the symbol of the first symbol display portion 37a is stopped by the symbol for jackpot, and at the same time, the symbol of the second symbol display portion 37b is stopped by the symbol for removal. That is, the second symbol display portion 37b stops the symbol earlier than the initially set fluctuation time of 10 minutes. Therefore, as in the case of adopting the normal simultaneous variable machine processing, the player suspends the game until the second symbol display portion 37b stops at the symbol for the big hit or the small hit (10 minutes). It is possible to avoid the problem of being forced to.

  For this reason, in the fluctuation stop processing in the present embodiment, when it is determined in step S6614 that the special 2 fluctuation flag is ON (S6614: YES), in step S6615, the second symbol display portion 37b is displayed. When the variation of the symbol is stopped by the deviation symbol and it is determined that the special 1 variation flag is ON in step S6632 (S6632: YES), the variation of the symbol in the first symbol display portion 37a is determined in step S6633. The process of stopping with the symbol for detachment is adopted.

<Game state transition processing>
Next, the game state transition processing will be described. The game state transition processing is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine of normal processing (FIG. 127: S5406).

  FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing the game state transition processing. In step S6701, it is determined whether the ending period flag is ON. The ending period flag is a flag that is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is the ending period, and is turned on at the start of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode and turned off at the end of the ending period. The ending period is a period for executing the ending effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

  When it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is not ON (S6701: NO), the process proceeds to step S6702, and it is determined whether the opening / closing process period flag is ON. The open / close processing period flag is a flag that is referred to in order to determine whether or not it is the open / close processing period, and is turned on at the start of the open / close processing period and turned off at the end of the open / close processing period. The opening / closing process period is a period for executing the opening / closing process of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36.

  When it is determined in step S6702 that the opening / closing processing period flag is not ON (S6702: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6703, and it is determined whether the opening period flag is ON. The opening period flag is a flag referred to for determining whether or not it is the opening period, and is turned on at the start of the opening period and turned off at the end of the opening period. The opening period is a period for executing the opening effect in the opening / closing execution mode.

  If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is not ON (S6703: NO), the flow proceeds to step S6704 and it is determined whether the opening / closing execution mode flag is ON. When it is determined in step S6704 that the opening / closing execution mode flag is not ON (S6704: NO), the present game state transition processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6704 that the open / close execution mode flag is ON (S6704: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6705.

  In step S6705, an opening time setting process is executed. The opening time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the opening period in the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as opening time). Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) or "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To indicating the remaining time of the opening period. The timer counter area To is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area To is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. Details of the opening time setting process will be described later. After executing step S6705, the process advances to step S6706.

  In step S6706, an opening command is set. The set opening command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). This opening command includes information on the set opening time. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the opening time based on the received opening command, and controls various devices so that the effect of the determined content is executed. After executing step S6706, the process advances to step S6707 to turn on the opening period flag. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S6703 that the opening period flag is ON (S6703: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6708.

  In step S6708, it is determined whether the opening period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the timer counter area To is “0”. If it is determined in step S6708 that the opening period has not ended (S6708: NO), the present game state transition processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S6708 that the opening period has ended (S6708: YES), the flow proceeds to step S6709 to turn off the opening period flag. Then, it progresses to step S6710.

  In step S6710, round display start processing for notifying the type of the current open / close execution mode is executed. Specifically, the address information stored in the stop result address storage area of the RAM 64 is confirmed. Then, based on the confirmed address information, the stop result data corresponding to the address information is specified from the stop result data group stored in the ROM 63, and the content of the number of rounds is specified from the specified stop result data. Confirm. After that, the content of the confirmed number of rounds is output to the round display section 39 in the main display section 45. As a result, the round display unit 39 displays the round information related to the output. After executing step S6710, the process proceeds to step S6711.

  In step S6711, the number of rounds in the current open / close execution mode is set. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, feature 2 16R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 2 8R number The type 1 big hit flag) and the small hit flag (the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, the third small hit flag) are confirmed, and the number of rounds corresponding to the flag is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64. Set in the first round counter area RC1. The first round counter area RC1 is a counter area for counting the number of times the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Details of the round number setting process will be described later. After executing S6711, the process proceeds to step S6712.

  In step S6712, the open / close processing command is set. The set open / close processing command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 of the normal processing (FIG. 127). The open / close processing command includes information on the number of rounds executed in the current open / close processing period. The sound emission control device 90 determines the content of the effect corresponding to the number of rounds based on the received opening / closing processing command, and controls various devices so that the determined content is executed. After executing step S6712, the process advances to step S6713.

  In step S6713, the opening / closing processing period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S6702 that the opening / closing process period flag is ON (S6702: YES), the process proceeds to step S6714, and the special winning opening opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 is being closed, the variable winning drive unit 36c is driven on condition that the first round counter area RC1 is "1" or more. As a result, the opening / closing door 36b is opened. In addition, when the opening / closing door 36b is open, a variable prize is provided on condition that the opening limit time has elapsed from the opening of the opening / closing door 36b or the opening limit number of game balls has entered. The drive state of the drive unit 36c is stopped and the open / close door 36b is closed. Details of the special winning opening / closing processing will be described later. After executing step S6714, the process advances to step S6715.

  In step S6715, a V winning opening / closing process is executed. Specifically, a process of opening the opening / closing door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 once in a predetermined round is executed. Details of the V winning opening / closing processing will be described later. After executing step S6715, the process advances to step S6716.

  In step S6716, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S6716: NO), this game state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S6716: YES), the process proceeds to step S6717 and the open / close processing period flag is turned off. After executing step S6717, the process advances to step S6718.

  In step S6718, round display end processing is executed. In the round display end processing, the round display unit 39 is controlled so that the round display unit 39 in the main display unit 45 is turned off. After executing step S6718, the process proceeds to step S6719.

  In step S6719, ending time setting processing is executed. The ending time setting process is a process of setting the temporal length of the ending period in the opening / closing execution mode (hereinafter, also referred to as ending time). Specifically, "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) or "0" (that is, 0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te indicating the remaining time of the ending period. The timer counter area Te is provided in various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64, and the value set in the timer counter area Te is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. The ending time setting process will be described later. After executing step S6719, the process proceeds to step S6720.

  In step S6720, an ending command is set. The set ending command is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 in step S5402 in the normal process (FIG. 127). The ending command includes information on the set ending time. The sound emission control device 90 terminates the effect corresponding to the opening / closing processing period based on the received ending command, determines the content of the effect corresponding to the ending time, and executes the effect of the determined content. Control various equipment. After executing step S6720, the process proceeds to step S6721.

  In step S6721, the ending period flag is turned on. After that, this game state transition processing ends.

  When it is determined in step S6701 that the ending period flag is ON (S6701: YES), the process proceeds to step S6722.

  In step S6722, it is determined whether the ending period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time in the ending time setting process (S6719) is "0". When it is determined in step S6722 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is not "0" (S6722: NO), this game state transition processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6722 that the value of the timer counter area Te set as the ending time is “0” (S6722: YES), the process proceeds to step S6723.

  In step S6723, the ending period flag is turned off. After that, the flow advances to step S6724 to turn off the open / close execution mode flag. After that, the process advances to step S6725, and the transition process at the end of the ending period is executed. The transition process at the end of the ending period is a process for setting various modes of the game times after the ending period ends. Details of the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described later. After executing step S6725, the present game state transition processing ends.

<Opening time setting process>
Next, the opening time setting process will be described. The opening time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6705) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing the opening time setting process. In step S6801, it is determined whether or not the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, feature 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 2 16R If any of the type 1 jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  When it is determined in step S6801 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S6801: YES), the process proceeds to step S6802 and "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) in the timer counter area To. Set. After that, this opening time setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6801 that the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode this time is not a jackpot (S6801: YES), that is, when the trigger for shifting to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot, It advances to step S6803.

  In step S6803, "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area To. That is, when the game ball is entered into the second starting opening 34, the opening / closing execution mode is changed this time, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game is entered is small. If it is a win, the opening effect is not substantially performed. After executing Step S6803, the present opening time setting process is ended.

<Round number setting process>
Next, the round number setting process will be described. The round number setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6711) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 142 is a flowchart showing the round number setting processing. In step S6901, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flag stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R 1st type jackpot flag, special 1 8R 2nd type jackpot flag, special 2 8R 1st type jackpot flag, special 2 16R number If any of the type 1 jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  When it is determined in step S6901 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S6901: YES), the process proceeds to step S6902, and the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the 16R first type. Determine if it is a jackpot. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special 2 16R type 1 jackpot flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON.

  When it is determined in step S6902 that the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the 16R first-class jackpot (S6902: YES), the process proceeds to step S6903, and “16” is set in the first round counter area RC1. set. Then, this round number setting process is ended.

  On the other hand, in step S6902, when it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not the 16R first-class jackpot (S6902: NO), that is, the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the 8R first. If it is a big jackpot or 8R second big jackpot, the process advances to step S6904, and "8" is set in the first round counter area RC1. Then, this round number setting process is ended.

  When it is determined in step S6901 that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is not a big hit (S6901: YES), that is, the opening / closing execution mode of this time is triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. In the case where the result of the big hit lottery executed upon the entry is a small hit, the process proceeds to step S6905.

  In step S6905, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the first small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether the first small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. In step S6905, when it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first small hit (S6905: YES), the process proceeds to step S6906, and “1” is set in the first round counter area RC1. To do. Then, this round number setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6905 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not the first small hit (S6905: NO), the process proceeds to step S6907.

  In step S6907, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the second small hit. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the second small hit flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON. When it is determined in step S6907 that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second small hit (S6907: YES), the process proceeds to step S6908, and “6” is set in the first round counter area RC1. To do. Then, this round number setting process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S6907 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not the second small hit (S6907: NO), that is, the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the third small hit. If it is, the process advances to step S6909 to set “8” in the first round counter area RC1. Then, this round number setting process is ended.

<Winning prize opening and closing processing>
Next, the special winning opening opening / closing process will be described. The special winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6714) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 143 is a flowchart showing the special winning opening opening / closing processing. In step S7001, it is determined whether the opening / closing door 36b provided at the special winning opening 36a is open. Specifically, the determination is made based on the drive state of the variable winning drive unit 36c. When it is determined in step S7001 that the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is not open (S7001: NO), the process proceeds to step S7002, and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "0". Determine if there is. When it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S7002: YES), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7002 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “0” (S7002: NO), the process proceeds to step S7003.

  In step S7003, it is determined whether or not the value of the first timer counter area T1 provided in the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. The value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, every 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S7003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S7003: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7003 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S7003: YES), the process proceeds to step S7004 and the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is opened. In order to do so, the variable winning award driving section 36c is brought into a driving state. Then, it progresses to step S7005.

  In step S7005, an entrance counter setting process is executed. In the ball entry counter setting process, a value that allows entry of a game ball into the ball entry counter area PC provided in each of the various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 during one opening of the special winning opening 36a (during one round) is set. set. The details of the entry counter setting process will be described later. After executing step S7005, the process proceeds to step S7006.

  In step S7006, a special winning opening open limit time setting process is executed. In the special winning opening open limit time setting process, an open limit time, which is a limit of one opening time of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a, is set. Specifically, a value corresponding to the opening limit time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. As described above, the value set in the first timer counter area T1 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, every 2 msec. The details of the special winning opening open time limit setting process will be described later. After executing step S7006, the process proceeds to step S7007.

  In step S7007, a special winning opening opening command is set. After that, the main prize opening / closing processing is ended. The special winning opening opening command causes the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a has started. The command includes information and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that opening of the opening / closing door 36b for one round is started based on the received special winning opening opening command, and displays the effect contents on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46. The contents are updated to correspond to the start of the opening of 36b. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the special winning opening opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. The display control device 100 recognizes that opening of the opening / closing door 36b for one round has started based on the received special winning opening opening command, and displays the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 as the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Update to the content corresponding to the start of.

  When it is determined in step S7001 that the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is open (step S7001: YES), the process proceeds to step S7008, and whether or not the special winning opening opening limit time has elapsed. To determine. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the first timer counter area T1 is "0". In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. When it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is not “0” (S7008: NO), the process proceeds to step S7009.

  In step S7009, whether or not a game ball has entered the special winning opening 36a is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the variable winning device 36. When it is determined in step S7009 that a game ball has not entered (S7009: NO), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7009 that a game ball has entered (S7009: YES), the flow advances to step S7010 to subtract 1 from the value of the entry counter area PC. Then, it progresses to step S7011.

  In step S7011, it is determined whether or not the value of the entry counter area PC is "0". When it is determined in step S7011 that the value of the entry counter area PC is not "0" (S7011: NO), the main winning opening / closing processing is ended as it is.

  When it is determined in step S7008 that the value of the first timer counter area T1 is “0” (S7008: YES), or when it is determined in step S7011 that the value of the entry counter area PC is “0”. (S7011: YES) advances to step S7012 and executes a special winning opening closing process. Specifically, in order to close the opening / closing door 36b provided at the special winning opening 36a, the variable winning driving unit 36c is brought into a non-driving state. Then, it progresses to step S7013.

  In step S7013, 1 is subtracted from the value in the first round counter area RC1. After that, the process advances to step S7014, and it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0”. When it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “0” (S7014: YES), the main winning opening opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7014 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "0" (S7014: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7015.

  In step S7015, a special winning opening closing time setting process is executed. The special winning opening closing time setting process is a process for setting the closing time of the special winning opening 36a, and specifically, a value corresponding to the closing time is set in the first timer counter area T1. In this case, the first timer counter area T1 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the closing time of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a. In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit, "1000" (2 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. When it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a small hit, "30" (that is, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After executing step S7015, the process advances to step S7016.

  In step S7016, a special winning opening closing command is set. After that, the main prize opening / closing processing is ended. Note that the special winning opening closing command is information for causing the sub light-side control device 90, which is the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, to recognize that the opening of the opening / closing door 36b provided in the special winning opening 36a is completed. And is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. Based on the received special winning opening closing command, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 36b for one round has been opened, and displays the effect contents in the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 on the opening / closing door 36b. The content is updated to correspond to the end of release. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the special winning opening closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received special winning opening closing command, the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening / closing door 36b for one round has been opened, and displays the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 as the opening / closing door 36b is opened. Update to the content that corresponds to the end.

<Incoming ball counter setting process>
Next, the entry counter setting process will be described. The game entrance counter setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 143: S7005) of the special winning opening opening / closing process.

  FIG. 144 is a flowchart showing the entry counter setting process. In step S7101, "10" is set in the entry counter area PC. After that, the main entrance counter setting process is ended.

<Opening time limit setting process for the special winning opening>
Next, the special winning opening open limit time setting process will be described. The special winning opening open time limit setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a special winning opening opening / closing process subroutine (FIG. 143: S7006).

  FIG. 145 is a flowchart showing a special winning opening open time limit setting process. In step S7201, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, feature 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 2 16R If any of the type 1 jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7201 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S7201: YES), the process advances to step S7202 and "15000" (that is, 30. 0 sec) is set. After that, the processing for setting the opening limit time for the special winning opening is ended.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7201 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not a big hit (S7201: NO), the process proceeds to step S7203, and the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the first. Determine whether it is a small hit. Specifically, when the first small hit flag is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first small hit.

  If it is determined in step S7203 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the first small hit (S7203: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7204 and "800" (that is, "1" in the first timer counter area T1). , 1.6 sec). After that, the processing for setting the opening limit time for the special winning opening is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7203 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not the first small hit (S7203: NO), that is, the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the second small hit. Alternatively, if it is the third small hit, the process proceeds to step S7205, and "30" (that is, 0.06 sec) is set in the first timer counter area T1. After that, the processing for setting the opening limit time for the special winning opening is ended.

<V prize opening / closing processing>
Next, the V winning opening / closing processing will be described. The V winning opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6715) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 146 is a flowchart showing the V winning opening / closing processing. In step S7301, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, feature 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 2 16R If any of the type 1 jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7301 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not a big hit (S7301: NO), that is, if the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a small hit, V Since the opening / closing door 48a provided at the winning opening 48 is not opened, this V winning opening opening / closing processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S7301: YES), the process proceeds to step S7302.

  In step S7302, it is determined whether the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “3”. When it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not “3” (S7302: YES), the process proceeds to step S7303.

  In step S7303, it is determined whether the opening / closing door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 is open. Specifically, the determination is performed based on the driving state of the opening / closing door driving unit 48b. When it is determined in step S7303 that the opening / closing door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 is not open (S7301: NO), the process proceeds to step S7304 and the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "4". Determine if there is. When it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is not "4" (S7304: NO), this V winning opening / closing processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7304 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is “4” (S7304: YES), the process proceeds to step S7305.

  In step S7305, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening opened flag stored in the various flag storage area 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. The V winning opening opened flag is a flag for recognizing whether or not the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 has already been opened in the present opening / closing execution mode. In this embodiment, the opening / closing door 48a is configured to open only once in the opening / closing execution mode. In step S7305, when it is determined that the V winning opening opening flag is not ON (S7305: NO), the process proceeds to step S7306, and the opening / closing door drive is performed to open the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48. The portion 48b is brought into a driving state. After that, it advances to step S7307. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7305 that the V winning opening opened flag is ON (S7305: YES), the V winning opening opening / closing processing is ended.

  In step S7307, a V winning opening opening limit time setting process is executed. In the opening time limit setting process for the V winning opening, the opening limit time which is the limit of the opening time of the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is set once. Specifically, a value corresponding to the opening limit time is set in the third timer counter area T3. In this case, the third timer counter area T3 is used as a counter for measuring the remaining time of the opening limit time of the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48. The value set in the third timer counter area T3 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. The details of the V winning opening opening time limit setting process will be described later. After executing step S7307, the process advances to step S7308.

  In step S7308, a V winning opening opening command is set. After that, this V winning a prize opening and closing processing ends. The V winning opening opening command causes the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that opening of the opening / closing door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 has started. The command includes information and is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. Based on the received V winning opening opening command, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that opening / closing of the opening / closing door 48a has started, and the contents of the effects on the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are opened / closed. Update the contents corresponding to the start. Further, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the V winning opening opening command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received V winning opening opening command, the display control device 100 recognizes that opening and closing of the opening and closing door 48a has started, and at the same time, opens the opening and closing door 48a as the effect contents on the symbol display device 41. Update to the content corresponding to that.

  When it is determined in step S7303 that the opening / closing door 48a provided in the V winning opening 48 is open (step S7303: YES), the process proceeds to step S7309, and whether a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 or not. Whether or not it is determined by the detection state of the detection sensor corresponding to the V winning opening 48. If it is determined in step S7309 that a game ball has entered (S7309: YES), the process advances to step S7310 to see if the V winning flag stored in the various flag storage areas 64e of the RAM 64 is ON. Determine whether or not.

  When it is determined in step S7310 that the V winning flag is not ON (S7310: NO), the process proceeds to step S7311, the V winning flag is turned ON, and the process proceeds to step S7312 to set the V winning command. The V winning command is a command including information for causing the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that a game ball has entered the V winning opening 48, and is a command of normal processing It is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the game ball has entered the V winning opening 48 based on the received V winning command, and at the same time, the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are played in the V winning opening 48. Update to the content corresponding to the ball entered. After executing step S7312, the process proceeds to step S7313. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7309 that no game ball has entered (S7309: NO), and if it is determined in step S7310 that the V winning flag is ON (S7310: YES). , Without proceeding to step S7311 and step S7312, the process proceeds to step S7313.

  In step S7313, it is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening limit time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the third timer counter area T3 is "0". When it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is not "0" (S7313: NO), the present V winning opening / closing processing is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7313 that the value of the third timer counter area T3 is “0” (S7313: YES), the process proceeds to step S7314.

  In step S7314, a V winning opening closing process is executed. Specifically, in order to close the V winning opening 48, the opening / closing door driving portion 48b is brought into a non-driving state. After that, the process advances to step S7315, and the V winning opening opened flag is set to ON. Then, it progresses to step S7316.

  In step S7316, a V winning opening closing command is set. After that, this V winning a prize opening and closing processing ends. In addition, the V winning opening closing command is information for causing the audio emission control device 90 and the display control device 100, which are sub-side control devices, to recognize that the opening / closing door 48a provided at the V winning opening 48 has been completed. And is transmitted to the sound emission control device 90 by the command output process (FIG. 127: step S5402) of the normal process. Based on the received V winning opening closing command, the sound emission control device 90 recognizes that the opening / closing door 48a has been opened, and the effect contents of the various lamps 47 and the speaker 46 are opened / closed. Update to the content that corresponds to what you did. In addition, the voice emission control device 90 transmits the V winning opening closing command to the display control device 100 while maintaining its information form. Based on the received V winning opening closing command, the display control device 100 recognizes that the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 48a has ended, and the effect contents on the symbol display device 41 indicate that the opening and closing of the opening and closing door 48a has ended. Update to the corresponding content.

  When it is determined in step S7302 that the value of the first round counter area RC1 is "3" (S7302: YES), the process proceeds to step S7317, and it is determined whether or not the V winning opening opening flag is ON. To do. When it is determined in step S7317 that the V winning opening opened flag is ON (S7317: YES), the process proceeds to step S7318, and the V winning opening opened flag is turned OFF. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7317 that the V winning opening opening completion flag is not ON (S7317: NO), the present V winning opening opening / closing processing is ended without executing step S7318.

<V winning opening opening time limit setting process>
Next, the V winning opening opening time limit setting process will be described. The V winning opening open time limit setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 146: S7307) of the V winning port opening / closing process.

  FIG. 147 is a flowchart showing a V winning opening opening limit time setting process. In step S7401, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the first-class jackpot. Specifically, if any of the special 1 8R first type jackpot flag, the special 2 8R first type jackpot flag, and the special 2 16R first type jackpot flag are ON, the opening / closing execution mode of this time It is determined that the trigger for the transition to is the first-class jackpot.

  When it is determined in step S7401 that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the first-class jackpot (S7401: YES), the process advances to step S7402, and "5000" is set in the third timer counter area T3 (that is, , 10.0 sec). After that, the processing for setting the opening limit time for the V winning opening is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7401 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not the first-class jackpot (S7401: NO), that is, the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the second-class jackpot. If it is, the process advances to step S7403 to set “3” (that is, 0.006 sec) in the third timer counter area T3. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is the second-class jackpot, it becomes substantially impossible for the game ball to enter the V winning opening 48. There is. After executing step S7403, the open limit time setting process for the V winning opening is ended.

<Ending time setting process>
Next, the ending time setting process will be described. The ending time setting process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6719) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 148 is a flowchart showing the ending time setting process. In step S7501, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, feature 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, feature 2 16R If any of the type 1 jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  If it is determined in step S7501 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit (S7501: YES), the process advances to step S7502 and "3000" (that is, 6.0 sec) in the timer counter area Te. Set. After that, the ending time setting process ends.

  On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7501 that the trigger for the shift to the current open / close execution mode is not a big hit (S7501: NO), that is, when the trigger for the shift to the current open / close execution mode is a small hit, It advances to step S7503.

  In step S7503, "0" (that is, 0.0 sec) is set in the timer counter area Te. That is, when the game ball is entered into the second starting opening 34, the opening / closing execution mode is changed this time, and the lottery result of the jackpot lottery executed when the game is entered is small. In the case of a win, the ending effect is not substantially performed. After executing step S7503, the present ending time setting process is ended.

<Transition process at the end of the ending period>
Next, the transition process at the end of the ending period will be described. The transition process at the end of the ending period is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 140: S6725) of the game state transition process.

  FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing the transition processing at the end of the ending period. In step S7601, it is determined whether or not the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is a big hit. Specifically, the jackpot type flags stored in the RAM 64 (special 1 8R first type jackpot flag, special 1 8R type 2 jackpot flag, special 2 8R type 1 jackpot flag, special 2 16R number If any of the type 1 jackpot flags) is ON, it is determined that the trigger for the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a jackpot.

  When it is determined in step S7601 that the shift to the opening / closing execution mode this time is a big hit (S7601: YES), the process proceeds to step S7602, and it is determined whether the V winning flag is ON. If it is determined in step S7602 that the V winning flag is ON (S7602: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7603.

  In step S7603, of the special 1 8R first type jackpot flag, the special 1 8R second type jackpot flag, the special 2 8R first type jackpot flag, and the special 2 16R type 1 jackpot flag are turned on. Turn off the flag. After executing step S7603, the process advances to step S7604.

  In step S7604, the high probability mode flag stored in RAM 64 is turned on. As a result, the winning / winning lottery mode is shifted to the high-probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is finished. After executing step S7604, the process proceeds to step S7605.

  In step S7605, the high probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. The high-probability mode command is a command that includes information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win / loss lottery mode is the high-probability mode. After executing step S7605, the process advances to step S7606.

  In step S7606, the high frequency support mode flag is turned ON. As a result, after the open / close execution mode ends, the high frequency support mode is entered. Then, it progresses to step S7607.

  In step S7607, the ST game number count flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S7608, and "0" is set to the ST game number counter PNC1. After that, the process advances to step S7609, and the V winning flag is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S7610.

  In step S7610, it is determined whether the special jackpot flag is ON. When it is determined in step S7610 that the special jackpot flag is not ON (S7610: NO), the process proceeds to step S7611, and the special 2 main display command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. Upon receiving the special 2 main display command, the voice emission control device 90 displays the variable display of the symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 in the main display area MA of the symbol display device 41, and the first start A command is transmitted to the display control device 100 so that the variable display of the symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the mouth 33 is displayed in the first sub display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. After executing Step S7611, the transition process at the end of the present ending period is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7610 that the special jackpot flag is ON (S7610: YES), the transition process at the end of the ending period is terminated without executing step S7611.

  When it is determined in step S7602 that the V winning flag is not ON (S7602: NO), the process proceeds to step S7612, and the special 1 8R first-class big hit flag, the special 1R 2R second-class big hit flag, and the special 2 Of the 8R first-class jackpot flag for special use and the 16R first-class jackpot flag for special use, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After executing step S7612, the process advances to step S7613.

  In step S7613, if the high probability mode flag stored in the RAM 64 is ON, the high probability mode flag is turned OFF. As a result, the winning / winning lottery mode is shifted to the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode is completed. After executing step S7613, the process advances to step S7614.

  In step S7614, the low-probability mode command is set as a command to be transmitted to the sound emission control device 90. The low-probability mode command is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the win / loss lot mode is the low-probability mode. After executing step S7614, the process advances to step S7615.

  In step S7615, if the high frequency support mode flag is ON, the high frequency support mode flag is turned OFF. As a result, after the open / close execution mode is completed, the low frequency support mode is entered. After that, the process advances to step S7616.

  In step S7616, the electric support game count flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S7617, and "0" is set to the electric support game number counter PNC2. Then, it progresses to step S7610.

  When it is determined in step S7601 that the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is not the big hit (S7601: NO), that is, when the trigger for the shift to the open / close execution mode this time is the small hit, Proceeding to S7618, among the first small hit flag, the second small hit flag, and the third small hit flag, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After executing Step S7618, the transition process at the end of the present ending period is ended.

<Processing for electric power support>
Next, a process for supporting electric power combination will be described. The power combination support process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 127: S5407).

  FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the electric power combination support processing. In step S7701, it is determined whether or not it is being supported. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the in-support flag of each flag storage area 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The in-support flag is a flag that is turned on when the opening / closing process of the electric accessory 34a of the second starting port 34 is started and turned off when the opening / closing process is ended. If it is determined in step S7701 that the in-support flag is not ON (S7701: NO), the process proceeds to step S7702.

  In step S7702, it is determined whether or not the support winning flag in the various flag storage areas 64g of the RAM 64 is ON. The support winning flag is a flag that is turned on when the open state wins in the electric role open lottery for determining whether or not to open the electric role thing 34a. When it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is not ON (S7702: NO), the process proceeds to step S7703.

  In step S7703, it is determined whether or not the value of the second timer counter area T2 provided in each counter area 64f of the RAM 64 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. The count value set in the second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec.

  When it is determined in step S7703 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7703: NO), the main power combination supporting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7703: YES), the process proceeds to step S7704.

  In step S7704, it is determined whether it is the end timing of the variable display of symbols in the universal figure unit 38. If it is determined in step S7704 that it is the end timing of the variable display (S7704: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7705, and after the deviation display is set, the processing for main electric power support is terminated. By setting the disengagement display, the variable display of the symbols in the universal graphic unit 38 is terminated with the disengagement display stopped. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7704 that it is not the end timing of the variable display (S7704: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7706.

  In step S7706, it is determined whether or not the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is larger than “0”. If it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the number of reserved accessory pieces SN is "0" (S7706: NO), the processing for main electric power support is directly terminated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7706 that the value of the number of reserved accessory parts SN is larger than “0” (S7706: YES), the process proceeds to step S7707.

  In step S7707, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress, and then, in step S7708, it is determined whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. If the open / close execution mode is not set in step S7707 (S7707: NO) and the high frequency support mode is set in step S7708 (S7708: YES), the flow advances to step S7709 to perform the electric accessory release lottery. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric part holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 463, the electric accessory opening lottery is selected. Be elected. That is, in the present embodiment, in the high frequency support mode, there is a probability of 232/233 to win the electric accessory release lottery. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. The second timer counter area T2 is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated. Then, it progresses to step S7710.

  In step S7710, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S7709 is support winning. When it is determined in step S7710 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is support winning (S7710: YES), the process proceeds to step S7711, the support winning flag is set to ON, and various counter areas 64f of the RAM 64 are provided. "1" is set in the obtained second round counter area RC2. The second round counter area RC2 is a counter area for counting the number of times the electric accessory 34a is opened. After that, the process advances to step S7712. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7710 that the result of the electric accessory release lottery is not a support win (S7710: NO), the process proceeds to step S7712 without executing the process of step S7711.

  In step S7712, it is determined whether the winning / winning lottery mode is the low probability mode. If it is determined in step S7712 that the winning / winning lottery mode is the low-probability mode (S7712: YES), the flow proceeds to step S7713. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7712 that the winning / winning lottery mode is not the low-probability mode (S7712: NO), the electric power combination supporting process is ended as it is.

  In step S7713, it is determined whether or not the value of the electric support game count counter PNC2 is "100". If it is determined in step S7713 that the value of the power-support game number counter PNC2 is not "100" (S7713: NO), the main-power-combination-supporting process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7713 that the value of the electric power support game number counter PNC2 is “0”, the process proceeds to step S7714, in which the high-frequency support mode flag is turned off and the special jackpot flag is turned on. If there is, the special jackpot flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S7715.

  In step S7715, a low-frequency support command, which is a command including information for causing the sub-side control device to recognize that the support mode is the low-frequency support mode, is set as a command to be transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90. To do. After that, the process for supporting the electric power combination ends.

  The low-frequency support command set in step S7715 is transmitted to the voice light emission control device 90 by the command output process of the normal process (FIG. 127: step S5402). The voice emission control device 90 specifies that the support mode is the low frequency support mode based on the reception of the low frequency support command, and executes the process corresponding thereto.

  If it is determined in step S7707 that it is the opening / closing execution mode (S7707: YES), or if it is determined that it is not in the high frequency support mode in step S7708 (S7708: NO), the process proceeds to step S7716, and the electric accessory release lottery is performed. I do. Specifically, when the value stored in the electric power holding area 64d is shifted and the value of the electric accessory opening counter C4 shifted to the execution area is 0 to 461, the electric accessory releasing lottery is selected. Be elected. That is, in the present embodiment, in the low frequency support mode, there is a probability of 231/233 to win the electric accessory open lottery. Also, "750" (that is, 1.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2 at the same time as the electric accessory release lottery. After that, the process advances to step S7717.

  In step S7717, it is determined whether or not the result of the electric accessory release lottery in step S7716 is support win. If it is determined in step S7717 that the support is not won (S7717: NO), the main power combination support process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7717 that the support is won (S7717: YES), the process proceeds to step S7718, the support winning flag is turned ON, and "1" is set in the second round counter area RC2. , The process for main electric power support is ended.

  When it is determined in step S7702 that the support winning flag is ON (S7702: YES), the process proceeds to step S7719, and it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0”. In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the fluctuation time of the universal figure unit 38. When it is determined in step S7719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7719: NO), since the pattern display in the universal figure unit 38 is being displayed, the main electric power support process is performed as it is. To finish. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7719 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7719: YES), the process proceeds to step S7720.

  In step S7720, a hit display is set. As a result, the variable display of the symbols in the universal figure unit 38 is terminated with the hit display stopped. After that, the process advances to step S7721 to turn on the support flag and turn off the support winning flag. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

  If it is determined in step S7701 that the in-support flag is ON (S7701: YES), the flow advances to step S7722 to execute electric role opening / closing processing for opening / closing controlling the electric accessory 34a. Then, the processing for main electric power support is ended.

<Opening / closing electric power processing>
Next, the power combination opening / closing process will be described. The electric power combination opening / closing process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a subroutine (FIG. 150: S7722) of the electric power combination support process.

  FIG. 151 is a flowchart showing a power combination opening / closing process. In step S7801, it is determined whether the electric accessory 34a is open. Whether or not the electric accessory 34a is open is determined by whether or not the electric accessory driving unit 44b is in a driving state. When it is determined that the electric accessory 34a is opened (S7801: YES), the process proceeds to step S7802.

  In step S7802, it is determined whether the value of the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S7802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7802: NO), the main electric power combination opening / closing process is ended as it is. That is, if the opening duration time of the electric accessory 34a has not ended, the main electric opening / closing process ends.

  When it is determined in step S7802 that the value of the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7802: YES), the process proceeds to step S7803, and a closing process is performed to control the electric accessory 34a in the closed state. "250" (that is, 0.5 sec) is set in the second timer counter area T2. That is, when the second timer counter area T2 as a means for measuring the opening duration of the electric accessory 34a is "0", the electric accessory 34a is closed and the second timer counter area T2 is electrically operated. It is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the accessory 34a, and "250" is set in the second timer counter area T2. After executing step S7803, the process advances to step S7804.

  In step S7804, the value of the second round counter area RC2 is decremented by 1, and then the process proceeds to step S7805 to determine whether the value of the second round counter area RC2 is “0”. When it is determined in step S7805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is not "0" (S7805: NO), the main power combination opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7805 that the value of the second round counter area RC2 is "0" (S7805: YES), the flow advances to step S7806 to turn off the support flag. Then, the main electric power opening / closing process is ended.

  If it is determined in step S7801 that the electric accessory 34a is not being opened (S7801: NO), the process advances to step S7807 to determine whether the second timer counter area T2 is "0". In this case, the second timer counter area T2 is used as a parameter for measuring the closing duration time of the electric accessory 34a. When it is determined in step S7807 that the second timer counter area T2 is not "0" (S7807: NO), the main power combination opening / closing process is ended as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7807 that the second timer counter area T2 is “0” (S7807: YES), the process proceeds to step S7808, and an opening process for controlling the electric accessory 34a to the open state is executed. . After that, the process advances to step S7809.

  In step S7809, it is determined whether or not the open / close execution mode is in progress. If it is determined that the open / close execution mode is not in effect (S7809: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7810 to determine whether or not the high frequency support mode is in effect. To do.

  If it is determined in step S7810 that the high frequency support mode is in progress (S7810: YES), the flow advances to step S7811 to set "800" (that is, 1.6 sec) in the second timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening / closing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7809 that the mode is the open / close execution mode (S7809: YES), or if it is determined that the mode is not the high frequency support mode in step S7810 (S7810: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7812, and the second "700" (that is, 1.4 sec) is set in the timer counter area T2. Then, the main electric power opening / closing process is ended.

<Game ball launch control processing>
Next, the game ball launch control process will be described. The game ball firing control process is executed by the MPU 62 of the main control device 60 as a normal process subroutine (FIG. 127: S5408).

  FIG. 152 is a flowchart showing the game ball launch control processing. In step S7901, it is determined whether the touch sensor 25a is ON. That is, it is determined whether or not the player is touching the operation handle 25. When it is determined in step S7901 that the touch sensor 25a is ON (S7901: YES), the process proceeds to step S7902. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S7901 that the touch sensor 25a is not ON (S7901: NO), the game ball launch control process is ended.

  In step S7902, it is determined whether or not the game ball firing button 26 is ON. When it is determined in step S7902 that the game ball firing button 26 is not ON (S7902: NO), the process proceeds to step S7903.

  In step S7903, it is determined whether the operation handle 25 is at the origin position. That is, it is determined whether or not the rotational operation amount of the operation handle 25 is zero. When it is determined in step S7903 that the operation handle 25 is at the origin position (S7903: YES), the game ball launch control process is ended. When it is determined in step S7903 that the operation handle 25 is not at the origin position (S7903: NO), the process proceeds to step S7904.

  In step S7904, it is determined whether the wait button 25b is ON. When it is determined in step S7904 that the wait button is ON (S7904: YES), the present game ball launch control processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S7904 that the wait button is not ON (S7904: NO), the flow proceeds to step S7905.

  In step S7905, a control signal is transmitted to the firing control device 80 so as to fire the game ball with a firing strength according to the displacement amount (rotation operation amount) of the operation handle 25. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity according to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. After executing step S7905, the present game ball firing control processing is ended.

  When it is determined in step S7902 that the game ball launch button 26 is ON (S7902: YES), the process proceeds to step S7906. In step S7906, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch the game ball with the launch intensity for right-handed hitting. In the present embodiment, a control signal is transmitted to the launch control device 80 so as to launch a game ball with the same launch strength as when the amount of turning operation of the operating handle 25 is maximum. The launch control device 80 launches a game ball into the game area PA with a launch intensity according to the control signal received from the main MPU 62. Then, the game ball launch control process is terminated.

K6. Electrical configuration of audio emission control device and display control device:
Next, the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 153 is a block diagram mainly showing the electrical configurations of the sound emission control device 90 and the display control device 100. It should be noted that some components such as the power supply device 85 are omitted. The MPU 92 and the RTC 96 are mounted on the sound emission control board 91 provided in the sound emission control device 90. The MPU 92 is an element including a ROM 93, a RAM 94, an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, and the like.

  The ROM 93 stores various control programs executed by the MPU 92, fixed value data, tables, and the like. For example, a part of the area of the ROM 93 is provided with an effect pattern table storage area 93a, a variable display pattern table storage area 93b, and the like.

  The RAM 94 is a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 93 is executed. For example, various flag storage areas 94a, various counter areas 94b, lottery counter areas 94c, etc. are provided in a part of the area of the RAM 94. It is not essential that the ROM 93 and the RAM 94 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 92, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The RTC 96 (RTC: Real-Time Clock) outputs date information and time information. The RTC 96 has a backup power supply and can update the date information and the time information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off. The MPU 92 acquires the date information and the time information output from the RTC 96, and also executes the RTC effect that is an effect based on the acquired date information and the time information. In the present embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 determines whether or not the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. Start the process for execution. The RTC effect of the present embodiment is configured by an RTC effect moving image for 300 seconds and RTC effect music corresponding to the RTC effect moving image, and is executed every hour.

  The MPU 92 is provided with an input port and an output port, respectively. The main controller 60 and the effect operation button 24 are connected to the input side of the MPU 92. Various commands are received from the main control device 60. A speaker 46 and various lamps 47 are connected to the output side of the MPU 92, and a display control device 100 is also connected to the output side.

  A display control board 101 provided in the display control device 100 includes an MPU 102 that is an element in which a program ROM 103 and a work RAM 104 are combined into a chip, a video display processor (VDP) 105, a character ROM 106, and a video RAM 107. Is installed. Note that it is not essential that the program ROM 103 and the work RAM 104 are integrated into one chip for the MPU 102, and each may be configured into an individual chip.

  The MPU 102 analyzes various commands received from the sound emission control device 90 or performs predetermined arithmetic processing based on the received various commands to control the VDP 105 (specifically, generate an internal command for the VDP 105). .

  The program ROM 103 is a memory for storing various control programs executed by the MPU 102 and fixed value data, and also stores JPEG image data for a background image.

  The work RAM 104 is a memory for temporarily storing work data, flags, and the like used when the MPU 102 executes various programs.

  The VDP 105 is a kind of drawing circuit and directly operates an image processing device as a liquid crystal display driver incorporated in the symbol display device 41. The VDP 105, which is an IC chip, is also called a "drawing chip", and is a kind of microcomputer chip having a firmware dedicated to drawing processing. The VDP 105 adjusts the respective timings of the MPU 102, the video RAM 107 and the like to intervene in the reading and writing of data, and also reads the image data to be stored in the video RAM 107 from the character ROM 106 at a predetermined timing and displays it on the symbol display device 41.

  The character ROM 106 plays a role as an image data library for storing character data such as designs displayed on the design display device 41. The character ROM 106 stores bitmap format image data of various display symbols, a color palette table that is referred to when determining the expression color at each dot of the bitmap image, and the like. It is also possible to provide a plurality of character ROMs 106 and share the character ROMs 106 to store image data and the like. Further, the JPEG format image data for the background image stored in the program ROM 103 may be stored in the character ROM 106.

  The video RAM 107 is a memory for storing display data to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the display contents of the symbol display device 41 are changed by rewriting the contents of the video RAM 107.

  Hereinafter, the MPU 62, the ROM 63, and the RAM 64 of the main controller 60 are also referred to as the main MPU 62, the main ROM 63, and the main RAM 64, respectively. The ROM 93 and the sound-light side RAM 94 are also called, and the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is also called the display side MPU 102.

K7. Various processes executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device:
Next, an example of specific control executed in the sound emission control device and the display control device will be described. The process executed by the sound emission control device 90 will be described first, and then the process executed by the display control device 100 will be described.

<Various processing executed in the voice emission control device>
<Timer interrupt processing>
First, the timer interrupt processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 will be described.

  FIG. 154 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt processing executed in the sound-light side MPU 92. The timer interrupt process is repeatedly executed in a relatively short cycle (4 msec in this embodiment). Hereinafter, processing of each step executed in the timer interrupt processing will be described.

  In step S8001, a command storage process is executed. The command storing process is a process for storing the received command in the sound / light side RAM 94 when the command is received from the main MPU 62. The sound / light side RAM 94 is provided with a ring buffer for enabling storage and reading of commands received from the main MPU 62, and commands received from the main MPU 62 are sequentially stored in the ring buffer. , Are sequentially read according to the stored order. After executing step S8001, the process proceeds to step S8002.

  In step S8002, display mode switching processing is executed. In the display mode switching process, the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is displayed in the main display area MA, and the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the gaming ball into the second starting opening 34 is displayed. A display mode displayed in the first sub display area SA1 (hereinafter, also referred to as a special 1 main display mode) and a variation of the symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 are displayed in the main display area MA. A process for switching between a display mode (hereinafter, also referred to as a special 2 main display mode) in which the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33 is displayed in the first sub display area SA1 is executed together. To do. Details of the display mode switching process will be described later. After executing step S8002, the process proceeds to step S8003.

  In step S8003, a special game play effect process is executed. The special 1 game time effect process is a process of setting the content of the effect executed in the game time based on the entry of the game ball into the first starting opening 33. Details of the special game play effect processing will be described later. After executing step S8003, the process proceeds to step S8004.

  In step S8004, special 2 game time performance processing is executed. The special 2 game time effect process is a process of setting the content of the effect executed in the game time based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34. Details of the special 2 game time effect processing will be described later. After executing step S8004, the process proceeds to step S8005.

  In step S8005, a standby process for causing the display control device 100 to start displaying a demo video (main demo video) and a sub demo video is executed. Details of the standby process will be described later. After executing step S8005, the process proceeds to step S8006.

  In step S8006, RTC effect processing is executed. In the RTC effect processing, processing relating to the RTC effect is executed. Details of the RTC effect processing will be described below. After executing step S8006, the process proceeds to step S8007.

  In step S8007, result display processing is executed. In the result display process, a process for displaying a result screen is executed when 120 game times have ended without winning the jackpot in the jackpot lottery in the high-probability mode. Details of the result display processing will be described later. After executing step S8007, the process proceeds to step S8008.

  In step S8008, a light emission control process for controlling light emission of the various lamps 47 is executed. In the light emission control process, the light emission control of the various lamps 47 is performed based on the light emission data read in the various processes of steps S8002 to S8007. After executing step S8008, the process proceeds to step S8009.

  In step S8009, a voice output control process for controlling the voice output of the speaker 46 is executed. In the audio output control process, the audio output control of the speaker 46 is performed based on the audio output data read in the various processes of steps S8002 to S8007. After executing step S8009, the timer interrupt processing ends.

<Display mode switching process>
Next, the display mode switching process will be described. The display mode switching process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8002).

  FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing the display mode switching process. In step S8101, it is determined whether the special 2 main display command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S8101 that the special 2 main display command is received (S8101: YES), the process advances to step S8102 and the special 2 main display stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 is displayed. Turn on the flag. The special 2 main display flag displays the variation of the symbol based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 in the main display area MA and the variation of the symbol based on the entering of the gaming ball into the first starting opening 33. Is a flag for specifying in the sound-light side MPU 92 that it is a display mode (special 2 main display mode) in which is displayed in the first sub display area SA1. After executing step S8102, the process advances to step S8103.

  In step S8103, the special 2 main display command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The special 2 main display command is a command for instructing the display control device 100 to switch from the special 1 main display mode to the special 2 main display mode. Upon receiving the special 2 main display command, the display control device 100 executes processing for switching from the special 1 main display mode to the special 2 main display mode. After executing step S8103, the process advances to step S8104. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8101 that the special 2 main display command has not been received (S8101: NO), the process proceeds to step S8104 without executing steps S8102 and S8103.

  In step S8104, it is determined whether or not the final specific game time end command has been received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S8104 that the final specific game time end command has been received (S8104: YES), the process proceeds to step S8105, and the special 2 main display flag is turned off. After executing step S8105, the process advances to step S8106.

  In step S8106, the special 1 main display command A is transmitted to the display control device 100. The special 1 main display command A is a command for instructing the display control device 100 to switch from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode via the display of the result image. Upon receiving the special 1 main display command A, the display control device 100 executes processing for switching from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode via the display of the result image. After executing step S8106, the process advances to step S8107. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8104 that the final specific game time end command is not received (S8104: NO), the process proceeds to step S8107 without executing steps S8105 and S8106.

  In step S8107, it is determined whether the low frequency support command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S8107 that the low frequency support command is received (S8107: YES), the process proceeds to step S8108, and the special 2 main display flag is turned off. After executing step S8108, the process advances to step S8109.

  In step S8109, the special 1 main display command B is transmitted to the display control device 100. The special 1 main display command B causes the display control device 100 to switch from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode after the fluctuation of the symbol in the 100th game time has ended after the high-frequency support mode has started. This is a command for instructing. Upon receiving the special 1 main display command B, the display control device 100 switches from the special 2 main display mode to the special 1 main display mode after the fluctuation of the symbol in the 100th game time has ended since the high frequency support mode was started. Perform the processing for. After executing step S8109, the display mode switching process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8107 that the low-frequency support command has not been received (S8107: NO), the display mode switching process ends without executing steps S8108 and S8109.

<Special 1 game time production processing>
Next, the special 1 game time performance processing will be described. The processing for special game play effect is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 154: S8003) of the timer interruption processing.

  FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing the special game play effect processing. The special 1 game time effect process is for setting the content of the effect in the game time, which is executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 when the special 1 variation command is received. Processing. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special game play effect process will be described.

  In step S8201, it is determined whether or not the special 1 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8201 that the special 1 variation command is not received (S8201: NO), the special special 1 game time effect is performed without executing the processes of steps S8202 to S8210 described below. The process ends. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8201 that the special 1 variation command is received (S8201: YES), the process proceeds to step S8202.

  In step S8202, the special 1 variation command received this time is read, and from this command, the presence / absence of a jackpot, the type of a jackpot, the presence / absence of a reach occurrence, and the variation time information are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step S8203.

  In step S8203, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8203 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8203: NO), the process advances to step S8204, and effect pattern setting processing for the main display area is executed. In the setting process of the effect pattern for the main display area, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the main display area MA are set based on the information read in step S8202. After that, the process advances to step S8206. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8203 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8203: YES), the process advances to step S8205 and the effect pattern setting process for the sub display area is executed. In the effect pattern setting process for the sub display area, the contents of the notice effect and the reach effect displayed in the first sub display area SA1 are set based on the information read in step S8202. After that, the process advances to step S8206.

  In step S8206, the liquid crystal symbol setting process to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R 1st class jackpot, 8R 1st class jackpot, 8R 2nd class jackpot, the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established above is set as the information of the liquid crystal symbol this time. Specifically, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a 16R first-class jackpot or an 8R first-class jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination. Together, the same even number of symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead of this, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the “7” symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R first-class jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is the 8R second type jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the jackpot lottery of the game time this time is out, it is determined whether or not the reach has occurred based on the contents of the special 1 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the reach occurrence, it is the stop result that the same symbol combination does not hold on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the reach symbol on the effective line L (L1 or L2). The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination is established is determined as the information of the current stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that it does not correspond to the occurrence of the reach, it is a stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L (L1 or L2), and the activated line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the reach symbol combination is not established is set as the liquid crystal symbol information of this time. After executing step S8206, the process advances to step S8207.

  In step S8207, processing for determining the variable display pattern for the current game is executed. In the process, while identifying the information of the variation time of the current game times from the contents of the variation command for special 1 received this time, the information of the variation time, and the information of the liquid crystal design identified in step S8206 described above. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S8207, the process advances to step S8208.

  In step S8208, the information of the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern set in the current game time is set in the special 1 game time effect command. Then, the process proceeds to step S8209, and the special 1 game time effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect contents corresponding to the received special 1 game time effect command. After executing step S8209, the process advances to step S8210.

  In step S8210, a process of updating the hold information is executed. In the update processing of the hold information, the information of the first hold number counter area is updated so that the first hold number stored in the first hold number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing step S8210, the game time effect processing for the special feature 1 is ended.

<Special 2 game time performance processing>
Next, the special 2 game time effect processing will be described. The special 2 game time effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a subroutine (FIG. 154: S8004) of the timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 157 is a flowchart showing the special 2 game time effect processing. The special 2 game time effect process is for setting the content of the effect in the game time, which is executed when the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 when the special 2 variation command is received. Processing. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special 2 game time effect process will be described.

  In step S8301, it is determined whether or not the special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. When it is determined in step S8301 that the special 2 variation command has not been received (S8301: NO), the special special 2 game time effect is performed without executing the processing of steps S8302 to S8310 described below. The process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8301 that the special 2 variation command is received (S8301: YES), the process advances to step S8302.

  In step S8302, the special 2 variation command received this time is read, and from this command, information on the presence / absence of a big hit, the type of a big hit, the presence / absence of a small hit, the type of a small hit, and the variation time are read. Then, the read information is stored in the register of the sound-light side MPU 92. After that, the process advances to step S8303.

  In step S8303, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8303 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8303: YES), the process advances to step S8304, and effect pattern setting processing for the main display area is executed. In the setting process of the effect pattern for the main display area, the content of the notice effect displayed in the main display area MA is set based on the information read in step S8302. After that, the process advances to step S8306. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8303 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8303: NO), the flow advances to step S8305 to execute effect pattern setting processing for the sub display area. In the effect pattern setting process for the sub display area, the content of the notice effect displayed in the first sub display area SA1 is set based on the information read in step S8302. After that, the process advances to step S8306.

  In step S8306, the process for setting the liquid crystal symbols to be stopped is executed. In the liquid crystal symbol setting process, if the result of the jackpot lottery of the current game is 16R 1st class jackpot, 8R 1st class jackpot, 8R 2nd class jackpot, the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is established above is set as the information of the liquid crystal symbol this time. Specifically, if the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is a 16R first-class jackpot or an 8R probability variation jackpot, the same odd symbol combination can be selected as the same symbol combination, The same even number of symbol combinations may be selected. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, this selection rate is the same for the same combination of odd symbols and the same combination of even symbols, but instead of this, the former is selected over the latter. The configuration may have a higher rate, and the latter may have a higher selection rate than the former. Further, the combination of the “7” symbols is selected only in the case of the 16R first-class jackpot. In addition, when the result of the jackpot lottery of this game time is the 8R second type jackpot, the same even number of symbols is selected as the same symbol combination.

  If the result of the big hit lottery of the game time this time is out, it is determined whether or not there is a small hit from the contents of the special 2 variation command. When it is determined that it corresponds to the small hit, it is a stop result that the combination of the same symbols is not established on the effective line L (L1 or L2), and the predetermined result is set on the effective line L (L1 or L2) The information corresponding to the stop result for which the combination of symbols is established is determined as the information of the present stop result. On the other hand, when it is determined that the small hit is not supported, the information corresponding to the stop result in which the same symbol combination is not established on the activated line L (L1 or L2) is used as the liquid crystal symbol information this time. Set. After executing step S8306, the process advances to step S8307.

  In step S8307, processing for determining the variation display pattern of the current game time is executed. In the process, information on the variation time of the current game time is specified from the content of the special-purpose variation command received this time, information on the variation time, and information on the liquid crystal design identified in step S8306. The variable display pattern corresponding to the combination of is selected. When selecting the variable display pattern, the variable display pattern table stored in the variable display pattern table storage area 93b of the sound-light side ROM 93 is referred to. After executing step S8307, the process advances to step S8308.

  In step S8308, the effect pattern, the stop liquid crystal symbol, and the variable display pattern information set in the current game time are set in the special 2 game time effect command. After that, the process advances to step S8309, and the special 2 game time effect command is transmitted to the display control device 100. The display-side MPU 102 of the display control device 100 executes a process of causing the symbol display device 41 to display the effect contents corresponding to the received special 2 game time effect command. After executing step S8309, the process advances to step S8310.

  In step S8310, update processing of the hold information is executed. In the update processing of the hold information, the information of the second hold number counter area is updated so that the second hold number stored in the second hold number counter area of the sound-light side RAM 94 is decremented by 1. After executing step S8310, the game special effect processing for main special 2 is ended.

<Processing for standby>
Next, the standby process will be described. The standby process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8005).

  FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing the standby process. The standby process is a process for causing the display control device 100 to start displaying a demo video (main demo video) or a sub-demonstration video when a special customer waiting command or a special customer waiting command is received. The specific processing of the standby processing will be described below.

  In step S8401, a special 1 migration preparation process is executed. The special 1 transition preparation process is a process of executing preparation for starting a demo video (main demo video) or a sub demo video when a special customer waiting command is received. Details of the special 1 transition preparation process will be described later. After executing step S8401, the flow proceeds to step S8402.

  In step S8402, special 2 migration preparation processing is executed. The special 2 transition preparation process is a process of executing preparation for starting a demo video (main demo video) or a sub demo video when a special customer waiting command is received. Details of the special 2 transition preparation process will be described later. After executing step S8402, the process proceeds to step S8403.

  In step S8403, main demo transfer processing is executed. The main demo transfer process is a process for displaying a demo moving image (main demo moving image) in the main display area MA. Details of the main demo transfer process will be described later. After executing step S8403, the process advances to step S8404.

  In step S8404, sub-demo migration processing is executed. The sub demo transition process is a process for displaying the sub demo moving image in the first sub display area SA1. Details of the sub demo transfer process will be described later. After executing step S8404, the process advances to step S8405.

  In step S8405, return processing is executed. The return process is a process for ending the demo moving image (main demo moving image) or the sub-demo moving image and returning to the normal state when the special-use variable command or the special-use variable command is received. Details of the return processing will be described later. After executing step S8405, the standby process ends.

<Special 1 transition preparation processing>
Next, the special 1 transition preparation process will be described. The special 1 transition preparation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a standby process subroutine (FIG. 158: S8401).

  FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the special 1 transition preparation process. In the special 1 transition preparation process, when the special 1 customer waiting command is received, the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned on. When the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned on and the special 1 main display mode is in effect, the special 1 standby state for 15 seconds is entered. Then, when the special 1 standby state for 15 seconds has ended, the volume reduction flag is turned on, and the processing for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. After that, when the volume becomes zero, the display of the demo moving image (main demo moving image) is started in the main display area MA in the main demo transfer process described later. On the other hand, when the special 1 customer waiting flag is turned on and the special 2 main display mode is being set, the sub-demo start flag is turned on. Then, in the sub demo transfer process described later, the display of the sub demo moving image is started in the first sub display area SA1. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special 1 transition preparation process will be described.

  In step S8501, it is determined whether a special customer waiting command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8501 that the special 1 customer waiting command has been received (S8501: YES), the process advances to step S8502 and special 1 stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. Turn on the customer waiting flag. After that, the process advances to step S8503. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8501 that the special customer waiting command is not received (S8501: NO), the process proceeds to step S8503 without executing step S8502.

  In step S8503, it is determined whether or not the special 1 standby state flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 is ON. When it is determined in step S8503 that the special 1 standby state flag is not ON (S8503: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8504, and it is determined whether the special 1 customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8504 that the special 1 customer waiting flag is not ON (S8504: NO), the special 1 transition preparation process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8504 that the special 1 customer waiting flag is ON (S8504: YES), the process proceeds to step S8505.

  In step S8505, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8505 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8505: NO), the flow advances to step S8506 to set the special 1 standby state flag to ON. After that, the process advances to step S8507, and the special 1 standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0se) is set to the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94. The special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the special 1 standby state flag is turned on, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is activated, that is, in a 2 msec cycle. It After executing step S8507, the process advances to step S8508 to turn off the special 1 customer waiting flag. Then, the transition preparation process for this special 1 is completed.

  If it is determined in step S8505 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8505: YES), the flow advances to step S8509 to turn on the sub-demo start flag. As a result, the sub-demo moving image processing is started in the first sub-display area SA1 by executing the sub-demo migration process described below. After executing step S8509, the process proceeds to step S8510 to turn off the special customer waiting flag. Then, the transition preparation process for this special 1 is completed.

  If it is determined in step S8503 that the special 1 standby state flag is ON (S8503: YES), the flow advances to step S8511 to determine whether the special 1 standby state period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the value of the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is 0, and if the value of the special 1 standby state timer counter Tw1 is 0, the special 1 standby state for 15 seconds. It is determined that the period has ended. If it is determined in step S8511 that the special 1 standby state period has not ended (S8511: NO), the special 1 transition preparation process is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8511 that the special 1 standby state period has ended (S8511: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8512 and the volume reduction flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. Turn on. As a result, the main demo shift processing, which will be described later, is executed to start the processing for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46. After executing step S8512, the process advances to step S8513 to turn off the special 1 standby state flag. Then, the transition preparation process for this special 1 is completed.

<Special 2 transition preparation processing>
Next, the special 2 transition preparation process will be described. The special 2 transition preparation process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a standby process subroutine (FIG. 158: S8402).

  FIG. 160 is a flowchart showing the special 2 transition preparation process. In the special 2 transition preparation process, when the special 2 customer waiting command is received, the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned on. When the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned on and the special 2 main display mode is in effect, the special 2 standby state for 15 seconds is entered. Then, when the special 2 standby state for 15 seconds is completed, the volume reduction flag is turned on, and the processing for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46 is started. After that, when the volume becomes zero, the display of the demo moving image (main demo moving image) is started in the main display area MA in the main demo transfer process described later. On the other hand, when the special 2 customer waiting flag is turned on and the special 1 main display mode is being set, the sub-demo start flag is turned on. Then, in the sub demo transfer process described later, the display of the sub demo moving image is started in the first sub display area SA1. Hereinafter, a specific process of the special 2 transition preparation process will be described.

  In step S8601, it is determined whether the special 2 customer waiting command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8601 that the special 2 customer waiting command has been received (S8601: YES), the process advances to step S8602 for special 2 stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94. Turn on the customer waiting flag. After that, the process advances to step S8603. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8601 that the special 2 customer waiting command has not been received (S8601: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8603 without executing step S8602.

  In step S8603, it is determined whether the special 2 standby state flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 is ON. If it is determined in step S8603 that the special 2 standby state flag is not ON (S8603: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8604 and it is determined whether the special 2 customer waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8604 that the customer waiting flag for special 2 is not ON (S8604: NO), the transition preparation processing for special 2 is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8604 that the special 2 customer waiting flag is ON (S8604: YES), the process advances to step S8605.

  In step S8605, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8605 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8605: YES), the process advances to step S8606 and the special 2 standby state flag is turned ON. After that, the process advances to step S8607, and a special 2 standby state time setting process is executed. Specifically, "7500" (that is, 15.0 se) is set in the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 stored in the various counter areas 94b of the sound-light side RAM 94. The special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the special 2 standby state flag is turned on, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a 2 msec cycle. It After executing step S8607, the process advances to step S8608 to turn off the special 2 customer waiting flag. Then, the transition preparation process for this special 2 is completed.

  If it is determined in step S8605 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8605: NO), the flow advances to step S8609 to turn on the sub-demo start flag. As a result, the sub-demo moving image processing is started in the first sub-display area SA1 by executing the sub-demo migration process described below. After executing step S8609, the process advances to step S8610 to turn off the special 2 customer waiting flag. Then, the transition preparation process for this special 2 is completed.

  If it is determined in step S8603 that the special 2 standby state flag is ON (S8603: YES), the flow advances to step S8611 to determine whether the special 2 standby state period has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is 0, and if the value of the special 2 standby state timer counter Tw2 is 0, the special 2 standby state for 15 seconds. It is determined that the period has ended. If it is determined in step S8611 that the standby state period for special 2 has not ended (S8611: NO), the transition preparation process for special 2 ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8611 that the special 2 standby state period has ended (S8611: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8612 and the volume reduction flag stored in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 is reduced. Turn on. As a result, the main demo shift processing, which will be described later, is executed to start the processing for reducing the volume output from the speaker 46. After executing step S8612, the process advances to step S8613 to turn off the special 2 standby state flag. Then, the transition preparation process for this special 2 is completed.

<Main demo migration process>
Next, the main demo transfer process will be described. The main demo shift process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a standby process subroutine (FIG. 158: S8403). Note that, hereinafter, the main demo moving image displayed in the main display area MA is also simply referred to as a demo moving image.

  FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing the main demo transfer processing. In step S8701, it is determined whether or not the RTC effect flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8701 that the RTC effect flag is ON (S8701: YES), the main demo demonstration process is terminated. That is, it is configured not to shift to the mode of displaying the demo moving image in the main display area MA while the RTC effect is being executed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8701 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S8701: NO), the process proceeds to step S8702 and it is determined whether the main return flag is ON. The main return flag is a flag that is turned on when a special 1 variation command or a special 2 variation command is received in the later-described restoration processing. When it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is not ON (S8702: NO), the process proceeds to step S8703.

  In step S8703, it is determined whether the demo movie display flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8703 that the demo moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8703: NO), the process proceeds to step S8704. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8703 that the demo moving image display flag is ON (S8703: YES), the main main demo transfer processing ends.

  In step S8704, it is determined whether the demo movie start waiting flag is ON. The demo video start waiting flag is a flag for identifying in the audio emission control device 90 that the demo video is waiting to start, and is turned on when the audio output level (volume) becomes zero. The flag is turned off when the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero and 5 seconds have passed. If it is determined in step S8704 that the demo movie start waiting flag is not ON (S8704: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8705.

  In step S8705, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8705: YES), the process proceeds to step S8706. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8705 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8705: NO), the main demo demonstration process is terminated.

  In step S8706, a process of reducing the output level (volume) of sound is executed. Specifically, in the present embodiment, the audio output level (volume) is set to 3000 steps, and the process of lowering the audio output level by one step is executed. In the present embodiment, since the main demo transfer process is executed in a cycle of 2 msec, the output level (volume) of the voice becomes zero from the maximum value in about 6 seconds. After executing step S8706, the process advances to step S8707.

  In step S8707, it is determined whether the audio output level (volume) has become zero. If it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) has become zero (S8707: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8708, the volume reduction flag is turned OFF, and the flow proceeds to step S8709 to wait for the start of the demonstration video. Turn on the flag. Then, it progresses to step S8710. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8707 that the audio output level (volume) is not zero (S8707: NO), this main demo transfer processing is terminated.

  In step S8710, a demo movie start waiting time setting process is executed. Specifically, "2500" (that is, 5.0 sec) is set to the demonstration moving image start waiting timer counter Tx stored in the various counter areas 94b. The demo movie start waiting timer counter Tx is a counter for measuring the elapsed time after the output level (volume) of the sound becomes zero, and is decremented by 1 every time the timer interrupt processing is started, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. It After executing step S8710, the main main demo transfer process ends.

  If it is determined in step S8704 that the demo movie start waiting flag is ON (S8704: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8711.

  In step S8711, it is determined whether the demo video start waiting period of 5 seconds has ended. Specifically, it is determined whether the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, and if the value of the demo video start waiting timer counter Tx is 0, the demo video start waiting period of 5 seconds ends. It is judged that it did. If it is determined in step S8711 that the demo movie start waiting period has ended, the process advances to step S8712. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8711 that the demo moving image start waiting period has not ended, the main main demo transfer process is ended.

  In step S8712, background music output stop processing is executed. After that, the process advances to step S8713, and a demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts the process for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S8713, the process advances to step S8714.

  In step S8714, the demo movie start wait flag is turned off, and the process proceeds to step S8715 to turn on the demo movie display flag. After that, the flow advances to step S8716 to turn on the cue determination flag, and the main main demo transfer processing ends.

  If it is determined in step S8702 that the main return flag is ON (S8702: YES), the flow advances to step S8717 to determine whether the cue determination flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8717 that the cue determination flag is not ON (S8717: NO), the process proceeds to step S8718 and the sound output level (volume) is returned to a value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S8718, the process proceeds to step S8719.

  In step S8719, it is determined whether the volume reduction flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is ON (S8719: YES), the flow advances to step S8720 to turn off the volume reduction flag. Then, it progresses to step S8721. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8719 that the volume reduction flag is not ON (S8719: NO), step S8720 is not executed and the process proceeds to step S8721.

  In step S8721, it is determined whether the demo movie start waiting flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8721 that the demo movie start wait is ON (S8721: YES), the flow advances to step S8722 to turn off the demo movie start wait flag. After that, the flow advances to step S8723 to turn off the main return flag. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8721 that the demo movie start waiting flag is not ON (S8721: NO), step S8722 is skipped and the process returns to step S8723 to turn off the main return flag. After executing step S8723, the main demo demonstration process is terminated.

  When it is determined in step S8717 that the cue determination flag is ON (S8717: YES), the process proceeds to step S8724, and a demo moving image end command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo movie end command executes a process for ending the display of the demo movie. After executing step S8724, the process advances to step S8725 to turn off the demo moving image displaying flag. Then, it progresses to step S8726.

  In step S8726, a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts the process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. Then, it progresses to step S8727.

  In step S8727, the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the value preset by the player. In this embodiment, since the value preset by the player is the maximum value, the output level (volume) of the voice is returned to the maximum value. After executing step S8727, the process proceeds to step S8728.

  In step S8728, background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, since the cue determination flag is ON, the output is started from the temporal head position of the background music. After that, the flow advances to step S8729 to turn off the cue determination flag. After that, the process advances to step S8730, the main return flag is turned off, and the main main demo transfer process ends.

<Sub demo migration process>
Next, the sub demo transfer process will be described. The sub demo transfer process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a standby process subroutine (FIG. 158: S8404).

  FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing the sub demo transfer processing. In step S8801, it is determined whether the sub return flag is ON. The sub return flag is a flag that is turned on when a special 1 variation command or a special 2 variation command is received in a restoration process described later. When it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is not ON (S8801: NO), the process proceeds to step S8802.

  In step S8802, it is determined whether the sub demo moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8802 that the sub demo moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8802: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8803. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8802 that the sub demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S8802: YES), the sub demo demo transition process ends.

  In step S8803, it is determined whether the sub-demo start flag is ON. The sub-demo start flag is a flag that is turned on in the special 1 transition preparation process (FIG. 159) or the special 2 transition preparation process (FIG. 160) described above. If it is determined in step S8803 that the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8803: YES), the process advances to step S8804. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8803 that the sub-demo start flag is not ON (S8803: NO), the sub-demo migration process ends.

  In step S8804, a sub-demo moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the sub-demo moving image start command starts processing for displaying the sub-demo moving image in the first sub-display area SA1 of the symbol display device 41. After executing step S8804, the process proceeds to step S8805.

  In step S8805, the sub-demo start flag is turned OFF, and in step S8806, the sub-demo moving image displaying flag is turned ON. After that, the sub-demo demo transfer process ends.

  If it is determined in step S8801 that the sub return flag is ON (S8801: YES), the flow advances to step S8807 to send a sub demo video end command to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the sub-demo video end command executes processing for ending the display of the sub-demo video. After executing step S8807, the process advances to step S8808, and the sub demo moving image displaying flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S8809, the sub return flag is turned ON, and the sub sub demo transfer process ends.

<Restoration processing>
Next, the return process will be described. The return process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a standby process subroutine (FIG. 158: S8405).

  FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing the return processing. In step S8901, it is determined whether a special 1 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8901 that the special-purpose variation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8911 described later. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8901 that the special 1 variation command is received from the main MPU 62 (S8901: YES), the process advances to step S8902.

  In step S8902, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8902 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8902: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8903 and either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 standby state flag is ON. Or not. When it is determined in step S8903 that either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 standby state flag is ON (S8903: YES), the process proceeds to step S8904, and the special 1 customer waiting flag or the special 1 Of the standby flags for use, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S8905. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8903 that neither the special 1 customer waiting flag nor the special 1 standby state flag is ON (S8903: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8905 without executing step S8904. .

  In step S8905, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the demo movie start wait flag, and the demo movie display flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8905 that any of the volume reduction flag, the demo movie start wait flag, and the demo movie display flag is ON (S8905: YES), the process proceeds to step S8906 and the main return flag is turned OFF. . After that, the process advances to step S8911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8905 that none of the volume reduction flag, the demo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag are ON (S8905: NO), step S8906 is not executed and step S8911 is executed. Proceed to.

  If it is determined in step S8902 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8902: YES), the flow advances to step S8907 to determine whether either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON. To judge. If it is determined in step S8907 that either the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8907: YES), the flow advances to step S8908 to select the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag. , The flag that is ON is turned OFF. After that, it advances to step S8909. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8907 that neither the special 1 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8907: NO), the process proceeds to step S8909 without executing step S8908.

  In step S8909, it is determined whether the sub demo moving image displaying flag is ON. If it is determined in step S8909 that the sub demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S8909: YES), the flow advances to step S8910 to turn on the sub return flag. After that, the process advances to step S8911. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8909 that the sub demo moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8909: NO), the flow proceeds to step S8911 without executing step S8910.

In step S8911, it is determined whether a special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S8911 that the special 2 variation command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S8911: NO), this return processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8911 that the special 2 variation command is received from the main MPU 62 (S8911: YES), the flow proceeds to step S8912.

  In step S8912, it is determined whether the special 2 main display flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8912 that the special 2 main display flag is ON (S8912: YES), the process proceeds to step S8913, and either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 standby state flag is ON. Or not. When it is determined in step S8913 that either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 waiting state flag is ON (S8913: YES), the process proceeds to step S8914 and the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 Of the standby flags for use, the flag that is ON is turned OFF. After that, the process advances to step S8915. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8913 that neither the special 2 customer waiting flag or the special 2 standby state flag is ON (S8913: NO), the process proceeds to step S8915 without executing step S8914. .

  In step S8915, it is determined whether any of the volume reduction flag, the demo movie start wait flag, and the demo movie display flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8915 that any of the volume reduction flag, the demo movie start waiting flag, and the demo movie display flag is ON (S8915: YES), the process proceeds to step S8916 and the main return flag is turned OFF. . Then, this return processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8915 that none of the volume reduction flag, the demo movie start waiting flag, and the demo movie display flag are ON (S8915: NO), the main recovery is performed without executing step S8916. The process ends.

  If it is determined in step S8912 that the special 2 main display flag is not ON (S8912: NO), the flow advances to step S8917 to determine whether either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON. To judge. If it is determined in step S8917 that either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8917: YES), the flow advances to step S8918 to select either the special 2 customer waiting flag or the sub-demo start flag. , The flag that is ON is turned OFF. Then, it progresses to step S8919. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S8917 that neither the special 2 customer waiting flag nor the sub-demo start flag is ON (S8917: NO), the process proceeds to step S8919 without executing step S8918.

  In step S8919, it is determined whether the sub demo moving image displaying flag is ON. When it is determined in step S8919 that the sub demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S8919: YES), the process proceeds to step S8910, and the sub return flag is turned ON. Then, this return processing is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S8919 that the sub-demo moving image displaying flag is not ON (S8919: NO), then the return processing is terminated without executing step S8910.

<RTC production process>
Next, the RTC effect processing will be described. The RTC effect process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8006).

  FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing the RTC effect process. In step S9001, it is determined whether the RTC effect flag is ON. The RTC effect flag is a flag for the sound-light side MPU 92 to recognize whether or not the RTC effect is being executed. If it is determined in step S9001 that the RTC effect flag is not ON (S9001: NO), the flow advances to step S9002 to read the time information output from the RTC 96. Then, it progresses to step S9003.

  In step S9003, it is determined whether the read time information matches the time set in advance as the time to start executing the RTC effect. In this embodiment, it is determined whether or not the read time information coincides with 00 minutes every hour. When it is determined in step S9003 that the read time information does not match the time preset as the time to start the execution of the RTC effect (S9003: NO), the RTC effect process is directly ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9003 that the read time information matches the time preset as the time to start executing the RTC effect (S9003: YES), the process proceeds to step S9004.

  In step S9004, RTC effect time setting processing is executed. Specifically, "150,000" (that is, 5.0 min) is set to the RTC effect time timer counter Tr stored in the various counter areas 94b. The RTC effect time timer counter Tr is a counter for measuring an elapsed time from the start of the RTC effect, and is decremented by 1 each time the timer interrupt process is activated, that is, in a cycle of 2 msec. After executing step S9004, the process proceeds to step S9005.

  In step S9005, an RTC effect moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Upon receiving the RTC effect moving image start command, the display-side MPU 102 starts the process for displaying the RTC effect moving image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S9005, the process proceeds to step S9006.

  In step S9006, output start processing of RTC effect music is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal head position of the RTC effect music. When the background music is being output, the output of the background music is stopped and the output of the RTC effect music is started from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S9007 to turn on the RTC effect flag. Then, it progresses to step S9008.

  In step S9008, it is determined whether or not any of the volume reduction flag, the temo video start waiting flag, and the demo video display flag is ON. The state where any of the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag is ON means that the output level (volume) of the sound is reduced. If it is determined in step S9008 that any of the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start waiting flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S9008: YES), the process proceeds to step S9009.

  In step S9009, the reduced output level (volume) of the voice is returned to a value preset by the player. After that, the process advances to step S9010, and the post-RTC effect demonstration movie start flag is turned ON. The post-RTC effect demo video start flag is a flag for starting the demo video after the RTC effect ends. After executing step S9010, the process advances to step S9011, and among the volume reduction flag, the temo moving image start wait flag, and the demo moving image displaying flag, the flag that has been turned on is turned off. Then, it progresses to step S9012. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9008 that all of the volume reduction flag, the temo movie start waiting flag, and the demo movie display flag are OFF (S9008: NO), the processes of steps S9009 to S9011 should be executed. No, the process advances to step S9012.

  In step S9012, it is determined whether the main return flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is ON (S9012: YES), the flow advances to step S9013 to turn off the RTC post-production demonstration video start flag, and to step S9014 to set the main return flag. Turn it off. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9012 that the main return flag is not ON (S9012: NO), the RTC effect process is terminated without executing the processes of steps S9013 and S9014.

  If it is determined in step S9001 that the RTC effect flag is ON (S9001: YES), that is, if the RTC effect is being executed, the process proceeds to step S9015.

  In step S9015, it is determined whether it is time to end the RTC effect. Specifically, it is determined whether the RTC effect time timer counter Tr set in step S9003 is 0. When it is determined in step S9015 that it is time to end the RTC effect (S9015: YES), the process proceeds to step S9016, and the process when the RTC effect ends is performed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9015 that it is not the timing to end the RTC effect (S9015: NO), the process proceeds from step S9008 to step S9014 described above. The reason for this is that the volume reduction flag and the main return flag may be turned on even during the period in which the RTC effect is being executed, and it is necessary to execute the processing from step S9008 to step S9014.

  In step S9016, the RTC rendering effect flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S9017, and an RTC effect music output stop process is executed. Then, it progresses to step S9018.

  In step S9018, it is determined whether the RTC post-rendering demonstration moving image start flag is ON. When it is determined in step S9018 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is not ON (S9018: NO), the process proceeds to step S9019, and a background moving image start command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the background moving image start command starts the process for displaying the background moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S9020, and background music output start processing is executed. Specifically, the output is started from the temporal start position of the background music. Then, this RTC effect processing is ended.

  If it is determined in step S9018 that the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is ON (S9018: YES), the process proceeds to step S9021, and a demonstration moving image start command is transmitted to the display-side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received the demo moving image start command starts the process for displaying the demo moving image on the symbol display device 41 from the temporal head position. After that, the process advances to step S9022, and the demo movie display flag is turned off. After that, the process advances to step S9023.

  In step S9023, the audio output level (volume) is reduced to zero. This is because the music output together with the demo video is not set in the present embodiment. After executing step S9023, the flow advances to step S9024 to turn on the cue determination flag. By this processing, the cue determination flag can be turned ON while the demo moving image is displayed. After executing step S9024, the process advances to step S9025, and the post-RTC effect demonstration moving image start flag is turned off. Then, this RTC effect processing is ended.

<Processing for result display>
Next, the result display processing will be described. The result display process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8007).

  FIG. 165 is a flowchart showing the result display processing. In step S9101, a result display totaling process is executed. The result display totaling process calculates the information necessary for displaying the result image based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 60, the command indicating the number of times the jackpot is won in the high probability mode, or the like. To do. After executing step S9101, the flow proceeds to step S9102.

  In step S9102, it is determined whether or not the final specific game time end command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S9102 that the final specific game time end command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S9102: YES), the flow advances to step S9103 to send a result display start command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the result display start command executes a process for displaying the result image on the symbol display device 41. After that, this result displaying process is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S9102 that the final specific game time end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9102: NO), the process for result display is ended without executing step S9103.

<Various processes executed in the display control device>
Next, a process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  The processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 is mainly executed when a command is received from the voice light emission control device 90 and a main process that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on until the power is turned off. There are command interrupt processing and V interrupt processing executed when a V interrupt signal transmitted from the VDP 105 is detected. The V interrupt signal is a signal transmitted from the VDP 105 to the MPU 102 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed.

  The MPU 102 executes main processing after power-on, and executes command interruption processing and V interruption processing in response to command reception and V interruption signal detection. When the command is received and the V interrupt signal is detected at the same time, the command interrupt process is preferentially executed. Therefore, it is possible to quickly reflect the content of the command received from the voice emission control device 90 and execute the V interrupt process.

<Main processing>
Next, a main process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the main process is a process that is executed when the power is turned on and continues to be executed as it is until the power is turned off. The processing of each step executed in the main processing will be described below.

  In step S9201, initial setting processing is executed. Specifically, first, a process of initializing the MPU 102 and clearing the storage of the work RAM 104 and the video RAM 107 is performed. Then, the compressed character information stored in the character ROM 106 is read, the read character information is decompressed, and the decompressed character information is stored in the character area of the video RAM 107. Further, in order to display the initial screen, information corresponding to the initial screen is extracted from the character information written in the video RAM 107, and the extracted character information is written in the frame buffer area of the video RAM 107. In addition, other settings required for initialization are performed. After that, the process advances to step S9202.

  In step S9202, interrupt permission setting is executed. When the interrupt permission setting is executed, in the main process thereafter, an infinite loop process is executed until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set, the command interrupt processing and the V interrupt processing described below are executed in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

<Command interrupt processing>
Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described. As described above, the command interrupt process is a process executed each time a command is received from the voice emission control device 90.

  FIG. 167 is a flowchart showing command interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. In step S9301, a command storage process is executed. In the command storing process, the received command data is extracted, and the extracted command data is stored in the command storage area provided in the work RAM 104. The various commands stored in the command storage area by the command storage process are read by the command determination process of the V interrupt process described later, and the process corresponding to the command is executed.

<V interrupt processing>
Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100 will be described.

  FIG. 168 is a flowchart showing V interrupt processing executed by the MPU 102 of the display control device 100. As described above, the V interrupt process is a process executed when the V interrupt signal from the VDP 105 is detected. In the V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the command stored in the command storage area by the command interrupt process are executed, the image to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 is specified, and then the image is drawn and drawn on the VDP 105. Execute the display instructions.

  As described above, the V interrupt signal is a signal that is generated in the VDP 105 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed, and is transmitted to the MPU 102. Therefore, the MPU 102 executes the V interrupt process in synchronization with the V interrupt signal, and thus the drawing instruction to the VDP 105 is issued every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. For this reason, the VDP 105 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image at a stage where the image drawing process or the display process is not completed, so that the VDP 105 starts drawing a new image during the drawing of the image, or displays the image. It is possible to suppress the development of an image associated with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer area in which the image information inside is stored. The details of the processing of each step of the V interrupt processing will be described below.

  In step S9401, command corresponding processing is executed. In the command handling process, the content of the command stored in the command storage area is analyzed by the command interrupt process (FIG. 167), and the process corresponding to the command is executed. Specifically, for example, when the effect command is stored, the control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode designated by the effect command is displayed on the symbol display device 41.

  When the effect operation command is stored, it is determined whether or not it is the acceptance period of pressing the effect operation button 24, and when it is determined that it is the acceptance period of the effect operation button 24, the effect operation is performed. The control of drawing and displaying the image is started so that the effect mode corresponding to the pressing of the button 24 is displayed on the symbol display device 41. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not in the acceptance period for pressing the effect operation button 24, the content of the next command is analyzed without executing the process.

  In the command handling process (S9401), all the commands stored in the command storage area at that time are analyzed, and the process corresponding to all the analyzed commands is executed. The reason for this will be described. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds in which the V interrupt processing is executed, and thus it is highly possible that a plurality of commands are stored in the command storage area during the 20 milliseconds. In particular, when the content of the effect is set by the sound emission control device 90 and the effect is started, it is highly possible that various commands for specifying the content of the effect are simultaneously stored in the command storage area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at one time, the manner of the effect such as the notice effect and the liquid crystal design set by the sound emission control device 90 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image according to the mode is designed. The drawing of the image can be controlled so as to be displayed on the display device 41.

  In step S9402, display setting processing is executed. In the display setting process, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next on the symbol display device 41 is specified based on the type of the screen to be displayed on the symbol display device 41 set by the command corresponding process (S9401) or the like. . After that, the process advances to step S9403.

  In step S9403, task processing is executed. In the task process, based on the content of the image for the next one frame to be displayed on the symbol display device 41, which is identified by the display setting process (S9402), the type of the character (sprite, display object) forming the image is determined. In addition to specifying, various parameters necessary for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each character (sprite). After that, the process advances to step S9404.

  In step S9404, drawing processing is executed. In the drawing process, the types of various characters forming one frame and the parameters necessary for drawing each character, which are determined by the task process (S9403), are transmitted to the VDP 105. The VDP 105 executes an image drawing process on the basis of these pieces of information and, together with the drive signal, displays the image drawn on the basis of the information received at the immediately preceding V interrupt process on the symbol display device 41. The image data is transmitted to the symbol display device 41. After that, the flow advances to step S9405, and after other processing is executed, the V interrupt processing is ended.

K8. effect:
As described above, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the special 1 customer waiting command is the presence or absence of the reserved game times of the first start opening game times (whether or not the first start reserved number RaN is 0). The customer waiting command for special 2 is transmitted based on the presence / absence of the reserved game times of the second start mouth game times (whether or not the second start reserved number RbN is 0). Then, the symbol display device 41 switches between the mode of displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the mode of displaying the demo moving image based on the special 1 customer waiting command, and based on the transmitted special 2 customer waiting command. The mode for displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and the mode for displaying the demo moving image are switched.

  Therefore, when the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are displayed in different display areas of the symbol display device 41, there are a mode of displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and a mode of displaying the demonstration moving image. The presence or absence of the holding game times of the first starting mouth game times (the number of holding game times of the second starting mouth game times (whether the second starting holding number RbN is 0 or not) is independent of the switching) It can be performed based on the first starting hold number RaN is 0), and switching between the mode of displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and the mode of displaying the demo moving image is performed in the first starting opening game time. Whether or not there is a reserved game time (whether or not the first starting and holding number RaN is 0) is independent of whether or not there is a holding game time for the second starting opening game time (whether or not the second starting and holding number RbN is 0). ) Can be done based on.

  Therefore, the symbol display device 41 switches between the mode of displaying the first liquid crystal symbol and the mode of displaying the demo moving image, and the switching between the mode of displaying the second liquid crystal symbol and the mode of displaying the demo moving image. It can be carried out in an independent manner, and switching between the manner in which the second liquid crystal symbol is displayed and the manner in which the demo moving image is displayed is switched between the manner in which the first liquid crystal symbol is displayed and the manner in which the demo moving image is displayed. Can be carried out in an independent manner.

  As a result, regarding the transition of the display state of the main display area MA, a configuration that correlates with the game times corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the first sub display area SA1 (second sub display area SA2), or the first sub Regarding the transition of the display state of the display area SA1 (second sub display area SA2), the display state is displayed in each display area as compared with the configuration having a correlation with the game times corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols displayed in the main display area MA. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player information regarding the presence / absence (presence / absence of pending game times) of the game times (the first starting mouth game times or the second starting mouth game times) corresponding to the liquid crystal symbols being played. it can. That is, when the game time is being executed, the player is executing either the game time for the first starting mouth or the game time for the second starting mouth, and which game time is being executed. It can be easily grasped whether there is no.

  The pachinko machine 10 according to the present embodiment can independently transition the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 to different display states. Therefore, independent display control can be easily performed on the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the gaming state is shifted, that is, when the low frequency support mode is shifted to the high frequency support mode, or when the high frequency support mode is shifted to the low frequency support mode. , The display area for displaying the first liquid crystal design and the second liquid crystal design is displayed in a display area different from that before the game state shifts, so that the player can easily recognize that the game state shifts. Can be made.

  Furthermore, when the game state is changed, two liquid crystal symbols, that is, a first liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the first starting port game time and a second liquid crystal symbol corresponding to the second starting port game time, are displayed. Since the display area is switched between the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 (second sub display area SA2), for example, the first liquid crystal symbol and the second liquid crystal symbol are changed to the role in the game. It is possible to give the player a sense of anticipation and a sense of urgency, for example, by making the player guess that there was such a situation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

  In the present embodiment, since the pachinko machine 10 is a simultaneous variation machine, the player feels at the same time about the results of the two jackpot lottery of the first start mouth game time and the second start mouth game time. Can be given.

  In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, since the variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to 12 seconds which is set in advance, the final specific game time is started. It is possible to preset the control in consideration of the variation time of at least two game times to be executed most recently afterwards. Specifically, in at least two game times to be executed most recently after starting the final specific game time, a result image that is an effect in which the execution time is set to 10 seconds in advance is displayed on the symbol display device 41. Can be executed.

  Further, in the case of a simultaneous variation machine such as the pachinko machine 10, during the period in which either one of the first starting opening game times or the second starting opening game times is executed, the first starting opening game times or the second starting openings Since one of the mouth game times may be executed, even if the variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to 12 seconds, Of the two game times, the time from the start of the game time started first to the end of the game time started later may be shorter than the total time of the two game times, which has a predetermined variation time. is there. However, as the time from the start of the first game time to the end of the game time started later in the two game times, at least a time for one game time whose fluctuation time is 12 seconds is secured. It is possible. That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game times, it is possible to secure a time for one game time in which the fluctuation time is at least 12 seconds, and the control in consideration of the secured time is preset. be able to. In the present embodiment, the effect of displaying the result image can be executed using the secured time.

  Further, in the case of a simultaneous variable machine, whichever of the first starting mouth game times or the second starting mouth game times is executed during a period in which one of the first starting mouth game times and the second starting mouth game times is executed. Or it may do the other. Therefore, during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, for example, the first starting opening game time is ended and a new first starting opening game time is started, or the second starting opening game time is ended. There may be a case where a new game opening for the second starting opening is started. As described above, the timing of starting the game time and the timing of ending the game time are also referred to as “game time division”.

  Here, if a "game time division" occurs during execution of a predetermined effect, the player may have a complicated impression with respect to the effect being executed. Further, the player may not be able to concentrate on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in each game time.

  Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when executing the effect of displaying the result image, the variation time of a plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel is used to execute the effect of displaying the result image. Since it is set to a time (12 seconds) longer than the required time (10 seconds), it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in the game times during the period in which the effect of displaying the result image is being executed.

  In addition, by changing the number of game times for which the variation time is set to 12 seconds to two, while suppressing the occurrence of breaks in the game times during the period in which the effect for displaying the result image is being executed, the result image is displayed. It is possible to minimize the number of game times set to a variable time (12 seconds) that is equal to or longer than the time (10 seconds) required to execute the displayed effect.

  Since the effect of displaying the result image is executed as the effect of notifying the information about the privilege given to the player, the player can easily recognize the granted privilege.

  In addition, the information regarding the granted privilege is of high interest to the player. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can suppress the occurrence of breaks in the game times during execution of the effect that informs the information of high interest to the player.

  Furthermore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the result image after the end of the last game time (the game time after the probability change is 120th game time) in the high probability mode. That is, the result image is displayed after the display of the guidance display GD1 is completed. Here, if the result image is configured to be displayed before the end of the last game time in the high probability mode, the result image is an image that allows the player to recognize that the high probability mode will end, so the game The person recognizes that it may be better to change the direction of circulating the game balls from the right side of the game board 30 to the left side. However, in this configuration, when the result image is displayed, the guide display GD1 indicating that it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball to the right side of the game board 30 is displayed. Therefore, if the result image and the guide display GD1 are displayed at the same time, there is a possibility that a skeptical feeling may be given to the player. In this respect, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment can prevent the player from having a skeptical feeling because the result image is not displayed in the high probability mode.

K9. Other aspects of the eleventh embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot effect during the result image display may be provided as a dedicated effect movie (hereinafter, also referred to as a result-only jackpot effect). Specifically, as shown in FIG. 120 (b), in the state where the result image is displayed, the first starting opening game time corresponding to the liquid crystal design displayed in the second sub display area SA2, or When the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery in one of the second starting opening game times corresponding to the liquid crystal design displayed in the first sub-display area SA1, the result image displayed in the main display area MA. Is hidden for a time shorter than the preset display time (10 seconds) of the result image, and the result-only jackpot effect is executed. After recognizing that the high-probability mode has ended due to the display of the result image, the player recognizes that the jackpot lottery has been won by the result-only jackpot production. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with unexpectedness and to improve the interest of the game.

  In addition, in the eleventh embodiment, the variation time in the two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time, but the two game times are performed. In the case of a big hit in any of the big hit lottery, the change time may be set to a specific change time instead of 12 seconds. For example, the variable time may be set to display the result image and to execute the result-only jackpot effect.

<Aspect 2>
In the pachinko machine 10 of the eleventh embodiment, the variation time in the two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time, but it is shown in FIG. 119. As shown in the example above, when the display of the result image for 10 seconds ends in the first (first) game time of the two game times executed most recently after the start of the final specific game time, the second time The variation time of the game times may be set not to 12 seconds. For example, it can be realized by preparing a flag that means that the display of the result image for 10 seconds is completed, and using the flag as an index to determine whether to apply the setting of the variation time of 12 seconds. By doing so, unnecessary time can be omitted as the execution time of at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time.

<Aspect 3>
Other modes may be adopted as the process of setting the variation time in the two game times executed most recently after the start of the final specific game time to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time. Specifically, the final specific game time is started by using the fluctuation pattern table that is the table data in which the game times up to the 122nd time after the high probability mode is started and the fluctuation time in each game time are associated with each other. You may set the fluctuation | variation time in the game play of 2 times performed most recently after that. In the fluctuation pattern table, 12 seconds is recorded as the fluctuation time corresponding to the 121st and 122nd game times (two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time), and the 121st time is recorded. And the command that the variation time corresponding to the game times other than the 122nd time is set by the variation type counter CS and the variation time table is recorded. By reading such a fluctuation pattern table at the start of the high-probability mode and reading the value or command of the fluctuation time recorded in the fluctuation pattern table while shifting one by one each time the game number advances, A variable time can be set. Therefore, it is possible to omit the process of counting the number of executions of the game game up to the 122nd time after the high-probability mode is started to set the variable time. Therefore, by using the variation pattern table, it is possible to simplify the process of setting the variation time of a specific game time to a specific value.

<Aspect 4>
In the eleventh embodiment, the variation time in the two game times executed most recently after the last specific game time is started is set to 12 seconds which is a predetermined time, but the game time to be set to 12 seconds is set. The number is not limited to two and any other number can be applied. When the gaming machine is a simultaneous variable machine as in the eleventh embodiment, the first starting mouth game is executed during a period in which one of the first starting mouth game time and the second starting mouth game time is executed. Since the other one of the times or the second starting mouth game times may be executed, it is a game time to be executed most recently after the final specific game time is started and the variation time is a predetermined time of 12 seconds. It is preferable that the number of game times set to is 2 or more. By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect for which the execution time is set in advance, such as an effect for displaying the result image, within the period in which the game times in which the change time is set in advance are executed. The control for setting the effect can be simplified.

<Aspect 5>
In the eleventh embodiment, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-probability mode is 120 when the high-probability mode is switched to in the first-class big hit once, but the number of times is not limited to 120. Any other number of times may be set.

<Aspect 6>
The opening / closing control of the special winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the big hit (the first kind big winning and the second kind big winning) is won is set in advance. You may perform based on the program of the opening pattern of the V winning opening 48. For example, the opening and closing control of the special winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48 in the 8R first-class jackpot and the 8R second-class jackpot can be performed based on a program set as the following opening pattern. In the example of the opening pattern below, the process in one () is executed in one round game.

・ [8R first-class jackpot]: (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → ( V prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open)
・ [8R second-class jackpot]: (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → (Big prize hole: 30 seconds open) → ( V winning opening: 0.006 seconds open) → (big winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (big winning opening: 30 seconds open) → (big winning opening: 30 seconds open)

  In this way, the winning opening to be opened in each round game and the opening time of the winning opening are read out and executed in the opening / closing execution mode of the opening pattern program set for each round game. It is possible to realize opening / closing control of the winning opening 36a and the V winning opening 48.

<Aspect 7>
Since the display of the result image gives the player the recognition that the high-probability mode has ended or has ended, various effects can be performed using the result image. For example, if you win the first-class jackpot in the high-probability mode, one of the effects when you hit the jackpot is to display a dummy result image first, and then perform an effect that notifies you that you have won the jackpot lottery. To do. Immediately after letting the player recognize that the high-probability mode has ended due to the display of the result image, the player can be made aware that the jackpot has been won, so that it is possible to add surprise to the player, The interest can be improved.

<Aspect 8>
During the display of the result image, the sound other than the notification sound used to notify that the jackpot lottery has been won may be reduced or the sound may be turned off. When the player recognizes the notification sound or the effect sound output during the display of the result image, he immediately feels that he has won the jackpot lottery. However, if the notification sound or the effect sound is not the notification sound for notifying that the jackpot lottery has been won, the player will be greatly depressed after having a feeling of expectation, and the willingness to play will be lowered. For example, when an RTC (RTC: Real-Time Clock) effect movie is started and a loud sound is suddenly output while the result image is displayed, the player recognizes the sound and immediately wins the jackpot lottery. I have a high expectation. After that, when recognizing that the sound is the sound of the RTC effect moving image, the player is greatly depressed.

  Therefore, while the result image is displayed, unnecessary sounds are given to the player by reducing the sound other than the notification sound used to notify that the big hit lottery has been won, or by muting the sound. Can be suppressed.

<Aspect 9>
As described above, when it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the right side of the game board 30, it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the right side of the game board 30. If it is more advantageous for the player to display the guide display GD1 which is a guide display indicating on the symbol display device 41 and distribute the game balls on the left side of the game board 30, the game balls on the left side of the game board 30. A guide display GD2, which is a guide display indicating that it is more advantageous for the player to distribute, is displayed on the symbol display device 41. That is, it can be said that the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 guide the operation method of the operation handle 25 that is advantageous to the player. Specifically, the content of the guidance on the guide display GD1 is a content indicating that it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the right side of the game board 30, and the content of the guidance on the guide display GD2 is The content indicates that it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls on the left side of the game board 30.

  Various effects can be executed by using the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 having different contents of the guidance. For example, even after the high-frequency support mode ends, the game ball that was circulating the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 immediately before the high-frequency support mode ends enters the second starting opening 34, When the jackpot or the small hit is won by the jackpot lottery executed by the entry ball, it is more advantageous for the player to distribute the game ball on the right side of the game board 30, so the guide display Continue to display GD2. That is, the display control of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 is controlled based on the lottery result of the jackpot lottery in the game time.

  The player has a sense of anticipation by recognizing that the guidance display GD2 is continuously displayed despite recognizing that the high frequency support mode has ended. If the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot, the player's feelings can be further enhanced because the result is as expected for the player. On the other hand, when the result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit), the result is contrary to the expectation of the player, and thus the player's feeling of uplifting is descend. In this way, by continuing the display of the guidance display GD2 when it is advantageous for the player to distribute the game balls to the right side of the game board 30 even after the high-frequency support mode ends, It is possible to guess whether the result of the jackpot lottery is a jackpot or a jackpot, and give the player a sense of tension. As a result, the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 can be used as suggestive effects that suggest the result of the jackpot lottery, and the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  Further, as the display mode of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2, a display mode suggesting the result of the jackpot lottery may be adopted. For example, as the display mode of the guidance display GD2, a blue guidance display GD2 and a red guidance display GD2 are used. Then, immediately before the high-frequency support mode ends, the game balls distributed on the right side of the game board 30 enter the second starting opening 34, and the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the entering is a small hit. In this case, the frequency (probability) of displaying the blue guide display GD2 is increased as the display mode of the guide display GD2 that is continuously displayed after the high-frequency support mode ends. On the other hand, when the game ball that has been circulating on the right side of the game board 30 immediately before the high-frequency support mode ends enters the second starting opening 34, and the result of the jackpot lottery executed by the entering ball is a jackpot. In the above, the frequency (probability) of displaying the red guidance display GD2 is increased as a display mode of the guidance display GD2 that is continuously displayed after the high-frequency support mode ends. In this way, by adopting a display mode that suggests the result of the jackpot lottery as the display mode of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2, the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 are used as suggestive effects that suggest the result of the jackpot lottery. Can be used.

  The player not only views the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2 as displays for guiding the operation method of the operation handle 25 and the game method, but also pays attention to the display duration and the display mode of the guide display GD1 and the guide display GD2. Like As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be used to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, and a new playability can be created. As a result, the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 are suggested by controlling the content of the guidance display such as whether to display the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2 and controlling the display form of the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2. It becomes possible to use it as a production, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. As for the control of the display mode of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2, various shapes such as the colors and shapes of the guidance display GD1 and the guidance display GD2 can be controlled.

<Aspect 10>
In the above-described embodiment, the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 are independently operated to switch between the display of the liquid crystal symbol and the display of the demonstration moving image, but another mode is adopted. You may. For example, with respect to the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1, the transition from the liquid crystal design to the demo video is independently performed, and both the main display area MA and the first sub display area SA1 are demo videos. In a state where is displayed, a mode in which one display area returns from the display of the demo video to the display of the liquid crystal design, and the other display area also returns from the display of the demo video to the display of the liquid crystal design May be adopted.

<Aspect 11>
The behavior in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, and the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a small hit (first small hit, second small hit, third small hit) It may be difficult for the player to distinguish the behavior in the open / close execution mode, which is executed when the change occurs.

  Specifically, it is a mode in which it is difficult for the player to distinguish between the jackpot effect executed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and the jackpot effect executed when the jackpot is won. Furthermore, the opening and closing execution mode of the variable winning a prize device 36 of the opening and closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit, and the opening and closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a small hit The difference is made difficult for the player to distinguish. For example, the opening mode of the variable winning a prize device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode executed when the first-class jackpot is won in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is changed to the mode in which the 1.6-second opening is executed twice. Thus, it is possible to make it difficult to distinguish from the first small hit in which the variable winning device 36 is opened once for 1.6 seconds. Furthermore, by shortening (for example, 0 seconds) the period of the opening effect (opening period) and the ending effect period (ending period) in the opening / closing execution mode executed with the first-class jackpot as a trigger, Furthermore, the behavior in the opening and closing execution mode executed when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a big hit and the opening and closing execution mode when the lottery result of the big hit lottery is a small hit The behavior can be made difficult to distinguish from the player.

  By doing so, for example, in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode, the player circulates the game ball on the right side of the game board 30 and allows the game ball to enter the second starting opening 34, whereby the second In the state where the starting mouth game times are continuously executed, the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is a small percentage at a high rate, so even if the lottery result of the jackpot lottery is the first-class jackpot, the jackpot was won. This can be difficult for the player to recognize. If you win the first-class jackpot, the number of game times that can be executed in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will be 120 times again, so the number of game times that can be executed in the high-probability mode and high-frequency support mode will be The number of times increases substantially. However, the fact that the number of executable times in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode has increased is notified to the player just before the 120th game time ends from the time when the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is first started. To do. In this case, it is possible to make the player recognize that the number of game times that can be executed in the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode is added, and it is possible to give the player unexpectedness.

<Aspect 12>
In the eleventh embodiment, the result image is displayed 10 seconds after the display is started, but the display is ended. However, the audio emission control device 90 ends the display of the result image from the main control device 60. When a command (hereinafter, also referred to as a result display end command) is received, the display of the result image may be ended.

  For example, the display of the result image is started after the final specific game time (the game time after the probability change is 120th game time), which is the last game time to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, and the after-probability change game time is started. At the end of the 121st game time, the main control device 60 transmits a result display end command to the sound emission control device 90, and a result image is displayed based on the result display end command received by the sound emission control device 90. May be configured to end.

  However, in the case of such a configuration, if the player ends the game at the same time as the end of the final specific game time, which is the last game time to be executed before the end of the high-probability mode, the number of times after the probability change game time is executed. However, since the 121st game time is not started and ended, the result image is continuously displayed and maintained. That is, the main control device 60 causes the voice emission control device 90 to start only when a new player starts a game on the game machine, the 121st game time is started after the probability change, and the game time ends. To the result display command, and the display of the result image is ended based on the result display end command received by the voice emission control device 90. Therefore, when a new player starts a game on the gaming machine, the symbol display device 41 is in a state where the result image showing the game result of the previous player is displayed, and the symbol display device for starting the game. The state of 41 is not preferable.

  Therefore, the sound emission control device 90 is configured to end the display of the result image even when the result display end command is not received, for example, when the state is changed to the state where the demonstration moving image is started. Specifically, when it is determined that the demo moving image starting flag in the eleventh embodiment is turned on, the display of the result image is ended even if the result display end command is not received. The specific processing will be described below.

  FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing the result display processing executed by the sound-light side MPU in aspect 12 of the eleventh embodiment. The result display process is executed by the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 as a timer interrupt process subroutine (FIG. 154: S8007).

  In step S9501, a result display totaling process is executed. The result display totaling process calculates the information necessary for displaying the result image based on the prize ball command transmitted from the main control device 60, the command indicating the number of times the jackpot is won in the high probability mode, or the like. To do. After executing step S9501, the flow proceeds to step S9502.

  In step S9502, it is determined whether or not a final specific game time end command has been received from the main MPU 62. If it is determined in step S9502 that the final specific game time end command has been received from the main MPU 62 (S9502: YES), the flow advances to step S9503 to send a result display start command to the display control device 100. The display control device 100 that has received the result display start command executes a process for displaying the result image on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S9503, the process proceeds to step S9504. In step S9504, the result display flag is turned ON, and then the process proceeds to step S9505.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9502 that the final specific game time end command has not been received from the main MPU 62 (S9502: NO), the flow proceeds to step S9505 without executing steps S9503 and S9504.

  In step S9505, it is determined whether or not the result display flag is ON. If it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is ON (S9505: YES), the process advances to step S9506. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9505 that the result display flag is not ON (S9505: NO), this result display processing ends.

  In step S9506, it is determined whether the result display end command has been received from main controller 60. In this aspect, as described above, the result display end command is a command that the main control device 60 transmits to the sound emission control device 90 at the end of the 121st game time when the number of game times after the probability change is 121.

  When it is determined in step S9506 that the result display end command has been received (S9506: YES), the process advances to step S9507, and the result display end command is transmitted to the display control device 100. That is, the result display end command is transmitted to the display control device 100 at the end of the 121st game time after the probability change game time execution count. The display control device 100 that has received the result display end command ends the display of the result image. After that, the process advances to step S9508.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9506 that the result display end command has not been received (S9506: NO), the process advances to step S9509, and it is determined whether the demo movie display flag is ON. The demo movie displaying flag is a flag that is turned on when the demo movie is started and turned off when the demo movie is finished. When the demo movie display flag is ON, it is highly possible that the player of the pachinko machine 10 has stopped playing and left the seat.

  If it is determined in step S9509 that the demo moving image displaying flag is ON (S9509: YES), the process advances to step S9507, and a result display end command is transmitted to the display control device 100. That is, even if the result display end command is not received, the result display end command is transmitted to the display control device 100, and the display of the result image is ended. More specifically, the display of the result image is started after the end of the final specific game time (the game time after the probability change is 120th game time) which is the last game time to be executed before the end of the high probability mode, After that, even if the result display end command is not received, if the post-probability-change game time execution count does not start and end the 121st game time, the display of the result image ends. After that, the process advances to step S9508.

  In step S9508, the in-result display flag is turned off, and then this result display processing is terminated.

  If it is determined in step S9509 that the demo moving image displaying flag is not ON (S9509: NO), steps S9507 and S9508 are not executed, and the result displaying process is ended.

  By executing such processing, for example, when the player leaves the seat at the same time as the end of the high-probability mode, the sound emission control device 90 has not received the result display end command from the main control device 60. However, the display of the result image can be ended. Therefore, even when the execution of the game is interrupted, it is possible to avoid the event that the display of the result image is maintained. In this aspect, even when the game state in which the game times are executed is changed to the game state in which the game times are not executed, the result is triggered by the transition to the game state in which the game times are not executed. A process of ending the display of the image can be executed.

  As a result, the display of the result image on the symbol display device 41 is finished even when the new player starts the game on the game machine and the 121st game time is started after the probability change game time execution count. That is, the game can be executed in the same game state as when the normal game was started.

L. Twelfth embodiment:
L1. Outline of twelfth embodiment:
Next, a twelfth embodiment will be described. Hereinafter, differences between the present embodiment and the eleventh embodiment will be described. The present embodiment is different from the eleventh embodiment in that a right-hand hitting unit 200 described later is provided in the right side area of the game area PA of the game board 30.

  In the following description, the configuration of the right-handing unit 200 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, the behavior of the game ball that has reached the right-handing unit 200, and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 will be mainly described. . The description of the same configurations and processes as those of the eleventh embodiment will be omitted.

  FIG. 170 is an explanatory diagram that schematically shows the configuration of the right-hand hitting unit 200 included in the pachinko machine 10 of the twelfth embodiment. In the present embodiment, in the right-handing unit 200, all of the game balls that have been launched from the game ball launching mechanism 81 with a launch strength of a predetermined value or more have the through gate 35 provided at the upper end of the right-handing unit 200. Is configured to pass. The right hitting unit 200 includes a through gate 35 through which a game ball can pass, a distribution mechanism 204 provided on the downstream side of the through gate 35, a route R1 provided on the left side on the downstream side of the distribution mechanism 204, and a distribution. A route R2 provided in the center downstream of the distribution mechanism 204 and a route R3 provided on the right side downstream of the distribution mechanism 204 are provided. Then, a variable ball entrance device 36 is provided on the route R1, an opening / closing ball entrance device 34x including the second starting port 34 inside is provided on the route R2, and a general prize is provided on the route R3. A mouth 32 is provided.

  The distribution mechanism 204 has a function of sequentially distributing the game balls that have reached through the through gate 35 to the three routes R1 to R3, and in the present embodiment, the route R1 → route R2 → route R3 → route. The arrived game balls are sorted in the order of R1 → route R2 → route R3 → route R1 ...

  The variable ball device 36 is provided with an opening / closing door 36b as a special electric accessory that opens and closes forward and backward with a lower rotation axis as a base point, and opens and closes a large winning opening 36a and a V winning opening 48 into which game balls can enter. It is provided inside the door 36b.

  The opening and closing ball entrance device 34x includes an opening and closing door 34a as an ordinary electric accessory that opens and closes forward and backward with a lower rotation axis as a base point, and a second starting opening 34 into which a game ball can enter is inside the opening and closing door 34a. Be prepared for.

  The route R1 is configured such that the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 and are distributed to the route R1 reach the variable ball entrance device 36 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. , When the opening and closing door 36b of the variable ball entering device 36 is open at the timing when the game ball arrives, the game ball is sure to enter the big winning opening 36a provided inside the opening and closing door 36b. Is configured.

  The route R2 is configured such that the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 and are distributed to the route R2 reach the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. If the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x is in the open state at the timing when the game ball arrives, the game ball always enters the second starting opening 34 provided inside the opening / closing door 34a. Is configured.

  The route R3 is configured such that the game balls that have passed through the through gate 35 and are distributed to the route R3 reach the general winning opening 32 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35. The game ball is always configured to enter the general winning opening 32.

  Next, variations of symbols (hereinafter, also referred to as ordinary symbols) in the electric accessory opening lottery and the universal symbol unit 38 in the present embodiment will be described. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the electric accessory release lottery is executed when the game ball passes through the through gate 35.

  In this embodiment, the total of the variation time and the stop time of the normal symbol in the high frequency support mode is set to 0.5 seconds. Further, the probability of winning the electric role release in the electric accessory release lottery during the high frequency support mode is set to 232/233. That is, in the present embodiment, if the electric accessory release lottery is executed during the high frequency support mode, the electric role release is substantially won.

  In addition, the number of times the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x is opened once and the opening time is set to 1.8 seconds when the electric role opening is won in the electric accessory opening lottery.

  In addition, when winning the electric role, the time from the stop time of the normal symbol to the opening and closing of the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x (so-called opening time) is set to 0 seconds. ing. That is, when the power combination is won, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x starts opening immediately after the stop time of the normal symbol elapses. In addition, the maximum number (opening limit number) that the game ball can enter the second starting opening 34 during one opening of the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x is set to one. That is, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x is in a closed state immediately after one game ball enters the second starting opening 34. Further, the time from the closing of the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x until the start of the next fluctuation of the normal symbol (so-called ending time) is set to 0 seconds. That is, when the electric accessory opening lottery is suspended, immediately after the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x is closed, the next variation of the normal symbol starts.

  Next, a variation of a symbol (hereinafter, also referred to as a special symbol) in the jackpot lottery and special symbol unit 37 in the present embodiment will be described. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the jackpot lottery is executed when the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second starting opening 34. In the present embodiment, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting opening 34, all of them are 2R first-class jackpots. The 2R first-class jackpot is a jackpot in which the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable winning device 36 in the opening / closing execution mode is opened is two (two rounds), and a game ball can enter the V winning opening 48. Is. When a game ball enters the V winning opening 48, the lottery mode of the jackpot lottery after the opening / closing execution mode becomes the high-probability mode, and the support mode becomes the high-frequency support mode.

  In the present embodiment, the total of the variation time and the stop time of the special symbol during the high probability mode is set to 0.6 seconds. In addition, the probability of winning the small hit when the big hit lottery based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34 is executed during the high probability mode is set to 74/75. In addition, the probability of winning a jackpot (2R first-class jackpot) is set to 1/75 when the jackpot lottery based on the entry of game balls into the second starting opening 34 is executed during the high probability mode. ing. That is, in the present embodiment, if the jackpot lottery based on the entry of the game balls into the second starting opening 34 is executed during the high probability mode, then it is substantially either a small hit or a big hit (2R first-class big hit). You will win the crab.

  Further, when the small hit is won in the big hit lottery, the number of times the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is opened is set to 1 and the opening time is set to 1.0 second. Further, when the jackpot (2R first-class jackpot) is won in the jackpot lottery, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is opened twice, the opening time of the first opening is 0.2 seconds, and the opening time of the second opening. Is 0.6 seconds, and the interval between the first opening and the second opening is set to 0.2 seconds. In addition, only when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is opened triggered by the first-class jackpot, the distribution piece provided inside the variable ball entrance device 36 operates to enter the variable ball entrance device 36. The played game ball enters the V winning opening 48. On the other hand, when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is opened due to the small hit, the distribution piece provided inside the variable ball entrance device 36 does not operate and the ball enters the variable ball entrance device 36. The game ball thus played will enter the special winning opening 36a.

  In addition, when you win the small hit or big hit, the time from the stop time of the special symbol until the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 starts to open (so-called opening time) is set to 0 seconds. Has been done. That is, when the small hit or the big hit is won, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 starts opening immediately after the stop time of the special symbol elapses. In addition, the maximum number (opening limit number) that a game ball can enter the special winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48 during one opening of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable entrance device 36 is set to one. There is. That is, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is closed immediately after one game ball enters the special winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48. In addition, the time (so-called ending time) from when the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is closed until the next variation of the special symbol can be started is set to 0 second. That is, when the jackpot lottery is suspended, the next change of the special symbol starts immediately after the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is closed.

  FIG. 171 is a time chart showing the behavior of the game ball that has reached the right-hand hitting unit 200. In FIG. 171, the point at which the downward arrow indicating the game ball intersects with the horizontal axis indicating the through gate or the like means that the game ball indicated by the arrow reaches the through gate or the like indicated by the horizontal axis. Also, the interval between the vertical broken lines shown in FIG. 171 is 0.1 second.

  In the example shown in FIG. 171, the lottery mode is the high-probability mode and the support mode is the high-frequency support mode. Further, the game balls are continuously fired by the game ball firing mechanism 81 at a constant firing intensity that can reach the right hitting unit 200 provided on the right side of the game board 30 at intervals of 0.6 seconds. ing. Therefore, the game ball passes through the through gate 35 of the right hitting unit 200 at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

  When the first game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35, the game ball PB1 is distributed to the route R1 by the distribution mechanism 204, and 0.3 seconds after passing through the through gate 35, the variable ball entrance device 36. To reach. In the example shown in FIG. 171, since the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is in the closed state, the game ball PB1 passes through without winning the special winning opening 36a.

  The second game ball PB2, which has been launched following the game ball PB1, passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB1 and is distributed to the route R2 by the distribution mechanism 204 so as to pass through the through gate 35. It reaches the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x 0.3 seconds after the passage. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, the opening and closing ball entry device 34x is selected because the winning combination of the first game ball PB1 has passed through the through gate 35 to win the power role in the power role opening lottery. The open / close door 34a of the first game ball PB1 passes through the through gate 35, and 0.5 seconds after the variation time and the stop time of the normal symbol end, the opening is started. Therefore, at the timing when the second game ball PB2 reaches the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x is in the open state, and the game ball PB2 is in the second starting opening 34. To enter. In the present embodiment, since the opening limit number of the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x in one opening is set to 1, when the game ball PB2 enters the second starting opening 34, the opening / closing entrance ball The opening / closing door 34a of the device 34x is closed. Then, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. Note that the electric-role releasing lottery triggered by the passage of the second game ball PB2 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

  The third game ball PB3, which is launched following the game ball PB2, passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB2, and is distributed to the route R3 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is distributed. 0.3 seconds after passing, it enters the general winning opening 32. Then, triggered by the entry of the game balls into the general winning opening 32, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the electric-role releasing lottery triggered by the passage of the third gaming ball PB3 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

  The fourth game ball PB4, which has been launched following the game ball PB3, passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB3 and is distributed to the route R1 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is distributed. The variable ball entrance device 36 is reached 0.3 seconds after the passage. Here, in the example shown in FIG. 171, since the big hit lottery is triggered by the fact that the second game ball PB2 has entered the second starting opening 34, a small hit is won. The open / close door 36b of the special symbol changes and stop time ends 0.6 seconds after the second game ball PB2 enters the second starting opening 34, and starts opening. Therefore, at the timing when the fourth game ball PB4 reaches the variable ball entrance device 36, the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is in an open state, and the game ball PB4 is in the special winning opening 36a. Enter the ball. In the present embodiment, the opening limit number of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 per opening is set to 1. Therefore, when the game ball PB4 enters the special winning opening 36a, the variable ball entrance device The open / close door 36b of 36 is closed. Then, when the game balls enter the big winning opening 36a, six game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the electric-role releasing lottery triggered by the passage of the fourth gaming ball PB4 through the through gate 35 is suspended.

  The fifth game ball PB5, which has been launched following the game ball PB4, passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB4 and is distributed to the route R2 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is distributed. It reaches the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x 0.3 seconds after the passage. Here, the held electric role open lottery (electric role open lottery triggered by the fact that the second game ball PB2 has passed through the through gate 35) is the second game ball PB2 being the second start opening. It starts immediately after the player enters the ball 34 and the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x is in the closed state, and in the example shown in FIG. 171, since he / she is elected to open the electric hand in the electric hand open lottery. The opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x starts opening 0.5 seconds after the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing ball entrance device 34x is closed. Then, since the opening time of the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x is set to 1.8 seconds, at the timing when the fifth game ball PB5 reaches the opening / closing entrance device 34x, opening / closing The opening / closing door 34a of the ball entrance device 34x is in an open state, and the game ball PB5 enters the second starting opening 34. When the game ball PB5 enters the second starting opening 34, the opening / closing door 34a of the opening / closing entrance device 34x is closed. Then, triggered by the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, one game ball is paid out as a prize ball. Note that the electric-role opening lottery triggered by the fifth gaming ball PB5 passing through the through gate 35 is withheld.

  The sixth game ball PB6, which has been launched following the game ball PB5, passes through the through gate 35 0.6 seconds after the game ball PB5 and is distributed to the route R3 by the distribution mechanism 204, and the through gate 35 is distributed. 0.3 seconds after passing, it enters the general winning opening 32. Then, triggered by the entry of the game balls into the general winning opening 32, three game balls are paid out as prize balls. Note that the electric-role opening lottery triggered by the sixth gaming ball PB6 passing through the through gate 35 is withheld.

  The behavior of the seventh game ball PB7, which has been launched following the game ball PB6, is the same as that of the above-mentioned game ball PB4, and enters the special winning opening 36a. For the eighth and subsequent game balls, the above-described entry pattern from the game ball PB5 to the game ball PB7 is repeated.

  In the example shown in FIG. 171, when the jackpot (2R first-class jackpot) is won, the game ball enters while the second opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 is opened. The sorting piece provided inside operates to enter the V winning opening 48.

  According to the right hitting unit 200 configured as described above, during the period of the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, all of the game balls shot toward the right hitting unit 200. However, the player will sequentially enter the second starting opening 34, the general winning opening 32, and the special winning opening 36a. Then, one game ball is paid out as an award ball based on the entry of the game ball into the second starting opening 34, and three game balls are obtained based on the entry of the game ball into the general winning opening 32. Six game balls are paid out as prize balls based on the game balls entering the special winning opening 36a or the V winning opening 48. That is, in the high probability mode and the high frequency support mode, when the game balls are continuously fired toward the right hitting unit 200 at a constant firing intensity, the second start is performed. A total of 10 game balls are paid out as prize balls each time the jackpot lottery (game time) based on the entry of the game balls into the mouth 34 is executed once.

  In addition, as described in the eleventh embodiment, in the present embodiment as well, the number of jackpot lottery (game times) executed in the high-probability mode is the specified number of times (in the present embodiment, without winning the jackpot). (120 times), the high probability mode ends. Then, as the high probability mode ends, the high frequency support mode also ends. Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed before the high-probability mode ends, the number of game balls to be paid out to the player as a prize ball before the high-probability mode ends. Calculate the remaining number. Then, in the high probability mode, instead of displaying the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed before the high probability mode ends, the player wins a prize ball until the high probability mode ends. Display the number of remaining game balls to be paid out. In the following, the number of remaining game balls to be paid out to the player as a prize ball by the end of the high-probability mode is also referred to as “remaining acquired ball number”.

  FIG. 172 is an explanatory diagram showing an image displayed on the symbol display device 41 during the high-probability mode and the high-frequency support mode. As shown in FIG. 172 (a), in the present embodiment, immediately after the high-probability mode is started, in the upper left part of the display surface 41a, the remaining acquired number of balls suggesting image CP that suggests the remaining acquired number of balls to the player. Is displayed. In the present embodiment, as described above, while the game ball enters the second starting opening 34 of the right-handing unit 200 and one jackpot lottery (game time) is executed, 10 game balls are played. Are paid out as prize balls. Therefore, immediately after the high-probability mode is started, the number of remaining jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed by the end of the high-probability mode is 120. Therefore, in the 120 big jackpot lottery (game times) If the jackpot is not won even once, the number of remaining game balls (remaining number of acquired balls) to be paid out to the player as a prize ball by the end of the high probability mode becomes 1200. . Therefore, “1200” is displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP immediately after the high-probability mode is started. Then, as the number of remaining jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed by the time the high probability mode ends is reduced, the number displayed in the remaining acquisition ball count suggestion image CP is decreased. In the present embodiment, each time the jackpot lottery (game time) is executed, the number displayed in the remaining acquired number of balls suggestion image CP is decreased by "10".

  FIG. 173 is an explanatory diagram showing a transition of the remaining number of acquired balls when the big hit is won in the big hit lottery in the high probability mode. In this FIG. 173, the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed before the high-probability mode ends, the actual number of remaining acquired balls, and the number displayed in the remaining acquired number suggestion image CP. , The number of remaining acquired balls that can be added, which will be described later, is shown.

  In the example shown in FIG. 173, after the high-probability mode is started, the jackpot (2R first-class jackpot) is won at the timing when “950” is displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP, and the high-probability mode is set. The remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed by the end of is once again 120 times. Therefore, the actual number of remaining acquired balls becomes 1200 again, but in the present embodiment, "950" is continuously displayed as it is on the remaining acquired number suggestive image CP. Therefore, the actual number of remaining acquired balls (1200) is 250 more than the number (950) displayed in the remaining acquired number suggestive image CP. That is, it is possible to add only the 250 pieces to the number displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP. In the following, the number obtained by subtracting the number displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP from the actual remaining acquisition number is also referred to as “addable remaining acquisition number”. In addition, in the present embodiment, even if the jackpot is won while the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP is displayed, the effect suggesting that the jackpot is won is not executed for the player. Therefore, it is difficult for the player to notice that the number of remaining jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed by the end of the high-probability mode is 120 again.

  Further, in the example shown in FIG. 173, it is possible to win the jackpot (2R first-class jackpot) at the timing when “170” is displayed in the remaining acquired number suggestion image CP, and can be executed before the high-probability mode ends. The number of remaining jackpot lottery (game times) is 120 times again. Therefore, the actual number of remaining acquired balls becomes 1200 again, but in the present embodiment, “170” is continuously displayed as it is in the remaining acquired number suggestion image CP. Therefore, the actual number of remaining acquired balls (1200) is 1030 more than the number (170) displayed in the remaining acquired number suggestion image CP. Therefore, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 1030.

  In the present embodiment, when the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more at the timing when "90" is displayed in the remaining acquired number suggestive image CP, the number of remaining acquired balls is increased by 500. An image CPB suggesting an increase in the number of remaining acquired balls is displayed in the central portion of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), and the number (90) displayed in the image indicating the remaining acquired number of balls CP is set to 500. Add pieces. Therefore, “590” is displayed on the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP (FIG. 172 (c)).

  In the example shown in FIG. 173, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 1030 at the timing when “90” is first displayed in the remaining acquired number of balls suggestion image CP, so the remaining acquired number of balls is An image CPB suggesting an increase in the number of remaining acquired balls suggesting an increase of 500 is displayed in the central portion of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), and the number (90 500 pieces) is added. Therefore, “590” is displayed on the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP (FIG. 172 (c)). The number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 530.

  After that, at the timing when “90” is displayed again in the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP, the number of remaining acquisition balls that can be added is 530, which indicates that the number of remaining acquisition balls has increased by 500. The image CPB suggesting an increase in the number of remaining acquired balls is displayed in the center of the display surface 41a (FIG. 172 (b)), and 500 is added to the number (90) displayed in the image suggesting the remaining number of acquired balls CP (90). . Therefore, “590” is displayed on the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP (FIG. 172 (c)). The number of remaining acquisition balls that can be added is 30.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is one or more X at the timing when “0” is displayed in the remaining acquired number of balls suggestion image CP, the number of remaining acquired balls is one. Is displayed in the central portion of the display surface 41a, which indicates that the number of remaining acquired spheres has increased by X, and "X" is displayed in the remaining acquired sphere number suggesting image CP. In the example shown in FIG. 173, the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 30 at the timing when "0" is displayed in the remaining acquired number suggestive image CP, so the number of remaining acquired balls is increased by 30. The remaining acquisition sphere number increase suggesting image CPB indicating that it has been performed is displayed in the center portion of the display surface 41a, and "30" is displayed on the remaining acquisition sphere number suggesting image CP. At this time point, the number displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP matches the actual remaining acquisition number.

L2. Processing executed in the sound emission control device:
<Processing for displaying the remaining number of acquired balls>
Next, an example of the process executed by the sound-light side MPU 92 to display the remaining acquisition sphere number will be described.

  FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing the remaining acquisition sphere count display processing executed by the sound-light side MPU 92. The processing for displaying the remaining number of acquired balls is executed in the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the processing for displaying the remaining number of acquired balls is repeatedly executed every 4 msec.

  In step S9601, it is determined whether or not the remaining acquired ball number displaying flag in the various flag storage areas 94a of the sound-light side RAM 94 is ON. The remaining acquisition sphere number displaying flag is a flag for determining whether or not the remaining acquisition sphere number suggesting image CP is being displayed on the symbol display device 41. If it is determined in step S9601 that the remaining acquired number of balls display flag is not ON (S9601: NO), the flow advances to step S9602 to determine whether or not a high probability mode command is received.

  If it is determined in step S9602 that the high-probability mode command has not been received (S9602: NO), the process for displaying the remaining remaining acquired ball count is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9602 that the high-probability mode command has been received (S9602: YES), the flow proceeds to step S9603, and 1200 is set in the counter indicating the actual remaining acquisition ball count. After that, the process advances to step S9604, and a command for displaying the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP in which “1200” is displayed as the remaining acquisition number is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. The display-side MPU 102 that has received this command executes processing for displaying the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S9604, the flow proceeds to step S9605, and the remaining acquired ball number displaying flag is turned on. After that, the process for displaying the remaining number of remaining balls is ended.

  If it is determined in step S9601 that the remaining acquired number of balls display flag is ON (S9601: YES), the flow advances to step S9606 to receive a variation command (special 1 variation command or special 2 variation command). Is determined. If it is determined in step S9606 that the variation command has been received (S9606: YES), the flow advances to step S9607 to subtract 10 from the remaining acquisition number of balls displayed on the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP. The command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Upon receiving this command, the display side MPU 102 executes a process for subtracting 10 from the remaining acquisition sphere number currently displayed on the remaining acquisition sphere number suggesting image CP. After executing step S9607, the process advances to step S9608, and 10 is subtracted from the counter indicating the actual remaining acquisition number of balls. Then, it progresses to step S9609. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9606 that the fluctuation command has not been received (S9606: NO), the process proceeds to step S9609 without executing the processes of steps S9607 and S9608.

  In step S9609, it is determined whether a V winning command has been received. When it is determined in step S9609 that the V winning command is received (S9609: YES), the process proceeds to step S9610, and from “1200”, the remaining acquisition ball number displayed in the remaining acquisition ball number suggesting image CP. The value obtained by subtracting is set in the counter indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added. After that, the process advances to step S9611, and 1200 is set to the counter indicating the actual number of remaining acquired balls. Then, it progresses to step S9612. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9609 that the V winning command has not been received (S9609: NO), the process proceeds to step S9612 without executing the processes of steps S9610 and S9611.

  In step S9612, it is determined whether or not the number of remaining acquisition balls displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP is 90. When it is determined in step S9612 that the remaining acquisition ball number displayed in the remaining acquisition ball number suggesting image CP is 90 (S9612: YES), the process proceeds to step S9613, and the addable remaining acquisition ball number is 500 or more. Or not. When it is determined in step S9613 that the number of remaining acquired spheres that can be added is 500 or more (S9613: YES), the process proceeds to step S9614, and a command for displaying the acquisition sphere count increase suggestion image CPB is displayed on the display side MPU 102. Send to. Upon receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for displaying the acquired sphere number increase suggestive image CPB on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S9614, the process advances to step S9615, and a command for adding 500 to the remaining acquisition sphere number being displayed on the remaining acquisition sphere number suggesting image CP is transmitted to the display side MPU 102. Upon receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for adding 500 to the remaining acquisition sphere number being displayed on the remaining acquisition sphere number suggesting image CP. After executing step S9615, the process advances to step S9616, and 500 is subtracted from the counter indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added. Then, it progresses to step S9617. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9612 that the number of remaining acquisition balls displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP is not 90 (S9612: NO), and the number of remaining acquisition balls that can be added is 500 in step S9613. If it is determined that the above is not the case (S9613: NO), the process proceeds from step S9614 to step S9616 without executing the processing from step S9616.

  In step S9617, it is determined whether the number of remaining acquired balls displayed in the remaining acquired number suggestion image CP is 0 or not. If it is determined in step S9617 that the number of remaining acquisition balls displayed in the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP is 0 (S9617: YES), the flow advances to step S9618 to see if there is a remaining number of acquisition balls that can be added. Determine whether or not. If it is determined in step S9618 that there is a remaining acquired sphere number that can be added (S9618: YES), the flow advances to step S9619 to send a command for displaying the acquired sphere count increase suggestion image CPB to the display side MPU 102. . Upon receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for displaying the acquired sphere number increase suggestive image CPB on the symbol display device 41. After executing step S9619, the process advances to step S9620, and a command for adding the value of the counter indicating the remaining acquired sphere number that can be added to the remaining acquired sphere number displayed in the remaining acquired sphere number suggesting image CP is displayed. It is transmitted to the MPU 102. Upon receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for adding the value of the counter to the remaining acquisition sphere number being displayed on the remaining acquisition sphere number suggesting image CP. After executing step S9620, the flow advances to step S9621 to set 0 to a counter indicating the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added. After that, the process for displaying the remaining number of remaining balls is ended.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step S9617 that the remaining number of remaining balls displayed in the remaining number of remaining balls suggestion image CP is not 0 (S9617: NO), the processes of steps S9618 to S9621 are not executed, The process for displaying the remaining number of remaining balls is ended. If it is determined in step S9618 that there is no remaining acquirable sphere number that can be added (S9618: NO), that is, if the value of the counter indicating the remaining acquirable sphere number that can be added is 0, the process proceeds to step S9622. Then, the command is transmitted to the display side MPU 102 for ending the display of the remaining acquisition number suggestive image CP. Upon receiving this command, the display-side MPU 102 executes a process for ending the display of the remaining acquisition sphere number suggesting image CP. After executing step S9622, the flow advances to step S9623 to turn off the remaining acquired ball number displaying flag. After that, the process for displaying the remaining number of remaining balls is ended.

L3. Effects of the twelfth embodiment:
As described above, according to the present embodiment, since the remaining acquisition ball number suggestion image CP showing the information corresponding to the remaining acquisition ball number is displayed, the game ball that can be acquired before the high probability mode ends. It is possible to let the player know the number of In addition, for example, as compared with the configuration that displays the remaining number of jackpot lottery that can be executed before the high-probability mode ends, how much expectation can be given to the high-probability mode Since it can be clearly recognized, the interest in the game can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the first type jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery, and the game ball enters the V winning opening 48 and the remaining number of acquired balls increases, the remaining number of acquired balls suggestive image CP The number of remaining balls shown by is updated with the maximum number of remaining balls that can be added as the upper limit, so it is possible to let the player recognize that the number of game balls that can be acquired by the end of the high probability mode has increased. The player's expectation for the high-probability mode can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, when the number of remaining acquired balls increases, the remaining acquired number of balls increasing suggestion image CPB is displayed, so that the number of game balls that can be acquired before the high probability mode ends is increased. The player can be made to clearly recognize the number of games played, and the player's expectation for the high-probability mode can be improved.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, the number of remaining acquisition balls is different from the timing at which it is determined that the number of remaining acquisition balls has increased (in this embodiment, the timing at which the game ball enters the V winning opening 48). Since the number of remaining acquisition balls indicated by the suggestion image CP is increased, it is possible to give a surprising effect to the game, and at what timing the number of remaining acquisition balls indicated by the suggestion image CP of the remaining acquisition ball increases. It is possible to provide the player with a sense of expectation.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, the number of remaining acquired balls shown in the remaining acquired number-of-balls increase suggestive image CPB is increased in increments of 500 as one unit, so that the expectation for one increase can be improved. . The unit of increase is not limited to 500, but may be set to any number such as 300 or 1000.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, when the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is less than 500 which is one unit of increase, the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired number suggestion image CP is 0. At that timing, the number of remaining less than 500 is added to the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired number suggestive image CP, so that the number of remaining acquired balls indicated by the remaining acquired number of suggested images CP becomes 0. It is possible to give a great sense of expectation to the player whose expectation has decreased even if the number of remaining acquired balls is less than 500.

  Furthermore, according to the present embodiment, even when the remaining acquisition ball number increases, the remaining acquisition ball number indicated by the remaining acquisition ball number suggesting image CP is continuously displayed for a predetermined period without increasing. , It is possible to give the player an expectation that the actual number of remaining balls to be acquired may be greater than the number of remaining balls to be acquired shown in the image CPB suggesting an increase in the number of remaining balls to improve the enjoyment of the game. be able to.

  Further, according to the present embodiment, in the high probability mode, when the game ball is continuously fired at 0.6 second intervals with a constant firing intensity that can reach the right-handing unit 200, The number of game balls (3) to enter into the large winning hole 36a (V winning hole 48), the second starting hole 34, and the general winning hole 32 occupying in the number of played game balls (3) is constant. Since it is configured to, it is possible to match the number of game balls actually paid out by the end of the high-probability mode with the number of remaining acquisition balls.

L4. Other aspects of the twelfth embodiment:
<Aspect 1>
In the twelfth embodiment, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 when the small hit is won is the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 when the 2R first type big hit is won. Although the configuration is different, the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 in the case of winning the small hit is the same as the opening pattern of the opening / closing door 36b of the variable ball entrance device 36 in the case of winning the 2R type 1 big hit. The configuration may be as follows. With such a configuration, it becomes more difficult for the player to notice that he or she has won the 2R first-class jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the player's sense of well-being when the image of suggesting increase in the number of remaining balls CPB is displayed.

<Aspect 2>
When the number of remaining acquired balls that can be added is 500 or more, the timing for displaying the remaining acquired number of balls increase suggestion image CPB indicating that the number of remaining acquired balls has increased by 500 is determined by a lottery. Good. According to such a configuration, it becomes difficult for the player to predict the timing at which the remaining acquisition number of balls increase suggesting image CPB is displayed, so that the game when the remaining acquisition number of balls increase suggesting image CPB is displayed. It is possible to further improve a person's sense of well-being.

<Aspect 3>
When the remaining acquisition number suggestion image CP is displayed, for example, the player operates the operation handle 25 to change the firing interval and the firing strength of the game ball, and the game ball is scheduled to enter. When the player does not enter the special winning opening 36a, the general winning opening 32, or the like, it may be configured to execute an effect that suggests that the game ball did not enter as planned. For example, an image such as "Miss !!" may be displayed on the display surface 41a of the symbol display device 41.

<Aspect 4>
The jackpot type other than the 2R first-class jackpot may be set as the jackpot type to be distributed when the jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery based on the entry into the second starting opening 34. For example, the 16R first-class jackpot may be set. If this configuration is adopted, the number of game balls to be paid out during the opening / closing execution mode executed with the 16R first-class jackpot as a trigger is further added to the above-described number of remaining earnable balls that can be added. Good.

<Aspect 5>
In addition to the remaining acquired number of balls suggesting image CP, the number of game balls actually paid out may be displayed. In addition to the remaining number of balls suggesting image CP or instead of the number of remaining balls suggesting image CP, it may be configured to display the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed before the high probability mode ends. Good. In such a configuration, even when the remaining number of jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed before the high-probability mode ends, the jackpot lottery (game times) currently displayed is displayed for a predetermined period. If it is configured to continuously display without increasing the remaining number of times, the remaining number of actual jackpot lottery (game times) that can be executed before the high-probability mode ends is displayed to the player. It is possible to give a sense of expectation that the number of remaining games may be greater than the remaining number of games, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

M. Modification:
The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various modes without departing from the scope of the invention, and the following modifications are possible, for example.

M1. Modification 1:
In the first to fourth embodiments, the suggestion effect is executed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game number reproduction effect are executed, but the suggestion effect is not limited to such a configuration. May be omitted. Even if the suggestive effect is omitted, at least one of the effects executed in the first game time in the second game time, despite winning the jackpot lottery related to the second game time. Since the effect of reproducing the part is executed, it is difficult for the player to expect that the jackpot lottery related to the second game is won. Even if the suggestion effect is omitted, the game time reproduction effect is executed due to the fact that the player has won the jackpot lottery related to the second game time, so as to surprise the player and improve the game. Unexpectedness can be imparted.

M2. Modification Example 2:
In case a2 of the first embodiment and case c2 of the third embodiment described above, the suggestive effect is executed in the ending period, but the invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, in the second game time, the suggestion effect may be executed before the game time reproduction effect. That is, if the timing is before the reproduction of the effect that has already been executed, the suggestive effect can be executed at any timing. Even if such a configuration is adopted, since the suggestion effect is executed before the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect are executed, for example, the effect executed in the second game time has already been performed. It is possible for the player to strongly recognize that it is a reproduction of the executed effect.

M3. Modification 3:
In the first to fourth embodiments described above, the target of reproduction in the special game state reproduction effect and the game time reproduction effect is not limited to the effect executed in the game time when the jackpot is achieved. A performance executed in a game time that is not a jackpot, for example, a reach performance in a game time of out (reach) may be targeted for reproduction in a special game state reproduction effect and a game time reproduction effect, or a game in which a game is out (no reach). The notice production at the time may be the target of reproduction.

M4. Modification 4:
The first game time and the second game time defined in the first embodiment to the fourth embodiment are not limited to two game times executed continuously. For example, another game time may exist between the first game time and the second game time.

M5. Modification 5:
In the first to third embodiments, a configuration is adopted in which the effect to be executed in the ending period of the special game state is determined based on special information relating to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state. did. For example, in the first embodiment, the effects executed during the ending period of the special game state executed after the first game time are the suggestion effect and the special game state reproduction effect as shown in case a1 (FIG. 9). Alternatively, as shown in the case a2, it is determined whether to be the suggestive effect based on the special information related to the second game time executed after the special game state, but the invention is not limited to such a structure. The effect to be determined based on the special information related to the predetermined game times executed after the special game state is not limited to the suggestion effect or the special game state reproduction effect, and any other effect may be adopted. Good. For example, other effects such as a normal reach effect (a reach effect that is not the target of the special game state reproduction effect) or an effect executed only when a predetermined condition is satisfied may be adopted. Even if such a configuration is adopted, it is possible to perform an effect in the special game state in consideration of special information relating to a predetermined game time executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect that is related to the effect executed in the predetermined game time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

M6. Modification 6:
The processes executed in the first to fourth embodiments may be combined. That is, the case a1 (FIG. 9 (a)) and the case a2 (FIG. 9 (b)), which are the processes executed in the first embodiment, and the processes (FIGS. 46 (a) and (b)) executed in the second embodiment. ), A case c1 (FIG. 48 (a)) and a case c2 (FIG. 48 (b)) which are processes executed in the third embodiment, and a case d1 (FIG. 49 (a) which is processes executed in the fourth embodiment. )) And case d2 (FIG. 49 (b)), a plurality of processes may be appropriately selected and used together. As a result, it becomes possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined processing. For example, it is possible to improve the player's attention and expectation with respect to effects that reproduce already executed effects, such as special game state reproduction effects and game time reproduction effects.

M7. Modification 7:
In the first to sixth embodiments, the case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition has been described as an example in which the jackpot lottery is won. However, the predetermined condition is that the jackpot lottery is won. Not limited. For example, as a case where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a case may be adopted in which the condition for executing the reach effect based on the acquired counter value of the reach random number counter C3 is satisfied. In this way, even if another condition is set as the predetermined condition, the same effect as the effect described in the first to sixth embodiments can be obtained.

M8. Modification 8:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments described above, three types of images of objects A to C are adopted as the object images used for the notice effect, but the present invention is not limited to such a configuration. For example, two types of object images may be used as the object image used for the notice effect, or four types of object images may be used. As described above, even if an arbitrary number of object images are adopted, the same effect as in the above embodiment can be obtained. Also, various contents can be adopted as the contents of each object.

M9. Modification 9:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments, the expectation level of the jackpot is shown to the player as the situation of the game depending on how to combine the images of the objects displayed as the notice effect. As a game situation such as a degree, an expectation that the current game state is a probability change state, and the like, a configuration may be adopted in which various game situations are shown to the player.

M10. Modification 10:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54, each of the display pattern tables of the object A, the object B, and the object C has three types: jackpot, miss (with reach), and miss (without reach). Each display pattern random number is distributed in this case, but for example, the jackpot in the display pattern table of the object B is further divided into 16R probability jackpot, 8R probability variation jackpot, 16R regular jackpot, 8R regular jackpot, The effect by the object B may be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability variation jackpot. In addition, for example, in a gaming machine in which there is a latent probability variation state, the effect by the object C may be made to function as a step-up effect indicating the degree of expectation of the probability variation state of the current game time. In this way, if the objects A, B, and C have the function of suggesting the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game depending on the display pattern, each object has a different type (eg, jackpot expectation or The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game such as the probability of the probability variation jackpot) may be indicated.

M11. Modification 11:
In the fifth embodiment, the coordinates indicating the placement of each object in the placement / timing setting table of FIG. 55 are set as fixed coordinates, but the placement position (coordinates) of each object is set so as to change over time. May be. That is, a dynamic locus of the center position of the object may be set. Even in this case, the arrangement position (coordinates) changes with time so that each object is displayed on the display surface 41a in a related manner, and each object displayed on the display surface 41a in the same period is The arrangement and display start timing of the display objects are set in the arrangement / timing setting table so as not to overlap each other.

M12. Modification 12:
In the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 56, only the image A3 of the display pattern (A1-A2-A3) using the object A is processed without displaying the image frame, but the display pattern (A1 The image frames A1, A2 and A3 displayed as -A2-A3) may not be displayed. Further, the same processing may be performed on other object images.

M13. Modification 13:
In the fifth embodiment, the pachinko machine 10 is configured to set the arrangement and the display start timing for each combination of the object images displayed as the notice effect by the arrangement / timing setting table as shown in FIG. 55. However, other configurations may be adopted. For example, even in the notice effect in which the object A and the object B are displayed, the notice effect combining (A1-A2) and (B1-B2-B3) or the notice effect combining (A1-A2-A3) and (B1). There are multiple types of notice effects, such as notice effects. The arrangement and display start timing of each object image may be set for each of these plural types of notice effects. By doing so, it is possible to improve the quality of the effect without causing a complicated impression to the player by the effect executed by displaying the plurality of objects in the same period.

M14. Modification 14:
In the fifth and sixth embodiments described above, when two or more objects are displayed in one notice effect, the relative positions between the objects are taken into consideration, and the objects are related to each other. The relative arrangement position between the objects and the display timing are set so as to be displayed on the display surface 41a in a manner having the above. Specifically, although it is set to be displayed in a mode having a narrative property as a related mode, it is set to be displayed in a mode having a plurality of objects as a related mode. Various modes can be adopted as a mode in which a plurality of objects are related to each other, such as a configuration in which a plurality of objects are associated with each other and a configuration in which a plurality of objects are set to be displayed in a mode having a predetermined rule.

M15. Modification 15:
The display patterns set in the display pattern tables described in the fifth and sixth embodiments are not limited to the modes shown in the above embodiments, and display patterns of other modes may be adopted. You can For example, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) may be adopted as the display pattern set in the BC display pattern table. In this case, the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of the dog in the box, and gives the player recognition that the game situation is advantageous. On the other hand, the display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object C is combined with the object B is a display pattern showing that the dog in the box gets wet due to the bad weather. It is possible to give the player recognition that the situation is disadvantageous, it is possible to execute various effects by combining the respective objects, and it is possible to effectively use the objects.

M16. Modification 16:
In the sixth embodiment, as the image used for the notice effect, the object A, the object B, the object C, or an image obtained by combining these is adopted, but another image may be adopted.

  FIG. 175 is an explanatory diagram showing an object D that can be used for the notice effect. The object D is an image that is composed of three images, that is, an image D1, an image D2, and an image D3, and that changes over time in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. 175 (a) shows the image D1, FIG. 175 (b) shows the image D2, and FIG. 175 (c) shows the image D3. As shown in the figure, the object D represents a love pattern between a male character and a female character. Specifically, the image D1 shows a male character and a female character gazing at each other with a certain distance. The image D2 shows a male character and a female character gazing at each other at a short distance. The image D3 shows that the male character and the female character are holding hands and making good friends. Further, in the image D3, a state in which the female character talks to the male character so as to keep secret from the female character's father that he or she is getting along with each other is expressed.

  In the object D composed of images of such contents, it is depicted that the romance of the man and woman is fulfilled as the images progress in the order of the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3. Image D3 generally gives a better impression than image D2. In other words, the image D1 to the image D2 and the image D2 to the image D3 give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Further, the object D is displayed on the display surface 41a as a step-up effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery increases as the image D1, the image D2, and the image D3 progress. That is, the pachinko machine according to the modified example 16 includes the display pattern table for D as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of jackpot, out (with reach), and out (without reach), non-display and display pattern, respectively. Four display patterns of (D1), display pattern (D1-D2), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3) are assigned. In the D display pattern table, the display pattern display pattern (D1) is most frequently displayed among the above four display patterns in the case of deviation (without reach), and in the case of deviation (with reach), Of the four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2) is most frequently displayed, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1-D2-D3) of the four display patterns is most frequently displayed. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned to be higher.

  The pachinko machine according to the present modification further executes a notice effect in which the image D is combined with the object D as another image.

  FIG. 176 shows an image in which the image D is combined with the object D (object D + image E). As shown in the figure, an image E, which is an image combined with the object D, expresses the father of the female character. The object D + image E is composed of three images of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. [Image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], [image D] It is an image that changes with time in the order of D3 + image E]. 176 (a) shows [image D1 + image E], FIG. 176 (b) shows [image D2 + image E], and FIG. 176 (c) shows [image D3 + image E]. As shown in the figure, the object D + image E shows how the father of the female character looks at the love pattern of the male character and the female character from behind the pillar. Specifically, in [Image D1 + Image E], a male character and a female character are staring at each other with a certain distance, and the female character's father is looking from behind the pillars. Has been done. [Image D2 + Image E] shows that the male character and the female character are gazing at each other at a short distance, and the female character's father is looking from behind the pillar. In [Image D3 + Image E], the male character and the female character hold hands, and the female character talks to the male character to keep the friendship of the female character from the father of the female character. The female character's father is seen from behind the pillars.

  The object D + image E composed of images of such contents has a female character and a father as the images progress in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E]. It is speculated that the parent-child relationship will deteriorate. Therefore, as the images progress in the order of [image D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E], a generally bad impression is given. In other words, [Image D3 + Image E] gives [Image D2 + Image E] and [Image D2 + Image E] gives [Image D1 + Image E] a generally good impression. That is, the [image D2 + image E] from the [image D3 + image E] and the [image D1 + image E] from the [image D2 + image E] give the player an advantageous recognition of the situation of the game.

  The object D + image E is displayed as an effect image that is set so that the probability of winning the jackpot lottery decreases as the image [D1 + image E], [image D2 + image E], and [image D3 + image E] progress. It is displayed on the surface 41a. That is, the pachinko machine according to the modified example 16 includes the DE display pattern table as the display pattern table, and in the three cases of the jackpot, the out (with reach), and the out (without reach), the non-display and the display pattern, respectively. Four display patterns are assigned: (D1 / E), display pattern (D1-D2 / E), and display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E). In the DE display pattern table, in the case of detachment (without reach), the display pattern (D1-D2-D3 / E) among the above four display patterns is displayed most frequently, and the display pattern of detachment (with reach) is displayed. In the case of the above four display patterns, the display pattern (D1-D2 / E) is displayed most frequently, and in the case of a big hit, the display pattern (D1 / E) of the above four display patterns is displayed most. The values of the display pattern random number counter C22 of 0 to 99 are assigned so that the frequency of being performed becomes high.

  By doing so, the same effect as that of the sixth embodiment can be obtained. That is, in the pachinko machine according to the modified example, the case where the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E is more than the case where the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E. The image D3 is displayed in combination with the image E when the image D1 is combined with the image E and displayed on the display surface 41a even though the player is favorably recognized about the game situation. It is possible to give the player more favorable recognition of the game situation than when the game is displayed on the surface 41a. Therefore, the player can be given various kinds of recognition about the game situation by devising the combination of images and the contents of the images.

  In addition, the probability that the jackpot lottery is won when the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E, rather than when the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a without being combined with the image E. Despite being high, the case where the image D1 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with the image E is larger than the case where the image D3 is displayed on the display surface 41a in combination with image E. The probability of winning is high. Therefore, when a predetermined image is combined with an effect image that steps up as the probability of winning the jackpot lottery or the degree of expectation increases, it is possible to give the player a completely different recognition of the game situation. it can. Even when the player recognizes the image D1 or the image D3 displayed on the display surface 41a, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on whether or not the image E is displayed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player to the image displayed on the display surface 41a. It should be noted that the above effect has been described by taking the relationship between the image D1 and the image D3 as an example, but the above effect is also exhibited between the image D1 and the image D2 and between the image D2 and the image D3.

M17. Modification 17:
In the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the output mode of the voice is reduced to zero with the volume of the background music being zero through the mode of reducing the volume of the background music while continuing to output the background music. Although it is configured to shift to a certain aspect, instead of this, when the transition condition is satisfied, a mode in which the volume of the background music is reduced over time while the output of the background music is continued while the output of the background music is continued. Instead, the configuration may be changed to a mode in which the volume of the background music is zero.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed to a mode in which the demo video is displayed after 5 seconds have elapsed since the volume of the background music became zero. However, instead of this, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 may be changed to a mode in which the demo moving image is displayed at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the background music output itself continues until 5 seconds elapse after the volume of the background music becomes zero, and the background music output is stopped after 5 seconds elapses. Instead of this, the background music output may be stopped at the timing when the volume of the background music becomes zero.

M18. Modification 18:
In the above embodiment, if the return condition is satisfied after the volume of the background music becomes zero and after the display of the demo video is started (FIG. 11), the temporal beginning of the background video is set. While the display is started from the position "01" and the output is started from the temporal start position "01" of the background music, the background video and the background music are displayed and output from the temporal start position. It is not limited to the configuration. For example, the background moving image and the background music may be configured to be displayed and output from a predetermined temporally most exciting time position (so-called chorus start position). That is, the display is started from the predetermined temporal position of the background video, and the output is performed from the temporal position of the background music that corresponds to the predetermined temporal position of the background video. It may be configured to start. Even with such a configuration, the display of the background moving image and the output of the background music are easily synchronized with each other as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the background moving image starts is changed according to the timing when the return condition is satisfied. be able to. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved.

M19. Modification 19:
In the above embodiment, the volume of the background music is set to zero when the transition condition is satisfied, but the volume of the background music may not be completely zero. For example, when the transition condition is satisfied, the volume of the background music may be set to be equal to or lower than the volume that the player cannot recognize. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to let the player recognize that the transition condition is satisfied.

  In addition, the output mode of the voice before the transition condition is satisfied is set as the mode in which the background music is output at the volume of the first loudness, and the output mode of the voice that is transferred after the transition condition is satisfied is set as the first background music. It is also possible to adopt a mode in which the volume is output at the second volume which is lower than the volume of the volume. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to let the player recognize that the transition condition is satisfied.

M20. Modification 20:
In the above-mentioned embodiment, when the transition condition is satisfied, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is changed from the mode of displaying the background moving image to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, but before the transition condition is satisfied. The display mode of the symbol display device 41 and the display mode of the symbol display device 41 that shifts after the shift condition is satisfied are not limited to the mode of displaying the background moving image and the mode of displaying the demo moving image. For example, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 before the transition condition is satisfied is a mode for displaying a predetermined moving image, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to be transitioned after the transition condition is satisfied is It may be a mode in which an image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed or a mode in which the image display is stopped. For example, the display mode of the symbol display device 41 to be transferred after the transition condition is satisfied is a mode in which a moving image different from the predetermined moving image is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the predetermined moving image is stopped and displayed, and the predetermined period is set. The moving image may be hidden, a still image different from the predetermined moving image may be displayed, or the moving image and the still image may be hidden.

M21. Modification 21:
In the above-described embodiment, a detection sensor for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board 30 is provided, and when the game sensor does not detect the game ball for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds), it is determined that the transition condition is satisfied. It may be configured to. In this way, the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the transition condition is satisfied even when the player is playing the game, which is uncomfortable for the player. Can be reduced.

  Further, it may be configured to determine that the return condition is satisfied when the game ball is detected by the detection sensor after the transition condition is satisfied. In this way, even after the transition condition is established, the return condition is established if the game ball is ejected to the game board 30, so that the return condition is established even though the player has started the game. It is possible to reduce an uncomfortable situation for the player in which the above does not hold for a long time (for example, one minute).

M22. Modification 22:
In the above embodiment, the background video and the background music corresponding to the background video may be selected from a plurality of types. In this case, the background moving image and the background music corresponding to the background moving image may be selected depending on whether the lottery mode is the high-probability mode, the player's selection, or the like.

M23. Modification 23:
The time, numerical value, etc. specifically set in the above embodiment are merely examples, and can be appropriately set to other time, numerical values, etc. For example, the time from when the fluctuation of the symbols stops until the transition condition is satisfied may be set to other than 15 seconds, and the time from when the volume of the background music becomes zero to when the demo video starts It may be set to other than 5 seconds.

M24. Modification 24:
In the above-described embodiment, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode for displaying a demo moving image, the output mode of voice is configured so that music is not output and the volume is zero. Alternatively, when the display mode of the symbol display device 41 is a mode for displaying a demo moving image, the output mode of the sound is a demo music which is music corresponding to the demo moving image, and an output level preset by the player. It may be configured to output in (volume).

  In such a configuration, when the display period of the RTC effect moving image ends and the mode shifts to the mode of displaying the demo moving image, the output of the demo music may be started from a predetermined temporal position. With such a configuration, the display of the demo video and the output of the demo music can be easily synchronized with each other, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the demo music is started changes. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, a predetermined temporal position of the demo music may be set as the temporal start position of the demo music. With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the output of the demo music is started from a position midway in time.

M25. Modification 25:
In the seventh embodiment, the MPU 92 of the sound emission control device 90 acquires time information, which is information regarding time, from the RTC 96, and the acquired time information matches a predetermined time set as the RTC effect start condition. It is configured to start the process for executing the RTC effect when it is determined whether or not they match, but instead of this, the sound emission control device 90 once executes the RTC effect, The elapsed time from the start of the last RTC effect is measured, and it is determined whether or not a predetermined time (for example, 1 hour) has elapsed from the start of the last RTC effect, and it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed. In this case, the processing for executing the RTC effect may be started.

M26. Modification 26:
In the seventh embodiment, the sound emission control device 90 outputs RTC effect music at the output level (volume) preset by the player, but instead, the sound emission control device 90 plays the game. The RTC effect music may be output at the maximum output level (volume) regardless of the output level (volume) preset by the person. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the power of RTC production and the degree of attention, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

M27. Modification 27:
After adopting the configuration of Modification 26, the maximum output level (volume) may be maintained when the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) ends and the background music is output. Good. The effect of such a configuration will be described. Since the player who enjoys the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) is fascinated by the power of the effect executed at the maximum output level (volume), the maximum even after the RTC effect is finished. There may be a request to continue the game at the output level (volume) of. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to continue the game at the maximum output level (volume) even after the RTC effect is finished.

  In addition, after adopting the configuration of the modification example 26, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output, the output level (volume set in advance by the player is set. It may be configured to return to (). With such a configuration, the special feeling of the RTC effect that has been executed can be further emphasized, so that the expectation for the next RTC effect can be further improved and the interest of the game can be improved. it can.

  In addition, after adopting the configuration of the modification example 26, when the output of the RTC effect music at the maximum output level (volume) is finished and the background music is output, the player sets the output level (volume) of the sound. A volume setting screen for setting may be displayed on the symbol display device 41, and the background music may be output at the output level (volume) of the voice designated by the player. The effect of such a configuration will be described. Since the player who is listening to the RTC effect music output at the maximum output level (volume) becomes accustomed to the high volume, the output level (volume) of his / her preference may be different from that before the RTC effect music is enjoyed. Therefore, there may be a request to reset the output level (volume) of the voice to a desired output level after the RTC effect is finished. Therefore, according to such a configuration, it is possible to satisfy the player's desire to reset the output level (volume) of the sound to a desired output level at the timing after the RTC effect is finished.

M28. Modification 28:
The method for determining the display mode of the hold display and the display mode of the hold display may be different from those of the eighth and ninth embodiments. Specifically, when the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one of the held displays among the plurality of held displays is determined to be won in the jackpot lottery by the previous determination processing, the plurality of displayed By setting the display mode of the hold display of No. 1 to a display mode of a specific pattern, it is highly possible that the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display among the displayed hold is highly likely to win the jackpot lottery. , May be suggested to the player. For example, when four hold displays Dm11 to hold display Dm14 are displayed in the first hold display area Ds1, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to the hold display Dm14 is selected in the jackpot lottery by the previous determination process. When it is determined to win, the display mode of the hold display Dm11 is changed to white, the display mode of the hold display Dm12 is changed to red, the display mode of the hold display Dm13 is changed to white, and the display mode of the hold display Dm14 is changed to red. In other words, by changing the display mode of the displayed multiple held displays to a specific pattern such as "white / red / white / red", the jackpot corresponding to one of the displayed held displays. It is possible to suggest to the player that the random number counter C1 is highly likely to win the jackpot lottery.

  In addition, when the jackpot random number counter C1 in a predetermined holding game time wins the big hit lottery, when it is determined by the previous determination process, a hold display of the predetermined holding game time and the predetermined holding game time are generated. By determining the display pattern of the hold display of the hold game times generated thereafter to a specific display pattern, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to one hold display in the hold display being displayed is a jackpot lottery. It may be suggested to the player that the probability of winning is high. In this case, after the predetermined hold game time is generated, the game ball enters the first starting opening 33 or the second start opening 34, and the display mode of the hold display of the hold game time corresponding to the entering ball is displayed. When making a decision, the jackpot random number counter C1 corresponding to another hold display (a hold display of a predetermined hold game number determined by the previous determination process when the big hit lottery is won) is different from the hold display whose display mode is determined. It can be realized by determining the display mode of the hold display based on the.

M29. Modification 29:
Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiments, such as a pachinko machine in which an electric accessory opens a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or a game ball enters a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine that receives a right and wins a jackpot, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, and a sparrow ball.

  Further, a non-ball-ball type gaming machine, for example, provided with a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols in the circumferential direction, the rotation of the reel is started by inserting a medal and operating the start lever, and the stop switch is operated. After the reels stop after a predetermined time has passed, if a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window, the player is provided with a privilege such as payout of medals. The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the game machine main body that is openably and closably supported by the outer frame is provided with a storage unit and a loading device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are loaded by the loading device. The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are combined, in which the rotation of the reel is started by doing so.

  Further, in the above embodiment, some of the functions realized by software may be realized by hardware, or some of the functions realized by hardware may be realized by software.

N. Regarding invention groups extracted from the above-mentioned embodiments and the like:
The features of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described below, showing effects and the like as necessary. It should be noted that, in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above embodiments are appropriately shown in parentheses, etc., but are not limited to the specific configurations shown in parentheses, etc.

<Feature A group>
The feature A group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature A1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means (the MPU 62, MPU 92 and MPU 102 in the first to fourth embodiments),
When the special information regarding the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced (processing of case a2 in the first embodiment, processing in the second embodiment, case in the third embodiment). The process of c2 and the process of case d1 in the fourth embodiment are executed.)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic A1, although the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, at least part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time. Since it is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. After that, by notifying the result of the determination of the special information related to the second game time by the notification means, the player is made aware that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and thus the game is played. Can be given unexpectedness. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature A2]
A gaming machine according to Feature A1, further comprising:
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a bonus is given to the player is started after the game times related to the special information satisfying the predetermined condition,
The effect execution means,
In the first case where the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition,
After the start of the special game state executed after the first game time and before the start of the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced. (The processing of case a1 in the first embodiment and the processing of case c1 in the third embodiment are executed),
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition for the second time,
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced (processing of case a2 in the first embodiment, processing in the second embodiment, case in the third embodiment). Execute the process of c2)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic A2, if the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is the reproduction of the effect already executed. It acts as a replicator and the player recognizes that way. On the other hand, if the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced as the effect already executed in the effect. However, in practice, it is executed because the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, after the reproduction is executed in the second game time, when the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the second time is not reached until the second time. The reproduction executed in the game time does not simply reproduce at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, but is because the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Then, the player recognizes that it is executed. Therefore, it is possible to give the player unexpectedness and to give the player a sense of expectation for the reproduction of the effect that has already been executed.

[Feature A3]
The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2,
The effect execution means,
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, a suggestion effect suggesting that the effect already executed is reproduced before the reproduction (first embodiment). From the suggestion effect executed in the fourth embodiment).

  According to the characteristic A3, the suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, so the effect executed in the second game time is the first game. It is possible for the player to strongly recognize that it is the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game. After that, by notifying the result of the determination of the special information relating to the second game time by the notifying means, the player is made aware that the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Unexpectedness can be further added to the game.

[Feature A4]
A gaming machine according to feature A3,
The effect execution means,
When another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time,
In the other game times, the suggestion effect is executed (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic A4, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect is executed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. And the reproduction can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature A5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A4,
The object to be reproduced by the effect execution means includes at least a part of effects executed in the game times before the first game times, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game times. (Including processing of case c1 and processing of case c2 in the third embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic A5, even when a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. .

[Feature A6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A5,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a player is given a privilege,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that indicates to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the characteristic A6, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, the reach effect executed after the suggestion effect is the effect of the effect executed in the first game time. Although it is executed as at least a part of reproduction, it is actually executed because the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and at least the effect executed in the first game time. When it is executed as a part of the reproduction, and on the effect, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, but in reality, the special information related to the game time is predetermined. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, the case where it is executed due to satisfying the condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

<Characteristic B group>
The feature B group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature B1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Game times (first to third embodiments) executed after a specific game time (first game time in the first to third embodiments) in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition. A second game time) in which the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined.

  According to the feature B1, since the timing of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined based on the special information regarding the game time executed after the specific game time, it is special for the reproduction. It is possible to add various meanings, and it is possible to improve the degree of attention of the player with respect to the reproduction, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B2]
A gaming machine described in Feature B1,
The effect execution means,
Before the determination means, it is determined whether or not the special information related to a game time executed after a specific game time, which is a game time when the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, satisfies the predetermined condition (step S1022). Along with running
Based on the result of the determination executed before the determining means, the timing for reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is determined (the processing of steps S2302 to S2312 is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B2, by performing before the determination means whether or not the special information relating to the game times executed after the specific game times satisfies the predetermined condition, the effect of the effect executed at the specific game times can be achieved. The effect in the game time to be executed before the game time to be reproduced at least in part can be determined in consideration of the game time to be reproduced. Therefore, for example, as the effect in the game time to be executed before the game time in which it is decided to execute the reproduction, it is possible to execute the effect related to the reproduction.

[Feature B3]
The gaming machine according to Feature B1 or Feature B2,
The effect execution means,
Of the game times to be executed after the specific game time, the special times where the special information satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 of the first embodiment, second case of the second embodiment and case c2 of the third embodiment). The game machine is characterized in that at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is reproduced.

  According to the feature B3, at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is reproduced in the game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, so that at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is executed. It is difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information regarding the game time that is fulfilled satisfies a predetermined condition. Unexpectedness is imparted to the game by notifying the player that the special information related to the game time satisfies the predetermined condition only after the result of the determination of the special information related to the game time is notified by the notification means. be able to. That is, by making the game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature B4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B3,
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive effect that suggests reproducing an already executed effect, before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time.

  According to the feature B4, since the suggestive effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed, the attention degree and the interest degree of the player for the reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time are shown. Can be improved. Further, when reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time is executed in the game time in which the special information satisfies a predetermined condition, by executing the suggestion effect, the game time in which the reproduction is further executed. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to anticipate that the special information relating to (4) satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature B5]
A gaming machine described in Feature B4,
The effect execution means,
When another game time exists between the specific game time and the game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time,
In the other game times, the suggestion effect is executed (in the second embodiment, the suggestion effect is executed in the preceding game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B5, even if another game time exists between the specific game time and the game time that reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, it is suggested in the other game time. By executing the effect, it is possible to reproduce at least a part of the suggested effect and the effect executed in the specific game time without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

[Feature B6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B5,
In the case where the effect execution means reproduces at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time,
The target to be reproduced by the effect execution unit is an effect executed in the specific game time, and includes a reach effect that is an effect that suggests to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature B6, the reach effect, which was executed as a reproduction of at least part of the effect executed in the specific game time, was actually executed based on the special information related to the game time. By making the player recognize that, the game can be given an unexpectedness. Further, as a case where the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation of satisfying a predetermined condition, and at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time. When it is executed as a reproduction and on the effect, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the specific game time, but in reality, it is determined that the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, the case where it is executed due to. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

<Characteristic C group>
The feature C group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modifications, or combinations thereof.
[Feature C1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
When the special game state is executed, the effect to be executed in the special game state is determined based on the special information regarding a predetermined game time executed after the special game state (first embodiment). In case a1 and case a2 in the second embodiment, and in case c1 and case c2 in the third embodiment, the effect in the special game state after the first game time is determined by whether or not the jackpot lottery in the second game time is successful. Determine / S1201 to S1209, S2601 to S2609)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic C1, it is possible to execute an effect in the special game state in consideration of special information regarding a predetermined game time executed after the special game state. Therefore, for example, in the special game state, it is possible to execute an effect that is related to the effect executed in the predetermined game time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C2]
The gaming machine according to feature C1, wherein:
The effect execution means,
In the case where the special game state is executed, and in the first case where the special information relating to the predetermined game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, a predetermined effect is executed in the special game state. (In the case a1 in the first embodiment and the case c1 in the third embodiment, the reproduction effect is executed in the special game state after the first game time),
In the case where the special game state is executed, and the special information related to the predetermined game time is the second condition that satisfies the predetermined condition, the predetermined effect is generated in the predetermined game time. Execute (in case a2 in the first embodiment, in the second embodiment, and in case c2 in the third embodiment, reproduction effect is executed in the second game time)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic C2, when the special information related to the predetermined game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition for performing the predetermined effect executed in the special game state. In this case, by executing the game in the predetermined game time, it is possible to let the player recognize that the timing at which the predetermined effect is executed has a special meaning. Therefore, it is possible to provide the game with unexpectedness and improve the interest of the game.

[Feature C3]
The gaming machine according to Feature C1 or Feature C2,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect that reproduces at least a part of an effect executed in a game time executed before the special game state.

  According to the characteristic C3, at least the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state in the predetermined game time, even though the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Since a part is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information relating to a predetermined game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Only when the result of the determination of the special information related to the predetermined game time is notified by the notification means, the player is made aware that the special information related to the predetermined game time satisfies the predetermined condition, thereby making the game unexpected. Can be granted. That is, by expanding the predetermined game times that the player does not expect, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature C4]
A gaming machine described in Feature C3,
When the game time executed before the special game state is defined as a first game time, and the predetermined game time executed after the special game state is defined as a second game time,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes an effect executed by the effect executing unit in the first game time when the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (reproduction). The target production is the case a1 and the case a2 of the first embodiment, the second embodiment, and the case c1 and the case c2 of the third embodiment, by winning the jackpot lottery related to the first game time. (Including the performance performed in the game times)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic C4, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and is executed in the first game time. The effect is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, only when the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, in terms of effect, the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game time. However, in reality, it is possible to make the player recognize that the special information related to the second game time has been executed due to the fact that the predetermined information is satisfied, and give the game unexpectedness. Further, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation for the reproduction.

[Feature C5]
A gaming machine according to feature C3 or feature C4,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that indicates to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the characteristic C5, when the special information related to a predetermined game time (second game time) satisfies a predetermined condition, in the game time (first game time) executed before the special game state. The reach effect executed is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, in the second game time, the reach effect, which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state, is actually the second effect. Unexpectedness can be imparted to the game by making the player recognize that the special information related to the game times has been executed due to satisfying a predetermined condition. In addition, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the game play is executed before the special game state. In the case where it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in, the effect is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the game time executed before the special game state. Can set at least three cases, that is, the case where the special information related to the game time is executed due to satisfying a predetermined condition. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

[Feature C6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C2 to C5,
The effect execution means,
A game machine characterized by executing a suggestive effect that suggests executing the predetermined effect before executing the predetermined effect.

  According to the characteristic C6, by executing the suggestive effect that suggests executing the predetermined effect before executing the predetermined effect, the player's attention level with respect to the predetermined effect to be executed, The degree of interest can be improved.

[Characteristic C7]
The gaming machine according to Feature C6,
The effect execution means,
In the case where the special game state is executed, the special information related to the predetermined game times satisfies the predetermined condition,
When there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time,
While performing the suggestive effect in the other game times (in the second embodiment, performing the suggestive effect in the preceding game times),
The predetermined effect is executed in the predetermined game time (in the second embodiment, the game time reproduction effect is executed in the second game time).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic C7, even if there is another game time between the special game state and the predetermined game time, the suggestion effect and the predetermined effect are executed by executing the suggestion effect in the other game time. The effect can be executed without giving the player a feeling of strangeness.

[Feature C8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features C3 to C7,
The object reproduced by the effect execution means is at least a part of the effect executed in at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state.

  According to the characteristic C8, even if a continuous effect is executed over at least two consecutive game times executed before the special game state, the continuous effect can be reproduced. it can.

<Feature D group>
The feature D group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature D1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Special game state starting means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The special game state starting means,
When the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the second special game state is started,
The effect execution means,
The effect to be executed in the second special game state is determined based on the special information related to the first game time (in the first embodiment, the effect executed in the special game state is the first case a1). Depending on the relationship between the game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the first game time in case a1 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] executed before the game time of , The first game time [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] is determined as an effect executed in the special game state [S2601, S2602, S2603 to S2605] / the first game time in case a2. The second game time [corresponding to the first game time in the feature group] and the second game time in case a2 [corresponding to the second game time in the feature group] 2 play Determining the effect to be executed in the special game state after Action] in time [S2601, S2607])
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic D1, the second special executed after the second game time in consideration of the special information of the first game time executed before the second game time when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. The effect in the game state can be executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to have a relation between the special information relating to the first game time and the effect in the second special game state, and various effects from the first game time to the second special game state. Can be performed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

[Feature D2]
A gaming machine described in Feature D1,
In the case where the second special game state is executed by the special information relating to the second game time satisfying the predetermined condition,
The effect execution means,
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (when there is a relationship between the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment),
In the second game time (the second game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment), of the effect executed in the first game time (the first game time of the case a2 of the first embodiment) At least a part is reproduced (the processes of S2308 and S2309 are executed),
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (the game time and the first game time executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment) In the case of),
In the second special game state (special game state after the first game time of the case a1 of the first embodiment), in the second game time (first game time of the case a1 of the first embodiment) At least a part of the executed effect is reproduced (the process of S2605 is executed).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D2, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time, even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. . Therefore, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. The result of the determination of the special information related to the second game time is notified by the notification means, and the player is made aware that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, which is unexpected to the game. It is possible to impart sex. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, when the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced in the second special game state. It is possible to satisfy the player's desire to appreciate the effect executed when the special information relating to the game times satisfies a predetermined condition.

[Feature D3]
A gaming machine described in Feature D2,
The effect execution means,
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment (When there is a relationship), prior to the reproduction, the first suggestive effect that suggests reproducing the already executed effect is executed (the process of S2606 is executed),
In the case of reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time in the second special game state ((the game time executed before the first game time in the case a1 of the first embodiment) And (in the case of the relationship between the first game times), before executing the reproduction, execute a second suggestive effect that suggests reproducing the effect that has already been executed (the process of S2605 is executed). )
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic D3, the first suggestive effect is executed before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, and at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced. Since the second suggestion effect is executed prior to doing, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time or at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time, It is possible to improve the degree of interest and interest of the player.

[Feature D4]
The gaming machine described in the feature D2 or D3,
The effect execution means,
When reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time (the first game time and the second game time in case a2 of the first embodiment If there is a relationship),
In the first special game state, which is started by the special information relating to the first game time satisfying the predetermined condition, the first suggestion effect is suggested to reproduce the effect already executed (S2606). Execute processing)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature D4, by executing an effect that suggests the content of the effect in the game time after the first special game state in the first special game state, for the game time after the first special game state ends. It is possible to improve the attention level, interest level, and expectation of the player.

[Feature D5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D4,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that indicates to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the feature D5, the reach effect, which has been executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, is actually caused by the special information related to the second game time. By making the player recognize that the game is being executed, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Further, when at least a part of the effect executed in the second game time is reproduced, the reach effect in the second game time is executed in the second special game state, so the second It is possible to satisfy the demand of the player who wants to appreciate the reach effect at the game time again. Furthermore, when the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting the expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied to the player, and when at least a part of the already executed effect is reproduced. When it is executed, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the already executed effect, but actually it is executed because the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. At least three cases can be set. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

<Feature E group>
The feature E group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature E1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for sequentially informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Effect execution means for executing an effect in each of the game times,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time executed after the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition (In case d1 in the fourth embodiment),
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced,
It has already been executed after execution of the effect in the first game time and before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time in the second game time. A gaming machine characterized by executing a suggestive production that suggests reproducing the production.

  According to the characteristic E1, the first game time in which the special information does not satisfy the predetermined condition in the second game time even though the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Since at least a part of the effect executed in is reproduced, it is difficult for the player to expect that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Further, by executing the suggestive effect before reproducing at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, at least the effect executed in the first game time is executed in the second game time. The player can be given more recognition that only a part is reproduced. Then, only when the result of the determination of the special information relating to the second game time is notified by the notifying means, the player is made aware that the special information relating to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition. Can be given unexpectedness. That is, by making the second game times unexpected by the player, the player can be surprised and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature E2]
A gaming machine described in Feature E1,
The effect execution means,
In addition to the case where the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition,
When the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition (case d2 in the fourth embodiment) )Also,
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced,
After the execution of the effect in the first game time and before the reproduction in the second game time, a suggestion effect indicating that the already executed effect is reproduced is executed. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic E2, even when the special information related to the first game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time does not satisfy the predetermined condition, Since at least a part of the effect executed in one game time is reproduced, it is possible to give the player the recognition that the special information related to the game time in which the reproduction is executed does not always satisfy the predetermined condition. . As a result, when at least a part of the effect executed in the first game cycle is reproduced, the player's emotional feelings and feelings of expectation are given to the player, and the reproduction of the game time in the game cycle in which the reproduction is executed is performed. The degree of attention can be improved.

[Feature E3]
The gaming machine according to feature E1 or feature E2, further comprising:
When the special information satisfies the predetermined condition, a special game state start means for starting a special game state in which a privilege is given to a player is provided,
The effect execution means,
When the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition (case a2 in the first embodiment) Has
In the second game time, at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time is reproduced,
A game machine characterized by executing the suggestive effect after the start of a special game state executed after the first game time and before the reproduction in the second game time.

  According to the characteristic E3, when the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, the special information related to the first game time satisfies the predetermined condition and is executed in the first game time. The effect is reproduced in the second game time. Therefore, for the first time, the notification means notifies that the special information related to the second game time satisfies the predetermined condition, and the effect is executed as a reproduction of the effect executed in the first game time. However, in reality, it is possible to give a surprise to the game by making the player recognize that the special information related to the second game time has been executed because the predetermined condition is satisfied. it can. In addition, it is possible to improve the player's attention level, interest level, and expectation regarding reproduction of the effect. Further, when at least a part of the reproduction performed in the first game time is executed due to the fact that the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition, a bonus is given to the player. Since the special game state in which is given is started, it is possible to further improve the player's expectation for the reproduction of the effect.

[Feature E4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E3,
The predetermined condition is a condition for starting a special game state in which a player is given a privilege,
The object reproduced by the effect executing unit includes a reach effect that is an effect that indicates to the player the degree of expectation that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition.

  According to the characteristic E4, the reach effect executed in the first game time is reproduced in the second game time when the special information related to the second game time satisfies a predetermined condition. Therefore, in the production, the reach production, which was executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the production executed in the first game time, actually had the special information related to the second game time satisfy the predetermined condition. By making the player recognize that the game is being executed due to the above, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Further, as a case where the reach effect is executed, it is executed as an original function of suggesting to the player the degree of expectation that a predetermined condition is satisfied, and at least one of the effects executed in the first game time. When it is executed as a reproduction of a part and as a reproduction, it is executed as a reproduction of at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time, but in reality, the special information related to the game time satisfies a predetermined condition. It is possible to set at least three cases, that is, the case where it is executed due to the satisfaction. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of interest, interest and expectation of the player for the reach effect.

[Feature E5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E4,
The effect execution means,
When another game time exists between the first game time and the second game time,
A game machine characterized by executing the suggestion effect in the other game times.

  According to the characteristic E5, even if there is another game time between the first game time and the second game time, the suggestion effect can be achieved by executing the suggestion effect in the other game times. The reproduction can be executed without making the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature E6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features E1 to E5,
The object to be reproduced by the effect executing means includes at least a part of the effect executed in the game time before the first game time, and at least a part of the effect executed in the first game time. A gaming machine characterized by including.

  According to the feature E6, even when a continuous effect is executed from the game time before the first game time to the first game time, the continuous effect can be reproduced. .

  The inventions of the characteristic A group, the characteristic B group, the characteristic C group, the characteristic D group, and the characteristic E group solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. These effects include effects that are executed at a low frequency, such as reach effects that are executed with a low probability and effects that are executed only when a jackpot lottery is won. Such an effect that is executed at a low frequency may be reproduced once by the player for the purpose of appreciation after being executed once. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, in order to meet such a demand of a player, a gaming machine that executes an effect that reproduces an effect once executed is known.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Characteristic F group>
The feature F group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature F1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player and that is different from the first image , Are displayed on the image display means (the objects A, B and C in the fifth and sixth embodiments are displayed on the display surface 41a),
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image.
When the first image is displayed in the period overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display unit in a manner having a relationship with the second image (in S3205 of the fifth embodiment). , Setting and displaying so that each object is displayed in a related manner by referring to the arrangement / timing table / In S3305 of the sixth embodiment, each object is displayed in a related manner Display each object based on each display pattern table set to
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  There is a game machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the display conditions of a plurality of images may overlap depending on the game state, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed during the overlapping period (same period) , The plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving the player the impression of a complicated effect.

  According to the feature F1, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image, the first image is displayed in a manner related to the second image. It is possible to improve the quality of the effect without giving a complicated impression to the player, because the effect executed by being displayed in the period in which the two images overlap (the same period) is displayed. In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period in which it overlaps with the second image, and may be displayed in a period in which it does not overlap with the second image. Therefore, a plurality of different images are displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Feature F2]
A gaming machine according to feature F1,
The game machine having the relevance includes a mode having a narrative property in which the first image and the second image are related to each other.

  According to the characteristic F2, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image, the first image and the second image are displayed in a story-related manner in a related manner. Therefore, the effect executed by being displayed in the period in which the first image and the second image are overlapped (the same period) can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable. In addition, since the effect executed by being displayed in the period in which the first image and the second image overlap each other has a narrative property, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature F3]
A gaming machine according to feature F1 or feature F2,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image,
It is different from the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in the overlapping period (fifth embodiment). S3203 in / S3305 in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature F3, the first image has different advantages and disadvantages of the game depending on whether the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image or the period not overlapping the second image. Since this is suggested, it is possible to execute effects in a plurality of different modes using the first image, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with another image. , Interest and expectation can be improved.

[Feature F4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F3,
The first image and the second image suggest different degrees of advantage and disadvantage of the game of different types (processing of S3203 of the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic F4, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage / disadvantage of various types of games using images.

[Feature F5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F4,
The control means is
When displaying the first image in a period in which the first image does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a mode with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display,
A game machine characterized by displaying the first image on the image display means in a mode without the image frame when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image.

  According to the feature F5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Feature F6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature F6, various effects can be executed by using the image that changes with time.

<Characteristic G group>
The feature G group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic G1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
An expectation degree image storage means for storing an expectation degree image that is an image that changes with time,
Image display means for displaying the expectation image as a performance,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The expectation degree image storage means,
The first expectation image,
A second expectation image,
Remember
The control means is
Displaying the first expectation image on the image display means;
A case where the second expectation image is displayed on the image display means;
A first partial image obtained by extracting an image forming at least a part of the first expectation image in the time axis direction and at least a part of the second expectation image in the time axis direction are formed. A case where a third expectation image which is the expectation image obtained by combining the second partial image in which the image to be extracted is combined with the second partial image in a related manner is displayed on the image display means,
There is
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the first expectation image is displayed by the control unit is defined as a first probability,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the second expectation image is displayed by the control unit is defined as a second probability,
In the case where the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition when the third expectation image is displayed by the control means is defined as the third probability,
The control means may set the third probability to be different from the first probability and to be different from the second probability.
The first expectation degree image, the second expectation degree image, or the third expectation degree image is displayed on the image display means (display using the display pattern table in the fifth embodiment / sixth embodiment Display using the display pattern table in
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G1, as the expectation image displayed on the image display means, in addition to the first expectation image and the second expectation image, the first partial image and the second partial image have relevance. Since the third expectation degree image combined in the form is displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute an effect that effectively utilizes the first expectation degree image and the second expectation degree image. The third degree of expectation image is an expectation degree image in which the first partial image and the second partial image are combined in a manner having relevance to each other, so that the player does not feel a complicated impression and The quality can be improved. The first probability image, the second expectation image, or the third expectation image is displayed on the image display means so that the third probability is different from the first probability and different from the second probability. Since it is displayed on the screen, the player's attention to the expectation image can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic G2]
A gaming machine described in Feature G1,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first degree-of-expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first degree-of-expectation image, a plurality of different display modes are displayed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means,
The third probability differs for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G2, when extracting the first partial image from the first degree-of-expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first degree-of-expectation image, a plurality of different display images are displayed. Since it is possible to display the third expectation image on the image display means in various manners, various effects can be executed using the third expectation image. In addition, the third probability is different for each of a plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image, so that the player's attention to the third expectation image can be improved and the interest of the game can be improved. be able to.

[Feature G3]
The gaming machine described in the feature G1 or the feature G2,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first degree-of-expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first degree-of-expectation image, a plurality of different display modes are displayed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means,
The relative display position of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image is
It is preset for each of the plurality of different display modes of the third expectation image (the arrangement position of each object is preset for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G3, the relative display positions of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from each other in the third expectation image. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not superposed on the image display unit as the third expectation image without any relation. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation image in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

[Characteristic G4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features G1 to G3,
The control means is
When extracting the first partial image from the first degree-of-expectation image, by extracting images of different periods in the time axis direction of the first degree-of-expectation image, a plurality of different display modes are displayed. Displaying a third expectation image on the image display means,
The relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from each other in the plurality of the third expectation images. It is preset for each display mode (the display timing of each object is preset for each display pattern by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature G4, the relative display timings of the first partial image and the second partial image displayed on the image display means as the third expectation image are different from each other in the third expectation image. Since it is set in advance for each display mode, the first partial image and the second partial image are not displayed as the third expectation image on the image display means at a timing having no relation to each other. Therefore, each effect using the third expectation image in a plurality of different display modes does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect can be improved.

<Characteristic H group>
The feature H group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic H1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player and that is different from the first image , Is displayed on the image display means,
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image.
When the first image is displayed in the period in which it overlaps with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is a predetermined arrangement position (the arrangement in the fifth embodiment. A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at an arrangement position determined by a timing table / an arrangement position set by a display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

  There is a game machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the display conditions of a plurality of images may overlap depending on the game state, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed during the overlapping period (same period) , The plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving the player the impression of a complicated effect.

  According to the characteristic H1, when the first image is displayed in the period (same period) overlapping with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is a predetermined arrangement position. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not displayed in superposed relation without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by the first image and the second image being displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect is improved. You can In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period in which it overlaps with the second image, and may be displayed in a period in which it does not overlap with the second image. Therefore, a plurality of different images are displayed using the first image. The effect of the aspect can be executed, and the first image can be effectively used.

[Characteristic H2]
A gaming machine described in Feature H1,
The control means is
In a plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means during a period in which it overlaps with the second image,
According to each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is arranged at a predetermined relative position with respect to the second image (in the display / pattern table in the sixth embodiment). A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at a set arrangement position).

  According to the feature H2, the first image is displayed in the plurality of different display modes during the period (the same period) that overlaps with the second image. Therefore, it is possible to use various images using the first image and the second image. The performance can be executed. Further, according to each of the plurality of different display modes, the first image is displayed on the image display means at the arrangement position whose relative position with respect to the second image is predetermined. In the above, the first image and the second image are not superimposed and displayed without any relation. Therefore, various effects executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) do not give a complicated impression to the player, and improve the quality of the effect. Can be made.

[Feature H3]
The gaming machine described in the feature H1 or the feature H2,
When displaying the first image in a period in which it overlaps with the second image, the control unit relatively sets a predetermined timing with respect to the second image (in the fifth embodiment. A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at the display timing determined by the arrangement / timing table / the display timing set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment).

  According to the characteristic H3, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image (same period), the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. Therefore, the first image and the second image are not displayed at timings that are not related to each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression, and further improves the quality of the effect. You can

[Characteristic H4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H3,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when it is not displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image,
It is different from the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in the overlapping period (fifth embodiment). Display pattern table in / / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature H4, the first image has different advantages and disadvantages of the game when it is displayed in the period overlapping with the second image and when it is displayed in the period not overlapping with the second image. Since this is suggested, it is possible to use the first image to execute a plurality of effects in different modes with different degrees of advantage and disadvantage of the game, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with another image. , Interest and expectation can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position between the second image and the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so that the quality can be improved. High performance can be provided to the player.

[Characteristic H5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H4,
The first image and the second image indicate the degree of advantages and disadvantages of the game of different types (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic H5, in each of the effect composed of the first image, the effect composed of the second image, and the effect composed of the first image and the second image, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of different types of games is suggested. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage or disadvantage of various kinds of games depending on how to combine a plurality of images.

[Characteristic H6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5,
The control means is
When displaying the first image in a period in which the first image does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a mode with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display,
A game machine characterized by displaying the first image on the image display means in a mode without the image frame when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image.

  According to the characteristic H6, the effect including the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

[Feature H7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H6,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature H7, various effects can be executed by using the image that changes with time.

<Feature group I>
The feature I group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic I1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
Image display means for displaying an image as an effect,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player, and a second image that indicates the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player and that is different from the first image , Is displayed on the image display means,
There are a case where the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image and a case where the first image is displayed in a period not overlapping the second image.
When the first image is displayed in a period overlapping the second image, a predetermined timing relative to the second image (in the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment, A game machine characterized by displaying at the determined display timing / display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment) on the image display means.

  There is a game machine that displays an image on an image display means and executes an effect that suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game to the player. Usually, a plurality of such images are prepared, and each image suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game. In addition, these images have different display conditions. In the case of such a gaming machine, the display conditions of a plurality of images may overlap depending on the game state, and in such a case, the relationship with other images displayed during the overlapping period (same period) , The plurality of images are displayed according to each setting. As a result, a plurality of images may be displayed on the image display means without any relation, or a number of images may be displayed in a superimposed manner, giving the player the impression of a complicated effect. The degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game indicates whether the state of the game times determined based on the special information is advantageous or disadvantageous to the player. For example, in a pachinko game machine, the state of the game times is advantageous for the player, such as the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot lottery, the probability of being a probability variation jackpot, the degree of expectation that the game number is a probability variation state, etc. Indicates the degree to which there is or is a disadvantage.

  According to the characteristic I1, when the first image is displayed in the period overlapping the second image, the first image is displayed at a predetermined timing relative to the second image. The 1st image and the 2nd image are not displayed at a timing having no relation to each other. Therefore, the effect executed by displaying the first image and the second image in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression, and further improves the quality of the effect. You can In addition, the first image may be displayed in a period that overlaps with the second image (same period) or may be displayed in a period that does not overlap the second image. Therefore, the first image is used. It is possible to execute a plurality of different aspects of the effect, and to effectively utilize the first image.

[Feature I2]
A gaming machine according to feature I1,
The control means arranges the first image in an arrangement position in which a relative position between the first image and the second image is predetermined (arrangement position / third position determined in arrangement / timing table in fifth embodiment). A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means at an arrangement position set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment.

  According to the characteristic I2, when the first image is displayed in the period (same period) overlapping with the second image, the relative position between the first image and the second image is a predetermined arrangement position. Since the image is displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image are not displayed in superposed relation without any relation. Therefore, the effect performed by the first image and the second image being displayed in the overlapping period (the same period) does not give the player a complicated impression, and the quality of the effect is improved. You can

[Characteristic I3]
A gaming machine according to feature I1 or feature I2,
The degree of advantage / disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image when displayed in a period that does not overlap with the second image,
It is different from the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game suggested by the first image and the second image when the first image and the second image are displayed in the overlapping period (fifth embodiment). Display pattern table in / / display pattern table in the sixth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic I3, the first image is displayed in a period in which it overlaps with the second image and in a period in which it does not overlap with the second image. Since this is suggested, it is possible to use the first image to execute a plurality of effects in different modes with different degrees of advantage and disadvantage of the game, and it is possible to effectively utilize the first image. Further, even when the first image is displayed, the degree of advantage / disadvantage varies depending on whether or not the first image is displayed in a period (same period) that overlaps with another image. , Interest and expectation can be improved. Even when an image combined with the second image is displayed, the relative position between the second image and the second image is displayed on the image display means at a predetermined arrangement position, so that the quality can be improved. High performance can be provided to the player.

[Feature I4]
A gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I3,
The first image and the second image indicate the degree of advantages and disadvantages of the game of different types (display pattern table in the fifth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic I4, in each of the effect composed of the first image, the effect composed of the second image, and the effect composed of the first image and the second image, the degree of advantage or disadvantage of different types of games is suggested. can do. Therefore, it is possible to suggest the degree of advantage or disadvantage of various kinds of games depending on how to combine a plurality of images.

[Characteristic I5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I4,
The control means is
When displaying the first image in a period in which the first image does not overlap with the second image, the first image is displayed on the image display means in a mode with an image frame indicating the area of the first image. Display,
A game machine characterized by displaying the first image on the image display means in a mode without the image frame when the first image is displayed in a period overlapping with the second image.

  According to the feature I5, the effect composed of the first image and the second image can be made an effect that does not make the player feel uncomfortable.

[Characteristic I6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I5,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature I6, various effects can be executed by using the image that changes with time.

<Feature J group>
The feature J group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic J1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
An image storage unit that stores an image that allows the player to be aware of the advantages and disadvantages of the game situation,
Image display means for displaying the image as a presentation,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
A first image stored in the image storage means, which displays on the image display means a first image which makes it possible to give the player recognition of advantages / disadvantages of a game situation,
It is a combination image in which the first image is combined with a second image different from the first image, and is a recognition regarding advantages / disadvantages of a game situation, and is not combined with the second image. A combination image that allows the player to be given a recognition different from the recognition given to the player when the first image is displayed is displayed on the image display means (in the fifth and sixth embodiments). , The display pattern (C1-C2-C3) of the object C is a display pattern showing the appearance of the dog in the box, and gives the player the recognition that the game situation is advantageous. The display pattern (B1-B2-B3 / C1-C2-C3) in which the object B is combined with the object C is a table showing how the dog in the box gets wet due to bad weather. A pattern, gives the recognition that the status of the game is disadvantageous to the player / modification 15)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature J1, recognition that gives the player advantages and disadvantages of the game when the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the second image, and the first image is referred to as the second image. Since it is possible to change the recognition given to the player regarding the advantages and disadvantages of the game when they are combined and displayed on the image display means, it is possible to execute various effects using the first image. The image of can be used effectively. The game status is based on, for example, a game status such as whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition and whether or not the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is relatively high. Say the situation.

[Characteristic J2]
A game machine according to feature J1,
The control means, when displaying the first image in combination with the second image, determines the relative position between the first image and the second image according to the situation of the game. By setting (setting at the arrangement position determined by the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / setting at the arrangement position set by the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), and displaying on the image display means. Characteristic gaming machine.

  According to the feature J2, since the relative position between the first image and the second image is set according to the game situation and displayed on the image display means, the first image and the second image. Using, it is possible to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Characteristic J3]
A gaming machine according to feature J1 or feature J2,
When the control unit displays the first image in combination with the second image, the control unit displays the relative timing between the first image and the second image on the image display unit. Is set according to the situation of the game (set to the display timing determined by the arrangement / timing table in the fifth embodiment / set to the display timing set in the display pattern table in the sixth embodiment), A game machine characterized by displaying on the image display means.

  According to the feature J3, the relative timing of displaying on the image display means between the first image and the second image is set according to the situation of the game and displayed on the image display means. The image and the second image can be used to give the player various recognitions about the advantages and disadvantages of the game.

[Characteristic J4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features J1 to J3,
At least one of the first image and the second image is an image that changes over time. A gaming machine.

  According to the feature J4, various effects can be executed by using an image that is an image that changes with time.

<Characteristic K group>
The characteristic K group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic K1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
At least an image storage unit that stores the first image, the second image, and the third image,
Image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The second image is displayed by the control unit more than when the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. Regarding the situation of the game to the player, the case where (the image of the dog showing the face from the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image Despite giving a favorable recognition,
The control unit combines the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to display the image. The second image (the image in which the dog faces the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed more in the third image (the image of the rain in the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ) Is displayed on the image display means in combination with the above), the gaming machine is provided with more advantageous recognition of the game situation.

  According to the characteristic K1, the player is more likely to be displayed when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Despite giving an advantageous recognition of the game situation, the case where the first image is displayed in combination with the third image is better than the case where the second image is displayed in combination with the third image. , Give the player an advantageous recognition of the game situation. Therefore, various effects can be executed depending on how the images are combined. Further, even when the player recognizes the first image or the second image displayed on the image display means, the player recognizes that the game situation is different depending on whether or not the third image is displayed. Therefore, the degree of attention of the player to the image displayed on the image display means can be improved.

[Characteristic K2]
The gaming machine described in the feature K1,
The image storage means stores a first time-dependent change image (image C, image C2, and image C3 that changes with time in the order C) that is an image that changes with time.
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first temporal change image. Amusement machine.

  According to the characteristic K2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the period in the time axis direction of the first time-varying image, and therefore the first image and the second time-varying image are partially divided. By extracting an image and combining it with the third image, it is possible to further execute various effects.

[Characteristic K3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic K1 or the characteristic K2,
The control means is
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image and then the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that there is.

  According to the characteristic K3, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, after that, the case where the second image is not combined with the third image and the case where the second image is not displayed are displayed. Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Characteristic K4]
A gaming machine described in Feature K3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1) in the C display pattern table in the sixth embodiment). The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect by is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic K4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (first case) Therefore, in the case of displaying (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Therefore, in the first case, in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter, in the second case, in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is The player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to execute more various effects.

[Characteristic K5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features K1 to K4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (image B1, image B2, image B3 in order of time-varying object B) that is a time-varying image,
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the second time-varying image in the time axis direction.

  According to the characteristic K5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time-axis direction of the second temporal change image, various effects can be obtained by using the second temporal change image. Can be executed. For example, when the first image and the second image are displayed in combination with the second temporal change image, the third image that is a part of the second temporal change image is displayed as the first image or the second image. When displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the perception of the game situation to the player.

<Feature L group>
The feature L group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature L1]
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Informing means for informing the result of the determination by the determining means whether or not the special information satisfies the predetermined condition for each game,
At least an image storage unit that stores the first image, the second image, and the third image,
Image display means for displaying the image stored in the image storage means,
Control means for controlling the image display means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The second image is displayed by the control unit more than when the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. In the case where (the image in which the dog makes a face out of the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image, the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Despite the high probability of meeting,
The control unit combines the first image (the image of the box of the image C1 in the sixth embodiment) with the third image (the image of the rain of the image B3 in the sixth embodiment) to display the image. The second image (the image in which the dog faces the box of the image C3 in the sixth embodiment) is displayed more in the third image (the image of the rain in the image B3 in the sixth embodiment). ), The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher than that when the special information is displayed on the image display means.

  According to the feature L1, the special information is more predetermined when the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image than when the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image. Although the probability of satisfying the condition is high, displaying the first image in combination with the third image is more preferable than displaying the second image in combination with the third image. There is a high probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition. Therefore, when the first image or the second image is displayed, the degree of attention of the player regarding whether or not the third image is displayed can be improved.

[Feature L2]
The gaming machine described in the feature L1,
The image storage means stores a first time-dependent change image (image C, image C2, and image C3 that changes with time in the order C) that is an image that changes with time.
The first image (image C1) and the second image (image C3) are partial images constituting at least a part of the time-axis direction of the first temporal change image. Amusement machine.

  According to the feature L2, the first image and the second image are partial images that constitute at least a part of the period of time in the time axis direction of the first temporal change image, and thus the first temporal change image is displayed. In this case, the degree of attention of the player regarding whether or not to display the third image can be improved.

[Feature L3]
A gaming machine according to feature L1 or feature L2,
The control means is
A first case in which the first image is displayed on the image display means without being combined with the third image;
A second case in which the first image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image and then the second image is displayed on the image display unit without being combined with the third image. A gaming machine characterized by the fact that there is.

  According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the case where the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is displayed, and the case where it is not displayed Therefore, various effects using the first image and the second image can be executed.

[Feature L4]
A gaming machine described in Feature L3,
The probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher in the second case than in the first case (display pattern (C1) in the C display pattern table in the sixth embodiment). The probability of winning the jackpot lottery is higher when the notice effect by the display pattern (C1-C2) or the display pattern (C1-C2-C3) is displayed than when the notice effect by is displayed.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature L4, in the case where the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter, the image in which the second image is not combined with the third image is not displayed (first case) Therefore, in the case of displaying (second case), the probability that the special information satisfies the predetermined condition is higher. Therefore, in the first case, in which the first image is displayed without being combined with the third image, and thereafter, in the second case, in which the second image is displayed without being combined with the third image, the state is The player can be given a sense of expectation for the transition, and the interest of the game can be improved. Further, by displaying the third image in combination with the first image and the second image having such characteristics, it is possible to execute more various effects.

[Feature L5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4,
The image storage means stores a second time-varying image (image B1, image B2, image B3 in order of time-varying object B) that is a time-varying image,
The third image (image B3) is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the second time-varying image in the time axis direction.

  According to the feature L5, since the third image is a partial image that constitutes at least a part of the time-axis direction of the second temporal change image, various effects can be obtained by using the second temporal change image. Can be executed. For example, when the first image and the second image are displayed in combination with the second temporal change image, the third image that is a part of the second temporal change image is displayed as the first image or the second image. When displayed in the same period as the second image, it is possible to change the perception of the game situation to the player.

  The inventions of the characteristic group F, the characteristic group G, the characteristic group H, the characteristic group I, the characteristic group J, the characteristic group K, and the characteristic group L solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various effects are performed according to various gaming states for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is a gaming machine that displays an object image on an image display unit and executes an effect that suggests a degree of advantage or disadvantage of a game to a player. Usually, a plurality of types of such object images are prepared, and each object image suggests the degree of advantage or disadvantage of the game.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature M group>
The feature M group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature M1]
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (background moving image) as a first display mode;
Sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the first moving image in a first output mode (a mode in which background music is output at a predetermined volume);
The image display means is changed from the first display manner to the second display manner (the manner in which a demo video is displayed), and the sound output means is changed from the first output manner to the second output manner (for background music). Transition condition determining means for determining whether or not a transition condition, which is a condition for transitioning to a mode in which output is stopped), is satisfied,
Return condition determination means for determining whether or not a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display means to the first display mode and returning the sound output means to the first output mode is satisfied,
A gaming machine comprising:
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode,
After the sound output means has shifted to the second output mode, and when the return condition is satisfied after the image display means has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display unit returns to the first display mode and, when displaying the first moving image as the first display mode, displays the first moving image from a predetermined temporal position. Start
The sound output unit returns to the first output mode, and when outputting the moving picture corresponding sound in the first output manner, starts outputting from the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture corresponding sound. A gaming machine characterized by:

  According to the feature M1, if the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and after the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, the image display unit Starts the display from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, and the sound output means outputs the first output mode. When outputting the sound corresponding to the moving image by returning to step 1, the output is started from the predetermined temporal position of the sound corresponding to the moving image. Therefore, after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode, and after the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, the image display unit is set to the first state according to the timing at which the return condition is satisfied. It is possible to easily synchronize the display of the first moving image and the output of the sound corresponding to the moving image, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image starts is changed. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. As a configuration in which the temporal position at which the image display means starts displaying the first moving image changes in accordance with the timing at which the return condition is satisfied, for example, the image display means returns after transitioning to the second display mode. When the condition is satisfied, the configuration for starting the display of the first moving image from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and the image display means When returning from the second display mode to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the second display mode. When the display unit continues the reproduction of the first moving image as an internal process even after the display unit shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, and when returning from the second display mode to the first display mode. Continues as an internal process Configured for displaying the first video is playing and the like.

[Feature M2]
The gaming machine described in the feature M1,
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output means shifts from the first output mode to the second output mode through a reduction mode in which the volume of the video corresponding sound is reduced with the passage of time while continuing to output the video corresponding sound. Then
The image display means, after the timing when the sound output means shifts to the second output mode, shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode,
When the return condition is satisfied during the period when the sound output unit is in the reduction mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The game machine, wherein the sound output unit returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume in the first output mode.

  According to the feature M2, when the return condition is satisfied during the period of the reduction mode, the image display unit continues the first display mode, and the sound output unit returns the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the first mode. Since the mode is returned to the output mode, it is possible to return to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied in a natural flow without any discomfort while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the moving image corresponding sound.

[Feature M3]
The gaming machine described in the feature M1 or the feature M2,
When the transition condition is satisfied,
The sound output unit outputs the moving image corresponding sound to a second volume lower than the first volume from the first output mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at the first volume. Transition to the second output mode of outputting at the volume of
The image display means shifts to the second display mode after a lapse of a predetermined time after the sound output means shifts to the second output mode,
When the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit has shifted to the second output mode and before the image display unit has shifted to the second display mode,
The image display means continues the first display mode of displaying the first moving image,
The game machine, wherein the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume of the first volume.

  According to the feature M3, when the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and before the image display unit shifts to the second display mode, the image display is performed. The means continues the first display mode in which the first moving image is displayed, and the sound output means returns to the first output mode by returning the volume of the moving image corresponding sound to the volume of the first volume. Therefore, while maintaining the synchronization between the display of the first moving image and the output of the moving image corresponding sound, it is possible to return in a natural flow to the mode before the transition condition is satisfied without a feeling of discomfort.

[Feature M4]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M3,
The predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal start position of the first moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture corresponding sound is a temporal starting position of the moving picture corresponding sound.

  According to the feature M4, the return condition is satisfied after the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode and after the image display unit shifts to the second display mode. When returning to each of the first output modes, the display is started from the temporal start position of the first moving image, and the output is started from the temporal start position of the moving image corresponding sound. Therefore, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the display is started from a temporal middle position of the first moving image and the output of the moving picture corresponding sound is started from a temporal middle position. You can For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started at a position midway in time of the first video and the output of the sound corresponding to the video is started at a position midway in time, the player is satisfied with the return condition. After that, since the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image are to be viewed from a position in the middle of time, it is uncomfortable or there is a portion of the first moving image and the sound corresponding to the moving image that is not appreciated. There is a possibility that you can feel it. On the other hand, according to the feature M4, since the player can watch the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound from the temporal head position, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player. At the same time, it is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the first moving image and the moving image corresponding sound can be viewed from the temporal head position. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature M5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M4,
The second display mode is a mode in which a second video different from the first video is displayed, a mode in which at least a part of the first video is stopped and displayed, and the first video is hidden. And a mode of displaying a still image different from the first moving image, or a mode of hiding the moving image and the still image,
The first output mode is a mode for outputting the sound corresponding to the moving image at a volume of a first volume,
The second output mode is a mode in which the moving image corresponding sound is output at a second volume lower than the first volume, or an output of the moving image corresponding sound is stopped. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature M5, it is possible to let the player recognize that the transition condition is satisfied and the image display means and the sound output means have been shifted to the second display mode and the second output mode, respectively.

[Feature M6]
A gaming machine described in feature M5,
A game machine characterized in that the volume of the second volume is equal to or lower than a volume of which the player cannot recognize.

  According to the feature M6, when the sound output unit shifts to the second output mode, the volume of the moving image corresponding sound becomes equal to or lower than the volume that the player cannot recognize, so that the transition condition is satisfied and the sound is output. It is possible to make the player clearly recognize that the means has already been shifted to the second output mode.

[Feature M7]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features M1 to M6,
A special game state starting means for starting a special game state advantageous to the player when the special information satisfies the predetermined condition,
The transition condition determination means displays a display corresponding to the result of the determination by the determination means, and after a game time is over, neither the special game state nor the next game time is started, and a predetermined time has passed. In this case, the gaming machine is characterized by determining that the transition condition is satisfied.

  After the game time is over, if the special game state and the next game time are not started and the predetermined time has elapsed, it is highly possible that the player is not playing the game on the game machine. Therefore, according to the feature M7, the transition condition can be satisfied in a state in which there is a high possibility that the player is not playing the game.

[Feature M8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M7,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
The game machine characterized in that the transition condition determination means determines that the transition condition is satisfied when the game ball is not detected for a predetermined time by the detection means.

  According to the feature M8, since the transition condition is not satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board, the transition condition is satisfied even when the player is playing the game, which is uncomfortable for the player. Occurrence can be reduced.

[Feature M9]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M8,
The game machine characterized in that the return condition determination means determines that the return condition is satisfied when the special information is acquired by the acquisition means after the transition condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature M9, when the special information is acquired, the image display unit returns to the first display mode and the sound output unit returns to the first output mode, so that the expectation that the special information has been acquired is obtained. It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature M10]
The gaming machine according to any one of features M1 to M9,
Equipped with detection means for detecting that the game ball has been ejected to the game board,
The game machine characterized in that the return condition determining means determines that the return condition is satisfied when a game ball is detected by the detecting means after the transition condition is satisfied.

  According to the feature M10, even after the transition condition is satisfied, the return condition is satisfied if the game ball is ejected to the game board, so that the return condition is satisfied even if the player starts the game. It is possible to reduce a situation that is uncomfortable for the player, such as not being established for a long time (for example, 1 minute).

<Feature N group>
The feature N group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Characteristic N1]
As a first display mode, image display means for displaying a predetermined moving image (background moving image),
As a first output mode, sound output means for outputting a moving image corresponding sound (background music) corresponding to the predetermined moving image at a predetermined output level,
Command receiving means for receiving a command,
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means is another display mode in which continuity with the predetermined moving image is broken (a mode in which a demo moving image is displayed), and the sound output means has lost continuity with the moving image corresponding sound. Identification information storage means for storing identification information (cueing determination flag) capable of identifying the particular mode, which is another output mode (mode in which output of background music is stopped).
When the command receiving means receives a specific command (return condition fulfillment command), a determining means for determining whether or not it is the specific mode based on the identification information stored in the identification information storage means. When,
Equipped with
When the command receiving unit receives the specific command and the determining unit determines the specific mode based on the identification information (when the mode is from time t4 to time t5 in FIG. 11). Is
The image display means returns to the first display mode and starts displaying the predetermined moving image from a predetermined temporal position (FIG. 11).
The sound output means returns to the first output mode and starts outputting the moving image corresponding sound from a predetermined temporal position (FIG. 11).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature N1, when the image display means is returned to the first display manner and the sound output means is returned to the first output manner from the specific manner, the time position of the predetermined moving image which the image display means starts to display. Also, since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the moving picture-compatible sound is predetermined, it is possible to easily synchronize the predetermined moving picture and the moving picture-compatible sound.

[Feature N2]
The gaming machine described in the feature N1,
In the case where the command receiving unit receives the specific command and the determining unit determines based on the identification information that the specific mode is not set, the image display unit determines that the continuity with the predetermined moving image is satisfied. When the display mode is maintained (when the mode is from time t2 to time t4 in FIG. 11),
The image display means returns to the first display mode, and continuously displays the predetermined moving image in a mode in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13),
The sound output unit returns to the first output mode and outputs the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image in which the continuity is maintained (FIGS. 12 and 13).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature N2, when the image display means is restored to the first display manner and the sound output means is restored to the first output manner from the display manner in which continuity with the predetermined moving image is maintained, the image display means Keeps displaying the predetermined moving image in a continuous manner, and the sound output means outputs the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined continuous moving image, so that the player does not feel uncomfortable. The image display means and the sound output means can be returned to the first display mode and the first output mode, respectively.

[Feature N3]
A gaming machine according to feature N1 or feature N2,
The predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image is a temporal start position of the predetermined moving image,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the moving picture corresponding sound is a temporal starting position of the moving picture corresponding sound.

  According to the feature N3, when the image display means is returned to the first display manner and the sound output means is returned to the first output manner from the specific manner, the time position of the predetermined moving image which the image display means starts to display. Since the temporal position at which the sound output means starts outputting the sound corresponding to the moving picture is the temporal start position, the display is started from the middle of the predetermined moving picture and the output is started from the middle of the sound corresponding to the moving picture. Compared with the case where it is performed, the processing executed by the image display means and the sound output means is easier and the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

[Characteristic N4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N3,
The other display mode is a mode in which the image display means displays an image different from the predetermined moving image, or a mode in which the display of the image is stopped.

  According to the feature N4, when returning the image display means to the first display mode from the specific mode, another display mode as the specific mode before the return to the first display mode is different from the predetermined moving image. Since it is a mode in which an image is displayed or a mode in which the image display is stopped, even if the display is returned to the first display mode and the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the predetermined moving image. It is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player. The image includes a moving image and a still image.

[Feature N5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features N1 to N4,
The other output mode is a mode in which the sound output unit outputs another sound different from the moving image corresponding sound, and the sound output unit outputs the sound corresponding to the moving image or the other sound at an output level that the player cannot recognize. Or a mode in which the sound output means stops the output.

  According to the feature N5, when the sound output means is returned from the specific mode to the first output mode, another output mode as the specific mode before the return to the first output mode is different from the moving image corresponding sound. Since it is a mode in which another sound is output, a mode in which the moving image is supported or another sound is output at an output level that cannot be recognized by the player, or a mode in which the output is stopped, the first output mode is selected. Even if the player returns and starts to output the moving image corresponding sound corresponding to the predetermined moving image whose display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced.

<Feature O group>
The feature O group is extracted from the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.
[Feature O1]
An acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the satisfaction of a predetermined acquisition condition;
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information acquired by the acquisition means satisfies a predetermined condition,
An elapsed time determining means for determining whether or not a predetermined time has elapsed,
Image display means for displaying a first moving image (a background moving image in the example shown in FIG. 80, a demo moving image in the example shown in FIG. 81) as a first display mode,
A gaming machine comprising:
The image display means,
When it is determined by the elapsed time determination means that the predetermined time has elapsed, the first display mode is switched to the second display mode (mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed) (FIGS. 80 and 81). ),
When the predetermined display period of the second display mode has ended, the second display mode shifts to the first display mode, and the first display mode shifts to the first display mode. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image (FIGS. 80 and 81).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature O1, when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the second display mode is switched to the first display mode and the first display mode is restored. When displaying the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image. Therefore, the control can be simplified as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position where the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first moving image is displayed and the first moving image is displayed. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the display of the first moving image is started changes when the first moving image is displayed and the first moving image is displayed, for example, the second display mode is set in advance. When the display period ends, the display of the first moving image is started from the temporal position of the first moving image displayed immediately before the transition to the second display mode, and an image display unit. When the second display mode is switched to the first display mode, the temporal position of the first moving image to be displayed is determined based on the elapsed time from the second display mode. , The reproduction of the first moving image is continued as an internal process even after the image display means shifts from the first display mode to the second display mode, and the second display mode shifts to the first display mode. In this case, it is continuously reproduced as an internal process. Configuration and the like to display a video.

  Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic O1 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends at the same time in each gaming machine, and the gaming machine shifts to the first display mode, and each gaming machine When the machine shifts to the first display mode and displays the first moving image, the display is started from a predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, so that the first displayed on each gaming machine. You can synchronize the videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the first moving image displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Feature O2]
A gaming machine described in feature O1,
A transition condition determination unit that determines whether or not a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the image display unit to the third display mode (a mode for displaying a demo moving image) is provided,
The image display means,
When the transition condition is satisfied during the first display mode (in the mode of displaying the background moving image), the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the satisfaction of the transition condition (FIG. 11),
When the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode (during the mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed), when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the Shift to the third display mode (FIG. 82),
A gaming machine characterized by starting display from a predetermined temporal position of the third moving image when shifting to the third display mode and displaying a third moving image (demo moving image).

  According to the characteristic O2, even when the transition condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is preliminarily stopped. Since the transition to the third display mode is triggered by the end of the predetermined display period, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player and to improve the interest of the game.

  Further, when a plurality of gaming machines having the characteristic O2 are installed, the display period of the second display mode ends at the same time in each gaming machine, and the gaming machine shifts to the third display mode, and each gaming machine When the machine shifts to the third display mode and displays the third moving image, the display starts from a predetermined temporal position of the third moving image, so that the third displayed on each gaming machine. You can synchronize the videos. That is, it is possible to create a spectacular situation in which the third moving image displayed on each gaming machine is synchronized, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature O3]
A gaming machine described in feature O2,
And a return condition determining unit that determines whether or not a return condition that is a condition for returning the image display unit to the first display mode (a mode in which a background moving image is displayed) is satisfied.
The image display means,
When the return condition is satisfied during the third display mode (during the mode of displaying the demo video), the return to the first display mode is triggered by the satisfaction of the return condition (FIG. 11),
In the case where the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode (during the mode in which the RTC effect moving image is displayed), when the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends, the Return to the first display mode (FIG. 83),
A game machine characterized by, when returning to the first display mode and displaying the first moving image, starting display from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image.

  According to the characteristic O3, even when the return condition is satisfied during the second display mode, the second display mode is not interrupted in the middle of the predetermined display period, and the second display mode is preliminarily stopped. Since the display mode is returned to the first display mode when the predetermined display period ends, the player can be less discomforted and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic O4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O3,
The gaming machine characterized in that the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image is a temporal start position of the first moving image.

  According to the feature O4, in comparison with the configuration in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the first moving image when the first moving image is displayed after moving or returning to the first display mode, It is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the person. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the first moving image when the first moving image is displayed after moving or returning to the first display mode, the player Since the first moving image is to be viewed from a position midway in time, it may be uncomfortable, or the unsatisfactory portion of the first moving image may be unsatisfactory. On the other hand, according to the feature O4, since the player can watch the first moving image from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player, and at the same time, the first It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the videos can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature O5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O1 to O4,
A sound output unit that outputs a moving image corresponding sound that is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display unit,
The sound output means, when the image display means starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image, the first moving image corresponding sound (background) corresponding to the first moving image. A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined time position of (music).

  According to the characteristic O5, the display of the first moving image and the output of the first moving image corresponding sound are easily synchronized with each other, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound starts is changed. be able to. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the first moving image-compatible sound is started varies, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends and the image display unit displays the first moving image. When starting the display from a predetermined temporal position, the first moving image corresponding sound output from the temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before the image display unit shifts to the second display mode. The image display means secondly displays the temporal position of the first moving image-adaptive sound at which output is started when the configuration is started to output the moving image-compatible sound or when the mode is changed to output the first moving image-compatible sound. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time after the transition to the mode, the reproduction of the first moving image corresponding sound is continued as an internal process even after the image display unit transits from the first display mode to the second display mode. And the image display means is Configured for outputting a first video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition or return from 示態 like in the first display mode.

[Feature O6]
A gaming machine described in feature O5,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the first moving image corresponding sound is a temporal start position of the first moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O6, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, as compared with a configuration in which the output of the first moving image corresponding sound is started from a temporal middle position. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the output of the first moving image-adaptive sound is started at a position midway in time, the player can enjoy the first moving image-adaptive sound from a position midway in time. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user feels uncomfortable or feels unsatisfactory because there is a portion of the first moving image-compatible sound that is not being listened to. On the other hand, according to the feature O6, since the player can watch the first moving image corresponding sound from the temporal head position, it is possible to reduce the discomfort given to the player. It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the first moving image corresponding sounds can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature O7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O3,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image is a temporal start position of the third moving image.

  According to the feature O7, when the third moving image is displayed and the third moving image is displayed, the player is compared with the structure in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the third moving image. It is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort. For example, if a configuration is adopted in which the display is started from the temporal middle position of the third moving image when the third moving image is displayed and the third moving image is displayed, the player can display the third moving image. Since the moving image is to be viewed from a position midway in time, there is a possibility that the user may feel uncomfortable or feel unsatisfactory in that there is a portion of the third moving image that is not being viewed. On the other hand, according to the feature O7, since the player can watch the third moving image from the temporal start position, it is possible to reduce the sense of discomfort given to the player, and at the same time, the third It is possible to give the player a sense of satisfaction that all of the videos can be viewed from the beginning position in terms of time. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Feature O8]
The gaming machine according to any one of features O2 to O4,
A sound output unit that outputs a moving image corresponding sound that is a sound corresponding to the moving image displayed by the image display unit,
The sound output means, when the image display means starts the display from the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image, a third moving image corresponding sound (demo) corresponding to the third moving image. A game machine characterized by starting output from a predetermined time position of (music).

  According to the feature O8, the display of the third moving image and the output of the third moving image corresponding sound are easily synchronized with each other, as compared with the configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is changed. be able to. As a result, the quality of the performance of the game can be improved, and the interest of the game can be improved. Note that, as a configuration in which the temporal position at which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started changes, for example, the predetermined display period of the second display mode ends and the image display unit displays the third moving image. When the display is started from a predetermined temporal position, the third moving image corresponding sound output from the temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound output at the timing immediately before the image display means shifts to the second display mode. The image display means secondly displays the temporal position of the third moving image-corresponding sound to be started when the configuration for outputting the moving image-corresponding sound is started or when the mode for outputting the third moving image-corresponding sound is entered. A configuration that is determined based on the elapsed time after the shift to the mode, and the reproduction of the third moving image corresponding sound is continued as an internal process even after the image display unit shifts from the third display mode to the second display mode. And the image display means is Configured for outputting the third video corresponding sound being played continuously as the internal processing and the like is at the transition from 示態 like the third display mode.

[Feature O9]
A gaming machine described in feature O8,
The gaming machine, wherein the predetermined temporal position of the third moving image corresponding sound is a temporal start position of the third moving image corresponding sound.

  According to the feature O9, the sense of discomfort given to the player can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which the output of the third moving image corresponding sound is started from the midway position in time. For example, if the configuration is adopted in which the output of the third moving image-adaptive sound is started from a temporally middle position, the player can enjoy the third moving image-corresponding sound from a temporal middle position. Therefore, there is a possibility that the user may feel a sense of incongruity or feel unsatisfactory because there is a part of the third moving image corresponding sound that is not being appreciated. On the other hand, according to the feature O9, since it is possible for the player to watch the third moving image corresponding sound from the temporal head position, it is possible to reduce a sense of discomfort given to the player, and It is possible to give the player the satisfaction that all the third moving image corresponding sounds can be viewed from the temporal start position. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

  The inventions of the characteristic group M, the characteristic group N, and the characteristic group O solve the following problems.

  In a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine or a slot machine, various performances are performed for the purpose of improving the interest of the game. For example, there is known a gaming machine that displays a moving image on a display device such as a liquid crystal screen and outputs music corresponding to the moving image from a speaker.

  Here, in the gaming machine as described above, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature P group>
The feature P group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Characteristic P1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
A number of holding displays (holding displays Dm11 to Dm14 and holding displays Dm21 to Dm24 in the eighth and ninth embodiments) corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means are displayed in a predetermined display mode. And holding display means (holding effect content determination processing in the eighth and ninth embodiments) that changes the display mode of the displayed holding display,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Prior to the hold display means changing the display mode of the hold display, a suggestion effect (FIG. 89, FIG. 90, FIG. 100, FIG. 105) that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  Conventionally, by displaying a hold display, the number of game times to be executed has been shown to the player. However, with respect to the hold display, further improvement of the technique is desired for the purpose of improving the enjoyment of the game.

  According to the feature P1, since the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the game is performed with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display. It is possible to make the person pay attention and to give a sense of expectation.

[Feature P2]
A gaming machine described in Feature P1,
The effect execution unit selects the suggestion effect to be executed from a plurality of types of suggestion effects prepared in accordance with an object of which the display mode is changed by the hold display unit among the displayed hold displays ( Hold effect content determination process in the eighth and ninth embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P2, since the suggestion effect to be executed is selected according to the pending display which is the target of the change in the display mode, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the content of the suggestion effect and to change the display mode. It is possible to give the player an expectation as to which of the pending displays is.

[Feature P3]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of FIG. , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit becomes shorter, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the special information is earlier in the order in which the determination means determines the displayed hold display, and the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the hold display corresponding to the special information. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information whose order of determination by the determination means is earlier among the displayed hold displays. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information may be changed in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  According to the feature P3, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, when changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display that is relatively later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays is changed, the hold display is changed. Since the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, further expectation. A feeling can be imparted.

[Feature P4]
The gaming machine according to feature P1 or feature P2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit, before the special information corresponding to the target hold display of which the display mode is changed. Is also changed to a display mode at a higher level (FIGS. 101, 103, 104)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  If there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. There are cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  According to the characteristic P4, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit before the special information corresponding to the hold display of which the display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode of. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means is set after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. Even if it changes, the hold display in which the display mode has changed changes to a higher display mode than the display mode of the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. Can be suppressed and, at the same time, a higher expectation can be imparted.

[Feature P5]
A gaming machine described in Feature P3 or Feature P4,
The effect execution unit,
Depending on the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means when executing the suggestive effect. Then, a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared (the eighth to tenth embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature P5, a plurality of types of suggestive effects are prepared in accordance with the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Since the suggestive effect to be executed is selected from the inside, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, and as a suggestive effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type of effect to be executed.

<Feature Q group>
The feature Q group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Characteristic Q1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Hold display means for displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode,
A gaming machine comprising:
The holding display means,
When determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of which the display mode is to be determined (eighth embodiment). To 10th Embodiment and Modification 28)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Q1, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the display mode of the hold display is determined based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of which the display mode is determined. Therefore, by using the hold display of the object whose display mode is determined, it is possible to suggest information about the game times (hereinafter, also referred to as hold game times) corresponding to other hold displays to the player. For example, when determining the display mode of the hold display, the special information corresponding to the hold display of which the display mode is to be determined is more specific to the player than the special information to be determined by the determination means before the special information. When it is advantageous, in addition to the information of the hold display itself for which the display mode is determined, such as determining the display mode of the hold display that is the target for determining the display mode to be a specific display mode, Information can be suggested to the player. As a result, by recognizing the display mode of one hold display, the player is not limited to guessing the outcome of one hold game time corresponding to the hold display, and is executed before and after that. Various inferences are also made regarding the outcome of the held game times. Therefore, a new playability can be created by using the display mode of the hold display, and it is possible to further give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency as compared with the past, and to improve the interest of the game. be able to.

[Characteristic Q2]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q1,
The holding display means,
It is possible to change the display mode of the displayed hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, based on special information corresponding to another hold display different from the hold display of the target for changing the display mode, after the change of the hold display of the target for changing the display mode Determine display mode (eighth embodiment to eighth embodiment)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic Q2, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold of the target whose display mode is changed is based on the special information corresponding to another hold display different from the target hold display whose display mode is changed. Since the display mode after the display is changed is determined, it is possible to suggest the information about the pending game time corresponding to the other pending display to the player by using the pending display whose display mode is changed. For example, based on the special information corresponding to the hold display of the hold game times executed earlier than the hold game times corresponding to the hold display of the target to change the display mode, the change of the hold display of the target to change the display mode By determining the subsequent display mode, the following playability can be realized. As an example, when changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit before the special information corresponding to the target hold display of which the display mode is changed. Can also be changed to a higher-level display mode (a display mode that is advantageous to the player). As described above, according to the feature Q2, various new game characteristics can be created, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic Q3]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of FIG. , Fig. 99)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit becomes shorter, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the special information is earlier in the order in which the determination means determines the displayed hold display, and the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the hold display corresponding to the special information. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information whose order of determination by the determination means is earlier among the displayed hold displays. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information may be changed in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  According to the feature Q3, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, when changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, even if, contrary to the player's desire, the display mode of the hold display that is relatively later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays is changed, the hold display is changed. Since the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the display mode is increased, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, further expectation. A feeling can be imparted.

[Characteristic Q4]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q2,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit, before the special information corresponding to the target hold display of which the display mode is changed. Is also changed to a display mode at a higher level (FIGS. 101, 103, 104)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  If there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. There are cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  According to the feature Q4, when changing the display mode of the hold display, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit before the special information corresponding to the hold display of which the display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode of. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means is set after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. Even if it changes, the hold display in which the display mode has changed changes to a higher display mode than the display mode of the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode, so that the player's expectation is lowered. Can be suppressed and, at the same time, a higher expectation can be imparted.

[Characteristic Q5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Q2 to Q4,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means executes a suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes before the hold display means changes the display mode of the hold display (FIGS. 89, 90, 90). (Fig. 100, Fig. 105)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Q5, prior to changing the display mode of the hold display, the suggestion effect that suggests that the display mode of the hold display is changed is executed. It is possible to make the person pay attention and to give a sense of expectation.

[Characteristic Q6]
The gaming machine described in the feature Q5,
The effect execution unit,
Depending on the size of the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the hold display changed by the hold display means when executing the suggestive effect. Then, a suggestive effect to be executed is selected from a plurality of types of suggestive effects prepared (the eighth to tenth embodiments).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Q6, a plurality of types of suggestive effects are prepared in accordance with the stepwise widths in the plurality of stages of the set display mode between before and after the change of the pending display to be changed. Since the suggestive effect to be executed is selected from the inside, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the change in the display mode of the hold display, and as a suggestive effect before the display mode of the hold display changes. It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation with respect to the type of effect to be executed.

<Feature R group>
The feature R group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof.

[Feature R1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Hold display means for displaying the number of hold displays corresponding to the number of the special information stored in the acquired information storage means in a predetermined display mode, and changing the display mode of the displayed hold display,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Performs production execution determination processing for determining whether or not a production execution condition that is a condition for executing a predetermined production is satisfied,
The holding display means,
While determining whether or not a display mode change condition that is a condition for changing the display mode of the hold display is determined,
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed (eighth embodiment to tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the display mode of the hold display is changed independently of the execution of the predetermined effect even though the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the player is given the predetermined effect. It is not possible to recognize that there is a correlation between the execution and the change in the display mode of the hold display, and it is not possible for the player to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display. In other words, the predetermined effect and the change in the display mode of the hold display only bring different effects to the player, and these two do not function synergistically.

  According to the feature R1, when the performance execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is changed after the predetermined effect is executed, so that the display mode of the hold display is changed. It is possible to let the player recognize that there is a correlation between and, and by using the execution of a predetermined effect, the player can be made to pay attention to the change in the display mode of the hold display. That is, in addition to the effect of executing a predetermined effect such as imparting expectation or tension, and the effect of changing the display mode of the pending display such as imparting expectation or tension for the subsequent game times, By changing the display mode of the hold display after the production of, it is possible to synergistically give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency with respect to the change of the display mode of the hold display. Can be achieved.

[Feature R2]
A gaming machine described in Feature R1,
The holding display means,
When the effect execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed despite the execution of the predetermined effect (tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature R2, when the performance execution condition is satisfied and the display mode change condition is not satisfied, the display mode of the hold display is not changed even though the predetermined performance is executed, so the predetermined performance is executed. It is possible to reverse the player's recognition that the display mode of the hold display is changed after the game is played, and it is possible to give the game unexpectedness. Furthermore, when a predetermined effect is executed, it is possible to give the player a sense of urgency as to whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes thereafter, and it is possible to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature R3]
A gaming machine according to feature R1 or feature R2,
The player is provided with selection means (production operation button 24) for selecting a predetermined hold display,
The holding display means,
While performing a changeability determination process of determining whether or not it is possible to change the display mode of each displayed hold
It is determined whether the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection unit and the determination result of the changeability determination process (tenth embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature R3, it is possible to create a new game property such as allowing the player to select the hold display. Further, since it is determined whether or not the display mode change condition is satisfied based on the predetermined hold display selected by the selection means and the determination result of the changeability determination processing, the hold display selected by the player himself / herself is displayed. A sense of urgency such as whether or not the display mode changes can be given to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature R4]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display is increased as the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold display is changed. The display mode of the hold display is changed such that the stepwise width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of (1) is increased (eighth embodiment and tenth embodiment). Form)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  When the hold display is displayed, as the remaining time until the special information corresponding to the hold display is determined by the determination unit becomes shorter, the chance of changing the display mode decreases. In other words, the hold display corresponding to the special information is earlier in the order in which the determination means determines the displayed hold display, and the order in which the determination means determines in the displayed hold display is later. The remaining display time is relatively shorter and the display mode is less likely to change than the hold display corresponding to the special information. Therefore, when the display mode of the hold display changes, the player preferentially changes the display mode from the hold display corresponding to the special information whose order of determination by the determination means is earlier among the displayed hold displays. Hope to do. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the later special information may be changed in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  According to the feature R4, in the case of changing the display mode of the hold display, when changing the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information later in the order determined by the determination means in the displayed hold displays. The display mode of the hold display is changed so that the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change of the display mode of the hold display becomes larger. Therefore, if, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display that is relatively later in the order determined by the determination means among the displayed hold displays changes (or if the player selects Even if the display mode of the held display is changed), the stepwise width in a plurality of stages of the display mode before and after the change in the display mode of the held display becomes large. It is possible to suppress a decrease in expectation and, at the same time, to give a further expectation.

[Feature R5]
A gaming machine according to features R1 to R3,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the hold display is more likely to satisfy the predetermined condition (FIG. 88 (b)),
The holding display means,
While determining the display mode of the hold display based on special information corresponding to the hold display,
When changing the display mode of the hold display, from the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information that is the target of the determination by the determination unit, before the special information corresponding to the target hold display of which the display mode is changed. Is also changed to a display mode at a higher stage (9th and 10th embodiments)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  If there is a hold display in which the display mode has already changed, and the player further desires to change to a higher display mode than the hold display, the player changes the display mode of the specific hold display. You may wish. However, contrary to the player's wish, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means changes after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. There are cases. In such a case, the player's expectation for the game is lowered.

  According to the feature R5, when the display mode of the hold display is changed, the hold display corresponding to the special information to be determined by the determination unit before the special information corresponding to the hold display of which the display mode is changed. The display mode is changed to a higher level display mode than the display mode of. Therefore, tentatively, contrary to the player's request, the display mode of the hold display corresponding to the special information to be judged by the judging means is set after the special information corresponding to the hold display for which the player desires to change the display mode. Even when it changes (or when the display mode of the hold display selected by the player is changed), the hold display whose display mode has changed is the display mode of the hold display that the player wishes to change the display mode. Since the display mode is changed to a higher display mode, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the player's expectation and, at the same time, to give a further expectation.

  The inventions of the characteristic P group, the characteristic Q group, and the characteristic R group solve the following problems.

  Conventionally, by displaying a hold display, the number of game times to be executed has been shown to the player.

  Here, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

<Feature S group>
The feature S group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature S1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A first ball entry portion (first starting opening 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
A second ball entry portion (second starting opening 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance section, and that acquires special information based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance section Means and
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, are acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And acquired information storage means for respectively storing the second special information which is the special information,
The special information stored by the acquisition information storage means, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Display means (symbol display device 41) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination,
First command transmission means for transmitting a first command (special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (the eleventh embodiment). S6610, S5402) in
Second command transmission means for transmitting a second command (special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (the eleventh embodiment). S6628, S5402),
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information. Second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating, is displayed in different display areas of the display means, respectively,
Based on the transmitted first command, a first identification information display mode in which the first identification information is changed or stopped, and a display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed (11th While switching to the first identification information non-display mode, which is the mode in which the demo image is displayed in the embodiment),
Based on the transmitted second command, a second identification information display mode in which the second identification information is changed or stopped, and a display mode in which the second identification information is not displayed (11th mode) A gaming machine characterized by switching between a second identification information non-display mode, which is a mode in which a demo image is displayed in the embodiment.

  According to the feature S1, the first command is transmitted based on the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquisition information storage unit, and the second command is storage of the second special information in the acquisition information storage unit. Sent based on the presence or absence of. Then, the display unit switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and the second identification information display based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display unit that displays the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display unit, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode is performed. This can be performed based on the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means, independently of the presence / absence of storage of the second special information in the storage means, and the second identification information display mode and the second identification information display mode. The switching to the 2 identification information non-display mode is performed based on the presence / absence of storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage unit in a mode independent of the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage unit. be able to. In other words, the display unit switches the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode independently of the switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. It is possible to perform switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode independently of the switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode. You can

[Feature S2]
The gaming machine according to feature S1,
The display means is
In the case where the game state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, or from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (first liquid crystal design) and the second identification information (second liquid crystal design) is displayed in a display area different from that before the game state transition (FIG. 120).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature S2, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is the same as before the game state shifts. Since they are displayed in different display areas, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the game state has shifted from the first game state to the second game state.

[Feature S3]
The gaming machine described in feature S2,
The display means is
When the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state,
While displaying the second identification information (design for the second liquid crystal) in the display area where the first identification information (design for the first liquid crystal) was displayed, the second identification information (design for the second liquid crystal) is displayed. A game machine characterized by displaying the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in the display area that has been displayed.

  According to the feature S3, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information was displayed, and the second identification information is displayed. Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the 2 identification information was displayed, it is necessary to make the player recognize that the game state has changed from the first game state to the second game state. You can Furthermore, by displaying the second identification information in the display area that was displaying the first identification information and displaying the first identification information in the display area that was displaying the second identification information, for example, the first identification information is displayed. With respect to the information and the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, for example, by making the player guess that the role in the game has changed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature S4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features S1 to S3,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode. It is possible to do so (it is a simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The first identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information. According to the feature S4, the display means can display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode at the same time. On the other hand, expectations can be simultaneously given to the results of the determination of the two pieces of special information, that is, the first special information and the second special information.

<Feature T group>
The feature T group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature T1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A first ball entry portion (first starting opening 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
A second ball entry portion (second starting opening 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance section, and that acquires special information based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance section Means and
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, are acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. And acquired information storage means for respectively storing the second special information which is the special information,
The special information stored by the acquisition information storage means, a determination means for determining whether a predetermined condition is satisfied,
Display means (symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination,
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, and the result of the determination based on the second special information. Second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern in the eleventh embodiment), which is identification information for indicating, is displayed in different display areas of the display means, respectively,
In the case where the game state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (shifts from the low frequency support mode to the high frequency support mode, or from the high frequency support mode to the low frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information (first liquid crystal design in the eleventh embodiment) and the second identification information (second liquid crystal design in the eleventh embodiment) is displayed differently from that before the game state transitions. Display in the area (Fig. 120)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature T1, when the gaming state shifts from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is compared with that before the gaming state shifts. Since they are displayed in different display areas, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the game state has shifted from the first game state to the second game state.

[Feature T2]
A gaming machine described in feature T1,
The display means is
In the case where the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state (shifts from a low frequency support mode to a high frequency support mode, or from a high frequency support mode to a low frequency support mode) Is
While displaying the second identification information (design for the second liquid crystal) in the display area where the first identification information (design for the first liquid crystal) was displayed, the second identification information (design for the second liquid crystal) is displayed. A game machine characterized by displaying the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in the display area that has been displayed.

  According to the feature T2, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the second identification information is displayed in the display area where the first identification information was displayed, and the second identification information is displayed. Since the first identification information is displayed in the display area where the 2 identification information was displayed, it is necessary to make the player recognize that the game state has changed from the first game state to the second game state. You can Furthermore, by displaying the second identification information in the display area that was displaying the first identification information and displaying the first identification information in the display area that was displaying the second identification information, for example, the first identification information is displayed. With respect to the information and the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, for example, by making the player guess that the role in the game has changed, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature T3]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic T1 or the characteristic T2,
First command transmission means for transmitting a first command (special customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (the eleventh embodiment). Form S6610, S5402),
Second command transmission means for transmitting a second command (special second customer waiting command in the eleventh embodiment) based on whether or not the second special information is stored in the acquired information storage means (eleventh embodiment). S6628, S5402) in the form,
Equipped with
The display means is
A first identification information display mode that is a display mode in which the first identification information (first liquid crystal design in the eleventh embodiment) is changing or stopped based on the transmitted first command; While switching between the first identification information non-display mode, which is a display mode in which the first identification information is not displayed (a mode in which a demo image is displayed in the eleventh embodiment),
A second identification information display mode that is a display mode in which the second identification information (second liquid crystal design in the eleventh embodiment) is changing or stopped based on the transmitted second command; A gaming machine characterized by switching between a second identification information non-display mode that is a display mode (a mode in which a demo image is displayed in the eleventh embodiment) in which the second identification information is not displayed.

  According to the characteristic T3, the first command is transmitted based on whether or not the first special information is stored in the acquired information storage unit, and the second command is stored in the acquired information storage unit. Sent based on the presence or absence of. Then, the display unit switches between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode based on the transmitted first command, and the second identification information display based on the transmitted second command. The mode and the second identification information non-display mode are switched. Therefore, in the display unit that displays the first identification information and the second identification information in different display areas of the display unit, switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode is performed. This can be performed based on the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage means, independently of the presence / absence of storage of the second special information in the storage means, and the second identification information display mode and the second identification information display mode. The switching to the 2 identification information non-display mode is performed based on the presence / absence of storage of the second special information in the acquired information storage unit in a mode independent of the presence / absence of storage of the first special information in the acquired information storage unit. be able to. In other words, the display unit switches the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode independently of the switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode. It is possible to perform switching between the second identification information display mode and the second identification information non-display mode independently of the switching between the first identification information display mode and the first identification information non-display mode. You can

[Feature T4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features T1 to T3,
The display means can simultaneously display the fluctuating display mode of the first identification information and the fluctuating display mode of the second identification information (simultaneous fluctuation in the eleventh embodiment). Machine)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  The first identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information. The second identification information is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information. According to the feature T4, the display means can display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode at the same time. On the other hand, expectations can be simultaneously given to the results of the determination of the two pieces of special information, that is, the first special information and the second special information.

<Feature U group>
The characteristic U group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature U1]
Special information storage means for storing the first special information and the second special information,
Depending on the state of the game, the first identification information based on the first special information (first liquid crystal symbol in the eleventh embodiment) and the second identification information based on the second special information (in the eleventh embodiment) Second display for displaying either one of the first identification information and the second identification information, and a first display area (main display area or sub display area) for displaying one of Display means having an area (main display area or sub display area),
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
The display state of the first display area is changed to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means. With (in the eleventh embodiment, the display state for displaying the liquid crystal symbols is changed to the display state for displaying the demo movie),
The display state of the second display area is changed to a different display state based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means. Yes (in the eleventh embodiment, the display state in which the liquid crystal symbols are displayed is changed to the display state in which the demo movie is displayed)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic U1, the display means determines the display state of the first display area based on whether or not the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage means. While changing to a different display state, the display state of the second display area is displayed differently based on whether the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage means. Since the state is changed to the state, the first display area and the second display area can be independently changed to different display states. Therefore, regarding the transition of the display state of the first display area, there is a correlation with the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area, and regarding the transition of the display state of the second display area, Compared with the configuration having the correlation with the special information corresponding to the displayed identification information, the information regarding the presence or absence of the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in each display area is clearly shown to the player. be able to.

[Feature U2]
A gaming machine according to feature U1,
The display means is
From the state where the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area (main display area) is stored in the special information storage means to the state where the special information is not stored in the special information storage means. As a result, the display state of the first display area is changed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed (the display state in which the design for liquid crystal is displayed) to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed (display a demo video). A game machine characterized by shifting to a display state).

  According to the characteristic U2, the display unit is changed from the state in which the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the first display area is stored in the special information storage unit to the state in which the special information storage unit is not stored in the special information storage unit. As a result, the display state of the first display area is changed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed. Therefore, it corresponds to the identification information displayed in the first display area. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the special information is changed from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U3]
A gaming machine according to feature U1 or feature U2,
The display means is
From the state in which the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area (sub-display area) is stored in the special information storage means to the state in which the special information storage means is not stored. As a result, the display state of the second display area is changed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed (the display state in which the design for liquid crystal is displayed) to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed (a demo video is displayed). A game machine characterized by shifting to a display state).

  According to the characteristic U3, the display unit changes from a state in which the special information corresponding to the identification information displayed in the second display area is stored in the special information storage unit to a state in which the special information storage unit is not stored in the special information storage unit. As a result, the display state of the second display area is changed from the display state in which the identification information is displayed to the display state in which the identification information is not displayed. Therefore, it corresponds to the identification information displayed in the second display area. It is possible to clearly indicate to the player that the special information is changed from being stored in the special information storage means to being not stored in the special information storage means.

[Feature U4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U3,
The display means is
When the game state shifts to a predetermined state, the identification information (first liquid crystal design or second liquid crystal design) displayed in the first display region (main display region) is displayed in the second display region ( While displaying in the sub display area), the identification information (first liquid crystal design or second liquid crystal design) displayed in the second display area (sub display area) is displayed in the first display area (main display area). ) Is displayed on the game machine.

  According to the characteristic U4, the display means displays the identification information displayed in the first display area in the second display area as well as the identification information displayed in the first display area when the game state shifts to a predetermined state. Since the identification information that has been displayed is displayed in the first display area, it is possible for the player to recognize that the game state has changed. Further, since the identification information displayed in the first display area is displayed in the second display area and the identification information displayed in the second display area is displayed in the first display area, for example, the first identification information Further, with respect to the second identification information, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and a sense of urgency, for example, by making the player guess that the role in the game has been changed, and thus the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature U5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features U1 to U4,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode. It is possible to do so (it is a simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic U5, since the display means can simultaneously display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode, the display means can be displayed to the player. On the other hand, an expectation can be simultaneously given to the two pieces of identification information of the first identification information and the second identification information.

<Feature V group>
The feature V group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic V1]
A gaming machine having display means,
The display means (symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment),
A first display area (main display area MA) and a second display area (first sub area SA1),
The display state of the first display area (main display area MA) is acquired by the first information (entering the game ball into the first starting opening 33) in the first game state (low frequency support mode). Based on the second information (special information acquired by entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34) in the second game state (high frequency support mode). A game machine characterized by changing.

  According to the characteristic V1, the display means has the first display area and the second display area, and the display state of the first display area is based on the first information in the first gaming state. Since the change is made based on the second information in the second game state, for example, when the changing state of the display state of the first display area is changed before and after a predetermined game time, the player On the other hand, it is possible to infer that the game state has changed before and after the predetermined game times, and it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation and intonation. As a result, the enjoyment of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic V2]
The gaming machine described in the feature V1,
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
In the game area, detection means for detecting the game ball (first starting opening 33 and second starting opening 34),
Equipped with
A game machine characterized in that the first information and the second information are information acquired when the detection means detects the game ball.

  According to the feature V2, the first information and the second information are information acquired when the detection means detects the game ball, so that the display state of the first display area is changed to the game state. In addition to changing according to the change (change from the first gaming state to the second gaming state, or from the second gaming state to the first gaming state), It can be changed depending on the presence / absence of a ball and the timing at which the game ball enters the ball entering portion.

[Characteristic V3]
The gaming machine described in the feature V1 or the feature V2,
The display means is
Display state of the second display area (first sub-area SA1), in the first game state (low frequency support mode), the second information (entering the game ball into the second starting opening 34) Based on the special information acquired by the special information acquired by the second game state (high-frequency support mode), the first information (the first starting opening 33 of the game ball into the special ball acquired A game machine characterized by being changed based on information.

  According to the feature V3, the display means changes the display state of the second display area based on the second information in the first gaming state and based on the first information in the second gaming state. Therefore, for example, when the display state of the second display area changes before and after the predetermined game time, the player is changed to the game state before and after the predetermined game time. It can be inferred that there was, and the player can be given a sense of expectation and intonation. Further, since such a change in the display state is executed in the two display areas, the first display area and the second display area, it is possible to further improve the enjoyment of the game.

<Feature W group>
The feature W group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature W1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
The end of the game turning operation after the game turning operation for informing the result of the determination is started is defined as one game time, and the game turning operation is started after the game turning operation is started. Control means for controlling the execution of the game times and controlling the variation time when the time until the end is the variation time,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
It is a final specific game time that is executed before the end of the specific game state, while executing a specific game time that is a game time executed in a specific game state (a high probability mode game state in the eleventh embodiment). The variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time (the game time after the probability change game time in the eleventh embodiment is the 120th game time) is a predetermined time (predetermined time). A game machine characterized by being set to 12 seconds in the eleventh embodiment.

  According to the feature W1, since the variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to a predetermined time set in advance, the latest time after starting the final specific game time is set. It is possible to preset the control in consideration of the variation time of at least two game times to be executed. For example, at least two game times to be executed most recently after starting the final specific game time, it is possible to execute the effect of which the execution time is set in advance.

[Feature W2]
The gaming machine described in the feature W1,
A first ball entering portion (first starting opening 33) as the ball entering portion;
A second ball-in portion (second starting port 34) as the ball-in portion,
Equipped with
The information acquisition means acquires special information based on a game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and special information based on a game ball entering the second ball entering portion. Get the information,
The determination means is the first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering portion, and the game ball entering the second ball entering portion. It is determined whether the second special information, which is the special information acquired by doing so, satisfies a predetermined condition,
The control means is
By controlling the variation time in the first game time for the first game part (first game game for the starting opening in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game time based on the game ball having entered the first game part.
The variation time in the game time for the second ball entering part (the game time for the second starting opening in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game time based on the game ball entering the second ball entering part, is controlled,
Any of the first ball-in-game or the second ball-in-game during the period in which one of the first ball-in-game and the second ball-in-game is executed. It is possible to perform a parallel execution process that is a process for executing one or the other (which is the simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature W2, in a gaming machine capable of performing parallel execution processing, the variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to a predetermined time. Set. In the case of a game machine that performs parallel execution processing, during the period in which one of the first ball entering part game time or the second ball entering part game time is executed, the first ball entering part game time or the second ball entering game Since one of the other part game times may be executed, even if the variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to a predetermined time set in advance If the time from the start of the first game time of the two game times to the end of the game time of the second time is shorter than the total time of the two game times in which the variation time is the predetermined time There is. However, as the time from the start of the first game time to the end of the game time started later of the two game times, at least a time for one game time whose variable time is a predetermined time is secured. It is possible to That is, as the time from the start to the end of the two game times, it is possible to preset the control considering at least one game time in which the fluctuation time is the predetermined time.

[Feature W3]
The gaming machine described in the feature W2,
The control means is
In the case where the parallel execution processing is executed and the prescribed condition is satisfied (when the result image is displayed for 10 seconds set in advance in the eleventh embodiment),
Of the at least two game times to be executed most recently after starting the final specific game time, at least one game time has elapsed the predetermined length of time since the game time was started. The game time is ended even before it is performed (another mode (mode 2) in the eleventh embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature W3, when the parallel execution process is being executed, and when the prescribed condition is satisfied, at least two game times to be executed most recently after the last specific game time is started. Of the at least one game time, the game time is terminated even before a predetermined length of time has elapsed since the game time was started, so that the game after the final specific game time is started An unnecessary time can be omitted as the execution time of at least two game times executed most recently.

[Feature W4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W3,
The determination means has at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of satisfying the predetermined condition is relatively high or low, as the determination mode,
The specific game state is a state in which the determination means is in the high probability mode.

  According to the characteristic W4, the fluctuation of at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time which is the last specific game time executed before the end of the game state of the high probability mode by the determination means. Control considering time can be set in advance. For example, in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the last specific game time executed before the end of the high-probability mode, it is possible to execute an effect whose execution time is set in advance.

[Feature W5]
A gaming machine according to feature W4,
The determination means limits the number of specific game times continuously executed in the specific game state of the high probability mode to a specified number, and the specific game times continuously executed is the specified number. The high-probability mode game number limiting means for ending the specific game state based on the fact that the game machine has reached.

  According to the feature W5, the variation time of at least two game times executed most recently after the last specific game time among the specific game times in which the number of times of continuous execution is limited to the specified number is started is taken into consideration. The control can be preset.

[Feature W6]
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W5,
The non-accepting state (state in which the electric accessory 34a is closed) in which the game ball is difficult to enter or cannot enter the second ball part, and the game ball enters from the non-accepting state. Switching means that can switch to a receiving state (a state in which the electric accessory 34a is opened) that is easy to perform,
As a control mode for controlling the switching unit and controlling the switching unit, a first mode (low frequency support mode) and a second mode (high frequency support mode) that is more likely to be in the receiving state than the first mode. A switching control means having
Equipped with
The specific game state is a state in which the switching control means is in the second mode (high frequency support mode).

  According to the feature W6, the switching control means executes at least two game times most recently after starting the final specific game time which is the last specific game time executed before the end of the game state of the second mode. It is possible to preset the control in consideration of the fluctuation time. For example, at least two game times executed most recently after starting the last specific game time executed before the end of the second mode, it is possible to execute the effect of which the execution time is set in advance.

[Feature W7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features W1 to W6,
Equipped with production execution means for executing production,
The effect execution means is given to the player at least in the first game time to be executed after the final specific game time (the game time after the probability change game time in the eleventh embodiment is the 120th game time) is started. Perform an effect that informs you about information about benefits (displays a result image)
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature W7, since the effect of notifying the information about the privilege given to the player is executed at least in the first game time after the last specific game time is started, the player is given the granted privilege. It becomes easier to understand. Further, in the present gaming machine in which the variation time in at least two game times executed most recently after starting the final specific game time is set to a predetermined time, the information about the privilege given to the player is notified. Since the effect to be performed is executed at least in the first game time to be executed after the final specific game time is started, the effect for informing the information regarding the privilege given to the player is executed as the effect for which the execution time is set in advance. be able to.

<Feature X group>
The feature X group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Feature X1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A first ball entry portion (first starting opening 33) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
A second ball entry portion (second starting opening 34) into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first ball entrance section, and that acquires special information based on that a game ball has entered the second ball entrance section Means and
The first special information, which is the special information acquired by the game ball entering the first ball entering section, and the game ball entering the second ball entering section, are acquired by the game ball entering the second ball entering section. Determination means for determining whether or not the second special information, which is the special information, satisfies a predetermined condition,
The end of the game turning operation after the game turning operation for informing the result of the determination is started is defined as one game time, and the game turning operation is started after the game turning operation is started. Control means for controlling the execution of the game times and controlling the variation time when the time until the end is the variation time,
Production execution means for executing production,
A gaming machine comprising:
The control means is
By controlling the variation time in the first game time for the first game part (first game game for the starting opening in the eleventh embodiment), which is a game time based on the game ball having entered the first game part.
The variation time in the game time for the second ball entering part (the game time for the second starting opening in the eleventh embodiment), which is the game time based on the game ball entering the second ball entering part, is controlled,
Any of the first ball-in-game or the second ball-in-game during the period in which one of the first ball-in-game and the second ball-in-game is executed. It is possible to perform a parallel execution process that is a process of executing the other or the other (simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment),
When the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect, a plurality of game times are executed continuously or in parallel (the probability-varied game time execution times in the eleventh embodiment are the 121st and 122nd game times). The variable time is set to a time (10 seconds in the 11th embodiment) or more (12 seconds in the 11th embodiment) that is required to execute the predetermined effect (effect to display the result image). A gaming machine characterized by executing variable time setting processing.

  According to the feature X1, in the case of a gaming machine that performs parallel execution processing, during the period in which either one of the first ball entering game time or the second ball entering game time is executed, the first ball entering game Either the second time or the game time for the second ball entering portion may be executed. Therefore, during the period in which the prescribed effect is executed by the effect execution means, for example, the first ball-in-game part game time ends and a new first ball-in-game part game time is started, or the second ball-in-time game. There is a case where the game game for the club ends and a new game game for the second ball entering unit is started. Hereinafter, the timing of starting the game times and the timing of ending the game times are also referred to as “game time division”.

  Here, if a "game time division" occurs during execution of a predetermined effect, the player may have a complicated impression with respect to the effect being executed. Further, the player may not be able to concentrate on the determination result by the determination means at each game time.

  According to the feature X1, when the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect, the variable time of a plurality of game times executed continuously or in parallel is set to a time equal to or longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect. Since the setting is made, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in the game times during the period in which the predetermined effect is executed.

[Feature X2]
The gaming machine according to feature X1,
The control unit is
When the effect execution means executes a predetermined effect, as the first variable time setting process, two game times are executed continuously or in parallel (the number of times of game operation after probability change in the eleventh embodiment). The game machine is characterized in that the variable time of the 121st and 122nd game times) is set to a time equal to or longer than the time required to execute the predetermined effect.

  According to the feature X2, in the gaming machine capable of executing the parallel execution processing, while suppressing the occurrence of breaks in the game times during the period in which the predetermined effect is being executed, the fluctuation of the time required for executing the predetermined effect or more The number of game times set in time can be minimized.

[Feature X3]
A gaming machine according to feature X1 or feature X2,
The control unit is
While presetting the number of executions of the game time set to a time longer than or equal to the time required to execute the predetermined effect to a predetermined number of executions (two times in the eleventh embodiment),
At the time point when the performance executing means finishes the execution of the predetermined performance (the performance for displaying the result image), the number of executions of the game times set to a time longer than the time required to execute the predetermined performance is the predetermined execution. When the number is less than the number of times (less than 2 times in the eleventh embodiment),
A second variation time different from the first variation time setting process (the process of setting the variation time to 12 seconds) for the game times started after the production execution means finishes executing the predetermined production. A gaming machine characterized by executing setting processing.

  According to the feature X3, when the effect execution means finishes the execution of the predetermined effect, the number of game times set to a time longer than or equal to the time required to execute the predetermined effect is less than the predetermined number of executions. In, the second execution time setting process different from the first operation time setting process is executed for the game times started after the effect execution means finishes the execution of the predetermined effect. It is possible to avoid unnecessarily executing the game times set to a time longer than the time required to execute. As a result, after the effect execution means finishes the execution of the predetermined effect, the change time shorter than the time required to execute the predetermined effect is set, or the long change time or the short change time is randomly set to change the change time. It is also possible to add intonation, and various control methods can be adopted to improve the enjoyment of the game.

[Feature X4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X3,
The determination means has at least a high-probability mode and a low-probability mode in which the probability of satisfying the predetermined condition is relatively high or low, as the determination mode,
The gaming machine, wherein the effect executing means executes the predetermined effect (an effect of displaying a result image) triggered by the end of the high probability mode.

  According to the feature X4, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of breaks in game times during the execution of a predetermined effect that is executed when the high-probability mode ends.

[Feature X5]
The gaming machine according to any one of features X1 to X4,
A game machine characterized in that the predetermined effect is an effect (an effect of displaying a result image) for notifying information about a privilege given to a player.

  According to the feature X5, the predetermined effect is an effect for notifying the information regarding the privilege given to the player, so that the player can easily understand the granted privilege. In addition, the information regarding the granted privilege is of high interest to the player. According to the feature X5, it is possible to prevent the break of the game time from occurring during the execution of the effect that informs the information of high interest to the player.

<Feature Y group>
The feature Y group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic Y1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
In the game area, a first detection means (first starting opening 33) for detecting the game ball,
Second detection means (second starting port 34) for detecting the game ball in the game area,
First information acquisition means for acquiring first special information based on the fact that the first detection means detects a game ball;
Second information acquisition means for acquiring second special information based on the fact that the second detection means has detected a game ball;
Determination means for determining whether or not the first special information satisfies the first predetermined condition, and determining whether or not the second special information satisfies the second predetermined condition,
Display means (symbol display device 41 in the eleventh embodiment) for displaying identification information for indicating the result of the determination,
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
It has at least three displayable areas capable of displaying the identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the special information (main display area MA, first sub display area SA1, second sub display in the eleventh embodiment). Area SA2),
First identification information (first liquid crystal pattern), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the first special information, is set in a first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas. Along with displaying
Second identification information (second liquid crystal design), which is identification information for indicating the result of the determination based on the second special information, is displayed in the first displayable area of the at least three displayable areas. Displayed in a second displayable area different from
Based on the establishment of a predetermined change condition (based on the transition to high frequency support mode),
At least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the predetermined change condition is satisfied. A gaming machine to do.

  According to the feature Y1, the display unit has at least three displayable areas in which the identification information can be displayed, and at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed based on a predetermined change condition. Since it is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area displayed before the predetermined change condition is satisfied, for example, the displayable area for displaying the first identification information is changed when the game state is changed. By doing so, it is possible for the player to easily recognize that the game state has changed. Further, the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed by selecting any two displayable areas from the three displayable areas. As an example, the displayable area in which the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed is changed depending on the state of the game, or a display different from the identification information is displayed in one of the three displayable areas (for example, , The effect image is displayed), the first identification information and the second identification information can be displayed in the remaining two displayable areas.

[Feature Y2]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1,
The display means simultaneously displays the first identification information (first liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode and the second identification information (second liquid crystal pattern) in a changing display mode. It is possible to do so (it is a simultaneous variable machine in the eleventh embodiment).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Y2, the display means can display the first identification information of the changing display mode and the second identification information of the changing display mode at the same time. On the other hand, expectations can be simultaneously given to the results of the determination of the two pieces of special information, that is, the first special information and the second special information.

[Feature Y3]
A gaming machine according to feature Y1 or feature Y2,
The predetermined change condition is a transition from the first gaming state to a second gaming state (transition from low frequency support mode to high frequency support mode, or transition from high frequency support mode to low frequency support mode). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Y3, by changing the displayable area in which the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed, it is possible to make the player infer that the game state has changed. , It is possible to improve the interest of the game. For example, by changing the displayable area in which the first identification information and the second identification information are displayed, it is possible to apply to a suggestion effect that is an effect that suggests something to the player. In this way, based on the transition of the game state, at least one of the first identification information and the second identification information is displayed in a displayable area different from the displayable area that was displayed before the transition of the game state. The displayed process can be used for various effects, and the range of effects expressed by the gaming machine can be greatly expanded.

<Feature Z group>
The feature Z group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic Z1]
An operation means that can be operated by the player,
Launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area in response to an operation of the operating means by a player,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
Determination means for determining whether the acquired special information satisfies a predetermined condition,
Display means for displaying a guidance display (guidance display GD1 and guidance display GD2 in <Aspect 9> of the eleventh embodiment) which is guidance regarding the operation of the operation means;
A gaming machine comprising:
The display means is
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means (the lottery result of the jackpot lottery), the content of the guide in the guide display is controlled (control of displaying the guide display GD1 or the guide display GD2).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Z1, the display means controls the content of the guidance in the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination means. Therefore, the content of the guidance in the guidance display reflects the result of the determination in the determination means. Can be As a result, by controlling the content of the guidance in the guidance display, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect that suggests the result of the determination made by the determination means.

[Characteristic Z2]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1,
The display means is
A gaming machine, which controls a display mode of the guidance display (display color of the guidance display GD1 or the guidance display GD2) based on the result of the determination by the determination means.

  According to the feature Z2, the display means controls the display mode of the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination means. Therefore, the display mode of the guidance display should reflect the determination result of the determination means. You can As a result, by controlling the display mode of the guidance display, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect that suggests the result of the determination made by the determination means.

[Feature Z3]
A gaming machine according to feature Z1 or feature Z2,
The display means is
Based on the result of the determination by the determination means, the color of the guide display (guidance display GD1 and guide display GD2) is controlled as the display mode of the guide display (control is performed to make it blue or red).
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature Z3, the display means controls the color of the guidance display as the display mode of the guidance display based on the result of the determination by the determination means. Therefore, the color of the guidance display reflects the result of the determination by the determination means. Can be something. As a result, by controlling the color of the guidance display, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect that suggests the result of the determination made by the determination means.

[Characteristic Z4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features Z1 to Z3,
The game machine is characterized in that the guide display is a display which guides an operation method of the operation means which is advantageous to a player.

  According to the feature Z4, it is possible to execute the suggestive effect that suggests the result of the determination made by the determination means by using the guide display that guides the operation method of the operation means that is advantageous to the player.

<Characteristic αA group>
The feature αA group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh embodiment.

[Characteristic αA1]
In the first gaming state, when a predetermined command (result display end command in the eleventh embodiment <aspect 12>) is received, a specific process is executed based on the predetermined command (display of result image is displayed). A gaming machine having a specific processing executing means,
The specific processing execution means,
The predetermined command is not received in the second game state (state in which the game time is not being executed) in which the game state is different from the first game state (state in which the game time is being executed). Despite this, a gaming machine that executes the specific process.

  According to the characteristic αA1, the specific process executing means executes a specific process based on the predetermined command when the predetermined command is received in the first game state, and the game state becomes the first game state. In a different second game state, specific processing is executed even though the predetermined command has not been received, so the condition for setting the predetermined command as a transmission command is satisfied in the second game state. If not, or if it is unlikely to be satisfied, the specific processing can be executed.

[Feature αA2]
A gaming machine according to feature αA1,
The specific processing execution means,
The predetermined command is received when the game state shifts from the first game state (state in which game times are being executed) to the second game state (state in which game times are not being executed). A gaming machine characterized by executing the specific processing regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is present.

  According to the characteristic αA2, when the game state shifts from the first game state to the second game state, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received. In the game state, if the condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied, or if it is unlikely to be satisfied, and if, for example, a specific process is not executed in the first game state Even in such a case, a specific process can be executed with the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.

[Characteristic αA3]
A gaming machine according to the characteristic αA1 or the characteristic αA2,
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the game ball entering the ball entering section,
Acquisition information storage means for storing the acquired special information,
A gaming machine comprising:
The first game state is a state in which the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means,
The second gaming state is a state in which the special information is not stored in the acquired information storage means,
A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the characteristic αA3, in the state where the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means, when the predetermined command is received, the specific processing based on the predetermined command is executed, and the special information is stored in the acquired information storage means. In the state where the information is not stored, the specific process is executed even though the predetermined command is not received. Therefore, when the special information is not stored in the acquired information storage unit, the predetermined command is executed. Even when the condition set as the transmission command is not satisfied or is unlikely to be satisfied, the specific process can be executed. For example, if the condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied in the state where the game ball is not fired toward the game area, or if the possibility of being satisfied is low, the specific process is executed. be able to.

[Characteristic αA4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αA1 to αA3,
Equipped with display means capable of displaying a specific image (result image),
The specific processing execution means, when receiving the predetermined command, executes processing for ending the display of the specific image displayed by the display means as the specific processing. Machine.

  According to the characteristic αA4, when the display means is displaying a specific image, in the second gaming state, the condition for setting a predetermined command as a transmission command is not satisfied or may be satisfied. Even if it is low, the display means can finish displaying the specific image. Therefore, when it is not desirable to display the specific image in the second gaming state, the display of the specific image can be terminated even if the predetermined command is not received.

<Characteristic αB group>
The characteristic αB group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the twelfth embodiment.

[Characteristic αB1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entering portion into which game balls circulating in the game area can enter (general winning opening 32, second starting opening 34, large winning opening 36a, V winning opening 48 in the twelfth embodiment),
Game state transition means for transitioning from the first game state (low probability mode) to the second game state (high probability mode) when a predetermined condition is satisfied,
A payout means (payout device 71) for paying out the game ball based on the entry of the game ball into the ball entering portion,
Information (a remaining acquisition number-of-balls suggestion image CP in the twelfth embodiment) corresponding to the planned number of payouts, which is the number of game balls planned to be paid out by the time the second game state (high probability mode) ends, is displayed. Display means (symbol display device 41),
A gaming machine comprising:

  According to the feature αB1, since the information corresponding to the planned payout number is displayed, it is possible to let the player know the number of game balls that can be acquired by the time the second gaming state ends. Further, for example, as compared with a configuration that displays the remaining number of jackpot lottery that can be executed before the second gaming state ends, how much expectation can be given to the second gaming state. Since it is possible for the player to clearly recognize that, the interest of the game can be improved.

[Feature αB2]
The gaming machine described in the feature αB1,
When the planned payout amount increases, the display unit displays information corresponding to the planned planned payout amount (the remaining acquired number of balls suggestive image CP (FIG. 172 (b)) in the twelfth embodiment). A game machine characterized by changing to information corresponding to the expected number of coins to be paid out after being increased with the increased number of coins as an upper limit (remaining acquired number of balls suggestive image CP (FIG. 172 (c)) in the twelfth embodiment) .

  According to the characteristic αB2, the information corresponding to the planned payout amount being displayed is changed to the information corresponding to the planned payout amount after the increase is performed with the increased number as the upper limit, until the second gaming state ends. It is possible to make the player recognize that the number of game balls that can be acquired has increased, and it is possible to improve the player's expectation for the second game state.

[Feature αB3]
A gaming machine according to feature αB2,
When the planned payout number increases, the display unit displays increase suggestion information (remaining acquired sphere number increase suggestion image CPB in the twelfth embodiment) indicating that the planned payout number has increased. After the information corresponding to the expected payout number being displayed (remaining acquired sphere number suggestion image CP in the twelfth embodiment (FIG. 172 (b))) is increased by the increase number indicated by the increase suggestion information. A game machine characterized by changing to information corresponding to the planned payout amount (remaining acquired ball number suggesting image CP (FIG. 172 (c)) in the twelfth embodiment).

  According to the feature αB3, since the increase suggestion information is displayed, it is possible to make the player clearly recognize the increased number of game balls that can be acquired by the time the second gaming state ends, and the second It is possible to improve the player's expectation of the gaming state.

[Characteristic αB4]
The gaming machine described in the characteristic αB2 or the characteristic αB3,
The display means displays the planned payout amount in the display at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the planned payout number has increased (the timing when the game ball hits the jackpot V and enters the V winning opening). A gaming machine, characterized in that the corresponding information is changed to information corresponding to the planned number of payouts after the increase.

  According to the characteristic αB4, the information corresponding to the planned payout amount being displayed is changed at a timing different from the timing at which it is determined that the planned payout number has increased, so that the game can be given an unexpected effect. It is possible to provide the player with a new expectation as to at what timing the information corresponding to the planned payout amount being displayed is changed.

[Characteristic αB5]
The gaming machine according to any one of the features αB2 to αB3,
The display means, in increments of a predetermined number (500 in the twelfth embodiment) or more as one unit, corresponds to the planned payout amount after increasing the information corresponding to the planned payout amount displayed. A game machine characterized by being changed to information.

  According to the feature αB5, the information corresponding to the planned payout number being displayed is changed to the information corresponding to the planned payout number after the increase, with the increase of the predetermined number or more as one unit. Expectations can be improved.

[Characteristic αB6]
A gaming machine according to feature αB4,
The display means, when the information corresponding to the planned number of payouts being displayed is equal to or less than a second predetermined number (0 in the twelfth embodiment), information corresponding to the planned number of payouts being displayed. Is changed to information corresponding to the planned payout amount after increasing the number less than the predetermined number (500).

  According to the characteristic αB6, when the information corresponding to the planned payout amount being displayed becomes equal to or smaller than the second predetermined number, the information corresponding to the planned payout number displayed is increased by a number less than the predetermined number. Since the information corresponding to the planned payout amount later is changed, the information corresponding to the planned payout number being displayed becomes the second predetermined number or less and the expectation is decreased for the player whose number is less than the predetermined number. It is possible to give a great sense of expectation even if the number of items scheduled to be paid out is increased.

[Feature αB7]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αB1 to αB6,
In the second game state, when the game balls are continuously launched at a constant firing intensity and at regular intervals (intervals of 0.6 seconds), the number of game balls fired (the twelfth embodiment). The game machine is characterized in that the number of game balls (3 in the twelfth embodiment) occupying the ball entering portion occupying 3) is constant.

  According to the characteristic αB7, when the game balls are continuously fired at a constant firing intensity and at a constant interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entrance portion in the number of game balls fired is Since it is configured to be constant, it is possible to match the number of game balls actually paid out by the end of the second game state with the planned payout number.

<Characteristic αC group>
The characteristic αC group is extracted from each of the above-described embodiments, modified examples, or a combination thereof, and is mainly extracted from the eleventh and twelfth embodiments.

[Characteristic αC1]
Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area (game ball launching mechanism 81),
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
An acquisition unit that acquires special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering unit,
Determination means for performing determination processing (big hit lottery) based on the special information,
In the first gaming state (low-probability mode), when a predetermined condition (in the twelfth embodiment, a 2R first-class jackpot is won in the jackpot lottery and a game ball enters the V winning opening 48) is established. In addition, the number of times of the determination process executed after shifting to the second gaming state from the first gaming state to the second gaming state (high probability mode) is a prescribed number (in the twelfth embodiment, 120 times), the transition means to transition from the second gaming state to the first gaming state,
Display means for displaying information (in the twelfth embodiment, the remaining number of remaining balls suggestive image CP) based on the remaining number of determinations, which is the number of remaining determination processes that can be executed before reaching the specified number of times;
An increasing means for increasing the remaining number of determinations when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second game state,
A gaming machine comprising:
Even when the remaining determination number is increased, the display means continues to change the information based on the remaining determination number being displayed without changing to the information based on the remaining determination number after the increase. A game machine characterized in that it may be displayed.

  According to the characteristic αC1, even when the remaining determination number is increased, the information based on the remaining determination number being displayed is continuously displayed without being changed to the information based on the increased remaining determination number. In some cases, it is possible to give the player an expectation that the actual remaining number of determinations may be larger than the displayed remaining number of determinations, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Characteristic αC2]
The gaming machine described in the feature αC1,
When the number of remaining determinations is increased, the display means displays information based on the number of remaining determinations being displayed at a timing different from the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second gaming state, A gaming machine characterized by changing to information based on the number of remaining judgments after the increase.

  According to the characteristic αC2, the information based on the remaining determination number being displayed is changed to the information based on the remaining determination number after the increase at a timing different from the timing when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the second gaming state. Therefore, it is possible to give the game unexpectedness and to provide the player with a new expectation as to at what timing the remaining number of determinations will increase.

[Characteristic αC3]
A gaming machine according to feature αC1 or feature αC2,
The display means, as the information based on the remaining determination number, information corresponding to the expected payout number, which is the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out before the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number (twelfth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by displaying a remaining number of remaining balls suggestive image CP) in the form.

  According to the feature αC3, the information corresponding to the expected payout number, which is the number of game balls scheduled to be paid out before the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number, is displayed, so the number of executions of the determination process reaches the specified number. Thus, the player can be made aware of the number of game balls that can be acquired by the time the second gaming state ends. In addition, since it is possible for the player to clearly recognize how much expectation the second gaming state can have, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

[Characteristic αC4]
The gaming machine according to any one of features αC1 to αC3,
In the second game state, when the game balls are continuously launched at a constant firing intensity and at regular intervals (intervals of 0.6 seconds), the number of game balls fired (the twelfth embodiment). The game machine is characterized in that the number of game balls (3 in the twelfth embodiment) occupying the ball entering portion occupying 3) is constant.

  According to the characteristic αC4, when the game balls are continuously fired at a constant firing intensity and at a constant interval, the number of game balls entering the ball entrance portion occupying the number of the game balls fired Since it is configured to be constant, it is possible to match the number of game balls actually paid out by the end of the second game state with the planned payout number.

  The inventions of the characteristic S group to the characteristic Z group and the characteristic αA group to the characteristic αC group solve the following problems.

  In gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines, technical improvements have been made from various points of view such as structure, control, and performance for the purpose of improving the interest of the game.

  In the above-mentioned gaming machines, further improvement in technology is desired for the purpose of enhancing the interest of the game.

  A configuration in which one or a plurality of configurations included in the characteristic group A to the characteristic group Z and the characteristic αA group to the characteristic αC group are appropriately combined may be applied. As a result, it is possible to exert a synergistic effect due to the combined configuration.

  The following is a basic configuration of a gaming machine to which each of the above features can be applied or applied to each feature.

Pachinko gaming machine: a launching means for launching a game ball toward a game area based on a shooting operation by a player, and a starting ball provided in the game area and into which a game ball flowing down the game area can enter. Part, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on that a game ball has entered the starting ball entry part,
A gaming machine comprising: an acquisition information storage unit configured to store special information acquired by the information acquisition unit when a game ball enters the starting ball entry unit.

  Rotating type gaming machine such as slot machine: equipped with a pattern display device for variably displaying a plurality of patterns, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is started by the operation of the start operation means, and caused by the operation of the stop operation means In addition, or after a lapse of a predetermined time, the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped, and a gaming machine which gives a privilege to the player according to the stopped patterns.

  The present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments and modified examples, and can be realized with various configurations without departing from the spirit of the present invention. For example, the technical features in the embodiments and modifications corresponding to the technical features in each mode described in the section of the summary of the invention are to solve some or all of the above problems, or In order to achieve some or all of the effects, it is possible to appropriately replace or combine them. If the technical features are not described as essential in this specification, they can be deleted as appropriate.

10 ... Pachinko machine 11 ... Outer frame 12 ... Pachinko machine main body 13 ... Inner frame 14 ... Front door frame 15 ... Hinge 16 ... Hinge 17 ... Cylinder lock 18. .. window 19 ... glass unit 20 ... upper plate 21 ... lower plate 22 ... discharge port 23 ... lever 24 ... directing operation button 25 ... operation handle 25a ... Touch sensor 25b ... Wait button 25c ... Variable resistor 26 ... Game ball launch button 30 ... Game board 31 ... Induction rail 31a ... Inner rail 31b ... Outer rail 32 ... General prize opening 33 ... First starting opening 34 ... Second starting opening 34a ... Electric accessory 34b ... Electric accessory drive 35 ... Through gate 36 ... Variable prize Device 36a ... Large winning opening 36b ... Opening / closing door 36c ... Variable winning drive 37 ... Special drawing unit 37a ... First result display (first symbol display)
37b ... second result display section (second symbol display section)
37c ... 1st hold display part 37d ... 2nd hold display part 38 ... Universal figure unit 39 ... Round display part 40 ... Variable display unit 41 ... Design display device 41a ... Display surface 41aL ... Display area 41aS ... Display area 42 ... Nail 43 ... Out port 45 ... Main display section 46 ... Speaker 47 ... Various lamps 48 ... V winning opening 48a ... Open / close door 48b ... Open / close door drive unit 51 ... First control unit 52 ... Second control unit 53 ... Third control unit 54 ... Tank 55 ... Tank rail 56 ... Case rail 60 ... Main control unit 61 ... Main control board 62 ... Main MPU
63 ... Main ROM
64 ... Main RAM
63a ... Acceptance table storage area 63b ... Sorting table storage area 63c ... Reach determination table storage area 63d ... Fluctuating time table storage area 63e ... Stop result table storage area 63f ... Command Information storage area 64a ... lottery counter buffer 64b ... holding information storage area 64c ... electricity holding area 64d ... counter area 64e ... various flag storage area 64f ... forward determination processing result Memory area 67a ... Various detection sensors 70 ... Payout control device 71 ... Payout device 80 ... Launch control device 81 ... Game ball launch mechanism 85 ... Power supply device 86 ... Power failure monitoring circuit 90 ... Sound emission control device 91 ... Sound emission control board 92 ... Sound side MPU
93 ... Sound side ROM
93a ... Production pattern table storage area 93b ... Variable display pattern table storage area 94 ... Sound-light side RAM
94a ... Various flag storage areas 94b ... Various counter areas 94c ... Lottery counter area 96 ... RTC
100 ... Display control device 101 ... Display control board 102 ... Display side MPU
103 ... Program ROM
104 ... Work RAM
106 ... Character ROM
107 ... Video RAM
PA ... Game area PC ... Winning counter area AE ... Execution area Ra ... First holding area Rb ... Second holding area Dm11-Dm14, Dm21-Dm24 ... Hold display Sync1 .. First sync display area Sync2 ... Second sync display area MA ... Main display area SA1 ... First sub display area SA2 ... Second sub display area Ds1 ... First reserved display area Ds2 ... second hold display area

Claims (1)

Launching means for launching a game ball toward the game area,
A ball entering portion into which a game ball circulating in the game area can enter,
Operation input means for inputting an operation by a player as a signal, information acquisition means for acquiring special information based on the fact that a game ball has entered the ball entering portion,
The acquired special information, the acquired information storage means for storing a predetermined specified number as an upper limit,
Determination means for determining whether or not the special information stored by the acquired information storage means satisfies a predetermined condition,
Preceding determination means that is executed at a timing earlier than the determination of the determination means, and performs advance determination including at least the determination of the special information,
The holding display corresponding to the special information stored in the acquired information storage means is determined by the first holding display in which the special information is first determined by the determination means and the special information is determined after the first holding display. And a second hold display which is displayed in a predetermined display manner so as to be distinguishable from each other, and a hold display means capable of changing the display manner of the displayed hold display,
Production execution means for executing the production corresponding to the determination result of the determination means,
A gaming machine comprising:
The effect execution means,
Prior to changing the display mode of the hold display by the hold display means, a suggestion effect execution means for executing a suggestion effect suggesting that the display mode of the hold display is changed is provided,
The display mode of the hold display,
The special information corresponding to the hold display indicates the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition, and the display mode of a plurality of stages from the upper rank to the lower rank is set corresponding to the possibility of the possibility. As the display mode of the display becomes higher in the plurality of stages, it is suggested that the special information corresponding to the suspended display is likely to satisfy the predetermined condition,
The holding display means,
Determining means for determining the display mode of the hold display based on at least the result of the preceding determination of the special information corresponding to the hold display;
More than the change width in the plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in the one display mode of the first hold display, the one display mode of the second hold display Means for changing the display mode of the hold display only in a mode in which the change width in a plurality of stages of the display mode between before and after the change in change is larger,
Means for changing the display mode of the hold display based on a signal input by the operation input means,
The game machine characterized in that the display mode of the second hold display may be a display mode of a lower stage than the display mode of the first hold display .